AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Hooke’s law of elasticity.
Answer:
“With in the elastic limit stress directly proportional to the strain”.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
k = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}[/latex]
Where k is modulus of elasticity.

Question 2.
State the units and dimensions of stress.
Answer:

  1. Stress = [latex]\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}[/latex]
    S.l units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
  2. Dimensional formula
    Stress = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~L}^2}[/latex] = [ML-1T-2].

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
Modulus of elasticity (k) = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}[/latex]
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2]

Question 4.
State the units and dimensions of Young’s modulus.
Answer:
Young’s modules (y) = [latex]\frac{\text { LongitudinalStress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{e}{L}}[/latex]
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2]

Question 5.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of rigidity.
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity (G) = [latex]\frac{F}{A \theta}=\frac{\text { Shearing Stress }}{\text { Shearing Strain }}[/latex]
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2].

Question 6.
State the units and dimensions of Bulk modulus.
Answer:
Bulk modulus (B) = [latex]\frac{\text { Bulk Stress }}{\text { Bulk Strain }}=\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}[/latex]
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2].

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 7.
State the examples of nearly perfect elastic and plastic bodies.
Answer:

  • Nearly perfect elastic bodies are quartz fibre.
  • Nearly perfect plastic bodies are dough and day.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s Law of elasticity, proportionality, permanent set and breaking stress.
Answer:
Hooke’s law : “With in the elastic limit stress is directly proportional to the strain”.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
Where k is modulus of elasticity.
Proportionality limit: The maximum stress developed in a body till it obeys Hookes law is called proportionality limit.
Permanent Set : Permanent deformation produced when a body is stretched beyond its elastic limit.
Breaking stress : The maximum stress a body can bear before it breaks.

Question 2.
Define modulus of elasticity, stress, strain and Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
Modulus of elasticity : It is the ratio stress applied on a body to the strain produced in the body.
k = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}[/latex]
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Stress : When a body is subjected to an external force, the force per unit area is called stress.
Stress = [latex]\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}[/latex]
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Strain : When deforming forces act on a body, the fractional deformation produced in the body. It has no units

Poisson’s ratio (σ) : The ratio between lateral strain to longitudinal strain of a body is called poisson’s ratio.
σ = [latex]\frac{\text { Lateral Strain }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{-\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}}{\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
Define Young’s modulus. Bulk modulus and Shear modulus.
Answer:
Young’s modulus (y) : With in the elastic limit, the ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is called young’s modulus.
y = [latex]\frac{\text { Longitudinal Stress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{e}{L}}[/latex]
y = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{e}}[/latex]
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Bulk modulus (B) : With in the elastic limit, it is defined as the ratio of Bulk stress to Bulk strain
B = [latex]\frac{\text { Bulk Stress }}{\text { Bulk Strain }}[/latex]
B = [latex]\frac{\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}}{\frac{-\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}}=\frac{-\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}[/latex] (∵ -ve sign indicates volume decreases)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Rigidity modulus (G) : With in the elastic limit, it is defined as the ratio of shearing stress to shearing strain.
G = [latex]\frac{\text { Shearing Stress }}{\text { Shearing Strain }}[/latex]
G = [latex]\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\theta}=\frac{F}{A \theta}[/latex]
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Question 4.
Define stress and explain the types of stress. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Stress : The restoring force per unit area is called stress
∴ Stress = [latex]\frac{\text { Restoring Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}[/latex]
Stress is classified into three types.

  1. Longitudinal stress
  2. Volume (or) Bulk stress
  3. Tangential (or) shearing stress

1. Longitudinal stress (or) Linear stress : When a normal stress changes the length of a body, then it is called longitudinal stress.
Longitudinal stress = [latex]\frac{F}{A}[/latex]

2. Volume (or) Bulk stress : When a normal stresschanges the volume of a body, then it is called volume stress.
Volume stress = [latex]\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}[/latex] = pressure.

3. Tangential (or) shearing stress : When the stress is tangential to the surface due to the application of forces parallel to the surface, then the stress is called tangential stress.
Tangential stress = [latex]\frac{F}{A}[/latex].

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
Define strain and explain the types of strain.
Answer:
Strain : It is the ratio of change in dimension to its original dimension.
Strain = [latex]\frac{\text { Changes in dimension }}{\text { Original dimension }}[/latex]
Strain is of three types.
1. Longitudinal strain : It is the ratio of change in length to its original length.
Longitudinal strain = [latex]\frac{\text { Changes in length }}{\text { Original length }}=\frac{e}{L}[/latex]

2. Shearing strain (or) Tangential strain : When simultaneous compression and extension in mutually perpendicular direction takes place in a body, the change of shape it under goes, is called shearing strain.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1
Shearing strain (θ) = [latex]\frac{1}{L}[/latex]

3. Bulk (or) volume strain : It is the ratio of change in volume to its original volume is called bulk strain. It is called Bulk (or) volume strain.
Bulk strain = [latex]\frac{\text { Change in Volume }}{\text { Original Volume }}=\frac{\Delta V}{V}[/latex]

Question 6.
Define strain energy and derive the equation for the same. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The potential energy stored in a body when stretched is called strain energy.
Let us consider a wire of length L and cross – sectional area A. Let x be the change in length of the wire by the application of stretching force F.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2
Strain energy per unit volume = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{F}{A} \cdot \frac{x}{L}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × stress × strain.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 7.
Explain why steel is preferred to copper, brass, aluminium in heavy-duty machines and in structural designs.
Answer:
The elastic behavior of materials plays an important role in everyday life. Designing of buildings, the structural design of the columns, beams and supports require knowledge of strength of material used. The elasticity of the material is due to stress developed with in the body, when extenal force acts on it. A material is of more elastic nature if it develops more stress (or) restoring force. Steel develops more stress than copper, brass, aluminium for same strain. So steel is more elastic.
y = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}[/latex]

Question 8.
Describe the behaviour of a wire under gradually increasing load. [A.P. – Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15; TS – Mar. ’18, ’15, ’13]
Answer:
When the load is increased in steps, a graph is drawn between stress on y-axis and corresponding strain on x-axis.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
1. Proportionality limit : In the linear position OA, stress is proportional to strain, i.e. Hookes law is obeyed by the wire upto point A. The graph is a straight lint. When ever the stretching force at A is removed, the wire regains its original length.
A is called proportionality limit.

2. Elastic limit : In the graph B is the elastic limit.
Through the wire doesnot obey Hooke’s law at B. The wire regains its original length after removing the stretching force at B. upto point B the wire is under elastic behaviour.

3. Permanent set (or) yield point: In the graph c is the yield point. If the stretching force at c is removed, the wire doesnot regain its original length and the length of the wire changes permanently. In this position the wire flows like a viscous liquid. After the point c, the wire is under plastic behavior, c is called permanent set (or) yield point.

4. Breaking point: When the stress increased, the wire becomes thinner and thinner. When the stress increases to a certain limit the wire breaks. The stress at which the wire breaks is called breaking stress and the point D is called breaking point.

5. Elastic fatigue : The state of temperary loss of elastic nature of a body due to continuous strain is called elastic fatigue. When a body is subjected to continuous strain with in the elastic limit, it appears to have lost Hastic property temporarily to some extent and becomes weak.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
Two identical solid balls, one of ivory and the other of wet-day are dropped from the same height onto the floor. Which one will rise to greater height after striking the floor and why ?
Answer:
Ivory ball rise to greater height after striking the floor. The ivory ball regain its original shape after striking the floor. The elastic property of ivory ball is more. Where as wet-day ball does not regain its original shape after striking the floor.

So wet-day ball acts like plastic body.

Question 10.
While constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends. Why ?
Answer:
Use of pillars (or) columns is also very common in buildings and bridges. A pillar with rounded ends supports less load than that with a distributed shape at the ends. The precise design of a bridge (or) a building has to take into account the conditions under which it will function, the cost and long period, reliability of usable materials.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4

Question 11.
Explain why the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km ?
Answer:
The maximum height of a mountain on earth is 10 km, can also be provided by considering the elastic properties of rocks. A mountain base is not under uniform compression and this provides some shearing stress to rocks under which they can flow. The stress due to all the material on the top should be less than the critical shearing stress at which the rocks flow.

At the bottom of a mountain of height h, the force per unit area due to the weight of the mountain is hρg. Where ρ is the density of the mountain. The material at the bottom experiences this force in the vertical direction and the sides of the mountain are free.
There is a shear component, approximately hρg itself.
Elastic limit for 3 typical rock is 30 × 107 N/m2
hρg = 30 × 107 (ρ = 3 × 103 kg/m3)
h = [latex]\frac{30 \times 10^7}{3 \times 10^3 \times 10}[/latex]
h = 10 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 12.
Explain the concept of Elastic Potential Energy in a stretched wire and hence obtain the expression for it.
Answer:
“When a wire is put under a tensile stress, work is done against the inter-atomic forces. The work is stored in the wire in the form of elastic potential energy”.

Expression for elastic potential energy : Consider a wire of length L and area of cross section A is subjected to a deforming force F along the length of the wire. Let the length of the wire is elongated by l.
Young’s modulus (y) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}[/latex]
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{yAl}}{\mathrm{L}}[/latex] ……………. (1)
Work done due to further elongation of small length dl
Work done (dw) = F × dl = ([latex]\frac{\mathrm{yAl}}{\mathrm{L}}[/latex])dl ……………… (2)
Total work done in increasing the length of the wire from L to (L + l)
w = [latex]\int_0^1 \frac{\mathrm{yAl} }{\mathrm{L}} \mathrm{dl}=\frac{\mathrm{yA}}{2} \times \frac{l^2}{\mathrm{~L}}[/latex]
w = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \times \mathrm{y} \times\left(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\right)^2 \times \mathrm{Al}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] y × stress2 × volume of the wire
w = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × stress × strain × volume of the wire.
This work is stored in the wire in elastic potential energy (u).

Long Answer Question

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity and describe an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of the material of a wire.
Answer:
Hooke’s law : With in the elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to the strain.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
Where k is modulus of elasticity.
Determination of young’s modulus of the material of a wire:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
Young’s Modulus of the Material of a wire

  1. It consists of two long straight wires of same length and same area of cross-section suspended side by side from a rigid .support.
  2. The wire A (reference wire) carries a metre scale M and a pan to place a weight.
  3. The wire B (experimental wire) carries a pan in which known weights can be placed.
  4. A vernier scale v is attached to a pointer at the bottom of the experimental wire B and the main scale M is fixed to the wire A.
  5. The weights placed in the pan, the elongation of the wire is measured by the vernier arrangement.
  6. The reference wire is used to compensate for any change in length that may occur due to change in room temperature.
  7. Both the reference and experimental wires are given an initial small load to keep the wires straight and the vernier reading is noted.
  8. Now the experimental wire is gradually loaded with more weights, the vernier reading is noted again.
  9. The difference between two vernier readings gives the elongation produced in the wire.
  10. Let r and L be the radius and initial length of the experimental wire. Let M be the mass that produced an elongation ∆L in the wire.
    Young’s modulus of the material of the experimental wire is given by
    y = [latex]\frac{\text { Longitudinal Stress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}}{\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
    y = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \Delta \mathrm{L}}[/latex]
    y = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MgL}}{\pi r^2 \times \Delta \mathrm{L}}[/latex]
    From above equation young’s modulus of the material of the wire is determined.

Problems

Question 1.
A copper wire of 1mm diameter is stretched by applying a force of 10 N. Find the stress in the wire.
Solution:
D = 1 m.m = 10-3m, r = [latex]\frac{D}{2}[/latex] = 0.5 × 10-3 m.
F = 10 N
Stress = [latex]\frac{F}{A}=\frac{F}{\pi r^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10}{3.14 \times\left(0.5 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}[/latex]
= 1.273 × 107 N/m2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 2.
A tungsten wire of length 20 cm is stretched by 0.1 cm. Find the strain on the wire.
Solution:
L = 20 × 10-2 m, ∆L = 0.1 × 10-2 m
Strain = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=\frac{0.1 \times 10^{-2}}{20 \times 10^{-2}}[/latex] = 0.005.

Question 3.
If an iron wire is stretched by 1 %, what is the strain on the Wire ?
Solution:
Strain = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}[/latex] = 1 %
Strain = [latex]\frac{1}{100}[/latex] = 0.01

Question 4.
A brass wire of diameter 1mm and length 2 m is streched by applying a force of 20N. If the increase in length is 0.51 mm. find
(i) the stress,
(ii) the strain and
(iii) the Young’s modulus of the wire.
Solution:
D = 1 m.m, r = [latex]\frac{D}{2}[/latex] = 0.5 × 10-3 m
L = 2 m, F = 20 N, ∆L = 0.51 m.m = 0.51 × 10-3 m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6
= 9.984 × 1010 N/m2

Question 5.
A copper wire and an aluminium wire have lengths in the ratio 3 : 2, diameters in the ratio 2 : 3 and forces applied in the ratio 4: 5. Find the ratio of increase in length of the two wires. (Ycu = 1.1 × 1011 Nm-2, YAl = 0.7 × 1011 Nm-2).
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
= [latex]\frac{4}{5} \times \frac{3}{2} \times\left(\frac{0.7 \times 10^{11}}{1.1 \times 10^{11}}\right) \times\left(\frac{3}{2}\right)^2[/latex]
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}_1}{\Delta \mathrm{L}_2}=\frac{189}{110}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 6.
A brass wire of cross-sectional area 2 mm2 is suspended from a rigid support and a body of volume 100 cm3 is attached to its other end. If the decrease in the length of the wire is 0.11 mm, when the body is completely immersed in water, find the natural length of the wire.
(Ybrass = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2, ρwater = 103 kg m-3).
Solution:
A = πr2 = 2 × 10-6 m2, V = 100 × 10-6 = 10-4 m3
∆L = 0.11 × 10-3 m, yBrass = 0.91 × 1011 N/m2, ρ = 103 kg/m3
y = [latex]\frac{M g L}{A \times \Delta L}=\frac{v \rho g L}{A \times \Delta L}[/latex]
L = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{yA} \Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{v \rho g}}=\frac{0.91 \times 10^{11} \times 2 \times 10^{-6} \times 0.11 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-4} \times 10^3 \times 9.8}[/latex]
L = 2.04 m.

Question 7.
There are two wires of same material. Their radii and lengths are both in the ratio 1:2. If the extensions produced are equal, what is the ratio of loads ?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Question 8.
Two wires of different material have same lengths and areas of cross¬section. What is the ratio of their increase in length when forces applied are the same ?
(Y1 = 0.9 × 1011 Nm-2, Y2 = 3.6 × 1011 Nm-2)
Solution:
y1 = 0.9 × 1011 Nm-2
y2 = 3.6 × 1011 Nm-2
y = [latex]\frac{F L}{A \times \Delta L}[/latex]
∆L ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{y}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{(\Delta L)_1}{(\Delta L)_2}=\frac{y_2}{y_1}=\frac{3.6 \times 10^{11}}{0.9 \times 10^{11}}=\frac{4}{1}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
A metal wire of length 2.5 m and area of cross-section 1.5 × 10-6 m2 is stretched through 2 mm. if its Young’s modulus is 1.25 × 1011 N.m2, find the tension in the wire.
Solution:
L = 2.5 m, A = 1.5 × 10-6 m2
∆L = 2 × 10-9 m
y = 1.25 × 1011 N.m2
y = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \Delta \mathrm{L}}[/latex]
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{yA} \Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1.25 \times 10^{11} \times 1.5 \times 10^{-6} \times 2 \times 10^{-3}}{2.5}[/latex]
F = 150 N

Question 10.
An aluminium wire and a steel wire of the same length and cross-section are joined end-to-end. The composite wire is hung from a rigid support and a load is suspended from the free end. If the increase in length of the composite wire is 1.35 mm, find the ratio of the
(i) stress in the two wires and
(ii) strain in the two wires.
(YAl = 0.7 × 1011 N.m2, YSteel = 2 × 1011 Nm2).
Solution:
YAl = 0.7 × 1011 N.m2, YSteel = 2 × 1011 Nm2
∆L1 + ∆L2 = 1.35 mm ……………… (1)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9

Question 11.
A 2 cm cube of some substance has its upper face displaced by 0.15 cm due to a tangential force of 0.3 N while keeping the lower face fixed, Calculate the rigidity modulus of the substance.
Solution:
L = 2 × 10-2 m, A = L2 = 4 × 10-4 m2
∆x = 0.15 × 10-2 m
F = 0.3 N
G = [latex]\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{\Delta x}{L}}=\frac{F L}{A \Delta x}[/latex] (∵ θ = [latex]\frac{\Delta x}{L}[/latex])
G = [latex]\frac{0.3 \times 2 \times 10^{-2}}{4 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.15^6 \times 10^{-2}}[/latex]
G = 104 N/m2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 12.
A spherical ball of volume 1000 cm3 is subjected to a pressure of 10 Atmosphere. The change in volume is 10-2 cm3. If the ball is made of iron, find its bulk modulus.
(1 atmosphere = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
v = 1000 cm3 = 1000 × 10-6 = 10-3 m3
p = 1 atm = 1 × 105 = 105 N/m2
-∆v = 10-2 cm3 = 10-2 × 10-6 = 10-8 m3
Bulk modulus (B) = [latex]\frac{-p v}{\Delta v}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10^5 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-8}}[/latex]
B = 1010 N/m2.

Question 13.
A copper cube of side of length 1 cm is subjected to a pressure of 100 atmosphere. Find the change in its volume if the bulk modulus of copper is 1.4 × 1011 Nm-2. (1 atm = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
l = 1 cm = 10-2 m
V = Volume of the cube = l3 = 1cm3
= 10-6 m3
P = 100 atm = 100 × 105 = 107 N/m2
B = 1.4 × 1011 N/m2
B = [latex]\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}[/latex]
-∆V = [latex]\frac{P V}{B}=\frac{10^7 \times 10^{-6}}{1.4 \times 10^{11}}[/latex]
-∆V = 0.7143 × 10-10 m3.

Question 14.
Determine the pressure required to reduce the given volume of water by 2%. Bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2.
Solution:
[latex]\frac{-\Delta V}{V}[/latex] = 2 % = [latex]\frac{2}{100}[/latex]
B = 2.2 × 109 Nm2
B = [latex]\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}[/latex]
P = -B × [latex]\frac{\Delta V}{V}[/latex]
= 2.2 × 109 × [latex]\frac{2}{100}[/latex]
P = 4.4 × 107 N/m2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
A steel wire of length 20 cm is stretched to increase its length by 0.2 cm. Find the lateral strain in the wire if the Poisson’s ratio for steel is 0.19.
Solution:
L = 20 cm = 20 × 10-2 m
∆L = 0.2 × 10-2 m
σ = 0.19
σ = [latex]\frac{\text { Lateral strain }}{\text { Longitudinal strain }\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}\right)}[/latex]
Lateral strain = σ × [latex]\frac{\Delta L}{L}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{0.19 \times 0.2 \times 10^{-2}}{20 \times 10^{-2}}[/latex]
= 0.0019

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-sectional area 3.0 × 10-5 m2 stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length 3.5 m and cross-sectional area of 4.0 × 10-5 m2,
Solution:
Given, for steel wire, a1 = 3.0 × 10-5 m2, l1 = 4.7 m, ∆l1 = ∆l, F1 = F
For copper wire, a2 = 4.0 × 10-5 m2, l2 = 3.5 m, ∆l2 = ∆l, F2 = F .
Let y1, y2 be the young modulus of steel wire and copper wire respectively.
∴ y1 = [latex]\frac{F_1}{a_1} \times \frac{l_1}{\Delta l_2}=\frac{F}{3.0 \times 10^{-5}} \times \frac{4.7}{\Delta l}[/latex] ………….. (i)
and y2 = [latex]\frac{F_2 \times l_2}{a_2 \times \Delta l_2}=\frac{F \times 3.2}{4 \times 10^{-5} \times \Delta l}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{y}_1}{\mathrm{y}_2}=\frac{4.7 \times 4 \times 10^{-5}}{3.5 \times 3.0 \times 10^{-5}}[/latex] = 1.8
Here y1 : y1 = 1.8 : 1.

Question 2.
Figure shows the strain-stress curve for a given material. What are (a) Young’s modulus and (b) approximate yield strength for this material ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10
Solution:
a) From graph, for stress = 150 × 106 Nm-2 the corresponding strain = 0.002
young’s modulus y = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}=\frac{150 \times 10^6}{0.002}[/latex]
= 7.5 × 1010 Nm-2

b) Approximate yeild strength will be equal to the maximum stress it can substain with out crossing the elastic limit. Therefore, the approximate yeild strength
= 300 × 106 Nm-2
= 3 × 108 Nm-2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
The stress-strain graphs for materials A and B are shown in Fig.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
The graphs are drawn to the same scale.
a) Which of the materials has the greater Young’s modulus ?
b) Which of the two is the stronger material ?
Solution:
a) From the two graphs we note that for a given strain, stress for A is more than that of B. Hence young’s modulus (= stress/ strain) is greater for A than that of B.

b) A is stronger than B. Strength of a material is measured by the amount of stress required to cause fracture, corresponding to the point of fracture.

Question 4.
Read the following two statements below carefully and state, with reasons, if it is true or false.
a) The Young’s modulus of rubber is greater than that of steel;
b) The stretching of a coil is determined by its shear modulus.
Solution:
a) False, because for a given stress there is more strain in rubber than steel and modulus of elasticity is inversly proportional to strain.

b) True because the strecting of coil simply changes its shape without any change in the length of the wire used in the coil due to which shear modulus of elasticity is involved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
Two wires of diameter 0.25 cm, one made of steel and the other made of brass are loaded as shown in Fig. The unloaded length of steel wire is 1.5 m and that of brass Wire is 1.0 m. Compute the elongations of the steel and the brass wires.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12
Solution:
For steel wire, total force on steel wire,
F1 = 4 + 6 = 10 kg, f = 10 × 9.8 N
l1 = 1.5 m, ∆l1 = ?, 2r1 = 0.25cm or r1 =(0.25/2)cm = 0.125 × 10-2 m
y1 = 2.0 × 1011 pa
For brass wire, F2 = 6.0 kg, f = 6 × 9.8 N
2r2 = 0.25 cm or r2 = (0.25/2) cm = 0.125 × 10-2 m,
y2 = 0.91 × 1011 pa, l2 = 1.0 m, ∆l2 = ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

Question 6.
The edge of an aluminium cube is 10 cm long. One face of the cube is firmly fixed to a verticle wall. A mass of 100 kdis then attached to the opposite face of the cube. The shear modulus of aluminium is 25 GPa. What is the vertical deflection of this face?
Solution:
A = 0.10 × 0.10 = 10-2 m2, F = mg = 100 × 10 N
Shearing strain = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=\frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}\right)}{\eta}[/latex]
or ∆L = [latex]\frac{F L}{A \eta}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(100 \times 10) \times(0.10)}{10^{-2} \times\left(25 \times 10^9\right)}[/latex] = 4 × 10-7 m.

Question 7.
Four identical hollow cylindrical columns of mild steel support a big structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of each column are 30 and 60 cm respectively. Assuming the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the corn pressional strain of each column.
Solution:
Load on each column, F = [latex]\frac{50,000}{4}[/latex] kgwt
= [latex]\frac{50,000 \times 9.8}{4}[/latex] N
A = π(r22 – r12) = [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex](0.60)2 – (0.30)2]
= [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] 0.27 m2
Compression strain = [latex]\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{y}=\frac{F}{A y}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{50,000 \times 9.8}{4 \times\left(\frac{22}{7} \times 0.27\right) \times 2.0 \times 10^{11}}[/latex]
= 7.21 × 10-7.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 8.
A piece of copper having a rectangular cross-section of 15.2 mm × 19.1 mm is pulled in tension with 44,500 N force, producing only elastic deformation. Calculate the resulting strain?
Solution:
Here, A = 15.2 × 19.2 × 10-6 m2, F = 44,
500 N, η = 42 × 109 Nm-2
Strain = [latex]\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Modulus of elasticity }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\eta}=\frac{F}{A \eta}=\frac{44500}{\left(15.2 \times 19.2 \times 10^{-6}\right) \times 42 \times 10^9}[/latex]
= 3.65 × 10-3.

Question 9.
A steel cable with a radius of 1.5 cm supports a chairlift at a ski area. If the maximum stress Is not to exceed 108 N m-2, what is the maximum load the cable can support ?
Solution:
Maximum load macimum stress × area of cross-section
= 108πr2
= 108 × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × (1.5 × 10-2)2
= 7.07 × 104 N.

Question 10.
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically by three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
Solution:
As each wire has same tension F, so each wire has same extansion due to mass of rigid bar. As each wire is of same length, hence each wire has same strain, if D is the diameter of wire, then
y = [latex]\frac{4 \mathrm{~F} / \pi \mathrm{D}^2}{\text { Strain }}[/latex] or D2 ∝ 1/y
[latex]\frac{D_{\mathrm{cu}}}{\mathrm{D}_{\mathrm{iron}}}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{iron}}}{\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{cu}}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{\frac{190 \times 10^9}{110 \times 10^9}}=\sqrt{\frac{19}{11}}[/latex] = 1.31.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 11.
A 14.5 kg mass, fastened to the end of a steel wire of unstretched length 1.0 m, is whirled in a vertical circle with an angular velocity of 2 rev/s at the bottom of the circle. The cross-sectional area of the wire is 0.065 cm2. Calculate the elongation of the wire when the mass is at the lowest point of its path.
Solution:
Here, m = 14.5 kg, l = r = 1m, v = 2 rps, A = 0.065 × 10-4 m2
Total pulling force on mass, when it is at the lowest position of the vertical circle is
F = mg + mrω2
= mg + mr4πv2
= 14.5 × 9.8 + 14.5 × 1 × 4 × ([latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex])2 × 22
= 142.1 +2291.6
= 2433.7 N
y = [latex]\frac{F}{A} \times \frac{l}{\Delta l}[/latex] or ∆l = [latex]\frac{F l}{A y}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2433.7 \times 1}{\left(0.065 \times 10^{-4}\right) \times\left(2 \times 10^{11}\right)}[/latex]
= 1.87 × 10-3 m
= 1.87 mm.

Question 12.
Compute the bulk modulus of water from the following data : Initial volume = 100.0 litre, Pressure increase = 100.0 atm (1 atm = 1.013 × 105 Pa), Final volume = 100.5 litre. Compare the bulk modulus of water with that of air (at constant temperature). Explain in simple terms why the ratio is so large.
Solution:
Here, V = 100 lit = 100 × 10-3 m3, P = 100 atm = 100 × 1.013 × 105 Pa
V + ∆V = 100.5 litre or ∆V= (V + ∆V) – V
= 100.5 – 100
= 0.5 litre = 0.5 × 10-3 m3
We known that bulk modulus, B = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{100 \times 1.013 \times 10^5 \times 100 \times 10^{-3}}{0.5 \times 10^{-3}}[/latex]
= 2.026 × 109 Pa
Bulk modulus of air = 1.0 × 105 Pa
[latex]\frac{\text { Bulk modulus of water }}{\text { Bulk modulus of air }}=\frac{2.026 \times 10^9}{1.0 \times 10^5}[/latex]
= 2.026 × 1014.
It is so because gases are much more compressible than those of liquids. The molecules in gases are very poorly coupled to their neighbours as compared to those of gases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 13.
What is the density of water at a depth where pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 ?
Solution:
Here, P = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.013 × 105 pa,
compressibility = [latex]\left(\frac{1}{B}\right)[/latex] = 45.8 × 10-11 pa-1
Density of water at surface,
ρ = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3
Let p be the density of water at the given depth, if v and v’ are volumes of certain mass M of ocean water at surface and at a given
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14
Putting this value in (i) we get
1 – [latex]\frac{1.03 \times 10^3}{\rho^{\prime}}[/latex] = 3.712 × 10-3 or
ρ’ = [latex]\frac{1.03 \times 10^3}{1-3.712 \times 10^{-3}}[/latex] = 1.034 × 103 kg m-3.

Question 14.
Compute the fractional change in volume of a glass slab, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 10 atm.
Solution:
Here, P = 10 atm = 10 × 1.013 × 105 pa,
B = 37 × 109 Nm-2
Volumetric strain = [latex]\frac{\Delta V}{V}=\frac{P}{B}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10 \times 1.013 \times 10^5}{37 \times 10^9}[/latex] = 2.74 × 10-5
∴ Fractional change in volume = [latex]\frac{\Delta V}{V}[/latex]
= 2.74 × 10-5

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
Determine the volume contraction of a solid copper cube, 10 cm on an edge, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 7.0 × 106 Pa.
Solution:
Here, L = 10 cm = 0.10m; P = 7 × 106 pa B = 140 Gpa = 140 × 109 pa
As B = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}=\frac{\mathrm{Pl}^3}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}[/latex] or ∆V = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Pl}^3}{\mathrm{~B}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(7 \times 10^6\right) \times(0.10)^3}{140 \times 10^9}[/latex] = 5 × 10-8 m3
= 5 × 10-2 mm3

Question 16.
How much should be pressure on a litre of water be changed to compress it by 0.10% ?
Solution:
Here, V = 1 litre = 10-3m3;
∆V/V = 0,10/100 = 10-3
B = [latex]\frac{P V}{\Delta V}[/latex] or P = B [latex]\frac{\Delta V}{V}[/latex]
= (2.2 × 109) × 10-3 = 2.2 × 106pa

Question 17.
Anvils made of single crystals of diamond, with the shape as shown in Fig. are used to investigate behaviour of materials under very high pressures. Flat faces at the narrow end of the anvil have a diameter of 0.50 mm, and the wide ends are subjected to a compressional force of 50,000 N. What is the pressure at the tip of the anvil ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15
Solution:
Here, D = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10-3m = 5 × 10-4m
F = 50,000 N = 5 × 104N
Pressure at the tip of anvil.
P = [latex]\frac{F}{\pi D^2 / 4}=\frac{4 F}{\pi D^2}[/latex]
P = [latex]\frac{4 \times\left(5 \times 10^4\right)}{(22 / 7) \times\left(5 \times 10^{-4}\right)^2}[/latex] = 2.5 × 1011pa.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 18.
A rod of length 1.05 m having negligible mass is supported at its end by two wires of steel (wire A) and aluminium (wire B) of equal lengths as shown in Fig. The cross-sectional areas of wires A and B are 1.0 mm2 and 2.0 mm2, respectively. At what point along the rod should a mass m be suspended in order to produce (a) equal stresses and (b) equal strains in both steel and aluminium wires.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16
Solution:
For Steel wire A, l1 = l, A1 = 1 mm2
Y1 = 2 × 1011Nm-2
For aluminium wire B, l2 = l;
A2 = 2mm2; y2 = 7 × 1010 Nm-2
a) Let mass m be suspended from the rod at the distance × from the end where wires A is connected. Let F1 and F2 be the tension in two wires and there is equal stress in two wires, then
[latex]\frac{F_1}{A_1}=\frac{F_2}{A_2} \text { or } \frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex] …………………. (i)
Taking moment of forces about the point of suspension of mass from the rod, we have
F1x = F2 (1.05 – x) or [latex]\frac{1.05-x}{x}=\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
or 2.10 – 2x = x or x = 0.70m = 70 cm

b) Let mass m be supended from the rod at distance × from the end where wire A is connected. Let F1 and F2 be the tension in the wires and there is equal strain in the two wires i.e.
[latex]\frac{F_1}{A_1 Y_1}=\frac{F_2}{A_2 Y_2}[/latex] or [latex]\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{A_1}{A_2} \frac{Y_1}{Y_2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2 \times 10^{11}}{7 \times 10^{10}}=\frac{10}{7}[/latex]
As the rod is stationary, so F1x = F2(1.05 – x)
or [latex]\frac{1.05-x}{x}=\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{10}{7}[/latex]
or 10 x = 7.35 – 7x
or x = 0.4324 m
x = 43.2cm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 19.
A mild steel wire of length 1.0 m and cross-sectional area 0.50 × 10-2 cm2 is stretched, well within its elastic limit, horizontally between two pillars. A mass of 100 g is suspended from the mid-point of the wire. Calculate the depression at the- mid-point.
Solution:
Refer the figure, let x be the depression at the mid point i.e CD = x
In fig. AC = CB = Z = 0.5m
m = 100g = 0.100 kg
AD = BD = (l2 + x2)1/2
Increase in length, ∆l = AD + DB – AB
= 2 AD – AB
= 2 (l2 + x2)1/2 – 2l
= 2l(1 + [latex]\frac{x^2}{l^2}[/latex])1/2 – 2l
= 2l (1 + [latex]\frac{x^2}{2 l^2}[/latex]) – 2l = [latex]\frac{x^2}{l}[/latex]
Strain = [latex]\frac{\Delta l}{2 l}=\frac{x^2}{2 l^2}[/latex]
If T is the tension in the wire, then 2T cos θ
= mg or T = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \cos \theta}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18

Question 20.
Two strips of metal are riveted together at their ends by four rivets, each of diameter 6.0 mm. What is the maximum tension that can be exerted by the riveted strip if the shearing stress on the rivet is not to exceed 6.9 × 107 Pa ? Assume that each rivet is to carry one quarter of the load.
Solution:
Here, r = 6/2 = 3mm = 3 × 10-3 m, max.
stress = 6.9 × 107 Pa
Max . load on a rivet = Max stress × area of cross section
= 6.9 × 107 × (22/7) × (3 × 10-3)2
∴ Maximum tension
= 4 (6.9 × 107 × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × 9 × 10-6)
= 7.8 × 103N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 21.
The Marina trench is located in the Pacific Ocean, and at one place it is nearly eleven km beneath the surface of water. The water pressure at the bottom of the trench is about 1.1 × 108 Pa. A steel ball of initial volume 0.32 m3 is dropped into the ocean and falls to the bottom of the trench. What is the change in the volume of the ball when it reaches to the bottom ?
Solution:
Here, P = 1.1 × 108 Pa, V = 0.32 m3,
B = 16 × 1011Pa
∆V = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{B}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(1.1 \times 10^8\right) \times 0.32}{1.6 \times 10^{11}}[/latex]
= 2.2 × 10-4m3

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of 10 m. A 100 KN force stretches it along its length. Calculate (a) stress, (b) elongation, and (c) strain on the rod. Young’s modulus, of structural steel ¡s 2.0 × 1011 Nm2.
Answer:
a) Given Stress = [latex]\frac{F}{A}=\frac{F}{\pi r^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{100 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~N}}{3.14 \times\left(10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}[/latex] = 3.18 × 108 Nm-2

b) The elongation
∆L = [latex]\frac{(\mathrm{F} / \mathrm{A}) \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{Y}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(3.18 \times 10^8 \mathrm{Nm}^2\right)(1 \mathrm{~m})}{2 \times 10^{11} \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}[/latex]
= 1.59 × 10-3 m
= 1.59 mm

c) The strain is given by
Strain = ∆L/L = (1.59 × 10-3) km
= 1.59 × 10-3 = 0.16%

Question 2.
A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length 1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm, are connected end to end. When stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to be 0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied.
Answer:
From y = [latex]\frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon}[/latex]
we have stress = strain × Young’s modulus.
W/A = Yc × (∆Lc/Lc) = Ys × (∆Ls/Ls)
where the subscripts c and s refer to copper and stainless steel respectively,
∆Lc/∆Ls = (Ys/Ys) () (Lc/Ls)
Given Lc = 2.2 m, Ls = 1.6 m,
Yc = 1.1 × 1011 N.m-2 and Ys = 2.0 × 1011 N.m-2.
∆Lc/∆Ls = [latex]\frac{2.0 \times 10^{11}}{1.1 \times 10^{11}}=\frac{2.2}{1.6}[/latex] = 2.5
∆Lc + ∆Ls = 7.0 × 10-4 m
Solving the above equations,
∆Lc = 5.0 × 10-4 m and ∆Ls = 2.0 × 10-4 m.
∴ W = (A × Yc × ∆Lc)Lc
= π(1.5 × 10-3)2 × [latex]\left[\frac{\left(5.0 \times 10^{-4} \times 1.1 \times 10^{11}\right)}{2.2}\right][/latex] = 1.8 × 102 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
In a human pyramid in a circus, the entire weight of the balanced group is supported by the legs of a performer who is lying on his back (as shown in Fig.) The combined mass of all the persons performing the act and the tables, planks etc. involved is 280 kg. The mass of the performer lying on his back at the bottom of the pyramid is 60 kg. Each thighbone (femur) of this performer has a length of 50 cm and an effective radius of 2.0 cm. Determine the amount by which each thighbone gets compressed under the extra load.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19
Answer:
Total mass of all the performers, tables, plaques = 280 kg
Mass of the performer = 60 kg
Mass supported by the legs of the performer at the bottom of the pyramid = 280 – 60
= 220 kg
Weight of this supported mass = 220 kg wt.
= 220 × 9.8 N = 2156 N
Weight supported by each thighbone of the performer = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (2156) N = 1078 N.
The Young’s modulus for bone is Y = 9.4 × 109 Nm-2 (compressive)
Length of each thighbone L = 0.5 m the radius of thigbone = 2.0 cm
Thus the cross-sectional area of the thighbone
A = π × (2 × 10-2)2 m2
= 1.26 × 10-3 m2
Using [latex]\frac{(F \times L)}{(A \times \Delta L)}[/latex] the compression in each thigbone (∆L) can be computed as
∆L = [latex]\frac{F \times L}{Y \times A}[/latex]
= [(1078 × 0.5)/(9.4 9 × 109 × 1.26 × 10-3)]
= 4.55 × 10-5 m or 4.55 × 10-3 cm.
This is a very small change ! The fractional decrease in the thighbone is ∆L/L = 0.000091 or 0.0091%.

Question 4.
A square slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10 cm is subject to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of 9.0 × 104 N. The lower edge is riveted to the floor. How much will the upper edge be displaced ?
Answer:
The area (A) = 50 cm × 10 cm
= 0.5 m × 0.1 m
= 0.05 m2
Therefore, the stress appIid is
= (9.4 × 104N/0.05 m2)
= 1.80 × 106 N.m2
We know that shearing strain = (∆x/L)
= Stress/G.
Therefore the displacement
∆x = (Stress × L)/G = [latex]\frac{\left(1.8 \times 10^6 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2} \times 0.5 \mathrm{~m}\right)}{5.6 \times 10^9 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}[/latex]
= 1.6 × 10-4 m = 0.16 mm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
The average depth of Indian Ocean is about 3000 m. Calculate the fractional compression. ∆V/V, of water at the bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2. (Take g = 10 ms-2)
Answer:
The pressure exerted by a 3000 m column of water on the bottom layer
ρ = hρg
= 3000 m × 1000 kg m-3× 10 ms-2
= 3 × 107 Nm-2
Fractional compression ∆V/V, is
∆V/V = stress [latex]\frac{\left(3 \times 10^7 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}\right)}{2.2 \times 109 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}[/latex]
= 1.36 × 10-2 or 1.36%

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State the unit and dimension of the universal gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}[/latex]
units of G = Nm2 Kg-2
dimensional formula of G = [latex]\frac{\left[\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}\right]\left[\mathrm{L}^2\right]}{[\mathrm{M}][\mathrm{M}]}[/latex] = [M-1 L3 T-2]

Question 2.
State the vector form of Newtons’s law of gravitation.
Answer:
Vector form of Newton’s law of gravitation is
F = [latex]\frac{-G m_1 m_2}{r^3} \hat{r}[/latex] where [latex]\hat{r}[/latex] is unit vector.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
If the gravitational force of Earth on the Moon is F, what is the gravitational force of moon on earth ? Do these forces to attraction-reaction pair ?
Answer:
F. Yes, they form action and reaction pair.

Question 4.
What would be the change in acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface, if the radius of Earth decreases by 2% keeping the mass of Earth constant ?
Answer:
g1r12, l = g2r22, r2 = [latex]\frac{98}{100}[/latex] r1
[latex]\frac{g_2}{g_1}=\frac{r_1^2}{r_2^2}=\frac{r_1^2}{\left(\frac{98}{100}\right) r_1^2}=\frac{100 \times 100}{98 \times 98}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{g_2}{g_1}[/latex] = 1.04
[latex]\frac{g_2}{g_1}[/latex] – 1 = 1.04 – 1
[latex]\frac{g_2-g_1}{g_1}[/latex] = 0.04

Question 5.
As we go from one planet to another, how will
a) the mass and
b) the weight of a body change ?
Answer:
a) The mass remains constant.
b) The weight (w = mg), changes from one planet to another planet.

Question 6.
Keeping the length of a simple pendulum constant, will the time period be the same on all planets ? Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
No, Time period depends on acceleration due to gravity (g).
T = 2π [latex]\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}[/latex]
g value varies from planet to planet. So time period changes.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 7.
Give the equation for the value of g at a depth ‘d’ from the surface of Earth. What is the value of ‘g’ at the centre of Earth ?
Answer:

  1. gd = g(1 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]) where d = Depth
    R = Radius of the Earth
  2. At the centre of the Earth g = 0.

Question 8.
What are the factors that make ‘g’ the least at the equator and maximum at the poles ? > .
Answer:

  1. g value is maximum at poles due to
    a) Rotation of the Earth
    b) Earth is flattened at the poles
    c) The equatorial radius is less at the poles.
  2. g value minimum at equator due to
    a) Rotation of the earth
    b) Bulging near the equator.

Question 9.
“Hydrogen is in abundance around the sun but not around Earth”. Explain.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the sun is 620 km/s and escape velocity on the Earth is 11.2 km/s. The r.m.s velocities of hydrogen (2 km/s) is less than escape velocity on the Sun. So hydrogen is more abundant around the Sun and less around the Earth.

Question 10.
What is the time period of revolution of a geostationary satellite ? Does it rorate from West to East or from East to West ?
Answer:
Time period of geo-stationary satellite is 24 hours. It can rotate from west to east.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
What are polar satellites ?
Answer:
Polar satellites are low altitude satellites (500 to 800 km), but they go around the poles of the earth in a north-south direction. Its time period is around 100 minutes.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Kepler’s laws of planetary motion.
Answer:
The three laws of Kepler can be stated as follows.

  1. Law of orbits : All planets move in elliptical orbits with the sun situated at one of the foci.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 1
  2. Law of areas : The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
  3. Law of periods : The square of the time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
    T2 ∝ R3

Question 2.
Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Consider a body of mass m on the surface of the planet. Let R be the radius of the Earth and M be the mass of the Earth.
Force acting on the body due to gravitational pull of the planet is
F = m g → (1)
According to Newton’s gravitational law, Force on the body is F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] → (2)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 2
From eq’s (1) and (2), we have
m g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
This is the relation between g and G
Mass of the earth (M) = Volume × density of the earth
M = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] π R2 × ρ
g = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] π G R ρ

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
How does the acceleration due to gravity (g) change for the same values of height(h) and depth (d).
Answer:
a) gh = g(1 – [latex]\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]), gd = g(1 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex])
Same values of height and depth, h = d
gh = g (1 – [latex]\frac{2 \mathrm{~d}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]) and gd = g(1 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex])
∴ gd > gh

b) For large height and large depth
gh = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}[/latex] and gd = g(1 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex])
If h = d = R
gh = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}[/latex] and gd = g(1 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]) = 0
∴ gh > gd

Question 4.
What is orbital velocity ? Obtain an expression for it. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Orbital velocity (V0) : The horizontal velocity required for an object to revolve around a planet in a circular orbit is called orbital velocity.

Expression for orbital velocity :
Consider a body (satellite) of mass m, revolves round the earth in a circular orbit. Let h be the height of the satellite from the surface of the earth. Then (R + h) is the radius of the orbit.
The Gravitational force of attraction of the earth on the body is given by F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^2}[/latex] ………….. (1)
Where M = Mass of the earth, R = Radius of the earth, G = universal gravitational constant. If V0 is the orbital velocity of the body.
The centripetal force on the body is given by F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{o}}^2}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex] …………… (2)
In order to make the body revolve in the same orbit, its centripetal force must be equal to the gravitational force
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 3

Question 5.
What is escape velocity ? Obtain an expression for it.
Answer:
Escape velocity : It is the minimum velocity with which a body should be projected, so that it moves into the space by overcoming the earth’s gravitational field.

Expression for escape velocity :
Consider a body of mass m thrown with a velocity v2
Then K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m ve2 …………. (1)
The gravitational force of attraction of the earth of mass M and Radius R on a body of mass m at its surface is F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] ……………… (2)
Gravitational P. E. = work done on the body
∴ P. E. = F × R = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] × R
P.E. = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] …………….. (3)
A body just escapes when its K. E. = P. E
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m ve2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
ve2 = [latex]\frac{2 \mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] (∵ g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex])
ve = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}}[/latex]
ve = [latex]\sqrt{2 g R}[/latex] (gR = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex])
ve = [latex]\sqrt{2} \times \sqrt{g R}[/latex] (∵ v0 = [latex]\sqrt{g R}[/latex])
ve = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] × v0
∴ Escape velocity is [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] times the orbital velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
What is a geostationary satellite ? State its uses. [T.S. Mar. 18, 15; A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Geo-stationary satellite : If the period of revolution of an artificial satellite is equal to the period of rotation of earth, then such a satellite is called geo-stationary satellite.
Time period of geo-stationary satellite is 24 hours.
Uses :

  1. Study the upper layers of atmosphere
  2. Forecast the changes in atmosphere
  3. Know the shape and size of the earth.
  4. Identify the minerals and natural resources present inside and on the surface of the earth.
  5. Transmit the T. V. programmes to distant objects
  6. Under take space research i.e. to know about the planets, satellites, comets etc.

Question 7.
If two places are at the same height from the mean sea level; One is a mountain and other is in air at which place will ‘g’ be greater ? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
The acceleration due to gravity on mountain is greater than that of air.
g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] ………….. (1)
Mass (M) = volume × density (ρ)
M = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]π R3 × ρ
g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] π R3 ρ
g = – [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] π R G ρ …………….. (2)
g ∝ ρ
So density is more at mountains. So g is more on mountain.

Question 8.
The weight of an object is more at the poles than at the equator. At which of these can we get more sugar for the same weight ? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
Weight of the object at poles = mp gp (∵ w = mg)
Weight of the object at equator = me ge
Given weight of the object at poles > weight of the object at equator
mp gp > mege
We know that gp > ge
Then mp < me
Hence we can get more sugar at equator.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 9.
If a nut becomes loose and gets detached form a satellite revolving around the earth, will it fall down to earth or will it revolve around earth ? Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
When a nut is detached from a satellite revolving around the earth, the nut is also moving with the speed of the satellite as the orbit of a satellite does not depend upon its mass. Hence nut is moving in the same orbit under centripetal force.

Question 10.
An object projected with a velocity greater than or equal to 11.2 kms it will not return to earth. Explain the reason.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the surface of the earth (ve) = 11.2 km/s. Any object projected with the velocity greater then (or) equal to 11.2 km/s it will not come back. Because it has overcome the earth’s gravitational pull.
So an object never come back to earth.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define gravitational potential energy and derive an expression for it associated with two particles of masses m1 and m2.
Answer:
Gravitational potential energy : Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another body is defined as the amount of work done in brining the given body from infinity to that point without acceleration.

Expression for gravitational potential energy : Consider a gravitational field due to earth of mass M, radius R. The mass of the earth can be supposed to be concentrated at its centre 0. Let us calculate the gravitational the potential energy of the body of mass m placed at point p in the gravitational field, where OP = r and r > R. Let OA = x and AB = dx.
The gravitational force on the body at A will be
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{X}^2}[/latex] ……………… (1)
Small amount of work done in bringing the body without acceleration through a small distance dx is given by
dw = Force × displacement
dw = F × dx
dw = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{X}^2}[/latex] × dx ……………… (2)
Total work done in bringing the body from infinity to point P is given by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 4
This work done is stored in the body as its gravitational potential energy (u)
∴ Gravitational potential energy (u) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}[/latex] ……………….. (4)
Gravitational potential energy associated with two particles of masses m, and m2 separated by a distance r is given by
u = -[latex]\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r}[/latex] ……………….. (5) (if we choose u = 0 as r → ∞).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Derive an expression for the variation of acceleration due to gravity (a) above and (b) below the surface of the Earth.
Answer:
i) Variation of g with height:
When an object is on the surface of the earth, it will be at a distance r = R radius of the earth, then we have g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
Where G = universal gravitational constant, M = Mass of the earth
When the object is at a height h above the surface of the earth, Then r = R + h
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 5
g value decreases with altitude.

ii) Variation of g with depth :
Let us assume that the earth to be a homogeneous uniform sphere of radius R, mass M and of uniform density ρ.
We know that g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] π ρ G R ………………… (1)
Consider a body of mass m be placed at a depth d.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 6
The value of g decreases with depth.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
State Newton’s Universal Law of gravitation. Explain how the value of the Gravitational constant (G) can be determined by Cavendish method.
Answer:
Newton’s law of gravitation :
“Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversly proportional to the square of the distance between them”
Determination of G value by cavendish method :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 7

  1. In 1798 Henry Cavendish determined the value of G experimentally.
  2. The bar AB has two small lead spheres attached at its ends.
  3. The bar is suspended from a rigid support by a fine wire.
  4. Two large lead spheres are brought close to the small ones but on opposite sides as shown in figure.
  5. The big spheres attract the nearby small ones by equal and opposite force as shown in figurer.
  6. There is no net force on the bar but only a torque which is clearly equal to F times the length of the bar. When F is the force of attraction between a big sphere and its neighbouring small sphere.
  7. Due to this torque, the suspended wire gets twisted till such time as the restoring torque of the wire equals the gravitational torque.
    Restoring torque = τ θ ………………… (1)
    Where τ is restoring couple per unit twist 0 is the angle
  8. If d is the seperation between big and small balls having masses M and m.
    Gravitational force (F) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{d}^2}[/latex] ……………… (2)
    ix) If L is the length of the bar A B, then the torque arising out of F is F multiplied by L. At equilibrium, this is equal to the restoring torque.
    [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{d}^2}[/latex] = τ θ
    observations of θ thus enables one to calculate G.
    The measurement of G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/ Kg2

Problems

(Gravitational Constant ‘G’ = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/ Kg-2; Radius of earth ‘R’ = 6400 km; Mass of earth ‘ME’ = 6 × 1024 kg)

Question 1.
Two spherical balls each of mass 1 kg are placed 1 cm apart. Find the gravitational force of attraction between them.
Solution:
m1 = m2 = 1 kg, d = 1 cm = 1 × 10-2 m
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}[/latex]
F = [latex]\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 1 \times 1}{\left(1 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}[/latex] = 6.67 × 10-7N

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
The mass of a ball is four times the mass of another ball. When these balls are separated by a distance of 10 cm, the force of gravitation between them is 6.67 × 10-7 N. Find the masses of the two balls.
Solution:
m1 = m, m2 = 4m, d = 10 cm = 10 × 10-2 m,
F = 6.67 × 10-7 N
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg 2
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}[/latex]
6.67 × 10-7 = [latex]\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times \mathrm{m} \times 4 \mathrm{~m}}{\left(10 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}[/latex]
4 m2 = 102
m2 = [latex]\frac{100}{4}[/latex] = 25
m = 5 kg
∴ m1 = m = 5 kg
m2 = 4m = 4 × 5 = 20 kg

Question 3.
Three spherical balls of masses 1 kg, 2kg and 3 kg are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. Find the magnitude of gravitational force exerted by the 2 kg and 3kg masses on the 1 kg mass.
Solution:
The force of attraction at 2 kg on the 1 kg particle
F2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Gmn}{\mathrm{~d}^2}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{G} \times 1 \times 2}{1^2}[/latex]
F2 = 2 G
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 8

Question 4.
At a certain height above the earth’s surface, the acceleration due to gravity is 4% of its value at the surface of earth. Determine the height.
Solution:
gh = 4% of g = [latex]\frac{4}{100}[/latex]g, R = 6400 km
gh = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{4 \mathrm{~g}}{100}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}[/latex]
[latex]\left(1+\frac{h}{R}\right)^2=\frac{100}{4}[/latex] = 25
1 + [latex]\frac{h}{R}[/latex] = 5
[latex]\frac{h}{R}[/latex] = 4
h = 4 × R = 4 × 6400 = 25,600 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
A satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of 1000km. Find its orbital speed.
Solution:
h = 1000 km
Oribital velocity (v0) = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}}[/latex]
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg 2, M = 6 × 1024 kg
R + h = 6400 + 1000 = 7400 km
= 7400 × 103m
v0 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24}}{7400 \times 10^3}}[/latex]
v0 = [latex]\sqrt{0.5408 \times 10^{10}}[/latex] = 73.54 × 103 m/s
v0 = 7.354km/s

Question 6.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height equal to the radius of earth. Find it’s
(i) orbital speed and
(ii) Period of revolution
Solution:
Height h = R
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 11

Question 7.
The gravitational force of attraction between two objects decreases by 36% when the distance between them is increased by 4 m. Find the original distance between them.
Solution:
F1 = F, F2 = [latex]\frac{64}{100}[/latex] F
d1 = d, d2 = (d + 4) m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 12
5d = 4d + 16
d = 16 m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
Four identical masses of m are kept at the corners of a square of side a. Find the gravitational force exerted on one of the masses by the other masses.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 13

Question 9.
Two spherical balls of 1 kg and 4kg are separated by a distance of 12 cm. Find the distance of a point from the 1 kg mass at which the gravitational force on any mass becomes zero.
Solution:
m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 4kg, r = 12 cm
∴ x = [latex]\frac{r}{\sqrt{\frac{m_2}{m_1}}+1}[/latex] from m1
= [latex]\frac{12}{\sqrt{\frac{4}{1}}+1}=\frac{12}{2+1}=\frac{12}{3}[/latex] = 4 cm
At x = 4 cm the gravitational force is zero.

Question 10.
Three uniform spheres each of mass m and radius R are kept in such a way that each touches the other two. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force on any one of the spheres due to the other two.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 9

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
Two satellites are revolving round the earth at different heights. The ratio of their orbital speeds ¡s 2 : 1. If one of them is at a height of 100 km, what is the height of the other satellite ?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 10
4R + 400 = R + h2
h2 = 3R + 400 = 3 × 6400 + 400
= 19200 + 400
h2 = 19,600 km.

Question 12.
A satellite is revolving round in a circular orbit with a speed of 8 km s-1 at a height where the value of acceleration due to gravity is 8 m s-2. How high is the satellite from the Earth’s surface ? (Radius of planet = 6000 km)
Solution:
v0 = 8 km/s = 8000 m/s
gh = 8 m/s2, R = 6000 km = 6000 × 103 m
∴ v0 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R+h}}=\sqrt{g(R+h)}[/latex]
v02 = g(R + h)
(8000)2 = 8(6000 × 103 + h)
6000 × 103 + h = 8 × 106
h = (8 – 6) 106
h = 2 × 106m
h = 2000 × 103 = 2000 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 13.
(a) Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the Earth’s surface, (b) If. the Earth were made of wood, its mass would be 10% of its current mass. What would be the escape velocity, if the Earth were made of wood ?
Solution:
R = 6400 × 103m,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 14

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Answer the following :
a) You can shield a charge from electrical forces by putting it inside a hollow conductor. Can you shield a body from the gravitational influence of nearby matter by putting it inside a hollow sphere or by some other means ?
b) An astronaut inside a small space ship orbiting around the earth cannot detect gravity. If the space station orbiting around the earth has a large size, can he hope to detect gravity ?
c) If you compare the gravitational force on the earth due to the sun to that due to the moon, you would find that the Sun’s pull is greater than the moon’s pull, (you can check this yourself using the data available in the succeeding exercises). However, the tidal effect of the moon’s pull is greater than the tidal effect of sun. Why ?
Solution:
a) We cannot shield a body from the gravitational influence of nearby matter because the gravitational force on the body due to near by matter is independent of the presence of other matter, whereas it is not so in the case of electrical forces it means the gravitational screens are not possible.

b) Yes, if the size of the spaceship orbiting around the earth is large enough, an astronaut inside the spaceship can detect the variation in g.

c) Tidal effect depends inversly on the cube of the distance, unlike force which depends inversly on the square of the distance. Since the distance of moon from the ocean water is very small as compared to the distance of sun from the ocean water on earth. Therefore, the tidal effect of moon’s pull is greater than the tidal effect of the sun.

Question 2.
Choose the correct alternative :
a) Acceleration due to gravity increase^ decreases with increasing altitude.
b) Acceleration due to gravity increases/decreases with increas¬ing depth (assume the earth to be a sphere of uniform density).
c) Acceleration due to gravity is independent of mass of the earth/ mass of the body.
d) The formula – G Mm (1/r2 – 1/r1) is more/less accurate than the formula mg (r2 – r1) for the difference of potential energy between two points r2 and r1 distance away from the centre of the earth.
Solution:
a) decreases
b) decreases
c) mass of the body
d) more

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
Suppose there existed a planet that went around the sun twice as fast as the earth. What would be its orbital size as compared to that of the earth ?
Solution:
Here, Te = 1 year; Tp = [latex]\frac{T_c}{2}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex] year; re = 1
A.U.; rp = ?
Using Kepler’s third law, we have
rp = re[latex]\left(\frac{T_p}{T_e}\right)^{2 / 3}[/latex] = [latex]1\left(\frac{1 / 2}{1}\right)^{2 / 3}[/latex]
= 0.63 AU

Question 4.
Io, one of the satellites of Jupiter, has an orbital period of 1.769 days and the radius of the orbit is 4.22 × 108m. Show that the mass of Jupiter is about-one-thousandth that of the sun.
Solution:
For a satellite of Jupiter, orbital period,
T1 = 1.769 days = 1.769 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
Radius of the orbit of satellite,
r1 = 4.22 × 108 m
mass of Jupiter, M1 is given by M1
= [latex]\frac{4 \pi^2 \times\left(4.22 \times 10^8\right)^3}{G \times(1.769 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{4 \pi^2 r_1^3}{\mathrm{GT}_1^2}[/latex] ……………. (1)
We know that the orbital period of earth around the sun,
T = 1 year = 365.25 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
Oribital radius, r = 1 A.U = 1.496 × 1011 m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 15

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
Let us assume that our galaxy consists of 2.5 × 1011 stars each of one solar mass. How long will a star at a distance of 50,000ly from the galactic centre take to complete one revolution ? Take the diameter of the Milky Way to be 105 ly.
Solution:
Here, r = 50,000 ly =50,000 × 9.46 × 1015m
= 4.73 × 1020m.
M = 2.5 × 1011 solar, mass = 2.5 × 1011 × (2 × 1030) kg
= 5.0 × 1041 kg
We know that, M = [latex]\frac{4 \pi^2 r^3}{\mathrm{GT}^2}[/latex]
or T = [latex]\left(\frac{4 \pi^2 r^3}{G M}\right)^{1 / 2}[/latex]
= [latex]\left[\frac{4 \times(22 / 7)^2 \times\left(4.73 \times 10^{20}\right)^3}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{11}\right) \times\left(5.0 \times 10^{41}\right)}\right]^{1 / 2}[/latex]
= 1.12 × 1016S.

Question 6.
Choose the correct alternative :
a) If the zero of potential energy is at infinity, the total energy of an orbiting satellite is negative of its kinetic/potentia! energy.
b) The energy required to launch an orbiting .satellite out of earth’s gravitational influence is more/less than the energy required to project a stationary object at the same height (as the satellite) out of earth’s influence.
Solution:
a) Kinetic energy
b) Less.

Question 7.
Does the escape speed of a body from the earth depend on (a) the mass of the body, (b) the Ideation from where it is projected, (c) the direction of projection, (d) the height of the location from where the body is launched ?
Solution:
The escape velocity is independent of mass of the body and the direction of projection it depends upon the gravitational potential at the point from where the body is launched. Since this potential depends slightly on the latitude and height of the point, therefore, the escape velocity depends slightly on these factors.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
A comet orbits the sun in a highly elliptical orbit. Does the comet have a constant (a) linear speed, (b) angular speed, (c) angular momentum, (d) kinetic energy, (e) potential energy, (f) total energy throughout its orbit ? Neglect any mass loss of the comet when it comes very close to the Sun.
Solution:
A comet while going on elliptical orbit around the sun has constant angular momentum and total energy at all locations but other quantities vary with locations.

Question 9.
Which of the following symptoms is likely to afflict an astronaut in space
(a) swollen feet,
(b) swollen face,
(c) headache,
(d) orientational problem.
Solution:
a) We know that the legs carry the weight of the body in the normal position due to gravity pull. The astronaut in space is in weightless state. Hence, swollen feet may not affect his working.

b) In the conditions of weightless, the face of the astronaut is expected to get more supply. Due to it, the astronaut may develop swollen face. As eyes, ears, nose, mouth etc. are all embedded in the face, hence, swollen face may affect to great extent the seeing / hearing / eating / smelling capabilities of the astronaut in space.

c) Headache is due to metal strain it will persist whether a person is an astronaut in space or he is on earth it means headache will have the same effect on the astronaut in space as on a person on earth.

d) Space also has orientation. We also have the frames of reference in space. Hence, orientational problem will affect the astronaut in space.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 10.
In the following two exercises, choose the correct answer from among the given ones : The gravitational intensity at the centre of a hemispherical shell of uniform mass density has the direction indicated by the arrow (see Fig) (i) a, (ii) b, (iii) c, (iv) 0.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 16
Solution:
We know that the gravitational potential is constant at all points upside a spherical shell. Therefore, the gravitational potential gradient at all points inside the spherical shell is zero [i.e as v is constant, [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dr}}[/latex] = 0].

Since gravitational intensity is equal to negative of the gravitational potential gradient, hence the gravitational intensity is zero at all points inside a hollow spherical shell. This indicates that the gravitational forces acting on a particle at any point inside a spherical shell, will be symmetrically placed. Therefore if we remove the upper hemispherical shell, the net gravitational forces acting on the particle at the centre Q or at some other point P will be acting downwards which will also be the direction of gravitational intensity it is so because, the gravitational intensity at a point is the gravitational force per unit mass at that point. Hence the gravitational intensity at the centre Q will be along c, i.e., option (iii) is correct.

Question 11.
For the above problem, the direction of the gravitational intensity at an arbitrary point P is indicated by the arrow (i) d, (ii) e, (iii) f, (iv) g. .
Solution:
As per explanation given in the answer of Q. 10, the direction of gravitational intensity at P will be along e i.e., option (ii) is correct.

Question 12.
A rocket is fired from the earth towards the sun. At what distance from the earth’s centre is the gravitational force on the rocket zero ? Mass of the sun = 2 × 1030 kg, mass of the earth 6 × 1024 kg. Neglect the effect of other planets etc. (orbital radius 1.5 × 1011 m).
Solution:
Here Ms = 2 × 1030 kg ; Mc = 6 × 1024 kg ; r = 1.5 × 1011 m .
Let x be the distance of a point from the earth where gravitational forces on the rocket due to sun and earth become equal and opposite. Then distance of rocket from the sun
= (r – x). If m is the mass of rocket then
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{m}}{(\mathrm{r}-\mathrm{x})^2}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{x}^2} \text { or } \frac{(\mathrm{r}-\mathrm{x})^2}{\mathrm{x}^2}=\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 17

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 13.
How will you ‘weigh the sun1, that is estimate its mass ? The mean orbital radius of the earth around the sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
Solution:
To estimate the mass of the sun, we require, the time period of revolution T of one of its planets (say the earth). Let Ms, Me be the masses of sun and earth respectively and r be the mean orbital radius of the earth around the sun. The gravitational force acting on earth due to sum is
F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}[/latex]
Let, the earth be moving in circular orbit around the sun, with a uniform angular velocity ω, the centripetal force acting on earth is.
F1 = Me2 = Mer [latex]\frac{4 \pi^2}{T^2}[/latex]
As this centripetal force is provided by the gravitational pull of sun on earth, So
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}=\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{r} \frac{4 \pi^2}{\mathrm{~T}^2} \text { or } \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \mathrm{r}^3}{G \mathrm{~T}^2}[/latex]
Knowing r and T, mass Ms of the sun can be estimated.
In this Question, we are given, r = 1.5 × 108 km
= 1.5 × 1011 m
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
∴ Ms = [latex]\frac{4 \times(22 / 7)^2 \times\left(1.5 \times 10^{11}\right)^3}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right) \times(365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^2}[/latex]
= 2 × 1030 kg.

Question 14.
A saturn year is 29.5 times the earth year. How far is the saturn from the sun if the earth is 1.50 × 108 km away from the sun ?
Solution:
Here, Ts = 29.5 Te; Re = 1.5 × 108 km; Rs =?
Using the relation, [latex]\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{s}}^2}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{s}}^3}=\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}^2}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{e}}^3}[/latex]
or R = Re [latex]\left(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right)^{2 / 3}[/latex]
= 1.5 × 108 [latex]\left(\frac{29.5 \mathrm{~T}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right)^{2 / 3}[/latex]
= 1.43 × 109 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 15.
A body weighs 63 N on the surface of the earth. What is the gravitational force on it due to the earth at a height equal to half the radius of the earth?
Solution:
Weight of the body = mg = 63N
At height h, the value of g is given by
g’ = [latex]\frac{g R^2}{(R+h)^2}=\frac{g R^2}{(R+R / 2)^2}[/latex] = 4/9 g
Gravitational force on body at height h is
F = mg’ = m × [latex]\frac{4}{9}[/latex] g = [latex]\frac{4}{9}[/latex] mg
= [latex]\frac{4}{9}[/latex] × 63 = 28N

Question 16.
Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre of the earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface ?
Solution:
wt. of body at a depth d = mg1
= m × g [latex]\left(1-\frac{d}{R}\right)[/latex]
= 250 [latex]\left(1-\frac{R / 2}{R}\right)[/latex]
= 125 N

Question 17.
A rocket is fired vertically with a speed of 5 km s-1 from the earth’s surface. How far from the earth does the rocket go before returning to the earth ? Mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg; mean radius of the earth = 6.4 × 106 m; G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Let the rocket be fired with velocity v from the surface of earth and it reaches a height h from the surface of earth where its velocity becomes zero.
Total energy of rocket at the surface of energy
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 18
or h = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Rv}^2}{2 \mathrm{gR}-\mathrm{v}^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right) \times\left(5 \times 10^3\right)^2}{2 \times 9.8 \times\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right)-\left(5 \times 10^3\right)^2}[/latex]
= 1.6 × 106m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 18.
The escape speed of a projectile on the earth’s surface is 11.2 km s-1. A body is projected out with thrice this speed. What is the speed of the body far away from the earth ? Ignore the presence of the sun and other planets.
Solution:
Here, ve = 11.2 kms-1, velocity of projection of the body v = 3ve. Let m be the mass of the projectile and v0 be the velocity of the projectile when far away from the earth (i.e) out of gravitational field of earth) then from the law of conservation of energy
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv02 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mve2
or v0 = [latex]\sqrt{v^2-v_e^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{(3 v e)^2-v_e^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{8} v_e=\sqrt{8}[/latex] × 11.2 = 31.68 kms-1

Question 19.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 400 km above the surface. How much energy must be expended to rocket the satellite out of the earth’s gravitational influence ? Mass of the satellite = 200 kg; mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg; radius of the earth = 6.4 × 106 m; G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Total energy of orbiting satellite at a hight h.
= – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2[/latex]
= – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}+\frac{1}{2} m \frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
energy expended to rocket the satellite out of the earth’s gravitational field.
= – (total energy of orbiting satellite)
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right) \times\left(6 \times 10^{24}\right) \times 200}{2\left(6.4 \times 10^6+4 \times 10^5\right)}[/latex]
= 5.9 × 109J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 20.
Two stars each of one solar mass (= 2 × 1030< kg) are approaching each other for a head on collision. When they are a distance i09 km, their speeds are negligible. What is the speed with which they collide? The radius of each star is 104< km. Assume the stars to remain undistorted until they collide. (Use the known value of G).
Solution:
Here, mass of each star, M = 2 × 1030< kg
initial distance between two stars, r = 109<
km = 1012< m.
initial potential energy of the system = – [latex]\frac{\text { GMM }}{r}[/latex]
Total K.E. of the stars = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2< + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2<
= Mv2<
Where v is the speed of stars with which they collide. When the stars are about to collide, the distance between their centres, r1< = 2R.
∴ Final potential energy of two starts = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMM}}{2 \mathrm{R}}[/latex]
since gain in K.E. is at the cost of loss in P.E
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 19

Question 21.
Two heavy spheres each of mass 100 kg and radius 0.10 m are placed 1.0 m apart on a horizontal table. What is the gravitational force and potential at the mid point of the line joining the centres of the spheres ? Is an object placed at that point in equilibrium ? If so, is the equilibrium stable or unstable ?
Solution:
Gravitational field at the mid – point of the line joining the centres of the two spheres.
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(r / 2)^2}(-\hat{r})+\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(r / 2)^2} \hat{r}=0[/latex]
Gravitational potential at the mid point of the list joining the centres of the two spheres is
v = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{r / 2}+\left(\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{r / 2}\right)=\frac{-4 \mathrm{GM}}{r}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{-4 \times 6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 100}{1.0}[/latex] = -2.7 × 10-8< J/kg
As the effective force on the body placed at mid-point is zero, so the body is in equilibrium. If the body is displaced a little towards either mass body from its equilibrium position, it will not return back to its initial position of equilibrium. Hence, the body is in unstable equilibrium.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 22.
As you have learnt in the text, a geo-stationary satellite orbits the earth at a height of nearly 36,000 km from the surface of the earth. What is the potential due to earth’s gravity at the site of this satellite ? (Take the potential energy at infinity to be zero). Mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg, radius = 6400 km.
Solution:
Gravitational potential at height h from the surface of earth is
v = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{-6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times\left(6 \times 10^{24}\right)}{\left(6.4 \times 10^6+36 \times 10^6\right)}[/latex]
= -9.4 × 106 J/kg.

Question 23.
A star 2.5 times the mass of the sun and collapsed to a size of 12 km rotates with a speed of 1.2 rev. per second. (Extremely compact stars of this kind are known as neutron stars. Certain stellar objects called pulsars belong to this category). Will an object placed on its equator remain stuck to its surface due to gravity ? (mass of the sun = 2 × 1030< kg).
Solution:
The object will remain struck to the surface of star due to gravity, if the accerlation due to gravity is more than the centrifugal accerlation due to its rotation.
Accerlation due to gravity, g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 2.5 \times 2 \times 10^{30}}{(12000)^2}[/latex]
= 2.3 × 1012 m/s2
centrifugal accerlation = rw2
= r(2πv)2
= 12000 (2π × 1.5)2
= 1.1 × 106 ms-2
since g > rω2 , therefore the body will remain struck with the surface of star.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 24.
A spaceship is stationed on Mars. How much energy must be expended on the spaceship to launch it out of the solar system ? Mass of the space ship = 1000 kg; mass of the sun = 2 × 1030 kg; mass of mars = 6.4 × 1023< kg; radius of mars = 3395 km; radius of the orbit of mars = 2.28 × 108< km; G = 6.67 × 10-11< N m2 kg 2 .
Solution:
Let R, be the radius of the orbit of mars and R be the radius of the mars. M be the mass of the sun and M’ be the mass of mars. If m is the mass of the space ship, then potential energy of space-ship due to gravitational attraction of the sun = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]
potential energy of space – ship due to gravitational attraction of mars = – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}^1 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{R}^1}[/latex]
since K.E of space ship is zero, therefore total energy of spaceship
= [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}^1 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{R}^1}[/latex]
= – Gm [latex]\left(\frac{M}{R}+\frac{M^1}{R^1}\right)[/latex]
∴ energy required to rocket out the spaceship from the solar system = – (total energy of space ship)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 20

Question 25.
A rocket is fired ‘vertically’ from the surface of mars with a speed of 2 km s-1. If 20% of its initial energy is lost due to martian atmospheric resistance, how far will the rocket go from the surface of mars before returning to it ? Mass of mars = 6.4 × 1023< kg; radius of mars = 3395 km; G = 6.67 × 10-11< N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Let m = mass of the rocket, M = mass of the mars and
R = radius of mars. Let v be the initial velocity of rocket.
Initial K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2; Initial P.E = – [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]
Total initial energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]
since 20% of K.E is lost, only 80% is left behind to reach the height. Therefore
Total energy available = [latex]\frac{80}{100} \times \frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2
– [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] = 0.4 mv2 – [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]
If the rocket reaches the higher point which is at a height h from the surface of Mars, its
K.E. is zero and P.E. = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
using principle of conservation of energy, we have
0.4 mv2 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}=-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}[/latex]
or [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] – 0.4 v2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 21

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Let the speed of the planet at the perihelion P in Fig. be υp and the Sun- planet distance SP be rp. Relate {rp, υp} to the corresponding quantities at the aphelion {rA, υA}. Will the planet take equal times to traverse BAC and CPB ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 22
(a) An ellipse traced out by a planet around the sun. The colsest point is P and the farthest point is A. P is called the perihelion and A the aphelion. The semimajor axis (a) is half the distance AP
Answer:
The magnitude of the angular momentum at P is Lp = mp rp υp. Similarly, LA = mp rA υA. From angular momentum conservation
mp rp υp = mp rA υA
or [latex]\frac{v_p}{v_A}=\frac{r_A}{r_p}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Three equal masses of m kg each are fixed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC. (a) What is the force acting on a mass,2m placed at the centroid O of the triangle ? (b) What is the force if the mass at the vertex A is doubled ?
Take AO = BO = CO = 1 m (see Fig)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 23
Three equal masses are placed at the three vertices of the ∆ABC. A mass 2m is placed at the centroid O.
Answer:
(a) The angle between OC and the positive x- axix is 30° and so is the angle between OB and the negative x-axis. The individual forces a vector notation are
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 24
From the principle of superposition and the law of vector addition, the resultant gravitational force FR on (2m) at O is
FR = FOA + FOB + FOC
FR = 2Gm2 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] + 2Gm2 [latex]-\hat{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] cos 30° – [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] sin 30°) + 2Gm2 ([latex]\hat{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] cos 30° – [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] sin 30°) = 0
Alternatively, one expects on the basis of symmetry that the resultant force ought to be zero.

(b) By symmetry the x-component of the force cancels out. The y-component survives.
FR = 4Gm2 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] – 2Gm2 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] = 2Gm2 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]

Question 3.
Find the potential energy of a system of four particles placed at the vertices of a square of side l. Also obtain the potential at the centre of the square.
Answer:
We have four mass pairs at distance l and two diagonal pairs at distance [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]1 Hence,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 25
= [latex]\frac{2 \mathrm{Gm}}{1}\left(2+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\right)[/latex] = -5.41 [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Gm}^2}{l}[/latex]
The gravitational potential U(r) at the centre of the square (r = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] l / 2) is
U(r) = [latex]-4 \sqrt{2} \frac{\mathrm{Gm}}{\mathrm{l}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 4.
Two uniform solid spheres of equal radii R, but mass M and 4 M have a centre to centre separation 6 R, as shown in Fig. The two spheres are held fixed A projeetile of mass m is projected from the surface of the sphere of mass M directly towards the centre of the second sphere. Obtain an expression for the minimum speed v of the projectile so that it reaches the surface of the second sphere.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 26
Answer:
If ON = r, we have
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^2}=\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{\left(6 \mathrm{R}-\mathrm{r}^2\right)}[/latex]
(6R – r)2 = 4r2
6R – r = ±2r
r = 2R or – 6R.
The neutral point r = -6R does not concern us in this example. Thus ON = r = 2R.
Thereafter, the greater gravitational pull of 4M would suffice. The mechanical energy at the surface of M is
Ei = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~m} v^2-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}-\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{5 \mathrm{R}}[/latex]
The mechanical energy at N is purely potential.
EN = [latex]-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}-\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{4 \mathrm{R}}[/latex]
From the principle of conservation of mechanical energy
[latex]\frac{1}{2} v^2-\frac{G M}{R}-\frac{4 G M}{5 R}=-\frac{G M}{2 R}-\frac{G M}{R}[/latex]
υ2 = [latex]\frac{2 G M}{R}\left(\frac{4}{5}-\frac{1}{2}\right)[/latex]
υ2 = [latex]\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{GM}}{5 R}\right)^{1 / 2}[/latex]

Question 5.
The planet Mars has two moons, phobos and delmos. (i) phobos has a period 7 hours, 39 minutes and an orbital radius of 9.4 × 103 km. Calculate the mass of Mars, (ii) Assume that Earth and Mars move in circular orbits around the sun, with the Martian orbits being 1.52 times the orbital radius of the earth. What is the length of the Martain year in days ?
Answer:
(i) We employ T2 = K (RE + h)3 (where K = 4π2 / GME) with the Earth’s mass replaced by the Martian mass Mm
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 27
(ii) Once again Kepler’s third law comes to our aid,
[latex]\frac{T_M^2}{T_E^2}=\frac{R_{M S}^3}{R_{E S}^3}[/latex]
Where RMS is the Mars-Sun distance and RES is the Earth-Sun distance.
∴ TM = (1.52)3/2 × 365
= 684 days
For example. the ratio of the semi-minor to semi-major axis for our Earth is, b/a = 0.99986.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
Weighing the Earth : You are given the following data g = 9.81 ms2 RE = 6.37 x106 m the distance to the moon R = 3.4 × 108 m and the time period of the moons revolution is 27.3 days. Obtain the mass of the Earth ME in two different ways.
Answer:
(1) From g = [latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{G M_E}{R_E^2}[/latex]
ME = [latex]\frac{g R_E^2}{G}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{9.81 \times\left(6.37 \times 10^6\right)^2}{6.67 \times 10^{-11}}[/latex]
= 5.97 × 1024kg. (by Method – 1)

(2) The moon is a satellite of the Earth. From the derivation of Kepler’s third law
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 28
= 6.02 × 1024kg (by Method – 2)
Both methods yield almost the same answer the difference between them being less than 1%.

Question 7.
Express the constant k T2 = K (RE + h)2 where K = 4π2/GME of in days and kilometres. Given k = 10-13 s2 m-3. The moon is at a distance of 3.84 × 105 km from the earth. Obtain its time period of revolution in days.
Answer:
Given
k = 10-13 s2 m-3 (d = day)
= 10-13 [latex]\left[\frac{1}{(24 \times 60 \times 60)^2} d^2\right][/latex]
[latex]\left[\frac{1}{(1 / 1000)^3 \mathrm{~km}^3}\right][/latex] = 1.33 × 10-14 d2 km-3
Using T2 = K (RE + h)3 (where k = 4π2/ GME) and the given value of k the time period of the moon is
T2 = (1.33 × 10-14) (3.84 × 105)3
T = 27.3 d

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
A 400 kg satellite is in a circular orbit of radius 2RE about the Earth. How much energy is required to transfer it to a circular orbit of radius 4RE? What are the changes in the kinetic and potential energies ?
Answer:
Initially,
E1 = [latex][/latex]
While finally
Ef = [latex][/latex]
The change in the total energy is
∆E = Ef – Ei
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}_E \mathrm{~m}}{8 R_E}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}^2}\right) \frac{\mathrm{mR} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{8}[/latex]
∆E = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{gm} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{8}=\frac{9.81 \times 400 \times 6.37 \times 10^6}{8}[/latex]
= 3.13 × 109J
The kinetic enegy is reduced and it mimics ∆E, namely, ∆K = Kf – Ki = -3.13 × 109 J.
The change in potential energy is twice the change in the total energy, namely
∆V = Vf – Vi= -6.25 × 109 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Give two examples of periodic motion which are not oscillatory.
Answer:

  1. The motion of planets around the sun.
  2. The motion of an electron round the nucleus.

Question 2.
The displacement in S.H.M. is given by y = a sin (20t + 4). What is the displacement when it is increased by 2π/ω ?
Answer:
The displacement in S.H.M. is y = a sin (20t + 4)
The time period T = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}[/latex] is increased, the displacement of the particle remains the same.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 3.
A girl is swinging seated in a swing. What is the effect on the frequency of oscillation if she stands ?
Answer:
Frequency (n) = [latex]\frac{1}{2 \pi} \sqrt{\frac{g}{l}}[/latex], n ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{l}}[/latex]
A girl swinging in standing position location of centre of mass shifts upwards l decreases, frequency of oscillation increases.

Question 4.
The bob of a simple pendulum is a hollow sphere filled with water. How will the period of oscillation change, if the water begins to drain out of the hollow sphere ?
Answer:
The period of the pendulum is same, when the bob is hollow (or) completely filled with water. As water flows out from the bob, the centre of gravity of the bob lowered. The pendulum length increases. Hence time period also increases. When the bob becomes empty, again centre of gravity shifts upwards. The pendulum length decreases. The time period also decreases.

Question 5.
The bob of a simple pendulum is made of wood. What will be the effect on the time period if the wooden bob is replaced by an identical bob of aluminum ?
Answer:
Time period (T) = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}[/latex], Time period is independent of mass of the bob.
Hence wooden bob is replaced by an identical aluminium bob, Time period remains constant.

Question 6.
Will a pendulum clock gain or lose time when taken to the top of a mountain.?
Answer:
T ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}[/latex], At the mountain top, the value of g decreases, hence time period increases i.e. the pendulum will take longer time to complete one vibration. Hence pendulum clock will loose time on the mountain top.

Question 7.
A pendulum dock gives correct time at the equator. Will it gain or lose time if it is taken to the poles ? If so, why ?
Answer:
Time period (T) = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}[/latex]
g value at poles is greater than at equator.
If it is taken to the poles g value increases, time period decreases.
So pendulum clock gains time.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 8.
What fraction of the total energy is K.E when the displacement is one half of a amplitude of a particle executing S.H.M.
Answer:
Total energy (E) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mω2 A2
Given y = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}[/latex], Kinetic energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2(A2 – y2) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mω2[latex]\left(A^2-\frac{A^2}{4}\right)[/latex] = [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
K.E = [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × E
∴ [latex]\frac{K \cdot E}{E}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex]

Question 9.
What happens to the energy of a simple harmonic oscillator if its amplitude is doubled ?
Answer:
Total energy (E) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
Given Amplitude A is doubled
E’ = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2(2A)2
E’ = 4 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
E’ = 4E
∴ Energy becomes four times.

Question 10.
Can a simple pendulum be used in an artificial satellite? (T.S. Mar. 16)
Answer:
No, in an artificial satellite acceleration due to gravity is zero. Hence we cannot use simple pendulum in an artificial satellite.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion. Give two examples.
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion : “A body is said to be in simple harmonic motion, if it moves to and fro along a straight line, about its mean position such that, at any point its acceleration is proportional to its displacement but opposite in direction and is directed always towards the mean position”.
w ∝ -x

If a is the acceleration of the body at any given displacement x from the mean position, the time for the body to be in S.H.M.
Displacement of a particle in S.H.M is given by
x(t) = A cos (ωt + ϕ)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 1

Example:

  1. Motion of a simple pendulum.
  2. Motion of mass attached to a spring.
  3. Motion of atoms in solids.
  4. Cork floating on water.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Present graphically the variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time for a particle in S.H.M.
Answer:
Let us put ϕ = 0 and write the expressions for x(t),
υ(t) and a(t).
x(t) = A cos ωt. υ(t) = -Aωsinωt
a(t) = -ω2A cos ωt. The corresponding plots are shown in figure. All quantities varies sinusoidally with time.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 2
x(t) varies between – A to A; υ(t) varies from -ωA to ωA and a(t) varies from – ω2A to ω2A with respect to displacement plot, velocity plot has a phase difference of [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex] and acceleration plot has a phase difference of π.

Question 3.
What is phase ? Discuss the phase relations between displacement, velocity and acceleration in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Phase : The phase of a particle executing S.H.M. at any instant is defined as its state (or) condition as regards to its position and direction of motion at that instant.

  1. Displacement : x = A cos (ωt – ϕ), (ωt – ϕ) is called phase and ϕ is epoch.
  2. Velocity : V = -Aω sin (ωt – ϕ), Here also (ωt – ϕ) is phase angle
  3. Acceleration : a = -ω2A cos (ωt – ϕ), Here also (ωt – ϕ) is phase angle.

Phase difference between displacement and velocity = [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex]
Phase difference between velocity and acceleration = [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex]
Phase difference between displacement and acceleration = π.

Question 4.
Obtain an equation for the frequency of oscillation of spring of force constant k to which a mass m is attached. Answer:
Let us consider a spring suspended vertically from a rigid support and loaded with a mass m. If it is now pulled down and released, it executes vertical oscillations about mean position.
Restoring force is directly proportional to the displacement, but oppositely directed
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 4
F ∝ -y
F = -ky —–> (1)
Where k is force constant
Ma = -ky (∴ F = Ma)
a = [latex]-\left(\frac{K}{M}\right) y[/latex] —-> (2)
Since K and M are constant. We can write a ∝ -y
ie Acceleration is directly proportional to the displacement but oppositely directed. Hence oscillations of a loaded spring is S.H.M.
Comparing eq. (2) with a = -ω2y
ω2 = [latex]\frac{K}{M}[/latex] ; ω = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{M}}}[/latex]
T = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}[/latex] ; T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{K}}}[/latex]
Frequency of oscillation (n) = [latex]\frac{1}{2 \pi} \sqrt{\frac{K}{M}}[/latex] —> (3)

Question 5.
Derive expressions for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Kinetic energy of simple harmonic oscillator : The velocity of a particle in S.H.M. is given by
v = [latex]\omega \sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex] ∴ Kinetic energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mω2(A2 – y2)
When y = 0, (K.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mω2A2 (Mean position)
When y = A, (K.E)Min = 0 (Extreme position)
K.E is maximum at mean position and minimum at extreme position.

Potential energy of simple harmonic oscillator: When the displacement of a particle executing simple Harmonic oscillations increases, the restoring force also increases. The restoring force is in the opposite direction to the displacement. Therefore work is done in moving through the displacement, against restoring force. If F is the restoring force at the displacement y.
The average force against which work is done = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{O}+\mathrm{F}}{2}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{F}{2}[/latex]

∴ Workdone on the particle for the displacement (y) = Average force × displacement F
i.e. w = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{F}}{2}[/latex] × y
w = [latex]\frac{\max y}{2}[/latex] —- (1) (∵ F = ma)
But acceleration of a particle in S.H.M. is given by
a = ω2y —– (2)
Using eq’s (1) and (2). we get
The work done (w) = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 y^2[/latex] mw2y2
This work done is stored in the form of P.E.
∴ P.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 y^2[/latex] —– (3)
If y = 0, (P.E)Min = 0 (At mean position)
If y = A, (P.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex] (At extreme position).
∴ P.E. is maximum at extreme position and minimum at mean position.

Question 6.
How does the energy of a simple pendulum vary as it moves from one extreme position to the other during its oscillations?
Answer:
The total energy associated with a particle executing S.H.M. at any point is the sum of potential energy and kinetic energy at that point.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 5
Total energy (E) = K.E + P.E
K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2\left(A^2-y^2\right)[/latex]
P.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 y^2[/latex]
T.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2(A2 – y2) + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2y2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
At mean position y = 0, P.E = 0
and (K.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex]
∴ T.E. = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex]
At extreme position y = A, K.E = 0 and P.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex]
∴ (P.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 A^2[/latex]
From mean position to extreme position K.E. is to be converted into P.E.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 7.
Derive the expressions for displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle executes S.H.M.
Answer:
Consider a particle P moves on the circumference of a circle of radius A with uniform angular velocity ω. Let PN be the perpendicular drawn to the diameter yy’ from P.
As P moves on the circumference of the circle, N moves on the diameter yy’ to and fro about the centre O.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 6
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 7

Velocity : The velocity of a partcile executing SHM is given by
v = [latex]\frac{d y}{d t}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] (A sin ωt)
= Aω cos ωt = Aω[latex]\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \omega t}[/latex]
v = [latex]A \omega \sqrt{1-\left(\frac{y}{A}\right)^2}[/latex] (∵ sin ωt = [latex]\frac{y}{A}[/latex])
v = ω[latex]\omega \sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex] —- (2)

Acceleration : As the rate of change of velocity gives acceleration of the particle executing S.H.M is given by
a = [latex]\frac{d v}{d t}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex](Aω cos ωt) = -Aω2 sin ωt
∴ a = -ω2y —- (3)

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion. Show that the motion of (point) projection of a particle performing uniform circular motion, on any diameter, is simple harmonic. (AP – Mar. ‘18; TS – Mar. ‘16)
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion : A body is said to be in simple harmonic motion, if it moves to and fro along a straight line, about its mean position such that, at any point its acceleration is proportional to its displacement but opposite in direction and directed always towards the mean position.

Show that the projection of uniform circular motion on any diameter is simple harmonic : Consider a particle P moving on the circumference of a circle of radius A with uniform angular velocity ω. Let O be the centre of the circle. XX’ and YY’ are two mutually perpendicular diameters of the circle as shown in the figure. Let PN be drawn perpendicular to the diameter YY’ from P. As P moves on the circumference of the circle, N moves on the diameter YY’ to and fro about the centre O. Let us consider the position of N at any time t, after leaving the point ‘O’, during its motion. The corresponding angular displacement of the particle P is AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 8
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 33
Hence acceleration is directly proportional to the displacement and opposite direction. Hence motion of N is simple harmonic.

Question 2.
Show that the motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic and hence derive an equation for its time period. What is seconds pendulum ? (TS – Mar. ’18, ’17, ’15, ’14, ’13; AP – Mar. ’17, ’16, ’15, ’14, ’13)
Answer:

  1. Consider simple pendulum, a small bob of mass m tied to an inextensible mass less string of length L and other end of the string is fixed from a rigid support.
  2. Once the bob is slightly displaced and released, it begins to oscillate about mean position.
  3. Let θ be the angular displacement and T be the tension in the string.
  4. The forces acting on the bob are (a) tension T along the string (b) weight mg acts vertically downwards.
  5. The force mg can be resolved into two components (1) mg cos θ along the PA and (2) mg sin θ acts along PB.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 34
  6. From figure at point P,
    T = mg cos θ —– (1)
  7. The force mg sin θ will provide the restoring torque, which tends to bring the bob back to its mean position O.
  8. The restoring torque is given by
    [latex]\tau[/latex] = Restoring force × ⊥lar distance
    [latex]\tau[/latex] = -mg sin θ × L —– (2)
    Here negative sign shows that the torque acts to reduce θ.
    Then sin θ is replaced by θ i.e., sin θ ≈ θ
    x = -mg L θ —– (3) (∵ sin θ = θ – [latex]\frac{\theta^3}{3 !}[/latex] + [latex]\frac{\theta^3}{5 !}[/latex] …..)
  9. From equation (3), we note that [latex]\tau[/latex] ∝ θ. and This [latex]\tau[/latex] will bring the bob back towards its equilibrium position.
    So, if the bob is left free, it will execute angular simple harmonic motion.
    Comparing equation (3), with the equation [latex]\tau[/latex] = -kθ, we have Spring factor, k = mgL.
  10. Here inertia factor = Moment of inertia of the bob about the point of suspension = mL2
  11. In S.H.M, Time period (T) = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\text { Inertia factor }}{\text { Spring factor }}}[/latex]
    T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m L^2}{m g L}}[/latex]
    T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}[/latex] — (4)
    Seconds pendulum : A pendulum whose time period is 2 seconds is called seconds pendulum.
    T = 2 seconds.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 3.
Derive the equation for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator and show that the total energy of a particle in simple harmonic motion is constant at any point on its path.
Answer:
Kinetic energy : The velocity of a particle in S.H.M is given by v = ω[latex]\sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex]
∴ Kinetic energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m \omega^2\left(A^2-y^2\right)[/latex] —— (1)
We know that y = A sin ωt
K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2[1 – sin2ωt) —— (2)
When y = 0, (K.E)Max = -[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2 (Mean position)
When y = A, (K.E)Min = 0 (At extreme position)
∴ K.E is maximum at mean position and minimum at extreme position.

Potential energy : When the displacement of a particle executing simple harmonic oscillations increase, the restoring force also increases. The restoring force is in the opposite direction to the displacement. Therefore work is done in moving through the displacement, against restoring force. If F is restoring force at the displacement y.
The average force against which work is done = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{O}+\mathrm{F}}{2}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{F}{2}[/latex]

∴ Workdone on the particle for the displacement (y) = Average force × displacement.
i.e., w = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × y
w = [latex]\frac{\max y}{2}[/latex] —– (3) (∵ F = ma)
But acceleration of a particle in S.H.M is given by
a = -ω2y —– (4)
Using equations (3) and (4), we get
The work done (W) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2y2
This work done is stored in the form of P.E
∴ P.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2y2 —– (5)
∴ P.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2 sin2ωt —– (6) (∵ y = A sin ωt)
If y = 0, (P.E)Min = 0 (At mean position)
If y = A, (P.E)Max = – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2 (At extreme position)
∴ P.E. is maximum at extreme position and minimum at mean position.

Total energy (E) : The total energy associated with a particle executing S.H.M at any point is the sum of RE and K.E at that point.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 35
Total energy (E) = K.E + P.E
K.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2y2
∴ T.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2 (A2 – y2) + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2y2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
At mean position y = 0, RE = 0, (KE)Max = – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
∴ T.E = K.E + P.E
T.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2 + 0 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
At extreme position, y = A, K.E = 0 and,
(P.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2.
∴ T.E = K.E + P.E
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 9
T.E. = O + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2
From mean position to extreme position K.E is to be converted into RE.

Problems

Question 1.
The bob of a pendulum is made of a hollow brass sphere. What happens to the time period of the pendulum, if the bob is filled with water completely ? Why?
Solution:
Time period (T) = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{g}}[/latex]
The period of the pendulum is same. When the bob is hollow (or) completely filled with water. As water flows out from the bob, the centre of gravity of the bob lowers.

The pendulum length increases. Hence time period also increases. When the bob becomes empty, again centre of gravity shifts upwards. The pendulum length decreases. The time period also decreases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Two identical springs of force constant “k” are joined one at the end of the other (in series). Find the effective force constant of the combination.
Solution:
k1 = k2 = k
If two springs are connected in series
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 10

Question 3.
What are the physical quantities having maximum value at the mean position in SHM ?
Solution:

  1. Velocity, Vmax = Aω
  2. Kinetic energy, (K.E)Max = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mω2A2.

Question 4.
A particle executes SHM such that, the maximum velocity during the oscillation is numerically equal to half the maximum acceleration. What is the time period ?
Solution:
Given VMax = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]aMax
Aω = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]ω2
ω = 2
T = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{2}[/latex] = π sec.

Question 5.
A mass of 2 kg attached to a spring of force constant 260 Nm-1 makes 100 oscillations. What is the time taken ?
Solution:
m = 2 kg, k = 260 N/m
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}[/latex] = 2 × 3.14[latex]\sqrt{\frac{2}{260}}[/latex] = 0.5508sec.
∴ Time for 100 oscillations = 100 × 0.5508
= 55.08 sec.

Question 6.
A simple pendulum in a stationery lift has time period T. What would be the effect on the time period when the lift

(i) moves up with uniform velocity
(ii) moves down with uniform velocity
(iii) moves up with uniform acceleration a
(iv) moves down with uniform acceleration ‘a’
(v) begins to fall freely under gravity ?

Solution:

i) When the lift moves up with uniform velocity
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{g}}[/latex]
No change in time period.

ii) When the lift moves down with uniform velocity. No change in the time period.

iii) When the lift moves up with acceleration.
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{g+a}}[/latex]
Time period decreases.

iv) When the lift moves down with acceleration.
T = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{1}{g-a}}[/latex]
Time period increases.

v) Lift falls freely, a = g
T = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{l}{g-g}}[/latex] = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{1}{0}}[/latex] = ∝
Time period becomes infinity.

Question 7.
A particle executing SHM has amplitude of 4 cm and its acceleration at a distance of 1 cm from the mean position is 3 cm s-2. What will is velocity be when it is at a distance of 2 cm from its mean position ?
Solution:
A = 4 cm, x1 = 1 cm, a = 3 cm/s2
a = ω2x1
3 = ω2 × 1
ω = [latex]\sqrt{3}[/latex]
Velocity v = ω[latex]\sqrt{A^2-x_2^2}[/latex]
(∵ x2 = 2 cm)
v = [latex]\sqrt{3} \sqrt{4^2-2^2}[/latex]
v = [latex]\sqrt{3} \times \sqrt{12}[/latex]
v = [latex]\sqrt{36}[/latex] = 6 cm/s.

Question 8.
A simple harmonic oscillator has a time period of 2s. What will be the change in the phase 0.25 s after leaving the mean position ?
Solution:
T = 2 sec
t = 0.25 sec
sin ωt = sin[latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\right) t[/latex]
ϕ = ωt = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{T}[/latex] × t
= [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{2}[/latex] × 0.25
ϕ = [latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 9.
A body describes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 5 cm and a period of 0.2 s. find the acceleration and velocity of the body when the displacement is
(a) 5 cm.
(b) 3 cm.
(c) 0 cm.
Solution:
A = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
T = 0.2 sec.

i) y = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
ω = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{T}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{0.2}[/latex] = 10π
Acceleration (a) = -ω22y = -(10π)2 × 5 × 10-2
a = -5π2 m/s2
Velocity (v) = ω[latex]\sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex]
= 10π[latex]\sqrt{\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2-\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}[/latex]

ii) y = 3 cm = 3 × 10-2 m
Acceleration (a) = -ω2y = -(10π)2 × 3 × 10-2
= -3π2 m/s2
Velocity (v) = ω[latex]\sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex]
= 10π[latex]\sqrt{\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2-\left(3 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}[/latex]
= 10π[latex]\sqrt{25-9}[/latex] × 10-2
v = 0.4π m/s.

iii) y = 0 cm
a = -ω2y = -(10π)2 × 0
Velocity (v) = ω[latex]\sqrt{A^2-y^2}[/latex]
= 10π[latex]\sqrt{\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2-0}[/latex]
= 0.5π m/s

Question 10.
The mass and radius of a planet are double that of the earth. If the time period of a simple pendulum on the earth is T, find the time period on the planet.
Solution:
g = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}[/latex]
g ∝ [latex]\frac{M}{R^2}[/latex]
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 12

Question 11.
Calculate the change in the length of a simple pendulum of length 1 m, when its period of oscillation changes from 2 s to 1.5 s. (T.S. Mar. ’18)
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 13

Question 12.
A freely falling body takes 2 seconds to reach the ground on a plane, when it is dropped from a height of 8 m. If the period of a simple pendulum is seconds on the planet, calculate the length of the pendulum.
Solution:
u = 0, t = 2 sec, s = h = 8 m
s = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]at
s = 0 × t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × g × 22
g = 4m/s2
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{g}}[/latex]
π = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{4}}[/latex]
l = 1 m = 100 cm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 13.
The period of a simple pendulum is found to increase by 50% when the length of the pendulum is increased by 0.6 m. Calculate the initial length and the initial period of oscillation at a place where g = 9.8 m s-2.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 14

Question 14.
A clock regulated by a second’s pendulum keeps correct time. During summer the length of the pendulum increases to 1.02 m. How much will the clock gain or lose in one day ?
Solution:
T = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{1}{g}}[/latex]
T ∝ [latex]\sqrt{l}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{d T}{T}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{d} l}{l}[/latex]
T = 2 sec, l = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\pi^2}[/latex] = 0.9927
dl = 1.02 – 0.9927 = 0.0273
[latex]\frac{d T}{2}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{0.0273}{0.9927}\right)[/latex]
dT = [latex]\frac{0.0273}{0.9927}[/latex]
No. of oscillations performed per day by seconds pendulum = [latex]\frac{\text { One day }}{2 \text { Sec. }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{86,400}{2}[/latex] = 43,200.

The gain (or) loss of time per day = No. of oscillations in one day to the change in time for one oscillation = 43,200 × [latex]\frac{0.0273}{0.9927}[/latex]
= 1180 sec.

Question 15.
The time period of a body suspended from a spring is T. What will be the new time period if the spring is cut into two equal parts and the mass is suspended
(i) from one part
(ii) simultaneously from both the parts ?
Answer:
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}[/latex]
i) Spring is cut into two parts, k’ = 2k
T’ = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{k^{\prime}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{T}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]
ii) When the mass is suspended from both the parts
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{2 k+2 k}}[/latex] = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{4 k}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{T}{2}[/latex]

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Which of the following examples represent periodic motion ?
a) A swimmer completing one (return) trip from one bank of a river to the other and back. .
b) A freely suspended bar magnet displaced from its N – S direction and released.
c) A hydrogen molecule rotating about its centre of mass.
d) An arrow released from a bow.
Solution:
a) It is not a periodic motion. Though the motion of a swimmer is to and fro but will not have a definite period.
b) It is a periodic motion because a freely suspended magnet if once displaced from N-S direction and let it go, it oscillation about this position. Hence it is simple harmonic motion also.
c) It is also a periodic motion.
d) It is not a periodic motion.

Question 2.
Which of the following examples represent (nearly) simple harmonic motion and which represent periodic but not simple harmonic motion ?
a) The rotation of earth about its axis.
b) Motion of an oscillating mercury column in a U-tube.
c) Motion of a ball bearing inside a smooth curved bowl, when released from a point slightly above the lower most point.
d) General vibrations of a polyatomic molecule about its equilibrium position.
Solution:
a) It is periodic but not SHM because it is not to and fro motion about a fixed point.
b) It is SHM
c) It is SHM
d) It is a periodic but not SHM. A polyatomic gas molecule has a number of natural frequencies and its general motion is the resultant of S.H.M’s of a number of different frequencies. The resultant motion is periodic but not SHM.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 3.
Fig. depicts four x-t plots for linear motion of a particle. Which of the plots represent periodic motion ? What is the period of motion (in case of periodic motion)?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 15
Solution:
a) Does not represent periodic motion, as the motion neither repeats nor comes to mean position.
b) Represents periodic motion with period equal to 2s.
c) Does not represent periodic motion, because it is not identically repeated.
d) Represents periodic motion with periodic equal to 2s.

Question 4.
Which of the following functions of time represent
(a) simple harmonic, (b) periodic but not simple harmonic, and (c) non-periodic motion ? Give period for each case of periodic motion (ω is any positive constant)
a) sin ωt – cos ωt
b) sin3 ωt
c) 3 cos (π/4 – 2ωt)
d) cos ωt + cos 3ωt + cos 5 ωt
e) exp (-ω2t2)
f) 1 + ωt + ω2t2.
Solution:
The function will represent a periodic motion, if it is identically repeated after a fixed interval of time and will represent SHM. If it can be written uniquely in the form of a
cos [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}+\phi\right)[/latex] or a
sin [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}+\phi\right)[/latex], where T is the time period.

a) sin ωt – cos ωt
= [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]([latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]sin ωt – [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]cos ωt)
= [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex](sin ωt cos [latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex] – cos ωt sin [latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex])
= [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex](ωt[latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex])
It is a S.H.M and its period is 2π/ω.

b) sin3 ωt = [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex](3sin ωt – sin 3ωt)
Here each term sin ωt and sin 3ωt individually represents S.H.M. But (ii) which is the out come of the super position of two S.H.Ms will only be periodic but not S.H.M. its time period is 2π/ω.
(∵ cos (-θ) = cos θ).

c) 3 cos [latex]\left(\frac{\pi}{4}-2 \omega t\right)[/latex] = 3 cos [latex]\left(2 \omega t-\frac{\pi}{4}\right)[/latex]
Clearly it represents S.H.M. and its time period is 2π/2ω.

d) cos ωt + cos 3ωt + cos 5ωt it represents the periodic but not S.H.M its time period is 2π/ω.

e) [latex]\mathrm{e}^{-\omega^2 t^2}[/latex] it is an exponential function which never repeats itself. Therefore it represents non-periodic motion.

f) 1 + ωt + ω2t2 also represents non periodic motion.

Question 5.
A particle is in linear simple harmonic motion between two points, A and B, 10 cm apart. Take the direction from A to B as the positive direction and give the signs of velocity, acceleration and force on the particle when it is
a) at the end A
b) at end B
c) at the mid-point of AB going towards A
d) at 2 cm away from B going towards A
e) at 3 cm away from A going towards B and
f) at 4 cm away from B going towards A.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 16
Refer figure here A and B represent the two extreme positions of a S.H.M. For velocity, the direction from A to B is taken as positive for acceleration and the force, the direction is taken positive if directed along AP and negative if directed along BP.
a) At the end A, the artice executing S.H.M is momentarily at rest being its extreme position of motion, hence its velocity is zero, acceleration is +ve because directed along AP. Force is also +ve since the force is directed towards AP i.e + ve direction.
b) At the end B, velocity is zero. Here acceleration and force are negative as they are directed along BP i.e. along negative direction.
c) At the mid point AB going towards A, the particle is at its mean position P, with a tendency to move along PA i.e. -ve direction. Hence velocity is -ve both acceleration and force are zero.
d) At 2 cm away from B going towards A, the particle is at Q, with a tendency to move along QP, which is a negative direction there velocity, acceleration and force are all -ve.
e) At 3 cm away from A going towards B, the particle is at R with a tendency to move along RP, which is positive direction, there, velocity, acceleration and force are all +ve.
f) At 4 cm away from A going towards A, the particle is at S, with a tendency to move along SA which is negative direction for velocity. Therefore velocity is negative but acceleration is directed towards mean position i.e., along SP, hence +ve. Similarly force is also +ve.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 6.
Which of the following relationships between the acceleration a and the displacement x of a particle involve simple harmonic motion ?
a) a = 0.7x
b) a = -200x2
c) a = -10x
d) a = 100x3
Solution:
In S.H.M acceleration a is related to displacement by the related of the form a = -kx which is for relation (c).

Question 7.
The motion of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is described by the displacement function.
x(t) = A cos (ωt + ϕ).
If the initial (t = 0) position of the particle is 1 cm and its initial velocity is ω cm/s, what are its amplitude and initial phase angle ? The angular frequency of the particle is πs-1. If instead of the cosine function, we choose the sine function to describe the SHM : x = B sin (ωt + α), what are the amplitude and initial phase of the particle with the above initial conditions.
Solution:
Here, at t = 0, x = 1 cm and v = ω cm s-1, ϕ = ?; ω = πs-1
Given x = A cos (ωt + ϕ)
1 = A cos (π × 0 + ϕ) or
= A cos ϕ —– (i)
Velocity, v = [latex]\frac{d x}{d t}[/latex] = – Aω(sin ωt + ϕ)
∴ ω = -Aω sin (π × 0 + ϕ) or 1 = – A sin ϕ
or A sin ϕ = -1 —— (ii)
Squaring and adding (i) and (ii)
A2(cos2 ϕ + sin2 ϕ) = 1 + 1 = 2 or A2 = 2 or A = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] cm
Dividing (ii) by (i), we get
tan ϕ = -1 or ϕ = [latex]\frac{3 \pi}{4}[/latex] or [latex]\frac{7 \pi}{4}[/latex]
For, x = B sin (ωt + α) —— (iii)
At t = 0, x = 1, so,
1 = B sin (ω × 0 + α) = B sin α —– (iv)
Differentiating (iii), w.r.t, t we have dx
velocity, v = [latex]\frac{d x}{d t}[/latex] = Bω cos (ωt + α)
Applying initial conditions i.e. at t = 0, v = ω
ω = Bωcos (π × 0 + α)
or 1 = B cos α —– (v)
Squaring and adding (iv) and (v) we get
B2sin2α + B2 cos2 α = 12 + 12 = 2 or B2 = 2 or B = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] cm
Dividing (iv) by (v), we have
[latex]\frac{B \sin \alpha}{B \cos \alpha}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{1}[/latex] or tan α = 1 or α = [latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex] or [latex]\frac{5 \pi}{4}[/latex].

Question 8.
A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The length of the scale is 20 cm. A body suspended from this balance, when displaced and released, oscillates with a period of 0.6 s. What is the weight of the body ?
Solution:
Here. m = 50 kg, max. extension.
y = 20 – 0 = 20 cm = 0.2 m; T = 0.65
Max. Force, F = mg = 5 × 9.8 N
K = [latex]\frac{F}{y}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{50 \times 9.8}{0.2}[/latex] = 2450 Nm-1
As T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}[/latex]
m = [latex]\frac{T^2 k}{4 \pi^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(0.6)^2 \times 2450}{4 \times(3.14)^2}[/latex]
= 22.36 kg
∴ Weight of body = mg = 22.36 × 9.8
= 219.1 N
= 22.36 kgf

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 9.
A spring having with a spring constant 1200 Nm-1 is mounted on a horizontal table as shown in fig. A mass of 3 kg is attached to the free end of the spring. The mass is then pulled sideways to a distance of 2.0 cm and released.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 17
Determine
(i) the frequency of oscillations,
(ii) maximum acceleration of the mass, and
(iii) the maximum speed of the mass.
Solution:
Here, k = 1200 Nm-1, m = 3.0 kg, a = 2.0 cm = 0.02 m
a)
Frequency,
υ = [latex]\frac{1}{T}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1}{2 \pi} \sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2 \times 3.14} \sqrt{\frac{1200}{3}}[/latex]
= 3.2s-1

b) Acceleration A = ω2y = [latex]\frac{k}{m}[/latex]y
Acceleration will be maximum when y is maximum i.e. y = a
Max. acceleration, Amax = [latex]\frac{k_a}{m}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1200 \times 0.02}{3}[/latex]
= 8 ms-2

c) Max. speed of the mass will be when it is passing through the mean position, which is given by
Vmax = aω = a[latex]\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}[/latex]
= 0.02 × [latex]\sqrt{\frac{1200}{3}}[/latex] = 0.4 ms-1

Question 10.
In exercise, let us take the position of mass when the spring is unstreched as x = 0, and the direction from left to right as the positive direction of x-axis. Give x as a function of time t for the oscillating mass if at the moment we start the stopwatch (t = 0), the mass is
a) at the mean position
b) at the maximum stretched position and
c) at the maximum compressed position
In what way do these functions for SHM differ from each other, in frequency, in amplitude or the initial phase ?
Solution:
Here, a = 2.0 cm; ω = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}[/latex] = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{1200}{3}}[/latex] = 20s-1

a) As time is noted from the mean position, hence using
x = a sin ωt, we have x = 2 sin 20t

b) At maximum stretched position, the body is the extreme right position, with an initial phase of [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex] rad. Then
x = a sin [latex]\left(\omega t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)[/latex]
= a cos ωt = 2 cos 20t

c) At maximum compressed position, the body is at the extreme left position, with an initial phase of [latex]\frac{3 \pi}{2}[/latex] rad.
Then x = a sin (ωt + [latex]\frac{3 \pi}{2}[/latex])
= -a cos ωt
= -2 cos 20t

Question 11.
Figures correspond to two circular motions. The radius of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial position, and the sense of revolution (i.e. clockwise or anti-clockwise) are indicated on each figure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 18
Obtain the corresponding simple ‘ harmonic motions of the x-projection of the radius vector of the revolving particle P, in each case.
Solution:
In Fig. (a) T = 2s ; a = 3 cm
At t = 0, OP makes an angle [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex] with X-axis
i.e., ϕ = [latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex] radian.
While moving clockwise, here ϕ = +[latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex]. Thus the X-projection of OP at time t will give us the equation of S.H.M. given by
x = a cos [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi t}{T}+\phi\right)[/latex]
= 3cos [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi t}{2}+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)[/latex] or x = -3
sin πt (x is in cm)
In Fig. (b) T = 4s ; a = 2m
At t = 0, OP makes an angle π with the positive direction of X-axis i.e., ϕ = π. While moving anticlockwise, here ϕ = +π.
Thus the X-projection of OP at time t will give us the equation of S.H.M. as
x = a cos [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi t}{T}+\phi\right)[/latex]
= 2 cos [latex]\left(\frac{2 \pi t}{4}+\pi\right)[/latex]
= -2 cos [latex]\left(\frac{\pi}{2} t\right)[/latex] (x is in m)

Question 12.
Plot the corresponding reference circle for each of the following simple harmonic motions. Indicate the initial (t = 0) position of the particle, the radius of the circle, and the angular speed of the rotating particle. For simplicity, the sense of rotation may be fixed to be anticlockwise in every case : (x is in cm and t is in s).
a) x = -2 sin (3t + π/3)
b) x = cos (π/6 – t)
c) x = 3 sin (2πt + π/4)
d) x = 2 cos πt.
Solution:
If we express each function of the form
x = a cos (cot + ϕ) —— (i)
Where ϕ is the initial phase i.e., ϕ represents the angle which the initial radius vector of the particle makes with the -l-ve direction of X-axis.

a) x = -2 sin (3t + [latex]\frac{\pi}{3}[/latex]) = 2 cos ([latex]\frac{\pi}{2}[/latex] + 3t + [latex]\frac{\pi}{3}[/latex])
or x = 2 cos (3t + [latex]\frac{5 \pi}{6}[/latex])
Comparing it with equation (i), we note
that a = 2, ω = 3 and ϕ = [latex]\frac{5 \pi}{6}[/latex]
Hence, the reference circle will be shown in Fig. (a).

b) x = cos[latex]\left(\frac{\pi}{6}-t\right)[/latex] = cos [latex]\left(t-\frac{\pi}{6}\right)[/latex]
(∵ cos (-θ) = cos θ))
Comparing it with equation (i), we note
that a = 1, ω and ϕ = [latex]\frac{\pi}{6}[/latex]
The reference circle will be as shown in Fig. (b).

c) x = 3 sin [latex]\left(2 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{4}\right)[/latex]
= 3 cos [latex]\left(2 \pi t+\frac{3 \pi}{2}+\frac{\pi}{4}\right)[/latex]
Comparing it with equation (i), we note that a = 3, ω = 2π and ϕ = [latex]\frac{3 \pi}{2}[/latex] + [latex]\frac{\pi}{4}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{7 \pi}{4}[/latex]
The reference circle will be as in Fig. (c).

d) x = 2 cos πt
Comparing it with equation (i), we note
that a = 2, = π and ϕ = 0.
The reference circle will be as shown Fig. (d)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 19

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 13.
Figures (a) shows a spring of force constant k clamped rigidly at one end and a mass m attached to its free end. A force F applied at the free end stretches the spring. Figure (b) shows the same spring with both ends free and attached to a mass at either end. Each end of the spring in Fig. (b) is stretched by the same force F.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 20
a) What is the maximum extension of the spring in two cases ?
b) If the mass in Fig. (a) and the two masses in Fig. (b) are released, what is the period of oscillation in each case ?
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 21
a) The maximum extension of the spring in both the cases will be = [latex]\frac{F}{K}[/latex], where K is the spring constant of the spring used.
b) In Fig. (a), if x is the extension in the spring, when mass m is returning to its mean posi-tion after being released free, then restoring force on the mass is F = -Kx i.e., F ∝ x.
As this F is directed towards mean position of the mass, hence the mass attached to the spring will execute SHM. Here, spring factor = spring constant
= K
Inertia factor = mass of the given mass
= m
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 22
In Fig.(b). we have a two body system of spring constant K and reduced mass,
μ = [latex]\frac{m \times m}{m+m}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{m}{2}[/latex]
Here, inertia factor = [latex]\frac{m}{2}[/latex]
and spring factor = K
∴ Time period, T = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{(m / 2)}{k}}[/latex]
= 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{m}{2 K}}[/latex]

Question 14.
The piston in the cylinder head of a locomotive has a stroke (twice the amplitude) of 1.0 m. If the piston moves with simple harmonic motion with an angular frequency of 200 rad/min. what is its maximum speed ?
Solution:
Given a = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m; ω = 200 rev/min ;
Vmax = aω
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 200
= 100 m/min.

Question 15.
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon is 1.7 ms-2. What is the time period of a simple pendulum on the surface of moon if its time period on the surface of earth is 3.5 s ? (g on the surface of earth is 9.8 ms-2).
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 23

Question 16.
Answer the following questions :
a) Time period of a particle in SHM depends on the force constant k and mass m of the particle :
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{k}}}[/latex]. A simple pendulum executes SHM approximately. Why then is the time period of a pendulum independent of the mass of the pendulum ?
b) The motion of a simple pendulum is approximately simple harmonic for small angle oscillations. For larger angles of oscillation, a more involved analysis shows that T is greater than [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}[/latex]. Think of a qualitative argument to appreciate this result.
c) A man with a wristwatch on his hand falls from the top of a tower. Does the watch give correct time during the free fall ?
d) What is the frequency of oscillation of a simple pendulum mounted in cabin that is freely falling under gravity ?
Solution:
a) For a simple pendulum, force constant or spring factor K is proportional to mass m, therefore, m cancels out in denominator as well as in numerator. That is why the time period of simple pendulum is independent of the mass of the bob.

b) The effective restoring force acting on the bob of simple pendulum in displaced position is
F = -mg sin θ. When θ is small, sin θ = θ. Then the expression for time period of simple pendulum is given by T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\mu \mathrm{g}}[/latex] When θ is large sin θ < θ, if the restoring force mg sin θ is replaced by mgθ, this amounts to effective reduction in the value of ‘g’ for large angles and hence an increase in the value of time period T.

c) Yes, because the working of the wrist watch depends on spring action and it has nothing to do with gravity.

d) We know that gravity disappears for a man under free fall, so frequency is zero.

Question 17.
A simple pendulum of length l and having a bob of mass M is suspended in a car. The car is moving on a circular track of radius R with a uniform speed v. If the pendulum makes small oscillations in a radial direction about its equilibrium position, what will be its time period ?
Solution:
Centripetal acceleration, ac = [latex]\frac{v^2}{R}[/latex], it is acting horizontally.
Acceleration due to gravity = g acting vertically downwards.
Effective acceleration due to gravity
g’ = [latex]\sqrt{g^2+\frac{v^4}{R^2}}[/latex]
∴ Time period, T = 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{1}{g}}[/latex]
= 2π[latex]\sqrt{\frac{1}{g^2+v^4 / R^2}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 18.
A cylindrical piece of cork of density of base area A and height h floats in a liquid of density ρ1. The cork is depressed slightly and then released. Show that the cork oscillates up and down simple harmonically with a period.
T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{h \rho}{\rho_1 g}}[/latex]
where ρ is the density of cork. (Ignore damping due to viscosity of the liquid).
Solution:
Mass of the cylinder (m) = volume × density
= Ahρ ——- (1)
F1 = weight of the liquid displaced by the length l of the cylinder
= (Al)ρ1g —— (2)
Weight of the cylinder = mg —– (3)
In equilibrium position, mg = Alρ1g
m = Alρ1 —– (4)
F2 = A(l + y)ρ1g —– (5)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 24
Restoring force (F) = -(F2 – mg)
= -[A(l + y)ρ1g – Alρ1g]
F = Ayρ1g = -(Aρ1g)y —— (6)
In S.H.M. F = -Ky —– (7)
From eqs. (6) & (7),
spring factor (K) = Aρ1g ——(8)
Inertia factor, m = Ahρ ——- (9)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 25

Question 19.
One end of a U-tube containing mercury is connected to a suction pump and the other end to atmosphere. A small pressure difference is maintained between the two columns. Show that, when the suction pump is removed, the column of mercury in the U-tube executes simple harmonic motion.
Solution:
Consider a liquid of density ρ contained in a vertical U-tube of cross-sectional area A. Total length of the liquid column from P to P1 is L.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 26
Mass (m) = LAρ
PQ = y, P1Q1 = y, QQ1 = 2y
Restoring force (F) = -(A2y)ρg
= -(2Aρg)y —– (1)
F ∝ -y
Hence oscillations in U-tube is S.H.M.

Question 20.
An air chamber of volume V has a neck area of cross section a into which a ball of mass m just fits and can move up and down without any friction (Fig.). Show that when the ball is pressed down a little and released, it executes SHM. Obtain an expression for the time period of oscillations assuming pressure-volume variations of air to be isothermal (see Fig.).
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 27
Solution:
Consider an air chamber of volume V with a long neck of uniform area of cross-section A, and a frictionless ball of mass m filled smoothly in the neck at position C. The pressure of air below the ball inside the chamber is equal to the atmospheric pressure. Increase the pressure on the ball by a little amount P, so that the ball is depressed to position D, where CD = y.
There will be decrease in volume and hence increases in pressure of air inside the chamber. The decrease in volume of the air inside the chamber.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 28
Here, negative sign shows that the increase in pressure will decrease the volume of air in the chamber.
Now, ρ = [latex]\frac{-E A y}{V}[/latex]
Due to this excess pressure, the restoring force acting on the ball is
F = P × A = [latex]\frac{-E A y}{V} \cdot A[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{-E A^2}{V} y[/latex] —- (1)
Since F ∝ y and negative sign shows that the force is directed towards equilibrium position, if the applied increased pressure is removed from the ball, the ball with start executing linear SHM in the neck of chamber with C as mean position.
In a S.H.M., the restoring force,
F = -Ky —- (2)
Comparing (1) and (2), we have spring factor.
K = [latex]\frac{E A^2}{V}[/latex]
Here, inertia factor = mass of ball = m
Inertia factor Spring factor
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 29

Note : If the ball oscillates in the neck of chamber under isothermal conditions, then E = P = Pressure of air inside the chamber, when ball is at equilibrium position. If the ball oscillates in the neck of chamber under adiabatic conditions, then E = υP, where v = [latex]\frac{c_p}{c_v}[/latex].

Question 21.
You are riding in an automobile of mass 3000 kg. Assuming that you are examining the oscillation characteristics of its suspension system. The suspension sags 15 cm when the entire automobile is placed on it. Also, the amplitude of oscillation decreases by 50% during one complete oscillation. Estimate the values of (a) the spring constant k and (b) the damping constant b for the spring and shock absorber system of one wheel, assuming that each wheel supports 750 kg.
Solution:
Here, M = 3000 kg ; x = 0.15 cm ; if K is the spring constant of each spring, then spring constant of 4 springs in parallel to support the whole mass is, K = 4 K.
4 kx = Mg
k = [latex]\frac{M g}{4 x}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{3000 \times 10}{4 \times 0.15}[/latex]
= 5 × 104 N/m.

b) If m is the mass supported by each spring, then m = [latex]\frac{3000}{4}[/latex] = 750 kg.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 30

Question 22.
Show that for a particle in linear SHM the average kinetic energy over a period of oscillation equals the average potential energy over the same period.
Solution:
Consider a particle of mass m be executing S.H.M. with period T. The displacement of the particle at an instant t, when time period is noted from the mean position is given by
Y = a sin ωt
∴ Velocity 1 V = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dy}}{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{t}}[/latex] = aω cos ωt
K.E., EK = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]ma2ω2 cos2 ωt
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 31
Average P.E. over one cycle is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 32

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 23.
A circular disc of mass 10 kg is suspended by a wire attached to is centre. The wire is twisted by rotating the disc and released. The period of torsional oscillations is found to be 1.5s. The radius of the disc is 15 cm. Determine the torsional spring constant of the wire. (Torsional spring constant a is defined by the relation J = -α θ, where J is the restoring couple and θ the angle of twist).
Solution:
Here, m = 10kg; R = 15 cm = 0.15m; T = 1.55, ∝ = ?
Moment of inertia of disc,
I = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m R^2[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × (0.15)2 kgm2
Now T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{1}{\alpha}}[/latex]
so, α = [latex]\frac{4 \pi^2 1}{T^2}[/latex]
= 4 × [latex]\left(\frac{22}{7}\right)^2[/latex] × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{10 \times(0.15)^2}{(1.5)^2}[/latex]
= 1.97Nm/rad.

Question 24.
A body describes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 5 cm and a period of 0.2 s. Find the acceleration and velocity of the body when the displacement is
(a) 5 cm
(b) 3 cm
(c) 0 cm.
Solution:
Here, r = 5 cm = 0.05 m ; T = 0.25 ;
ω = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{0.2}[/latex]
= 10p rad/s
When displacement is y, then acceleration
A = -ω2y
Velocity, v = ω[latex]\sqrt{r^2-y^2}[/latex]

Case (a) : When y = x cm = 0.05 m
A = -(10π)2 × 0.05
= -5π2 m/s2
V = 10π[latex]\sqrt{(0.05)^2-(0.05)^2}[/latex] = 0

Case (b) : When y = 3 cm = 0.03 m
A = -(10π)2 × 0.03
= -3π2 m/s2
V= 10π × [latex]\sqrt{(0.05)^2-(0.03)^2}[/latex]
= 10π × 0.04
= 0.4π m/s

Case (c): When y = 0,
A = -(10π)2 × 0 = 0
V= 10π[latex]\sqrt{(0.05)^2-(0)^2}[/latex]
= 10π × 0.05
= 0.5π m/s.

Question 25.
A mass attached to a spring is free to oscillate, with angular velocity ω, in a horizontal plane without friction or damping. It is pulled to a distance x0 and pushed towards the centre with a velocity v0 at time t = 0. Determine the amplitude of the resulting oscillations in terms of the parameters ω, x0 and V0.
[Hint : Start with the equation x = a cos (ωt + θ) and note that the initial velocity is negative.]
Solution:
x = A cos (ωt + θ) dx
Velocity, [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = -Aω sin (ωt + θ) dt
When t = 0, x = x0, and [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = -V0
∴ x0 = A cos θ
-V0 = -Aω sin θ or A sin θ = [latex]\frac{V_0}{\omega}[/latex]
Squaring and adding- (i) and (ii), we get
A2(sin2 θ + cos2 θ) = [latex]\left(\frac{v_0^2}{\omega^2}\right)+x_0^2[/latex]
A = [latex]\left[\frac{v_0^2}{\omega^2}+x_0^2\right]^{1 / 2}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Is it necessary that a mass should be present at the centre of mass of any system?
Answer:
No. Any mass need not be present at the centre of mass of a system.
Ex : a hollow sphere, centre of mass lies at its centre.

Question 2.
What is the difference in the positions of a girl carrying a bag in one of her hands and another girl carrying a bag in each of her two hands?
Answer:
When the girl carries a bag in one hand (left) her centre of mass shifts towards other hands (right). In order to bring it in the middle, the girl has to lean towards her other side. When the girl carries a bag in each of her two hands (left and right), the centre of mass does not shift. The girl does not bend any side because of the same hags’ .w in her two hands.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 3.
Two rigid bodies have same moment of inertia about their axes of symmetry. Or the two, which body will have greater kinetic energy ?
Answer:
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I ω2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{L}^2}{1}[/latex] , E oc [latex]\frac{1}{l}[/latex] (∵ L = constant)
The rigid body having less moment of inertia will have greater kinetic energy.

Question 4.
Why are spokes provided in a bicycle wheel ?
Answer:
By connecting to the rim of wheel to the axle through the spokes the mass of the wheel gets concentrated at its rim. This increases its moment of inertia. This ensures its uniform speed.

Question 5.
We cannot open or close the door by applying force at the hinges, why ?
Answer:
When the force is applied at the hinges, the line of action of the force passes through the axis of rotation i.e, r = 0, so we can not open or close the door by pushing or pulling it at the hinges.

Question 6.
Why do we prefer a spanner of longer arm as compared to the spanner of shorter arm ?
Answer:
The torque applied on the nut by the spanner is equal to the force multiplied by the perpendicular distance from the axis of rotaion.
A spanner with longer arm provides more torque compared to a spanner with shorter arm. Hence longer arm spanner is preferred.

Question 7.
By spinning eggs on a table top, how will you distinguish a hard boiled egg from a raw egg ? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
A raw egg has some fluid in it and a hard boiled egg is solid form inside. Both eggs are spinning on a table top, the fluid is thrown outwards. Therefore (Ir > Ib) That means M. I of raw egg is greater than boiled egg. As I × ω = constant; ∴ ωr < ωb. That means Angular Velocity of raw egg is less than angular velocity of boiled egg.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 8.
Why should a helicopter necessarily have two propellers ?
Answer:
If there were only one propeller in the hellicopter then, due tio conservation of angular momentum, the helicopter itself would have turned in the opposite direction. Hence, if should have two propellers.

Question 9.
It the polar ice caps of the earth were to melt, what would the effect of the length of the day be ?
Answer:
Earth rotates about its polar axis. When ice of polar caps of earth melts, mass concentrated near the axis or rotation spreads out. Therefore, moment of Inertia I increases.

As no external torgue acts, L = I × ω = [latex]I\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\right)[/latex]= constant. With increase of I, T will increase i.e. length of the day will increase.

Question 10.
Why is it easier to balance a bicycle in motion?
Answer:
When a bicycle is in motion, it is easy to balance because the principle of conservation of angular momentum is involved.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between centre of mass and centre of gravity. [A.P. – Mar. ‘18, ‘16, ‘15, ‘14, ‘13; TS – Mar. ‘16, ‘15, ‘14, ‘13]
Answer:
Centre of mass

  1. Point at which entire mass of the body is supposed to be concentrated, and the motion of the point represents motion of the body.
  2. It refers mass of to body.
  3. In a uniform gravitational field centre of mass and centre of gravity coincide
  4. Centre of mass of the body is defined to describe the nature of motion of a body as a whole.

Centre of gravity

  1. Fixed point through which the weight of the body act.
  2. It refers to the weight acting on all particles of the body
  3. In a non-uniform gravitational field, centre of gravity and centre of mass do not coincide.
  4. Centre of gravity of body is defined to know the amount of stability of the body when supported.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
Show that a system of particles moving under the influence of an external force, moves as if the force is applied at its centre of mass.
Answer:
Consider [latex]\overrightarrow{r_1}, \overrightarrow{r_2}, \overrightarrow{r_3} \ldots \ldots \overrightarrow{r_n}[/latex] be the position vectors of masses m1, m2, m3 …………. mn of n particle system.
According to Defination of centre of mass.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 4
Differentiating the above equation w.r.t. time, we obtain
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 5
Where Fext represents the sum of all external forces acting on the particles of the system. This equation states that the centre of mass of a system of particles moves as if all the mass of the system was concentrated at the centre of mass and all the external forces were applied at that point.

Question 3.
Explain about the centre of mass of earth-moon system and its rotation around the sun.
Answer:
In the solar system the planets have different velocities and have complex two dimensional motion. But the motion of the centre of mass of the planet is simple and translational. consider the earth and moon system. We consider that the earth is moving around the sun in an elliptical path. But actually the centre of mass of earth and moon moves in an elliptical path round the sun. But the motion of either earth or moon is complicated when considered separately, more over we say that moon goes round the earth.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 6
But actually earth and moon are revolving round their centre of mass such that they are always on opposite sides of the centre of mass. Here the forces of attraction between earth and moon are internal forces.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 4.
Define vector product. Explain the properties of a vector product with two examples. [T.S. AP – Mar. 15]
Answer:
The cross product of two vectors is given by [latex]\vec{C}=\vec{A} \times \vec{B}[/latex]. The magnitude of the vector defined from cross product of two vectors is equal to product of magnitudes of the vectors and sine of angle between the vectors.

Direction of the vectors is given by right hand corkscrew rule and is perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors.
∴ [latex]|\vec{C}|[/latex] = AB sin θ. and [latex]\vec{C}[/latex] = AB sin θ [latex]\hat{n}[/latex]. Where, [latex]\hat{n}[/latex] is the unit vector perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{B}[/latex]
Example: 1) Torque is cross product of position vector and Force. i.e., [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{T}}=\vec{r} \times \vec{F}[/latex]
2) Angular momentum is cross product of position vector and momentum
i.e., [latex]\vec{L}=\vec{r} \times \vec{p}[/latex]

Properties:

  1. Cross product does not obey commutative law. But its magnitude obeys commutative low.
    [latex]\vec{A} \times \vec{B} \neq \vec{B} \times \vec{A} \Rightarrow(\vec{A} \times \vec{B})=-(\vec{B} \times \vec{A}),|\vec{A} \times \vec{B}|=|\vec{B} \times \vec{A}|[/latex]
  2. It obeys distributive law [latex]\vec{A} \times(\vec{B} \times \vec{C})=\vec{A} \times \vec{B}+\vec{A} \times \vec{C}[/latex]
  3. The magnitude of cross product of two vectors which are parallel is zero.
    Since θ = 0; [latex]|\vec{A} \times \vec{B}|[/latex] = AB sin 0° = 0
  4. For perpendicular vectors, θ = 90°, [latex]|\vec{A} \times \vec{B}|[/latex] = AB sin 90° [latex]|\hat{n}|[/latex]= AB

Question 5.
Define angular velocity(u). Derive v = r ω. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Angular velocity (ω):
The rate of change of angular displacement of a body is called angular velocity, i.e., ω = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
Derivation of v = rω
consider a rigid body be moving with uniform speed (v)along the circumference of a circle of radius r. Let the body be displaced from A to B in a small interval of time At making an angle ∆θ at the cantre. Let the linear displacement be ∆x from A to B.
From the property of circle, length of arc = radius × angle
∆x = r ∆θ
This equation is divided by ∆t, and taking
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 1

Question 6.
Define angular acceleration and torque. Establish the relation between angular acceleration and torque. [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Angular acceleration :
The rate of change of angular velocity is called angular acceleration
i.e., α = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \omega}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
Torque : The rate of change of angular momentum is called torque or The moment of Force is called Torque.

Relation between angular acceleration and Torque: Consider a rigid body of mass ‘M’ rotating in a circular path of radius ‘R’ with angular velocity ‘ωω’ about fixed axis.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 2
By definition, τ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dL}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}(\mathrm{I} \omega)}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
Where I = MR2 = moment of inertia of a body
τ = I [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \omega}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] [∵ I = constant]
But [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \omega}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] α
∴ τ = Iα

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 7.
Write the equations of motion for a particle rotating about a fixed axis?
Answer:
Equations of motion for a particle rotating about a fixed axis:
1. ωf = ωf + αt [∵ like v = u + at]
2. θ = [latex]\left(\frac{\omega_f+\omega_t}{2}\right) t[/latex] [∵ like v = [latex]\left(\frac{v_1+v_2}{2}\right) t[/latex]]
3. θ = ωit + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] α t2 [∵ like s = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2]
4. ωf2 – ωi2 = 2 α θ [∵ like v2 – u2 = 2as]
Where ωi = Initial angular velocity
ωf = Final angular velocity
α = Angular acceleration
θ = Angujar displacement
t = time

Question 8.
Derive expressions for the final velocity and total energy of a body rolling without slipping.
Answer:
Expression of velocity of a body Rolling down an inclined plane:
Consider a rigid body of mass M and radius R rolling down an inclined plane from a height h . Let v the linear speed acquired by the body when it reaches the bottom of the plane and k is its radius of gyration.

According to law of conservation of Energy, we have P.E of body on top of inclined plane = K.E of a body at the bottom of inclimed plane
When a body rolls down an incline of height h, we apply the principle of conservation of energy.
P.E at the top – K.E of translation + K.E of rotation
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 3

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Expression of Total energy of a body Rolling down on an inclined plane:
Suppose a body (Sphere) is rolling on a surface. Its motion can be treated as a combination of the translation of the centre of mass and rotation about an axis passing through the centre of mass. The total kinetic energy E can written as
E = ET + ER
Where ET = Translational kinetic energy
and ER = Rotational kinetic energy
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] MR2 ω2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Mk2ω2
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] M ω2 (R2 + K2)
where k is radius of gyration
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Mv2 (1 + [latex]\frac{K^2}{R^2}[/latex]) [∵ ω = [latex]\frac{V}{R}[/latex]]

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
a) State and prove parallel axis theorem.
Answer:
Statement: The moment of inertia of a rigid body about any axis is equals to the sum of moment of inertia about a parallel axis passing through centre of mass (lg) and product of mass of body and square of perpendicular distance between two parallel axis.
∴ I = IG + mr2
Proof : Consider a rigid body of mass M. Let I and IG are the moment of inertia of a body about parallel axes X and Y respectively.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 7
Let ‘r’ be the perpendicular distance between two axes.
Moment of inertia about ‘X’ axes is
I = Σm(OP)2 ………………. (1)
Moment of inertia about Y axes is
IG = Σm(GP)2 …………….. (2)
from ∆4 OQP, OP2 = (OQ)2 + (PQ)2
= (OG + GQ)2 + (PQ)2
= OG2 + (GQ)2 + 2.OG.GQ + (PQ)2
= OG2 + (GP)2 + 2(OG) (GQ) (∴ (GP)2 = (GQ)2 + (PQ)2)
Multiplying both sides by Σm,
⇒ Σm(OP)2 = Σm(OG)2 + Σm(GP)2 + 2Σm(OG)(GQ)
from (1) and (2), I = mr2 + IG + 2Σm (OG) (GQ)
But sum of moments of particles about centre of mass is zero.
i.e., Σm (OG) (GQ) = 0
∴ I = IG + mr2
Hence proves.

b) For a thin flat circular disk, the radius of gyration about a diameter as axis is k. If the disk is cut along a diameter AB as shown in to two equal pieces, then find the radius of gyration of each piece about AB.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 8
Answer:
For thin circular disk, the radius of gyration about a diameter
AB is, K = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{I}{M}}[/latex]
Where M = mass of disk
I = M.I of disk
The disk is cut into two halves about AB, when each,
Mass M’ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{2}}[/latex] and each M.I, I = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
Therefore Radius of gyration of each piece is
K’ = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{I^{\prime}}{M^{\prime}}}=\sqrt{\frac{\left(\frac{I}{2}\right)}{\left(\frac{M}{2}\right)}}=\sqrt{\frac{I}{M}}[/latex] = k

Question 2.
a) State and prove perpendicular axes theorem.
Answer:
Statement: The moment of inertia of a plane lamina about an axes perpendicular to its plane is equal to sum of moment of inertia of lamina about the perpendicular axes in its plane intersecting each other at a point, where the perpendicular axes passes.
i.e., Iz = Ix + Iy
Proof’ Consider a particle of mass’m’ at p. Let it be at a distance Y from Z-axis. Here ‘X’ and Y axes are in plane Ramina and Z-axes perpendicular to plane lamina.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 9
Now,
Moment of inertia about X-axix, Ix = Σmx2
Moment of inertia about Y-axis, Iy = Σmy2
Moment of inertia about Z-axis, Iz = Σmr2
From ∆4 OQP, r2 = x2 + y2
multiplying both side with Σm,
⇒ Σmr2 = Σmx2 + Σmy2
⇒ Iz = Ix + Iy
Hence proved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

b) If a thin circular ring and a thin flat circular disk of same mass have same moment of inertia about their respective diameters as axes. Then find the ratio of their radii.
Answer:
For a thin flat circular dist, M.I., Ir = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MR}_{\mathrm{r}}^2}{2}[/latex]
For a thin flat circular dist, M.I., Id = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MR}_{\mathrm{d}}^2}{2}[/latex]
Given that Ir = Id
[latex]\frac{M R_r^2}{2}=\frac{M R_d^2}{4} \Rightarrow \frac{R_r^2}{R_d^2}=\frac{2}{4}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
∴ [latex]\frac{R_r}{R_d}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \text { or } R_r: R_d=1: \sqrt{2}[/latex]

Question 3.
State and prove the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Explain the principle of conservation of angular momentum with examples. [A.P. Mar 16]
Answer:
Statement: Angular momentum of a body remains constant when the external torque is zero.
L = I ω = constant K.
or I1 ω1 = I2 ω2.
If the moment of Inertia of a body is lowered, the angular velocity of the body co increases.
Proof:
By derfination, the rate of change of angular momentum is called Torque.
i.e., τ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dL}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
If τ = 0 ⇒ [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dL}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = 0
or L = constant k
⇒ L1 = L2
∴ I1 ω1 = I2 ω2
Example 1): When a man with stretched out arms stands on a turn table which is revolving then his moment of inertia is high. If he folded his hands, the moment of inertia decreases and hence the angular velocity, linear velocity increase, but the period decreases. In both cases angular momentum remains constant.

Example 2): An acrobat from a swing in a circus, leaves the swing with certain angular momentum, with his arms and legs stretched. As soon as he leaves the swing he pulls his hands and legs together thus lowering his M.I. and increasing his angular velocity. He then quickly makes somersaults in air and finally lands on a net or ground.

Problems

Question 1.
Show that a(b × c) is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallelepiped formed on the three vectors a, b and c.
Solution:
Let a parallele piped be formed on three vectors.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 10
Which is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallel piped.

Question 2.
A rope of negligible mass is wound 4. round a hollow cylinder of mass 3kg and redius 40 cm. What is the angular acceleration of the cylinder if the rope is pulled with a force of 30N ? What is the linear acceleration of the rope ? Assume that there is no slipping.
Solution:
Here M = 3kg, R = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Moment of intertia of the hollow cylinder about its axis
I = MR2 = 3(0.4)2 = 0.48 kgm2
Force applied F = 30 N
∴ Torque, τ = F × R= 30 × 0.4 = 12 N – m.
If α is the angular acceleration, produced, then from τ = Iα
α = [latex]\frac{\tau}{\mathrm{l}}=\frac{12}{0.48}[/latex] = 25 rads-2
Linear acceleration, a = Rα = 0.4 × 25 = 10 m/s2

Question 3.
A coin is kept a distance of 10 cm from the centre of a circular turntable. If the coefficient of static friction between the table and the coin is 0.8 find the frequency of rotation of the disc at which the coin will just begin to slip.
Solution:
Here, radius, r = 10cm = 0.1 m; μs = 0.8
F = μmg
mrω2 = μmg
2 = μg
ω = [latex]\frac{\mu \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{r}}=\sqrt{\frac{0.8 \times 9.8}{0.1}}=\sqrt{8 \times 9.8}[/latex]
= 8.854 rad/s
w = 2πn
∴ frequency n = [latex]\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}=\frac{8.854}{2 \times 3.14}[/latex] = 1 .409rps
n = 1.409 × 60 = 84.54 rpm

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 4.
Particles of masses 1g, 2g, 3g…. 100g are kept at the marks 1 cm. 2cm, 3cm ….100cm respectively on 2 meter scale. Find the moment of inertia of the system of particles about a perpendicular bisector of the meter scale. –
Solution:
By adding all the masses, we get M = 5050g
= 5.050 kg
= 5.1 kg
and L = 1 m
M.I. of the meter scale = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mL}^2}{12}=\frac{5.1 \times 1^2}{12}[/latex]
= 0.425kg m2
= 0.43kg -m2

Question 5.
Three particles each of mass 100g are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side length 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centroid Of the triangle and perpendicular to its plane.
Solution:
m = 100 g = 100 × 10-3kg
Side a = 10 cm
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 11

Question 6.
Four particles each of mass 100g are placed at the corners of a square of side 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centre of the square and perpendicular to its plane. Find also the radius of gyration of the system.
Solution:
mass m = 100g
= 100 × 10-3kg
M = 4m = 400 × 10-3kg
radius r = 10cm
= 10 × 10-2m
Moment of Inertia I = Mr2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 12

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 7.
Two uniform circular discs, each of mass 1 kg and radius 20 cm, are kept in contact about the tangent passing through the point of contact. Find the moment of inertia of the system about the tangent passing through the point of contact.
Solution:
Mass m = 1kg; r = 20cm = 20 × 10-2m
I = I1 + I<sub2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 13
I1 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MR}^2}{4}[/latex] + MR2
I1 = [latex]\frac{5\mathrm{MR}^2}{4}[/latex]
Similarly I2 = [latex]\frac{5\mathrm{MR}^2}{4}[/latex]
∴ I = [latex]\frac{10 \mathrm{MR}^2}{4}=\frac{10 \times 1 \times\left(20 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}{4}[/latex] = 0.1 kg-m2

Question 8.
Four spheres, each diameter 2a and mass ‘m’ are placed with their centres on the four corners of a spuare of the side b. Calculate the moment of inertia of the system about any side of the square.
Solution:
I1 = mb2
I2 = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] ma2
I3 = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] ma2
I4 = mb2
∴ Moment of inertia of the system
I = I1 + I2 + I3 + I4
= mb2 + [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] ma2 + [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] ma2 + mb2
I = [latex]\frac{4}{5}[/latex] ma2 + 2mb2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 14

Question 9.
To maintain a rotor at a uniform angular speed or 200 rads-1, an engine needs to transmit a torque of 180 Nm. What is the power required by the engine ? (Note : uniform angular velocity in the absence of friction implies zero torque. In practice applied torque is needed to counter frictional torque). Assume that the engine is 100% efficient.
Solution:
Here, ω = 200 rad/s, torque τ = 180 N – m, power p = ?
As p = τ ω
∴ p = 180 × 200 = 3600.watt = 36 kw.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 10.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick ?
Solution:
Let M be the mass of stick concentrated at L, the 50 cm, mark.
For equilibrium about G’ the 45 cm mark,
10g (45 – 12) = mg(50 – 45)
10 g × 33 = mg × 5
M = [latex]\frac{10 \times 33}{5}[/latex] = 66 gram.

Question 11.
Determine the kinetic energy of a circular disc rotating with a speed of 60 rpm about an axis passing through a point on its circumference and perpendicular to its plane. The circular disc has a mass of 5kg and radius 1m.
Solution:
Here M = 5kg; R = 1 m;
ω = 2π × [latex]\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex] = 2n × [latex]\frac{60}{60}[/latex] rad /s = 2π rad/s
The M.I of disc about parallel axis passing through a point on its circumferance
I = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MR}^2}{2}[/latex] + MR2 = [latex]\frac{3}{2}[/latex] MR2
∴ Kinetic energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I ω2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{3}{2}[/latex] MR2 ω2 = [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × 5 × (1)2 × (2π)2
= [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × 5 × 4π2 = 15 × ([latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex]2
∴ K.E = 148.16 J.

Question 12.
Two particles each of mass m and speed v Travel in opposite directions along parallel lines separated by a distance. Show that the vector angular momentum of the two particle system is the same whatever be the point about which the angular momentum is taken.
Solution:
Given that m1 = m2 = m;
[latex]\vec{V}_1=\vec{V}_2=\vec{V}[/latex]
momentum of 1st particle p1 = [latex]\mathrm{m} \vec{\mathrm{V}}[/latex]
∴ p1 = [latex]\mathrm{m} \vec{\mathrm{V}}[/latex]
momentum of 2nd particle [latex]\vec{\mathrm{P}}_2=\mathrm{mV}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 15
If two particles moves oppositely on
Circumference of circle, distance d = 2r
Angular momentum of 1st particle w.r.t
Centre ‘O’ is [latex]\vec{L_1}=\vec{r} \times \vec{P}_1=\vec{r} \times m \vec{V}[/latex]
Angular momentum of 2nd particle w.r.t
centre ‘O’ is [latex]\vec{\mathrm{L}_2}=\vec{\mathrm{r}} \times \vec{\mathrm{P}_2}=\vec{\mathrm{r}} \times \mathrm{m} \vec{\mathrm{V}}[/latex]
∴ [latex]\vec{L_1}=\vec{L_2}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 13.
The moment of inertia of a fly wheel making 300 revolutions per minute is 0.3 kgm 2 Find the torque required to bring it to rest in 20s.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 16

Question 14.
When 100 J of work is done on a fly wheel, its angular velocity is increased from 60 rpm to 180 rpm. What is the moment of inertia of the wheel ?
Solution:
Here, Initial frequency
n1 = [latex]\frac{60}{60}[/latex] = 1Hz
Initial angular velocity
ω1 = 2π n1 = 2π rad /sec
Final frequency n2 = [latex]\frac{180}{60}[/latex] = 3Hz
Final angular velocity
ω2 = 2π n2 = 2π × 3 = 6π rad/sec
Work done = 100 J from work – energy therorem,
Workdone = change in K.E.
W = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I ω22 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I ω12
100 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I [(6π)2 – (2π)2]
100 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I (32π)2
I = [latex]\frac{200}{32 \pi^2}[/latex] = 0.634 kg – m2
∴ I = 0.634 kg- m2

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Give the location of the centre of mass of a (i) sphere (ii) cylinder (iii) ring and (iv) cube. each of uniform mass density. Does the centre of mass of a body necessarily lie inside the body?
Solution:
In all the four cases, as the mass density is uniform, centre of mass is located at their respective geometrical centres.
No, it is not necessary that the center of mass of a body should lie on the body for example in caSe of a circular ring. Center of mass is at the centre of the ring, where there is no mass.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
In the HCl molecule the separation between the nuclei of the two atoms Is about 1.27 Å(1 Å = 10-10m). Find the approximate location of the CM of the molecule, given that a chlorine atom is about 35.5 times as massive as a hydrogen atom and nearly all the mass of an atom Is concentrated in its nucleus.
Solution:
Let the mass of the H atom = m unit, mass of the Cl atom = 35.5 m units
Let cm be at the distance xÅ from Htom
∴Distance of cm from CL atom = (1.27 – x) Å
It cm is taken at the origin,
then mx + (1.27 – x) 55.5m = 0
mx = (1.27 – x) 35.5 m.
Negative sign indicates that if chlorine atom is on the right side of cm (+), the hydrogen atom is on the left side of cm, so leavning negative sign, we get
x + 35.5 x = 1.27 × 35.5
36.5 x = 45.085
x = [latex]\frac{45.085}{36.5}[/latex]
= 1.235
x = 1.235 Å
Hence cm is located on the line joining centres of H and d atoms at a distance 1.235 Å from H.

Question 3.
A child sits stationary at one end of a long trolley moving uniformly with a speed V on a smooth horizontal floor. If the child gets up and runs about on the trolley in any manner, what is the speed of the CM of the (trolley + child) system ?
Solution:
The speed of the centre of mass of the system , (trolley + child) shall remain unchanged, when the child gets up and runs about on the trolley in any manner. This is because forces involved in the exercise are purely internal i.e., from within the system. No external force acts on the system and hence there is no change in velocity of the system.

Question 4.
Show that the area of the triangle contained between the vectors a and b is one half of the magnitude of a × b
Solution:
Let [latex]\vec{\mathrm{a}}[/latex] represented by [latex]\vec{\mathrm{OP}}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] be represented by [latex]\vec{\mathrm{OQ}}[/latex].
Let ∠POQ = θ
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 17
∴ area of ∆ OPQ = [latex]\frac{1}{2}|\vec{a} \times \vec{b}|[/latex], which was to be proved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 5.
Show that a.(b × c) is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallelepiped formed on the three vectors a, b and c.
Solution:
Let a parallel piped be formed on three vectors.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 18
Where [latex]\hat{n}[/latex] is unit vector along [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}[/latex] perpendicular to the plane containing [latex][/latex] and [latex]\vec{\mathrm{b}}[/latex]. Now [latex]\vec{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] = (a) (be) cos 0°
= abc
Which is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallelepiped.

Question 6.
Find the components along the x. y. z axes of the angular momentum 1 of a particle whose position vector is r with components x, y, z and momentum is p with components px, py, and pz,. Show that if the particle moves only in the x-y plane the angular momentum has only a z-component.
Solution:
For motion in 3D, the position vector [latex]\vec{\mathrm{r}}[/latex] and linear momentum vector [latex]\vec{\mathrm{p}}[/latex] can be written in terms of their rectangular components as follows.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 19
Comparing the coefficient of k on both sides, we have Lz = xpy – ypx.
Therefore the particle moves only in x-y plane. The angular momentum has only z component.

Question 7.
Two particles, each of mass m and speed v. travel in opposite directions along parallel lines separated by a distance d. Show that the vector angular momentum of the two particle system is the same what ever be the point about which the angular momentum is taken.
Solution:
From fig, vector angular momentum of the two particle system any point A on x1 y1 is.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 20
Similary, vector angular momentum of the tw.o particle system, a bout any pt. B on x2y2 is
[latex]\vec{L_B}=m \vec{v} \times d+m \vec{v} \times 0=m \vec{v} d[/latex]
Let us consider any other point (on AB, where AC = x)
∴ Vector angular momentum of the two particle system about c is
[latex]\vec{L_c}=m \vec{v}(x)+m \vec{v}(d-x)=m \vec{v} d[/latex]
Clearly, [latex]\vec{\mathrm{L}_{\mathrm{A}}}=\vec{\mathrm{L}_{\mathrm{B}}}=\vec{\mathrm{L}_C}[/latex]
Which has to be proved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 8.
A non-uniform bar of weight W is suspended at rest by two strings of negligible weight as shown in figure. The angles made by the strings with the vertical are 36.9 and 53.1° respectively. The bar is 2 m long. Calculate the distance d of the centre of gravity of the bar from its left end.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 21
From fig (b)
θ1 = 36.9°, θ2 = 53.1°
If T1, T2 are the tensions in two strings, then for equilibrium along the horizontal,
T1 sin θ1 = T2 sin θ2
(or) [latex]\frac{T_1}{T_2}=\frac{\sin \theta_2}{\sin \theta_1}=\frac{\sin 53.1^{\circ}}{\sin 36.9^{\circ}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{0.7407}{0.5477}[/latex] = 1.3523
Let d be the distance of center of gravity c of the bar from the left end.
For rotational equilibrium about c,
T1 cos θ1 Xd = T2 cos θ2 (2 – d)
T1 cos 36.9° × d = T2 cos 53.1° (2 – d)
T1 × 0.8366 d = T2 × 0.6718 (2 – d)
Put T1 = 1.3523 T2 and solve to get
d = 0.745 m.

Question 9.
A car weight 1800 kg. The distance between its front and back axles is 1.8 m. Its centre of gravity is 1.05 m behind the front axle. Determine the force exerted by the level ground on each front wheel and each back wheel.
Solution:
Here, m = 1800 kg
Distance between front and .back axles = 1.8 m
Distance of center of gravity (c) behind the front axle = 1.05 m
Let R1 and R2 be the forces exerted by the level ground on each front wheel and each back wheel. As it is dear from fig.
R1 + R2 = mg = 1800 × 9.8
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 22
For rotational equilibrium about C,
R1 × 1.05 = R2 (1.8 – 1.05) = R2 × 0.75 ………….. (i)
[latex]\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\frac{0.75}{1.05}=\frac{5}{7}[/latex]
Putting in (i)
[latex]\frac{5}{7}[/latex] R2 + R2 = 1800 × 9.8
R2 = [latex]\frac{7 \times 1800 \times 9.8}{12}[/latex]
= 10290 N
R1 = [latex]\frac{5}{7}[/latex] R2
= [latex]\frac{5}{7}[/latex] × 10290
= 7350 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 10.
(a) Find the moment of inertia of a sphere about a tangent to the sphere, given the moment of inertia of the sphere about any of its diameters to be 2 MR2/5. where M is the mass of the sphere and R is the radius of the sphere.
Solution:
a) Moment of inertia of sphere about any diameter = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex]MR2
Applying theorem of parallel axes,
Moment of inertia of sphere about a tangent to the sphere = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex]MR2 + M(R)2
= [latex]\frac{7}{5}[/latex]MR2.

(b) Given the moment of inertia of a disc of mass M and radius R about any of its diameters to be MR2/4, find its moment of inertia about an axis normal to the disc and passing through a point on its edge.
Solution:
We are given, moment of inertia of the disc about any of its diameters = [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex]MR2.
i) Using theorem of perpindicular axes, moment of inertia of the disc about an axis passing through its center and normal to the disc = 2 × [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex]MR2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]MR2
ii) Using theorem of parallel axes, moment of inertia of the disc passing through a point on its edge and normal to the disc
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]R2 + MR2 = [latex]\frac{3}{2}[/latex] MR2.

Question 11.
Torques of equal magnitude are applied to a hollow cylinder and a solid sphere, both having the same mass and radius. The cylinder is free to rotate about its standard axis of symmetry, and the sphere is free to rotate about an axis passing through its centre. Which of the two will acquire a greater angular speed after a given time.
Solution:
If M is mass and R is radius of the hollow cylinder and the solid sphere, then
M.I of hollow cylinder about its axis of symmetry I1 = MR2 and
M.I of solid sphere about an axis through its 2 , centre, I1 = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] MR2
Torque applied, I = I1 α1 = I2 α2
[latex]\frac{\alpha_2}{\alpha_1}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}=\frac{M^2}{\frac{2}{5} M R^2}=\frac{5}{2}[/latex]
α2 > α1
From ω = ω0 + αt, we find that for given ω0 and t, ω2 > ω1 to, i.e. angular speed of solid sphere will be greater than angular speed of hallow sphere.

Question 12.
A solid cylinder of mass 20 kg rotates about its axis with angular speed 100 rad s-1. The radius of the cylinder is 0.25m. What is the kinetic energy associated with the rotation of the cylinder ? What is the magnitude of angular momentum of the cylinder about its axis ?
Solution:
Here, M = 20 kg, R = 0.25 m, w – 100 g-1
Moment of inertia of solid cylinder
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{MR}^2}{2}=\frac{20 \times(0.25)^2}{2}[/latex] = 0.625 kg/m2
K.E of rotation = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.625 × (100)2 = 3125 J
Angular momentum, L = Iω
= 0.625 × 100
= 62.5 Js.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 13.
a) A child stands at the centre of a turntable with his two arms outstretched. The turntable is set rotating with an angular speed of 40 rev/miri. How much is the angular spped of the child if he folds his hands back and thereby reduces his moment of inertia to 2/5 times the initial value ? Assume that the turntable rotates without friction.
Solution:
Here, intial angular speed ω1 = 40 rev/min, ω2 = ?
Final moment of inertia, I2 = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex]I, Intial moment of Inertia
As no external torque acts in the process, therefore
Iω = constant
i.e. I2ω2 = I1ω1
ω2 = [latex]\frac{I_1}{I_2}[/latex] ω1 = [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex] × 40
= 100 rpm

b) Show that the child’s new kinetic energy of rotation is more than the initial kinetic energy of rotation. How do you account for this increase in kinetic energy ?
Solution:
Final K.E of rotation, E2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]I2ω22
Intial K.E of rotation, E1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]I2ω12
[latex]\frac{E_2}{E_1}=\frac{\frac{1}{2} l_2 \omega_2^2}{\frac{1}{2} l_1 \omega_1^2}=\left(\frac{l_2}{l_1}\right)\left(\frac{\omega_2}{\omega_1}\right)^2[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2}{5} \times\left(\frac{100}{40}\right)^2=\frac{5}{2}[/latex] = 2.5
∴ K.E of rotation increase. This is because child spends internal energy folding back his hands.

Question 14.
A rope of negligible mass is wound roung a hollow cylinder of mass 3kg and radius 40 cm. What is the angular acceleration of the cylinder if the rope is pulled with a force of 30 N ? what is the linear acceleration of the rope ? Assume that there is no slipping.
Solution:
Here M = 3kg, R = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Moment of Inertia of the hollow cylinder about its axis
I = MR2 = 3(0.4)2 = 0.48 kgm2
Force applied F = 30 N
∴ Torque, τ = F × R = 30 × 0.4 = 12 N – m.
If α is the angular acceleration, produced, then from τ = Iα
α = [latex]\frac{\tau}{\mathrm{I}}=\frac{12}{0.48}[/latex] = 25 rads-2
Linear acceleration, a = Rα = 0.4 × 25 = 10 m/s2.

Question 15.
To maintain a rotor at a uniform angular speed of 200 rad s-1, an engine needs to transmit a torque of 180 N m. What is the power required by the engine ? (Note : uniform angular velocity in the absence of friction implies zero torque. In practice, applied torque is needed to counter frictional torque). Assume that the engine is 100% efficient.
Solution:
Here, ω = 200 rad/s, torque τ = 180 N – m, power p = ?
As p = τω
∴ p = 180 × 200 = 3600 watt = 36 kw.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 16.
From a uniform disc of radius R, a circular hole of radius R/2 is cut out. The centre of the hole is a R/2 from the centre of the original disc. Locate the centre of gravity of the resulting flat body.
Solution:
Suppose mass per unit area of the disc = M
∴ Mass of original disc
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 23
M = πR2 × m
Mass of portion removed from the disc
M’ = π[latex]\left(\frac{R}{2}\right)^2 \times m=\frac{\pi R^2}{4} m=\frac{M}{4}[/latex]
In fig, mass M is connected at O and mass
M’ is concentrated at O’, where OO’ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{2}}[/latex].
After the circular disc of mass M’ is removed, the remaining portion can be considered as a system of two masses M at 0 and – M’ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{-M}}{\mathrm{4}}[/latex] at O’. If x is the distance of centre of 4 mass (p) of the remaining part, then
x = [latex]\frac{M \times O-M^{\prime} \times \frac{R}{2}}{M-M^{\prime}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\frac{-M}{4} \times \frac{R}{2}}{M-\frac{M}{4}}=\frac{-M R}{8} \times \frac{4}{3 M}=\frac{-R}{6}[/latex]
Negative sign shows that p is the left O.

Question 17.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 24
Solution:
Let m be the mass of stick concentrated at c, the 50 cm, mark,
For equilibrium about c’ the 45 cm mark,
10g (45 – 12) = mg(50 – 45)
10 g × 33 = mg × 5
m = [latex]\frac{10 \times 33}{5}[/latex]
= 66 gram.

Question 18.
A solid sphere rolls down two different inclined planes of the same heights but different angles of inclination, (a) Will it reach the bottom with the same speed in each case ? (b) Will jt take longer to roll down one plane than the other ? (c) If so, which one and why ?
Solution:
Let v be the speed of the solid sphere at the bottom of the incine. Applying principle of conservation of energy, we get
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2 = mgh
As I = [latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] mr2; [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] ([latex]\frac{2}{5}[/latex] mr22 = mgh
as rω = v, [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{5}[/latex] mv2 = mgh
v = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{10}{7} \mathrm{gh}} .[/latex]
As h is same in two cases, v must be same i.e., It will reach the bottom with the same speed. Time taken to roll down the two planes will also be the same, as their height is the same.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 19.
A hoop of radius 2 m weighs 100 kg. It rolls along a horizontal floor so that its centre of mass has a speed of 20 cm/s. How much work has to be done to stop it ?
Solution:
Here, R = 2m, M = 100 kg v = 20 cm/s = 0.2 m/s.
Total energy of the hoop = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (MR)2ω2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2
= mv2.
Work required to stop the hoop = total energy of the hoop
w = mv2 = 100(0.2)2 = 4 joule.

Question 20.
The oxygen molecule has a mass of 5.30 × 10-26 kg and a moment of inertia of 1.94 × 10-46 kg m2 about an axis through its centre perpendicular to the lines joining the two atoms. Suppose the mean speed of such a molecule in a gas is 500 m/s and that its kinetic energy of rotation is two thirds of its kinetic energy of trans-lation. Find the average angular velocity of the molecule.
Solution:
Here, m = 5.30 × 10-26 kg
I = 1.94 × 10--46 . kgm2
v = 500 m/s
If [latex]\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{2}}[/latex] is mass of each atom of oxygen and 2r is the distance between the two atoms as shown in fig. then
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 25
= 6.7 × 10-12 rod/s.

Question 21.
A solid cylinder rolls up an inclined plane of angle of inclination 30°. At the bottom of the inclined plane the centre of mass of the cylinder has a speed of 5 m/s.
a) How far will the cylinder go up the plane ?
b) How long will is take to return to the bottom ?
Solution:
Here θ = 30°, v = θm/s
Let the cylinder go up the plane upto a height h
From [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2 = mgh
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] ([latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mr2) ω2 = mgh
[latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] mv2 = mgh
h = [latex]\frac{3 v^2}{4 g}=\frac{3 \times 5^2}{4 \times 9.8}[/latex] = 1.913 m
If s is the distance up the inclined plane, then as sin θ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{s}^2}[/latex]
s = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sin \theta}=\frac{1.913}{\sin 30^{\circ}}[/latex] = 3.826 m
Time taken to return to the bottom
t = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 s\left(1+\frac{k^2}{r^2}\right)}{g \sin \theta}}=t \sqrt{\frac{2 \times 3.826\left(1+\frac{1}{2}\right)}{9.8 \sin 30^{\circ}}}[/latex] = 1.53 s.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 22.
As shown in Fig. the two sides of a step ladder BA and CA are 1.6 m long and hinged at A. A rope DE, 0.5 m is tied half way up. A weight 40 kg is suspended from a point F.1.2 m from B along the ladder BA. Assuming the floor to be frictionless and neglecting the weight of the ladder, find the tension in the rope and forces exerted by the floor on the ladder.
(Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 26
(Hint: Consider the equilibrium of each side of the ladder separately.)
Solution:
Data seems to be insufficient

Question 23.
A man stands on a rotating platform, with his arms stretched horizontally holding a 5 kg weight in each hand . The angular speed of the platform is 30 revolutions per minute. The man then brings his arms dose to his body with the distance of each weight from the axis changing from 90cm to 20 cm. Thd moment of inertia of the man together with the platform may be taken to be constant and equal to 7.6 kg m2
(a) What is his new angular speed ? (Neglect friction.)
b) Is kinetic energy conserved in the process ? If not, form where does the change come about ?
Solution:
Here l1 = 7.6 × 2 × 5(0.9)2 = 15.7 kgm2
ω1 = 30 rpm
l2 = 7.6 + 2 × 5(0.2)2 = 8.0 kgm2
ω2 = ?
According to the principle of conservation of angular momentum
l2ω2 = l1ω1
ω2 = [latex]\frac{l_1}{l_2} \omega_1=\frac{15.7 \times 30}{8.0}[/latex] = 58.88 rpm

Question 24.
A bullet of mass 10 g and speed 500 m/s is fired into a door and gets embedded exactly at the centre of the door. The door is 1.0 m wide and weighs 12 kg. It is hinged at one end and rotates about a vertical axis practically without friction. Find the angular speed of the door just after the bullet embeds into it.
(Hint : The moment of inertia of the door about the vertical axis at one end is ML2/3.)
Solution:
Angular momentum imparted by the bullet
I_ = mv × r = (10 × 10-3) × 500 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] = 2.5
Also, L = [latex]\frac{M L^2}{3}=\frac{12 \times 1.0^2}{3}[/latex] = 4kgm
As L = Lω
∴ ω = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{L}}{1}=\frac{2.5}{4}[/latex] = 0.625 rad/sec.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 25.
Two discs of moments of inertia I, and I2 about their respective axes (normal to the disc and passing through the centre), and rotawing with angular speeds ω1, and ω2 are brought into contact face to face with their axes of rotation coincident,
(a) .What is the angular speed of the two-disc system ?
(b) Show that the kinetic energy of the combined system is less than the sum of the initial kinetic energies of the two discs. How do you account for this loss in energy ? Take ω1 ≠ ω1.
Solution:
Here, total intial angular momentum of the two discs L1 = I1ω1 + I2ω2
Under, the given conditions, moment of intertia of the two disc system = (I1 + I2)
If ω is angular speed of the combined system, the final angular momentum of the system
L2 = (I1 + I2
As no external torque is involved in this excercise, therefore, L2 = L1
(I1 + I2)ω = I1ω1 + I2ω2
ω = [latex]\frac{I_1 \omega_1+I_2 \omega_2}{I_1+I_2}[/latex]

b) Initial K.E of two disc E1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I1ω12 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] I2ω22
Final K.E of the system E2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (I1 + I22
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 27
∴ E1 – E2 > 0 or E1 > E2 or E2 < E1
Hence there occurs a loss of K.E in the process. Loss of energy = E1 – E2. This loss must be due to friction in the contact of the two discs.

Question 26.
a) Prove the theorem of perpendicular axes.
(Hint: Square of the distance of a point (x, y) in the x – y plane from an axis through the origin and perpendicular to the plane is x2 + y2).
Answer:
Statement: The sum of moments of inertia of a plane lamina about any two perpendicular axes in its plane is equal to its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to the plane and passing through the point of intersection of the first two axes.

Proof : Consider a plane lamina revolving about the Z axis. Let ‘O’ be the origin of the axis. Imagine a particle of mass ‘m’ lying at a distance ‘r’ from point ‘o’ on the plane. Let x, y be the coordinates of the point P.
Thus r2 = x2 + y2
Then the moment of the body about x-aixs
Ix = Σm y2
The moment of inertia of the body about y-axis.
Iy = Σm x2
Then the moment of inertia of the body about Z-axis
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 28
Iz = Σm r2
Iz = Σm(x2 + y2)
Iz = Σm x2 + Σm y2 = Iy + Ix
∴ Iz = Ix + Iy
Hence perpendicular axes theorem is proved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

b) Prove the theorem of parallel axes.
(Hint: If the centre of mass is chosen to be the origin Σmiri = 0).
Answer:
Statement: The moment of inertia of a plane lamina about an-axis is equal to the sum of the moment of inertia about a parallel axis passing through the centre of mass and the product of its mass and square of the distance between the two axes i.e., I0 = IG + Mr2
Let IG is the moment of inertia of the plane lamina about the axis Z2 passing through the centre of mass.
I0 is the moment of inertia of the plane lamina about an axis Z1
Let M be the mass of the lamina and r be the distance between the two axes . Then
I0 = IG + mr2.
Proof : Let a particle of mass m is situated at P. Moment of inertia about the axis passing through 0 is
dl = m op2 or I = Σm op2.
Join the lines PO and PG and draw the line PQ and Join with the line extending from OG.
From the trainagle POQ, OP2 = OQ2 + PQ2
OP2 – (OG + GQ)2 + PQ2 + OQ = OG + GQ
OP2 = OG2 + 2OG . GQ + (GQ2 + PQ2)
OP2 – OG2 + 2OG. GQ + GP2
OP2 = OG2 + GP2 + 2OG.GQ
[∵ From the ∆le PGQ, GP2 = PQ2 + GQ2]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 29
Multiplying with Σm on both side
Σm OP2 = Σm OG2 + Σm GP2 + Σm OG. GQ
But Σm OG2 = Mr2
(∵ OG is constant and Σm = M, total mass of the body)
Σm GP2 = IG
Σm OP2 = I0
∴ I0 = Mr2 – IG + 2r ΣmGQ
Σm.GQ = 0
[∵ The moment of all the particles about the centre of mass is always zero]
I0 = IG + Mr2
Thus the theorem is proved.

Question 27.
Prove the result that the velocity u of translation of a rolling body (like a ring, disc, cylinder or sphere) at the bottom of an inclined plane of a height h is given by υ2 = [latex]\frac{2 g h}{\left(1+k^2 / R^2\right.}[/latex] using dynamical consideration (i.e. by consideration of forces and torques). Note k is the radius of gyration of the body about its symmetry axis, and R is the radius of the body. The body starts from rest at the top of the plane.
Solution:
When a body rolls down an incline of height h, we apply the principle of conservation of energy.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 30
K.E of translation + K.E of rotation = P.E at the top
i.e . [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2 = mgh
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (mk2) ω2 = mgh
As w = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]
∴ [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m [latex]\frac{k^2}{R^2}[/latex]v2 = mgh
or mv2 (1 + [latex]\frac{k^2}{R^2}[/latex]) = mgh
v2 = [latex]\frac{2 g h}{\left(1+\frac{K^2}{R^2}\right)}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 28.
A disc rotating about its axis with angular speed ω0 is placed lightly (without any translational push) on a perfectly frictionless table. The radius of the disc is R. What are the linear velocities of the points A, B and C on the disc shown in Fig. ? Will the disc roll in the direction indicated ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 31
Solution:
Using the reaction v = rω,
we get
for point A, VA = Rω0, along AX
for point B, VB = Rω0, along BX
for point C, Vc = ([latex]\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{2}}[/latex] ω0 parallel to AX,
The disc will not rotate, because it is placed on a perfectly frictionless table, without, rolling is not possible.

Question 29.
Explain why friction is necessary to make the disc in Figure roll in the direction indicated.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 31
(a) Give the direction of frictional force at B and the sense of frictional torque before perfect rolling begins.
(b) What is the force of friction after perfect rolling begins ?
Solution:
To roll a disc, we require a torque, which can be proved only by a tangential force. As force of friction is the only tangential force in this case, it is necessary.
(a) As frictional force at B opposes the velocity of point B, which is to the left, the frictional force must be to the right. The sense of frictional torque will be perpendicular to the plane of the disc and outwards.

(b) As frictional force at B decreases the velocity of the point of contact B with the surface, the perfect rolling begins only when velocity of point B becomes zero. Also, force of friction would become zero at this stage.

Question 30.
A solid disc and a ring, both of radius 10 cm are placed on a horizontal table simultaneously, with initial angular speed equal to 10 π rad s-1. Which of the two will start to roll earlier ? The co-efficient of kinetic friction is μk = 0.2.
Solution:
Here, intial velocity of centre of mass is zero i.e, u = 0.
Frictional force causes the GM to accelerate
μk mg = ma ∴ a = μk g
As v = u + at ∴ v = 0 + μk gt
Torque due to friction causes retardation in the intial angular speed ω0.
i.e. μk mg × R = – Iα
α = [latex]\frac{\mu_k \mathrm{mgR}}{\mathrm{I}}[/latex]
ω = ω0 + αt
∴ ω = ω0 – [latex]\frac{\mu_k \mathrm{mgRt}}{\mathrm{I}}[/latex]
Rolling begins, when v = Rω from (ii) and (iv)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 32
Comparing (vi) and (vii) we find that the disc would begin to roll earlier than the ring We can calculate the values of t from (vi) and (vii) using known values of μk, g, R and ω0.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 31.
A cylinder of mass 10kg and radius 15 cm is rolling perfectly on a plane of inclination 30°. The coefficient of static friction μs = 0.25.
(a) How much is the force of friction acting on the cylinder?
(b) What is the work done against friction during rolling?
(c) If the inclination θ of the plane is increased, at what value of θ does the cylinder begin to skid, and not roll perfectly?
Solution:
Here, m = 10 kg, r = 15 cm = 0.15 m
θ = 30°, μs = 0.25
Accelaration of the cylinder down the incline,
α = [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex]g sin θ = [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] × 9.8 sin 30° = [latex]\frac{9.8}{3}[/latex] m/s2
a) Force of friction, f = mg sin θ – ma = m(g sin θ – α) = 10(9.8 sin 30° – [latex]\frac{9.8}{3}[/latex]) = 16.4 N
b) During rolling the point of contact is at rest. Therefore work done against friction is zero
c) For rolling without slipping/skidding μ = [latex]\frac{1}{3}[/latex] tan θ
tan θ = 3μ
= 3 × 0.25 = 0.75
θ = 37°.

Question 32.
Read each statement below carefully, and state, with reasons, if it is true or false;
(a) During rolling, the force of friction acts in the same direction as the direction of motion of the CM of the body.
(b) The instantaneous speed of the point of contact during rolling is zero.
(c) The instantaneous acceleration of the point of contact during rolling is zero.
(d) For perfect rolling motion, work done against friction is zero.
(e) A wheel moving down a perfectly italic inclined plane will undergo slipping (not roiling) motion.
Solution:
a) The statement is false.

b) True. This is because rolling body can be imagined to be rotating about an axis passing through the point of contact of the body with the ground.
Hence its instantaneous speed is zero.

c) This is not true. This is because when the body is rotating its instantaneous acc is not zero.

d) It is true. This is because once the perfect rolling begins, force of friction becomes zero. Hence work done against friction is zero.

e) The statement is true. This is because rolling occurs only on account of friction which is tangential force capable of providing torque. When the inclined plane is perfectly smooth it will simply slip under the effect of its own weights.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 33.
Separation of Motion of a system of particles into motion of the centre of mass and motion about the centre of mass :
(a) Show P = [latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{i}}^{-}+\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{V}[/latex]
Where Pi is the momentum of the ii the particle (of mass mi) and p’i + miv’i. Note relative velocity of the ith particle relative to the centre of mass. Also, prove using the definition of the centre of mass Σp’i = 0
(b) Show K = K’ + 1/2MV2
Where K is the total kinetic energy of the system of particles. K’ is the total kinetic energy of the system when the particle velocities are taken with respect to the centre of mass and MV2/2 is the kinetic energy of the translation of the system as a whole (i.e. of the centre of mass motion of the system). The result has been used in Sec. 7.14.
(c) Show L = L’ + R × MV
Where L’ = Σri Pi is the angular momentum of the system about the centre of mass with velocities taken relative to the centre of mass. Remember r’i = ri – R rest of the notation is the standard notation used in the chapter. Note L1 and MR × V can be said to be angular momenta, respectively, about and of the centre of mass of the system of particles.
(d) Show [latex]\frac{d l^{\prime}}{d t}=\sum r_i^{\prime} \frac{d p^{\prime}}{d t}[/latex]
Further, show that [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dL}^{\mathrm{l}}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = τ’ext
Whereτ’ext is the sum of all external torques acting on the system about the centre of mass.
(Hint: Use the definition of centre of mass and Newton’s Third Law. Assume the internal forces between any two particles act along the line joining the particles.)
Solution:
a) Let m1, m2, … mi mass points have the position vectors [latex]\overrightarrow{r_1}, \overrightarrow{r_2}, \overrightarrow{r_i}[/latex] w.r.t origin ‘O’. The position vector of C.M. say [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}[/latex]
i.e., [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}=\frac{m_1 \overrightarrow{r_1}+m_2 \overrightarrow{r_2}+\ldots}{m_1+m_2+\ldots}=\frac{m_i r_i}{M}[/latex]
where i = 1, 2, 3 .
Now, let us change the origin to O’ and assume that the C.M is now at p’ with
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 33
Multiplying eqn. (1) by mi and differentiating w.r.t to time, we get
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 34
even if we change the origin, the position of
centre of mass will not change i.e., Σp’i = 0

b) In rotational kinematics, K.ET of the system of particles = K.ET of the system when the particle velocities are taken w.r.t to CM + K.E of the translation of the system as a whole (i.e. of the C.M motion of the system)
i.e. [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1v12 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m2v22 + …..
= [[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1v12 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m2v2 +……] + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]Mv2
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mivi2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mivi2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2
∴ k = k’ + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
where M = total mass of particles
and y = velocity of C.M motion of the system.

c) From eq. (1), we have
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 35
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 36

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Find the centre of mass of three particles at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. The masses of the particles are 100g, 150 g, and 200 g respectively. Each side of the equilateral triangle is 0.5 long. [A.P. & T.S. Mar.18]
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 37
With the x – and y-axes chosen as shown in Fig. 7.9, the coordinates of points O, A and B forming the equilateral triangle are
respectively (0, 0), (0, 5, 0), (0.25. [latex]\sqrt{3}[/latex] ). Let the masses 100 g, 150g and 200g be located at O, A and B be respectively. Then.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 38

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
Find the centre of mass of a triangular lamina.
Solution:
The lamina (∆LMN) may be subdivided into narrow strips each parallel to the base (MN) as shown in Fig.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 39
By symmetry each strip has its centre of mass at its midpoint. If we joint the midpoint of all the strips we get the median LP. The centre of mass of the triangle as a whole therefore, has to lie on the median LP. Similarly, we can argue that it lies on the median MQ and NR. This means the centre of mass lies on the point of concurrence of the medians, i.e. on the centroid G of the triangle.

Question 3.
The density of the atmosphere at sea level is 1.29 kg/m3. Assume that it does not change with altitude. Then how high would the atmosphere extend ?
Solution:
The centres of mass C1, C2 and C3 of the squares are, by symmetry, their geometric centres and have coordinates (1/2,1/2), (3/ 2,1/2), (1/2,3/2) respectively.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 40

Question 4.
A 3m long ladder weighing 20 kg leans on a frictionless wall. Its feet reston the floor 1 m from the wall as shown in Fig. Find the reaction forcesof the wall and the floor.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 41
Let AB is 3 m long, A is at distance AC = 1 m from the wall. Pythagoras theorem,
BC = 2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m.
For translational equilibrium, taking the forces in the vertical direction, N – W = 0 ……….. (i)
Taking the forces in the horizontal direction,
F – F1 = 0 ……………. (ii)
taking the moments of the forces about A,
2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] F1 – (1/2) W = 0 ………….. (iii)
Now W = 20 g = 20 × 9.8 N = 1960.0 N
From (i) N = 196.0
From (iii) = F1 = W/4 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] = 196.0/4 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]
= 34.6 N
From (ii) F = F1 = 34.6 N
F2 = [latex]\sqrt{F^2+N^2}[/latex] = 199.0 N

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 5.
Find the scalar and vector products of two vectors
a = [latex](3 \vec{i}-4 \vec{j}+5 \vec{k})[/latex] and b = [latex](-2 \vec{i}+\vec{j}-3 \vec{k})[/latex]
Solution:
a.b = ([latex](3 \vec{i}-4 \vec{j}+5 \vec{k})[/latex]) . ([latex](-2 \vec{i}+\vec{j}-3 \vec{k})[/latex])
= -6 – 4 – 15 = -25
a × b = [latex]\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
\vec{i} & \vec{j} & \vec{k} \\
3 & -4 & 5 \\
-2 & 1 & -3
\end{array}\right|=7 \vec{i}-\vec{j}-5 \vec{k}[/latex]
Note b × a = [latex]7 \vec{i}-\vec{j}-5 \vec{k}[/latex]

Question 6.
Obtain Equation from first principles.
Solution:
The angular acceleration is uniform,
ω = αt + c (as α is comstant)
At t = 0, ω = ω0 (given)
From (i) we get at t = 0, ω = c = ω0
Thus, ω = αt + ω0 as required

Question 7.
The angular speed of a motor wheel is increased from 1200 rpm to 3120 rpm is 16 seconds, (i) What is its angular acceleration, assuming the acceleration to be uniform ? (ii) How many revolutions does the engine make during this time ?
Solution:
(i) We shall use ω = ω0 + αt
ω0 = initial angular speed in rad/s
= 2π × angular speed in rev/s
= [latex]\frac{2 \pi \times \text { angular speed in rev } / \mathrm{min}}{60 \mathrm{~s} / \mathrm{min}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2 \pi \times 1200}{60} \mathrm{rad} / \mathrm{s}[/latex]
= 40π rad/ s
Similarly ω = final angular speed in rad /s
= [latex]\frac{2 \pi \times 3120}{60} \mathrm{rad} / \mathrm{s}[/latex]
= 2π × 52 rad/s = 104 π rad/s
∴ Angular acceleration
α = [latex]\frac{\omega-\omega_0}{t}[/latex] = 4π rad/s2
The angular acceleration of the engine = 4π rad/s2

(ii) The angular displacement in time t is given by
θ = ω0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] αt2
= (40π × 16 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 4π × 162) rad
= (640 π+ 512 π )rad
= 1150π rad
Number of revolutions = [latex]\frac{1152 \pi}{2 \pi}[/latex] = 576

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 8.
Find the torque of a force [latex](\bar{i}-\bar{j}+\bar{k})[/latex] about the origin. The force acts on a particle whose position vector is [latex](\bar{i}-\bar{j}+\bar{k})[/latex] (Mar.’14, 13)
Answer:
Here r = [latex]\vec{i}-\vec{j}+\vec{k}[/latex]
and F = [latex]7 \vec{i}-3 \vec{j}+5 \vec{k}[/latex]
We shall use the determinant rule to find the torque τ = r × F
τ = [latex]\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
\vec{i} & \vec{j} & \vec{k} \\
1 & -1 & 1 \\
7 & 3 & -5
\end{array}\right|=(5-3) \vec{i}-(-5-7) \vec{j}[/latex] + [latex](3-(-7)) \vec{k}[/latex]
or τ = [latex]2 \vec{i}+12 \vec{j}+10 \vec{k}[/latex]

Question 9.
Show that the angular momentum about any point of a single particle moving with constant velocity remains constant throughout the motion.
Solution:
Let the particle with velocity v be at point P at some instant t. We want to calculate the angular momentum of the particle about an arbitrary point O.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 42
The angular momentum is 1 = r × mv. Its magnitude is mvr. sine, where θ is the angle between r and v as shown in Fig. Although the particle changes position with time, the line of direction of v remains the same and hence OM = r sin θ ; a constant.

Question 10.
Show that moment of a couple does not depend on the point about which you take the moments.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 43
The moment of the couple = sum of the moments of the two forces making the couple
= r1 × (-F) + r2 × F
= r2 × F + r1 × F
= (r2 – r1) × F
But r2 + AB = r2, and hence AB = r2 – r1.
The moment of the couple, therefore, is AB × F.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 11.
What is the moment of intertia of a disc about one of its diameters ?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 44
x and y-axes lie in the plane of the disc and z is perpendicular Iz = Ix = Iy
Now, x and y axes are along two diameters of the disc, and by symmetry the moment of inertia of the disc is the same about any diameter. Hence
Ix = Iy
and Iz = 2Iy
But Ix = Iy
So finally, Ix = Iz/2 = MR2/4
Thus the moment of inertia of a disc about any of its diameter is MR2/4.
Find similarly the moment of inertia of a ring about any of its diameter. Will the theorem be applicable to a solid cylinder?

Question 12.
What is the moment of inertia of a rod of mass M, length l about an axis perpendicular to it through one end ?
Solution:
For the rod of mass M and length l, I = Ml2/ 12. Using the parallel axes theorem, I’ = I + Ma2 with a = l/2 we get.
I’ = [latex]\mathrm{M} \frac{l^2}{12}+\mathrm{M}\left(\frac{l}{2}\right)^2=\frac{\mathrm{M} l^2}{3}[/latex]
We can check this independently since I is half the moment of inertia of a rod of mass 2M and length 21 about its midpoint,
I’ = [latex]2 \mathrm{M} \frac{4 l^2}{12} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{M} l^2}{3}[/latex]

Question 13.
What is the moment of inertia of a ring about a tangent to the circle of the ring ?
Solution:
The tangent to the ring in the plane of the ring is parallel to one of the diameters of the ring. The distance between these two parallel axes is R, the radius of the ring. Using the parallel axes theorem.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 45
= 0.4kg m2
α = angular acceleration
= 5.0 Nm/0.4 kg m2 = 12.5 S-2

b)Work done by the pull unwinding 2m of the cord
= 25 N × 2 m = 50 J

(c) Let ω be the final angular velocity. The kinetic energy gained = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Iω2
since the wheel starts from rest. Now,
ω2 = ω20 +2αθ, ω0 = 0
The angular displacement θ = length of unwound string / radius of wheel = 2m / 0.2 m = 10 rad
ω2 = 2 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 12.5 × 10.0 = 250 (rad/s)2
∴ K.E. gained = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.4 × 250 = 50 J

(d) The answers are the same, i.e. the kinetic energy gained by the wheel work done by the force. There is no loss of energy due to friction.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 14.
A cord of negligible mass is wound round the rim of a fly wheel of mass 20 kg and radius 20 cm. A steady pull of 25 N is applied on the cord as shown in Fig. The flywheel is mounted on a horizontal axle -with frictionless bearings.
(a) Compute the angular acceleration of the wheel.
(b) Find the work done by the pull, when 2m of the cord is unwound
(c) Find also the kinetic energy of the wheel at this point. Assume that the wheel starts from rest.
(d) Compare answers to parts (b) and (c).
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 46
a) We use Iα = τ
the toque τ = FR
= 25 × 0.20 Nm (as R = 0.20m)
= 5.0 Nm

Question 15.
Three bodies, a ring, a solid cylinder and a solid sphere roll down the same inclined plane without slipping. They start from rest. The radii of the bodies are identical. Which of the bodies reaches the ground with maximum velocity ?
Solution:
We assume conservation of energy of the rolling body, i.e. there is no loss of energy due to friction etc. The protential energy lost by the body in rolling down the inclined plane (= mgh) must, therefore, be equal to kinetic energy gained. (See fig.) Since the bodies start from rest the kinetic energy gained is equal tot he final kinetic energy of the odies. From K = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m v_{\mathrm{cm}}^2\left[1+\frac{\mathrm{k}^2}{\mathrm{R}^2}\right][/latex]
K = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m v^2 1+\left(\frac{K^2}{R^2}\right)[/latex] Where v is the final velocity of (the centre of mass of) the body.
Equating K and mgh
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 47
Note v2 is independent of the mass of the rolling body:
For a ring, k2 = R2
vring = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 g h}{1+1}}=\sqrt{g h}[/latex]
For a solid cylinder K2 = R2/0.2
vdisc = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 g h}{1+1 / 2}}=\sqrt{\frac{4 g h}{3}}[/latex]
For a solid sphere K2 = 2R2/5
vsphere = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 g h}{1+1 / 52}}=\sqrt{\frac{10 g h}{7}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State the conditions under which a force does no work. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:

  1. When the displacement is zero,
  2. When the displacement is perpendicular to the direction of the force,
  3. When the body moves under the action of a conservative force over a closed path.

Question 2.
Define : Work, Power and Energy. State their SI units.
Answer:
Work : The product of magnitude of displacement (S) and component of force (F cos θ) along the direction of displacement is called work, ie., W = [latex]\vec{F} \cdot \vec{S}[/latex] = F S cos θ.
Unit: Joule

Power : The rate of doing work by a force is called power, i.e., P = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex]
Unit: watt or J/S

Energy : The ability or the capacity to do work is called energy.
Unit: Joule

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
State the relation between the kinetic energy and momentum of a body.
Answer:
Kinetic energy (EK) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}^2}{2 \mathrm{~m}}[/latex]; where P = momentum of a body, m = mass of the body

Question 4.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) Work done by a man in lifting a bucket out of a well by means of a rope tied to the bucket.
b) Work done gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) To lift a bucket out of a well, force equal to the weight of the bucket has to be applied by the man along the vertical in upward direction. Since the displacement is also in upward direction θ = 0 and hence the workdone is positive.

b) The angle between the gravitational force and the displacement is 180°. Therefore workdone by the gravitational force is negative.

Question 5.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) Work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane.
b) Work done by gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) Friction always acts in a direction, opposite to the direction of motion. Hence work done is negative.
b) The work done is positive.

Question 6.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) Work done by an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity.
b) Work done by the resistive force of air on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
Answer:
a) The applied force and the displacement are in same direction. Work is positive.
b) The direction of resistive force is opposite to the direction of motion of the pendulum. Hence work done is negative.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 7.
State if each of the following statements is true or false. Give reasons for your answer.
a) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no matter what internal and external forces on the body are present.
b) The work done by earth’s gravitational force in keeping the moon in its orbit for its one revolution is zero.*
Answer:

  1. False
  2. True. Because gravitational force is conservative force.

Question 8.
Which physical quantity remains constant

  1. in an elastic collision
  2. in am. inelastic collision ?

Answer:

  1. In elastic collision : Both momentum and kinetic energy is constant.
  2. In an inelastic collision : Momentum remains constant.

Question 9.
A body freely falling from a certain height h, after striking a smooth floor rebounds and h rises to a height W2. What is the coefficient of restitution between the floor and the body? [T.S. – Mar.’18]
Answer:
h1 = h, h2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2}[/latex]
e = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{\mathrm{~h}_1}}=\sqrt{\frac{\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2}}{\mathrm{~h}}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 10.
What is the total displacement of a freely falling body, after successive rebounds from the same place of ground, before it comes to stop ? Assume that ‘e’ is the coefficient of restitution between the body and the ground.
Answer:
Total distance = [latex]\frac{h\left(1+e^2\right)}{\left(1-e^2\right)}[/latex], where h is the height through it has fallen and e is the coefficient of restitution.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is potential energy ? Derive an expression for the gravitational potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy: Definition : The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its position or state is called potential energy.
e.g. : 1) Energy possessed by water stored in a dam.
2) A stretched rubber card.
Formula for P.E = mgh : The potential energy is measured by the work done in lifting a body through a height ‘h’ against gravitational force. Consider a body of mass m on the body against gravitational force.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 1
∴ Gravitational force F = Weight of the body
Minimum force needed to lift the body = F in upwards direction
F = mg
Height lifted = h
Work done W = gravitational force × height lifted
W = mgh
This work done is stored as potential energy.
∴ Potential energy P.E = mgh.

Question 2.
A lorry and a car moving with the same momentum are brought to rest by the application of brakes, which provide equal retarding forces. Which of them will come to rest in shorter time ? Which will come to rest in less distance ?
Answer:
F1 = F2 and P1 = P2; W = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2; [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}^2}{2 \mathrm{~m}}[/latex]
∴ W = F.S = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}^2}{2 \mathrm{~m}}[/latex]
∴ S ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{m}[/latex]
The heavier body (lorry) comes to rest in shorter time. The lorry will come to rest in less distance.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
Distinguish between conservative and non-conservative forces with one example each.
Answer:
Forces can be classified into two types.

  1. Conservative force,
  2. Non conservative force.

1) Conservative force : Conservative forces are the forces under the action of which a body returns to its starting point with same K.F. with which it is projected work done by conservative force is path independent.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 2
Explanation : If work done along path I, path II, path III are w1, w2, w3 respectively and w1 = w2 = w3 then the force involved in the work is conservative force.
Workdone by a conservative force along a closed path is zero.
Ex. : Gravitational force, electrostatic force, spring force etc.

2) Non-conservative force : Non-conservative force are the forces under the action of which the work done depends upon the path followed and the K.E changes work done by non¬conservative force is path dependent.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 3
Explanation : If workdone along path I, path II, path III are w1, w2, w3 respectively and w1 ≠ w2 ≠ w3, then the force involved in the work is non conservative. Workdone by a non conservative force along a closed path is not zero.
Ex. : Frictional force, viscous force etc.

Question 4.
Show that in the case of one dimensional elastic collision, the relative velocity of approach of two colliding bodies before collision is equal to the relative velocity of – separation after collision. [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Consider two spheres (bodies) which have smooth, non-rotating of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are moving along the straight line joining the centres of mass with initial velocities u1 and u2 (u1 > u2). They undergo head on collision and move along the same line after collision with final velocities of v, and v2. These two bodies exert forces on each other during collision.
Let the collision be elastic, then both momentum and K.E are conserved.
According to law of conservation of linear momentum, Momentum of the system before collision = Momentum of the system after collision.
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m1v2
m1(u1 – v1) = m2 (v2 – u2) ……………….. (1)
According to law of conservation of kinetic energy, K.E of the system before collision = K.E of the system after collision.
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m1u12 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m2u22 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1v12 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m2v22
m1u12 + m2u22 = m1v12 + m2v22
m1(u12 – v12) = m2(v22 – u22) ……………….. (2)
[latex]\frac{\text { (2) }}{(1)} \Rightarrow \frac{m_1\left(u_1^2-v_1^2\right)}{m_1\left(u_1-v_1\right)}=\frac{m_2\left(v_2^2-u_2^2\right)}{m_2\left(v_2-u_2\right)}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{\left(u_1-v_1\right)\left(u_1+v_1\right)}{\left(u_1-v_1\right)}=\frac{\left(v_2-u_2\right)\left(v_2+u_2\right)}{\left(v_2-u_2\right)}[/latex]
(u1 – v1) = u2 + v2
u1 – u2 = v2 – v1
Relative velocity of approach from the above equation before collision = Relative velocity of separation after collision.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
Show that two equal masses undergo oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest.
Answer:
Oblique elastic collision : If the centres of mass of the colliding bodies are not initially moving along the line of impact, then the impact is called oblique collision.

Two equal masses undergo oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 4
Consider two smooth and perfectly elastic spheres of masses m1 and m2. Let u1 and u2 be their initial velocities before collission. Let v1 and v2 be their final velocities after collision, (α, β) and (θ, Φ) are the angles, the directions of motion make with the line of impact before collision and after collision.

Since the spheres are smooth, there is no (impulse) change of velocities perpendicular to the line of impact. Hence the resolved parts of velocity of the two spheres in the direction perpendicular to the line of impact remain unchanged.
∴ v1 sinθ = u1 sinα ……………………. (1)
and v2 sinΦ = u2 sin β …………………. (2)
According to the principle of conservation of momentum, the sum of the moment of the two spheres along the line of impact before collision and after collision are equal.
∴ m1u1 cosα + m2u2 cosβ = m1v1 cosθ + m2v2 cosΦ ……………… (3)
⇒ m1(u1 cosα – v, cosθ) = m2 (v2 cosΦ – u2 cosβ) ……………….. (4)
According to the principle of conservation of kinetic energy, the sum of the K.E along the line of impart before and after are equal.
⇒ [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1 (u1cosα)2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m2 (u2cosβ)2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1 (v1cosθ)2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m2(v2cos126,Φ)2
⇒ m1 [(u1cosα)2 – (v1cosθ)2 ] = m2 [(v2cosΦ)2 – (u2cosβ)2] …………….. (5)
[latex]\frac{(5)}{(4)}[/latex] ⇒ u1 cosα + v1 cosθ = v2 cosΦ + u2 cosβ
v1cosθ = v2 cosΦ + u2 cosβ – u1 cosα ……………… (6)
and v2 cosΦ = v1 cosθ + u1 cosα – u2 cosβ ……………….. (7)
sub. equation (7) in equation (3), we get
v1 cosθ = [latex]\left(\frac{m_1-m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right)[/latex] u1 cosα + [latex]\left(\frac{2 m_u u_2}{m_1+m_2}\right)[/latex] cosβ ……………… (8)
Sub-equation (6) in equation (3), we get
and v2 cosΦ = [latex]\left(\frac{m_2-m_1}{m_1+m_2}\right)[/latex] u2 cosβ + [latex]\left(\frac{2 m_1 u_1}{m_1+m_2}\right)[/latex] cosα ………………. (9)
If u2 = 0 and m1 = m2 then equation (2), we get Φ = 0 and from equation (8), θ = 90°. This means that if a sphere of mass ‘m’ collides obliquely on another perfectly elastic sphere of the same mass at rest, the directions of motions of the spheres after impact will be at right angles.

Question 6.
Derive an expression for the height attained by a freely falling body after ‘n’ number of rebounds from the floor.
Answer:
Consider a small sphere fall freely at a height ‘h’ onto the floor. It strikes the floor with a velocity of ‘u’
So that u1 = [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex] …………….. (1)
At the time of collision between the sphere and the floor, the initial and final velocities of floor are zero i.e., u2 = 0 and v2 = 0
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 5
Let ‘v1‘ be the final velocity of the sphere after the first collision.
∴ e = [latex]\frac{v_2-v_1}{u_1-u_2}=\frac{0-v_1}{\sqrt{2 g h}-0}=\frac{-v_1}{\sqrt{2 g h}}[/latex]
∴ v1 = -e[latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex] ……………… (2)
(-) indicates that the sphere rebounds
∴ The height (h1) attained by the sphere after first rebound is
h1 = [latex]\frac{v_1^2}{2 g}=\frac{(e \sqrt{2 g h})^2}{2 g}[/latex] = e2h
h1 = (e2)1 h ………………… (3)
Similarly we can that velocity attained by the sphere after second rebound.
v2 = -e2 [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex] …………………. (4)
and maximum height attained by the sphere after second rebound
h2 = (e2)2 h ………………… (5)
From the (2) and (4) equations
velocity of the sphere rebounds after ‘n’ collisions
vn = en [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex]
From the (3) and (5) equations, maximum height attained by the sphere after n rebounds hn = (e2)n h

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 7.
Explain the law of conservation of energy.
Answer:
The total mechanical energy of the system is conserved if the forces doing work on it are conservative. If some of the forces involved are non-conservative, part of the mechanical energy may get transformed into other forms such as heat, light and sound. However, the total energy of an isolated system does not change, as long as one accounts for all forms of energy. Energy may be transformed from one form to another but the total energy of an isolated system remains constant. Energy can neither be created, nor destroyed.

Since the universe as a whole may be viewed as an isolated system, the total energy of the universe is constant. If one part of the universe looses energy, another part must gain an equal amount of energy.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Develop the notions of work and kinetic energy and show that it leads to work energy theorem. [A.P. Mar. 17; T.S. Mar. 15, 14]
Answer:
Statement : The change in kinetic energy of a particle is equal to the workdone on it by the net force, i.e., kf – ki = W
Proof : Consider a particle of mass ‘m’ is moving with initial speed ‘u’ to final speed ‘v’. Let ‘a’ be its constant acceleration and S be its distance traversed. The kinematic relation is given by
v2 – u2 = 2as ………………. (1)
Multiplying both sides by [latex]\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}[/latex], we have 11
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 mas = FS …………….. (2)
Where the last step follows from Newton’s second law.
We can generalise Equation (1) to three dimensions by employing vectors
v2 – u2 = 2 [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d}}[/latex]
Once again multiplying both sides by [latex]\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}[/latex], we obtain
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 = m [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d}}[/latex] – [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d}}[/latex] …………………. (3)
The above equation provides a motivation for the definitions of work and kinetec energy.
In equation (3), [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 = kf – ki
Where ki, kf are initial and final kinetic energies and [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d}}[/latex] = W, where W refers workdone by a force on the body over a certain displacement.
kf – ki = W ……………….. (4)
Equation (4) is also a special case of the work-energy (WE) theorem.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
What are collisions ? Explain the possible types of collisions ? Develop the theory of one dimensional elastic collision. [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Collisions : A strong interactions between bodies that occurs for a very short interval during which redistribution of momenta occur ignoring the effect of other forces are called collisions.
Collisions are of two types :
i) Elastic collision : The collision in which both momentum and kinetic energy is constant is called elastic collision.
ii) Inelastic collision: The collision in which momentum remains constant but not kinetic energy is called Inelastic collision.
One dimensional elastic collision : Consider two spheres (bodies) which have smooth, non-rotating of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are moving along the straight line joining their centres of mass with initial velocities u1and u2 (u1 > u2). They undergo head on collision and move along the same line after collision with final velocities v1 and v2. These two bodies exert forces on each other during collision.
Hence both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. According to law of conservation of linear momentum.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 6
From the above equation, in one dimensional elastic collision, the relative velocity of approach before collision is equal to the relative velocity of separation after collision.
From equation (3) u1 – u2 = v2 – v1, v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 ………………… (4)
Sub equation (4) in equation (1) we get
m1 (u1 – v1) = m2 (u1 – u2 + v1 – u2), m1 u1 – m1v1 = m2 u1 – m2 u2 + m2 v1 – m2 u2
m1 u1 – m2 u1 + 2 m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 v1 (m1 – m2) u1 + 2 m2 u2 = (m1 + m2) u1
vi = [latex]\left(\frac{m_1-m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right) u_1+\left(\frac{2 m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right) u_2[/latex] ………………… (5)
From the equation (4), v1 = v2 – u1 + u2
Sub. this value in equation (1) we get
m1 (u1 – v2 + u1 – u2) = m2 (v2 – u2), m1 u1 – m1 v2 + m1 u1 – m1 u2 = m2 v2 – m2 u2
2m1 u1 + u2 (m2 – m1) = (m2 + m2)v2
v2 = [latex]\frac{2 m_1 u_1}{\left(m_1+m_2\right)}+\frac{\left(m_2-m_1\right)}{\left(m_1+m_2\right)}[/latex] u2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
State and prove law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. [AP – Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15, ’13; TS – Mar. ’17, ’16]
Answer:
Statement: “Energy can neither be created nor destroyed. But it can be converted from one form to another form. The total energy of a closed system always remains constant”. This law is called law of conservation of energy.

Proof : In case of freely falling body : A body of mass’m’ is dropped or freely falling at a height ‘H‘ from the ground. The total mechanical energy of the body E = K + U.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 7
Where k = kinetic energy; U = potential energy.
Suppose A, B and C are the points at heights H, h and ground respectively.
At ‘A’ : At the highest point, velocity u = 0
Kinetic energy K.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 = 0
Potential energy P.E. = mgH
Total mechanical energy of the body = EA = P.E. + K.E. = mgH + 0
∴ EA = mgH ………………. (1)

At ‘B’: When the body falls from A to B, which is at a height ‘h’ from the ground. The velocity of the body at ‘B’ is VB.
At ‘B’ the body possesses both P.E and K.E
S = H – h
u = 0
a = g
v = vB = ?
vB2 – u2 = 2as
a = g
v = vB = ?
vA2 – 0 = 2g (H – h)
VB = 2g(H – h)
Kinetic energy of the body (K) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mvB2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m 2g(H – h)
K = mg (H – h)
Potential energy (u) = mgh
∴ Total mechanical energy at B = k + u
EB = mg (H – h) + mgH
EB = mgh ……………… (2)

At ‘C’ : When the body reaches the point ‘c’ on the ground. The velocity of the body at ‘c is ‘vc’ can be found by using v2 – u2 = 2as equation.
S = H
u = 0
a = g
v = vc = ?
vc2 – 0 = 2gH
vc2 = 2gH
vc = [latex]\sqrt{2 \mathrm{gH}}[/latex]
Kinetic energy of the body (k) = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mvc2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m 2gH = mgH
Potential energy (u) = 0
Total energy at c = k + u
∴ EC = mgH ………………. (3)
From the above three equations (1), (2) and (3), the mechanical energy of the body remains constant under the action of gravitational force. Hence, law of conservation of energy is proved incase of freely falling body.

Problems

Question 1.
A test tube of mass 10 grams closed with a cork of mass 1 gram contains some ether. When the test tube is heated the cork flies out under the pressure of the ether gas. The test tube is suspended horizontally by a weight less rigid bar of length 5cm. What is the minimum velocity with which the cork should fly out of the tube, so that test tube describing a full vertical circle about the point O. Neglect the mass of ether.
Answer:
Mass of test tube M = 10g; Mass of ether m = 1g ;
Length of rigid bar = radius of circle (r) = 5cm
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 8
∴ r = 5 × 10-2 m, g = 10 ms2
[∴ action = – reaction]
Given the minimum velocity of cork flies out (= -v) (v) = The minimum velocity of test tube right
v = [latex]\sqrt{5 r g}=\sqrt{5 \times 5 \times 10^{-2} \times 10}[/latex]
= 5 × [latex]\sqrt{10^{-1}}[/latex] m/s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
A machine gun fires 360 bullets per minute and each bullet travels with a velocity of 600 ms-1. If the mass of each bullet is 5 gm, find the power of the machine gun ? [A.P. – Mar. ’18, ’16; Mar. ’13]
Answer:
Here n = 360; t = 60 sec; V = 600 ms-1; m = 5g = 5 × 10-3 kg; Power,
P = [latex]\frac{\text { K.E of n} \text { bullets }}{t}=\frac{\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mnV}^2}{t}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\frac{1}{2} \times 5 \times 10^{-3} \times 360 \times 600 \times 600}{60}[/latex]
∴ P = 5400, W = 5.4 KW.

Question 3.
Find the useful power used in pumping 3425 m3 of water per hour from a well 8 m deep to the surface, supposing 40% of the horse power during pumping is wasted. What is the horse power of the engine ?
Answer:
Here V = 3425 m3; d = 103 kg m-3; h = 8m;
g = 9.8ms-2; t = 1 hour = 60 × 60s
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 9
166.6 HP [1 hp = 746 Watt]

Question 4.
A pump is required to lift 600 kg of water per minute from a well 25 m deep and to eject it with a speed of 50 ms-1. Calculate the power required to perform the above task ? [Mar. 16 (TS), A.P (Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Here m = 600kg; h = 25m; V = 50ms-1; t = 60s;
Power of the motor,
P = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mgh}+\frac{1}{2} m \mathrm{~V}^2}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{m}\left(\mathrm{gh}+\frac{\mathrm{V}^2}{2}\right)}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{600}{60}\left(9.8 \times 25+\frac{50 \times 50}{2}\right)[/latex]
= 10 (245 + 1250) = 14950 = 14.95 KW.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
A block of mass 5 kg initially at rest at the origin is acted on by a force along the X-positive direction represented by F = (20 + 5x)N. Calculate the work done by the force during the displacement of the block from x = 0 to x = 4 m.
Answer:
Given m = 5kg;
F = (20 + 5x)
W = [latex]\int_{x=0}^{x=4} F d x[/latex]
= [latex]\int_0^4(20+5 x) d x[/latex]
= [latex][20 x]_0^4+\left[5 \frac{x^2}{2}\right]_0^4[/latex]
= 20 × 4 + 5 × [latex]\frac{16}{2}[/latex]
= 120 J.

Question 6.
A block of mass 2.5 kg is sliding down a smooth inclined plane as shown. The spring arranged near the bottom of the inclined plane has a force constant 600 N/m. Find the compression in the spring at the moment the velocity of the block is maximum?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 10
Answer:
Here m = 2.5 kg
µ = 0; K = 600 N/m
Let ‘x’ be the compression of the spring.
According to Newton’s third law, we have
Force due to block on spring
FB = – Restoring force of spring (FR)
In magnitude FB = FR = mg sinθ = Kx
2.5 × 10 × [latex]\frac{3}{5}[/latex] = 600 × x
⇒ x = [latex]\frac{15}{600}[/latex]
= 0.025 cm.

Question 7.
A force F = -[latex]\frac{K}{x^2}[/latex](x ≠ 0)acts on a particle along the X-axis. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = C +a to x = +2a. Take K as a positive constant.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 11

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 8.
A force F acting on a particle varies with the position x as shown in the graph. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = -a to x = +2a.
Answer:
Average force, F = [latex]\frac{+2 b-b}{2}=\frac{b}{2}[/latex]
⇒ x = -a to x = 2a
W = [latex]\int_{-a}^{+2 a} F d x=F[x]_a^{+2}=\frac{b}{2}[2 a-(-a)]=\frac{3 a b}{2}[/latex]

Question 9.
From a height of 20m above a horizontal floor, a ball is thrown down with initial velocity 20 m/s. After striking the floor, the ball bounces to the same height from which it was thrown. Find the coefficient of restitution for the collision between the ball and the floor.
Answer:
Here u = 20 mIs; s = h = 20m; g = 10m/s2;
v = u1
using, v2 – u2 = 2as
u12 = 202 = 2 × 10 × 20
u12 = 202 + 400 = 800
∴ u1 = [latex]\sqrt{800}[/latex]
And v1 = [latex]\sqrt{2 \mathrm{gh}}=\sqrt{2 \times 10 \times 20}=\sqrt{400}[/latex]
Since floor is at rest u2 = 0; v2 = 0
e = [latex]\frac{v_2-v_1}{u_1-u_2}=\frac{0-\sqrt{400}}{800-0}=-\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]
∴ e = [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex] […. -ve sign indicates, if rebounds]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 10.
A Ball falls from a height of 10 m on to a hard horizontal floor and repeatedly bounces. If the coefficient of restitution is [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]. What is the total distance travelled by the ball before it ceases to rebound ?
Solution:
Given h = 10m; e = [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]
d = h[latex]\left[\frac{1+\mathrm{e}^2}{1-\mathrm{e}^2}\right]=10\left[\frac{1+\frac{1}{2}}{1-\frac{1}{2}}\right]=10\left[\frac{\left(\frac{3}{2}\right)}{1 / 2}\right][/latex]
∴ d = 30 m

Additional Problems

Question 1.
The sign of work done by a force on a body is important to understand. State carefully if the following quantities are positive or negative:
a) Work done by a man ¡n lifting a bucket out of a well by means of a rope tied to the bucket.
b) Work done by gravitational force in the above case,
c) Work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane,
d) Work done by an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity.
e) Work done by the resistive force of air on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
Answer:
Workdone W = [latex]\vec{F} \cdot \vec{S}[/latex] = FS cosθ where θ is smaller angle between force j and displacement [latex]\vec{S}[/latex].
a) To lift the bucket, force equal to weight of b

b) The bucket moves in a direction opposite to the gravitational force which acts vertically downwards.
θ = 180°
W = FS cos 180° = -FS. It is negative

c) Friction always opposite the relative motion.
∴ θ = 180°, W = FS cos 180° = -FS. It is negative.

d) As the body moves along the direction of applied force θ = 0, W = FS cos 0° = FS. It is positive.

e) The direction of resistive face is opposite to the direction of motion of the bob i.e. θ = 180°. Hence workdone, in this case, is negative.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
A body of mass 2kg initially at rest moves under the action of an applied horizontal force of 7 N on a table with coefficient of kinetic friction = 0.1. Compute the
a) Work done by the applied force in 10s,
b) Work done by friction in 10s,
c) Work done by the net force on the body in 10s.
d) Change in kinetic energy of the body in 10s. and interpret your results.
Answer:
Here, m = 2kg, u = 0, F = 7N; µ = 0.1,
W = 2, t = 10s
Acceleration produced by applied force;
a = -[latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{7}{2}[/latex] = 3.5 m/s2
force of friction, f = µR = µmg = 0.1 × 2 × 9.8 = 1.96 N
Retardation produced by friction
a2 = -[latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{-1.96}{2}[/latex] = 0.98 m/s2
Net acceleration with which body moves,
a = a1 + a2
= 3.5 – 0.98 = 2.52m/s2
Distance moved by the body in 10 second from
S = Ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
= 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 2.52 × (10)2 = 126m.
a) Workdone by the applied force = F × S
W1 = 7 × 126 = 882J

b) Workdone by force of friction W2
= -f × s = -1.96 × 126 = 246.9J

c) Workdone by the net force W3 = Net force × distance
= (F – f)s = (7 – 1.96)126 = 635 J.

d) From v = u + at
v = 0 + 2.52 × 10 = 25.2 mS-1
Final K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 2 × (25.2)2
= 635J
Initial K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mu2 = 0
∴ Change in K.E = 635 – 0 = 635 J.
This shows that change in K.E of the body is equal to workdone by the net force on the body.

Question 3.
Given in Fig. are examples of some potential energy functions in one dimension. The total energy of the particle is indicated by a cross on the ordinate axis. In each case, specify the regions, if any, in which the particle cannot be found for the given energy. Also, indicate the minimum total energy the particle must have in each case. Think of simple physical contexts for which these potential energy shapes are relevant.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 12
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 13
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 14
Answer:
We know that total energy E = P.E + K.E (or) K.E = E – P.E and K.E can never be negative. The object cannot exist in the region where its K.E would become negative.

  1. For x > a, P.E (v0) > E
    ∴ K.E becomes negative. Hence the object cannot exist in the region x > a.
  2. For x < a and x > b, P.E (v0) > E
    ∴ K.E becomes negative. Hence the object cannot be present in the region x < a and x > b.
  3. Object cannot exist in any region because P.E (v0) > E in every region.
  4. On the same basis, the object cannot exist in the region -b/2 < x < – a/2 and a/2 < x < b/2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 4.
To potential energy function for a particle executing linear simple harmonic motion is given by V(x) = kx2/ 2, where k is the force constant of the oscillator. For k= 0.5 N m-1, the graph of V(x) versus x is shown in Fig. Show that a particle of total energy 1 J moving under this potential must ‘turn back’ when it reaches x = ± 2m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 15
Answer:
At any instant, the total energy of an oscillator is the sum of K.E and P.E i.e.
E = K.E + P.E, E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mu2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] kx2
The particles turns back at the instant, when its velocity becomes zero i.e. u = 0.
∴ E = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] kx2 as E = 1 Joule and K = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] N/m
∴ 1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] x2 (or) x2 = 4, x = ± 2m.

Question 5.
Answer the following :
a) The casing of a rocket in flight burns up due to friction. At whose expense is the heat energy required for burning obtained ? The rocket or the atmosphere ?
b) Comets move around the sun in highly elliptical orbits. The gravitational force on the comet due to the sun is not normal to the comet’s velocity in general. Yet the work done by the gravitational force over every complete orbit of the comet is zero. Why ?
c) An artificial satellite orbiting the earth in very thin atmosphere loses its energy gradually due to dissipation against atmospheric resistance, however small. Why then does its speed increase progressively as it comes closer and closer to the earth ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 16
d) In fig. (i) the man walks 2 m carrying a mass of 15 kg on his hands. In Fig. (ii), he walks the same distance pulling the rope behind him. The rope goes over a pulley, and a mass of 15 kg hangs at its other end. In which case is the work done greater ?
Answer:
a) The total energy of a rocket in a flight depends on its mass i.e. P.E + K.E = mgh + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2. When the casing burns up, its mass decreases. The total energy of the rocket decreases Hence heat energy required for burning is obtained from the rocket itself and not from the atmosphere.

b) This is because gravitational force is a conservative force. Work done by the gravitational force of the sun over a closed path in every complete orbit of the comet is zero.

c) When the artificial satellite orbiting the earth comes closer and closer to the earth, its potential energy decreases as sum of potential energy and kinetic energy is constant, therefore K.E of satellite and hence its velocity goes on increasing. However total energy of satellite decreases a little on account of dissipation against atmospheric resistance.

d) In fig. (a), force is applied on the mass, by the man in vertically upward direction but distance is moved along the horizontal.
∴ θ = 90°, W = FS cos 90° = zero.
In fig. (b), force is applied along the horizontal and the distance moved is also along the horizontal. Therefore v = 0°.
W = FS cosθ = mg × S cos0°
W = 15 × 9.8 × 2 × 1 = 294 Joule.
workdone in 2nd case is greater.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 6.
Underline the correct alternative :
a) When a conservative force does positive work on a body, the potential energy of the body increases / decreases / remains unaltered.
b) Work done by a body against friction always .results in a loss of its kinetic / potential energy.
c) The rate of change of total momentum of a many-particle system is proportional to the external force / sum of the internal forces on the system.
d) In an inelastic collision of two bodies, the quantities which do not change after the collision are the total kinetic energy/total linear mometum. total energy of the system of two bodies.
Answer:
a) Potential energy of the body decreases. The conservative force does positive work on a body, when it displaces the body in the direction of force. The body, therefore, approaches the center of force, decreasing x. Hence P.E decreases.

b) Workdone by a body against friction at the expense of its kinetic energy. Hence K.E of the body decreases.

c) Internal forces cannot change the total (or) net momentum of a system. Hence the rate of change of total momentum of many particle system is proportional to the external force on the system.

d) In an inelastic collision of two bodies, the quantities which do not change after the collision are total linear momentum and total energy of the system of two bodies. The total K.E changes as some energy appears in other forms.

Question 7.
State if each of the following statements is true or false. Give reasons for your answer.
a) In an elastic collision of two bodies, the momentum and energy of each body is conserved.
b) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no matter what internal and external forces on the body are present.
c) Work done in the motion of a body over a closed loop is zero for every force in nature.
d) In an inelastic collision/the final kinetic energy is always less than the initial kinetic energy of the system.
Answer:
a) False. The total momentum and total energy of the system are conserved and not of each body.
b) False. The external forces on the body may change the total energy of the body.
c) False. Work done in the motion of a body over a closed loop is zero only the body is moving under the action of conservative forces (like gravitational (or) electrostatic faces).
It is not zero when the forces are non conservative, e.g. frictional forces etc.
d) True, because in an inelastic collision, some kinetic energy usually changes into some other form of energy.

Question 8.
Answer carefully, with reasons ;
a) In an elastic collision of two billiard balls, is the total kinetic energy conserved during the short time of collision of the balls (i.e. when they are in contact) ?
b) Is the total linear momentum conserved during the short time of an elastic collision of two balls ?
c) What are the answer to (a) and (b) for an inelastic collision ?
d) If the potential energy of two billiard balls depends only on the separation distance between their centres, is the collision elastic or inelastic ? (Note, we are talking here of potential energy corresponding to the force during collision, not gravitational potential energy).
Answer:
a) No, K.E is not conserved during the given elastic collision. K.E. before and after collision is the same. Infact during collision, K.E of the balls gets converted into potential energy.
b) Yes, the total linear momentum is conserved during the short time of an elastic collision of two balls.
c) In an in elastic collision, total K.E is not conserved during collision.
d) The collision is elastic, because the forces involved are conservative.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 9.
A body is initially at rest. It undergoes one-dimensional motion with constant acceleration. The power delivered to it at time t is proportional to
i) t1/2
ii) t
iii) t3/2
iv) t2
Answer:
From v – u + at, v = 0 + at = at
As power, p = F × v = (ma) × at = ma2t
As m and a are constants, therefore, p ∝ t.

Question 10.
A body is moving unidirectionally under the influence of a source of constant power. Its displacement in time t is proportional to
i) t1/2
ii) t
iii) t3/2
iv) t2
Answer:
As power, P = force × velocity
∴ P = [MLT-2] [LT-1] = [mL2 T-3]
As P = [mL-2 T-3] = constant
∴ L2 T-3 = constant
∴ L2 ∝ T3 (or) L ∝ T3/2
(or) [latex]\frac{\mathrm{L}^2}{\mathrm{~T}^3}[/latex] = constant

Question 11.
A body constrained to move along the z-axis of a coordinate system is subject to a constant force F given by F = [latex]-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}[/latex] N where [latex]\hat{i}, \hat{j}, \hat{k}[/latex] are unit vectors along the x-, y- and z-axis of the system respectively. What is the work done by this force in moving the body a distance of 4 m along the z-axis ?
Answer:
Here, F = [latex]-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}[/latex]N
[latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}=4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}[/latex] (∵ 4m distance is along z-axis)
W = 2; As W = [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}[/latex]
∴ W = [latex](-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}) \cdot(4 \hat{\mathrm{k}})=12 \hat{\mathrm{k}} \cdot \hat{\mathrm{k}}[/latex] = 12J.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
An electron and a proton are detected in a cosmic ray experiment, the first with kinetic energy 10 keV and the second With 100 keV. Which is faster, the electron or the proton ? Obtain the ratio of their speeds, (electron mass = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, proton mass = 1.67 × 10-27 kg, 1 eV = 1.60 × 10-19 J).
Answer:
E1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] meve2 = 10 × 1.6 × 10-16 ……………… (i)
E2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mpvp2 = 100 × 1.6 × 10-16 ……………… (ii)
Divide (i) by (ii) [latex]\frac{m_v v_v^2}{m_p v_p^2}=\frac{1}{10}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{v_{\mathrm{e}}}{v_\rho}=\sqrt{\frac{1}{10}} \frac{m \rho}{m_e}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{\frac{1.67 \times 10^{-27}}{10 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31}}}=10^2 \sqrt{\frac{1.67}{91.1}}[/latex] = 13.53

Question 13.
A rain drop of radius 2 mm falls from a height of 500 m above the ground. It falls with decreasing acceleration (due to viscous resistance of the air) until at half its original height, it .attains its maximum (terminal) speed and moves with uniform speed thereafter. What is the work done by the gravita-tional force on the drop in the first and second half of its journey ? What is the work done by the resistive force in the entire journey if its speed on reaching the ground is 10 ms-1 ?
Answer:
Here, r = 2mm = 2 × 10-3m
Distance moved in each half of journey,
s = [latex]\frac{500}{2}[/latex] = 250 m
Density of water, ρ = 103 kg/m3
Mass of rain drop
= Volume of drop × Density
m = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]πr3 × ρ = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] (2 × 10-3)3 × 103
= 3.35 × 10-5 kg
w = mg × s = 3.35 × 10-5 × 9.8 × 250 = 0.082J
It should be clearly understood that whether the drop moves with decreasing acceleration (or) with uniform speed, work done by the gravitational force on the drop remains the same.
If there were no resistive forces, energy of drop on reaching the ground.
E1 = mgh = 3.35 × 10-5 × 9.8 × 500 = 0.164J
Actual energy, E2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 3.35 × 10-5 × (10)2 = 1.675 × 10-3 J.
∴ Workdone by the resistive forces,
W = E1 – E2 = 0.164 – 1.675 × 10-3
W = 0.1623 Joule.

Question 14.
A molecule in a gas container hits a horizontal wall with speed 200 m s-1 and angle 30° with the normal and rebounds with the same speed. Is momentum conserved in the collision ? Is the collision elastic or inelastic ?
Answer:
We know that momentum is conserved in all collisions, elastic as well as inelastic. Let us now check if K. E is conserved (or) not.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 17+
If the wall is too heavy, the recoiling molecule produces no velocity in the wall.
If m is mass of the gas molecule and M is mass of wall, then total K.E after collision
E2 = – m(200)2 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] M(0)2
E2 = 2 × 104 mJ
Which is the K.E. of the molecule before collision.
[E1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m(200)2 = 2 × 104 mJ]
Hence the collision is elastic.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 15.
A pump on the ground floor of a building can pump up water to fill a tank of volume 30 m3 in 15 min. If the tank is 40 m above the ground and the efficiency of the pump is 30%, how much electric power is consumed by the pump ?
Answer:
Here, volume of water = 30 m2, t = 15 min = 15 × 60 = 900s.
height h = 40m, efficiency η = 30%
As density of water = ρ = 103 kg /m3
∴ Mass of water pumped, m = volume x density = 30 × 103 kg
Actual power consumed (or) out power
P0 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{mgh}}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{30 \times 10^3 \times 9.8 \times 40}{900}[/latex] = 10370 watt.
If Pi is input power (required), then as η = [latex]\frac{P_0}{P_i}[/latex]
∴ Pi =[latex]\frac{P_0}{\eta}=\frac{10370}{\frac{30}{100}}[/latex] = 43567 watt = 43.567 KW.

Question 16.
Two identical ball bearings in contact with each other and resting on a frictionless table are hit head-on by another ball bearing of the same mass moving initially with a speed V. If the collision ¡s elastic, which of the following (Fig.) is a possible result after collision ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 18
Answer:
Let m be the mass of each ball bearing
Before collision, total K.E of the system =
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mV2 + 0 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mV2
After collision K.E of the system is
Case I, E1 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (2m) (V/2)2 = [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex] mV2
Case II, E2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mV2
Case III, E3 = – (3m) (V/3)2 = [latex]\frac{1}{6}[/latex]mV2
We observe that is conserved only in Case II. Hence the Case II is the only possibility.

Question 17.
The bob A of a pendulum released from 30° to the vertical hits another bob B of the same mass at rest on a tables as shown in Fig. How high does the bob A rise after the collision ? Neglect the size of the bobs and assume the collision to be elastic.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 19
Answer:
The bob A shall not rise. This is because when two bodies of same mass undergo an elastic collision, their velocities are interchanged. After collision, ball a will come to rest and the ball B would move with the velocity of A.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 18.
The bob of a pendulum is released from a horizontal position, If the length of the pendulum is 1.5 m, what is the speed with which the bob arrives at the lowermost point, given that it dissipated 5% of its initial energy against air resistance ?
Answer:
Here, h = 1.5m, V = ?
Energy dissipated = 5%
Taking B as the lowest position of the bob, its potential energy at B is zero. At the horizontal position, A total potential energy of the bob is mgh.
In going from A to B, P.E of the bob is converted into K.E
Energy conserved = 95% (mgh)
If V is velocity acquired at B, then K.E = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2
= [latex]\frac{95}{100}[/latex]mgh
V = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{95}{100} \times 2 \mathrm{gh}}=\sqrt{\frac{19}{20} \times 2 \times 9.8 \times 1.5}[/latex]
= 5.285ms-1.

Question 19.
A trolley of mass 300 kg carrying a sandbag of 25 kg is moving uniformly with a speed of 27 km/ h oh a frictionless track. After a while, sand starts leaking out of a hole on the floor of the trolley at the rate of 0.05 kg s-1. What is the speed of the trolley after the entire sand bag is empty ?
Answer:
As the trolley carrying the sane bag is moving uniformly, therefore, external force on the system = zero.
When the sand leaks out, it does not lead to the application of any external force on the trolley. Hence the speed of the trolley shall not change.

Question 20.
A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line with velocity v = ax3/2 where a = 5m-1/2 s-1. What is the workdone by the net force during its displacement from x = 0 to x = 2 m ?
Answer:
Here, m = 0.5 kg; v = ax3/2, a = 5m-1/2 s-1,
w = ?
Intial vel. at x = 0, v1 = a × 0 =0
Final vel, at x = 2, v2 = a23/2 = 5 × 23/2
Workdone = increase in K.E. = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m
(v22 – v12), W = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.5 [(5 × 23/2)2) – 0]
= 50 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 21.
The blades of a windmill sweep out a circle of area A.
(a) If the wind flows at a velocity v perpendicular to the circle, what is the mass of the air passing through it in time t ?
(b) What is the kinetic energy of the air ?
(c) Assume that the windmill converts 25% of the wind’s energy into electrical energy and that A = 30 m2, v = 36 km/h and the density of air is 1.2 kg m-3. What is the electrical power produced ?
Answer:
a) Volume of wind flowing /sec = AV
Mass of wind flowing / sec = AVρ
Mass of air passing in t sec = AVρt

b) K.E of air = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (AVρt)
v2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] av3ρt.

c) Electrical energy produced = [latex]\frac{25}{100}[/latex]
K.E of air = [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × Av3ρt
Electrical power = [latex]\frac{1}{8} \frac{A v^3 \rho t}{t}=\frac{1}{8} A v^3 \rho t[/latex]
P = [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] × 30 × (10)3 × 1.2 = 4500 watt
= 4.5 Kw.

Question 22.
A person trying to lose weight (dieter) lifts a 10kg mass, one thousand times, to a height of 0.5 m ech time. Assume that the potential energy lost each time she lowers the mass is dissipated,
(a) How much work does she do against the gravitational force ?
(b) Fat supplies 3.8 × 107J of energy per kilo-gram which is converted to mechanical energy with a 20% efficiency rate. How much fat will the dieter use up ?
Answer:
Here, m = 10 kg, h = 0.5 m, n = 1000
a) Workdone against gravitational force W = n(mgh)
= 1000 × (10 × 9.8 × 0.5 = 49000 J

b) Mechanical energy supplied by 1 kg of fat
= 3.8 × 10 × [latex]\frac{20}{100}[/latex] = 0.76 × 107 J/kg
∴ Fat used up by the dieter
= [latex]\frac{1 \mathrm{~kg}}{0.76 \times 10^7}[/latex] = 4000 = 6.45 × 10-3 kg.

Question 23.
A family uses 8 kW of power,
(a) Direct solar energy is incident on the horizontal surface at an average rate of 200 W per square meter. If 20% of this energy can be converted to useful electrical energy, how large an area is needed to supply 8 kW ?
(b) Compare this area to that of the roof of a typical house.
Answer:
Let area be A’ square meter
∴ Total power = 200A
Useful electrical energy produced/sec = [latex]\frac{20}{100}[/latex]
(200A) = 8KW = 40A = 8000 (watt)
Therefore, A = [latex]\frac{8000}{40}[/latex] = 200 sq.m
This area is comparable to the roof of a large house of 250 sq.mt.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 24.
A bullet of mass 0.012 kg and horizontal speed 70 ms-1 strikes a block of wood of mass 0.4 kg and instantly comes to rest with respect to the block. The block is suspended from the ceiling by means of thin wires. Calculate the height to which the block rises. Also, estimate the amount of heat produced in the block.
Answer:
Here m1 = 0.012kg. u1 = 70 m/s m2 = 0.4 kg, u2 = 0
As the bullet comes to rest w.r. to the block, the two behave as one body. Let v be the velocity acquired by the combination. Applying principle of conservation of linear momentum, (m1 + m2)v
= m1u1 + m2u2 = m1u1
V = [latex]\frac{m_1 u_1}{m_1+m_2}=\frac{0.012 \times 70}{0.012+0.4}=\frac{0.84}{0.412}[/latex]
= 2.04 m/s.
Let the block rise to a height h.
RE of combination = K.E. of the combination
(m1 + m2)gh = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (m1 + m2)v2
h = [latex]\frac{v^2}{2 g}=\frac{2.04 \times 2.04}{2 \times 9.8}[/latex] = 0.212m.
For calculating heat produced. We calculate energy lost (W). where
W = intial K.E of bullet – final K.E of combination
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1u12 [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (m1 + m2)v2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.012 (70)2 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (0.412) (2.04)2
W = 29.4 – 0.86 = 28.54 Joule.
∴ heat produd. H = [latex]\frac{W}{j}=\frac{28.54}{4.2}[/latex] = 6.8 cal.

Question 25.
A 1kg block situated on a rough incline is connected to a spring of spring constant 100 N m-1 as shown in Fig. The block is released from rest with the spring in the unstretched position. The block moves 10 cm down the incline before coming to rest. Find the coefficient of friction between the block and the incline. Assume that the spring has a negligible mass and the pulley is frictionless.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 20
Answer:
From Fig.
R = mg cosθ
F = μR = μmg cosθ
Net force on the block down the incline
= mg sin θ – F = mg sin θ – μ mg cos θ
= mg (sin – μ cos θ)
Distanced moved, x = 10cm = 0.1m.
In equilibrium, work done = P.E of streched spring
mg (sin θ – μ cos θ) x = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] Kx2
2mg (sin θ – μ cos θ) = Kx
2 × 1 × 10 (sin 37° – μ cos 37°) = 100 × 0.1
20(0.601 – μ 0.798) = 10
∴ μ = 0.126

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 26.
A bob of mass 0.3 kg falls from the ceiling of an elevator moving down with an uniform speed of 7 ms-1. It hits the floor of the elevator (length of the elevator = 3 m) and does not rebound. What is the heat produced by the impact ? Would your answer be different if the elevator were stationary ?
Answer:
Here, m 0.3kg, v = 7 m/s h = length of elevator = 3m
As relative of the bob w.r.t elevator is zero, therefore, in the impact, only potential energy of the fall is converted into heat energy.
Amount of heat produced = P.E lost by the bob = mgh = 0.3 × 9.8 × 3 = 8.82 J.
The answer shall not be different, if the elevator were stationary as the bob too in that cause would start from stationary position, i.e. relative velocity of the ball w.r.t elevator would continue to be zero.

Question 27.
A trolley of mass 200 kg moves with a uniform speed of 36 km / h on a frictionless track. A child of mass 20 kg runs on the trolley from one end to the other (10 m away) with a speed of p m s-1 relative to the trolley in a direction opposite to the its motion and jumps out of the trolley. What is the final speed of the trolley ? Flow much has been trolley moved from the time the child begins to run ?
Answer:
Here, mass of trolley, m1 = 200 kg
speed of the trolley v = 36 km/h = 10m/s
mass of the child, m2 = 20 kg
Before the child starts running, momentum of the system.
P1 = (m1 + m2)v = (200 + 20)10
= 2200kg ms-1.
∴ Momentum of the system when the child is running
P2 = 200v1 + 20 (v1 – 4) = 220v1 – 80
As no external force is applied on the system.
∴ P2 = P1
220v1 – 80 = 2200
220v1 = 2200 + 80 = 2280
v1 = [latex]\frac{2280}{220}[/latex] = 10.36 ms-1
Time taken by the child to run a distance of 10m over the trolley, t = [latex]\frac{10 \mathrm{~m}}{4 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}[/latex] = 2.5 s
Distance moved by the trolley in this time = Velocity of trolley × time = 10.36 × 2.5 = 25.9 m

Question 28.
Which of the following potential energy curves in Fig. cannot possibly describe the elastic collision of two billiard balls ? Here r is the distance between centres of the balls.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 21
Answer:
The potential energy of a system of two masses varies inversely as the distance (r) between them i.e,
v(r) ∝ [latex]\frac{\mathrm{1}}{\mathrm{r}}[/latex].
When the two billiard balls touch each other, P.E become zero i.e. at r = R + R = 2R;
v(r) = 0. Out of the given graphs, curve (v) only satisfies these two conditions.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 29.
Consider the decay of a free neutron at rest : n → p + e Show that the two-body decay of this type must necessarily give an electron of fixed energy and, therefore, cannot account for the observed continuous energy distribution in the β-decay of a neutron or a nucleus (Fig.).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 22
(Note : The simple result of this exercise was one among the several arguments advanced by W. Pauli to predict the existence of a third particle in the decay products of β-decay. This particle is known as neutrino. We now know that it is a particle of intrinsic spin 1/2 (like e-, p or n), but is neutral, and either masslessor having an extremely small mass (compared to the mass of electron) and which interacts very weakly with matter. The correct decay process of neutron is: n → p + e- + v
Answer:
In the decay process, n → p + e
energy of electrons is equal to (∆m)c2
Where ∆m = mass defect = mass of neutron – mass of proton and electron;
which is fixed. Therefore, two body decay of this type cannot explain the observed continuous energy distribution in the β-decay of a neutron or a nucleus.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Find the angle between force F = [latex](3 \bar{i}+4 \bar{J}-5 \bar{k})[/latex] unit and displacement d = [latex](3 \bar{i}+4 \bar{J}-5 \bar{k})[/latex] unit. Also find the projection of F on d.
Answer:
F.d = Fxdx + Fydy + Fzdz = 3(5) + 4(4) + (-5)
(3) = 16 unit
Hence F.d = F d cos θ = 16 unit
Now F.F = F2 – Fx2 + Fy2 + Fz2
= 9 + 16 + 25 = 50 unit
and d.d = d2 = dx2 + dy2 + dz2
= 25 + 16 + 9 = 50 unit
∴ cosθ = [latex]\frac{16}{\sqrt{50} \sqrt{50}}=\frac{16}{50}[/latex] = 0.32
= θ = cos-1 0.32.

Question 2.
It is well known that a raindrop falls under the influence of the downward gravitational force and the opposing resistive force. The latter is known to be proportional to the speed of the drop but is otherwise undetermined. Consider a drop of mass 1.00 g falling from a height 1.00 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50.0 ms-1. (a) What is the work done by the gravitational force? What is the work done by the unknown resistive force?
Answer:
(a) The change in kinetic energy of the drop is
∆k = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2 – 0
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10-3 × 50 × 50 = 1.25 J
where we have assumed that the drop is initially at rest.
Assuming that g is a constant with a value 10 m/s2, the work done by the gravitational force is,
Wg = mgh = 10-3 × 10 × 10-3 = 10.0 J

(b) From the work-energy theorem
∆K = Wg + Wr
Where Wr is the work done by the resistive force on the raindrop. Thus
Wr = ∆K – Wg = 1.25 – 10 = -8.75 J in negative.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
A cyclist comes to a skidding stop in 10 m. During this process, the force on the cycle due to the road is 200 N and is directly opposed to the motion,
(a) How much work does the road do on the cycle ?
(b) How much work does the cycle do on the road ?
Answer:
Work done on the cycle by the road is the work done by the stopping (frictional) force on the cycle due to the road.
(a) The stopping force and the displacement make an angle of 180° (π rad) with each other.
Thus, work done by the road,
Wr = Fd cosθ = 200 × 10 × cos π
= -2000 J
It is this negative work that brings the cycle to a halt in accordance with WE theorem.

(b) From Newton’s Third Law an equal and opposite force acts on the road due to the cycle. Its magnitude is 200 N. However, the road, undergoes no displacement. Thus work done by cycle on the road is zero.

Question 4.
In a ballistics demonstration a police officer fires a bullet of mass 50.0g with speed 200 ms-1 (Bullet of mass = 5 × 10-2, Bullet of speed = 200; Bullet of K(J) = 103; on soft plywood of thickness 2.00 cm. The bullet emerges with only 10% of its initial kinetic energy. What is the emergent speed of the bullet ?
Answer:
The initial kinetic energy of the bullet is mv2 / 2 = 1000 J. It has a final kinetic energy of 0.1 × 1000 = 100 J. If vf is the emergent speed of the bullet,
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2f = 100 J
vf = [latex]\frac{\sqrt{2 \times 100 \mathrm{~J}}}{0.05 \mathrm{~kg}}[/latex] = 63.2 ms-1
The speed is reduced by approximately 68% (not 90%).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
A woman pushes a trunk on a railway platform which has a rough surface. She applies a force of 100 N over a distance of 10 m. Thereafter, she gets progressively tired and her applied force reduces linearly with distance to 50 N. The total distance through which the trunk has been moved is 20 m. Plot the force applied by the woman and the frictional force, which is 50 N versus displacement. Calculate the work done by the two forces over 20m.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 23
Plot of the force F applied by the woman and the opposing frictional force f versus displacement.
The plot of the applied force is shown in Fig. At x = 20 m, F = 50 N (≠ 0). We are given that the frictional force f is |f| = 50N. It opposes motion and acts in a direction opposite to F. It is therefore, shown on the negative side of the force axis.
The work done by the woman is
WF → area of the rectangle ABCD + area of the trapezium CEID
WF = 1000 × 10 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex](100 + 50) ×10
= 1000 + 750 = 1750 J
The work done by the frictional force is
Wf → area of the rectangle AGHI
Wf → (-50) × 20 = -1000 J
The area on the negative side of the x- axis has a negative sign.

Question 6.
A bob of mass m is suspended by a light string of length L. It is imparted a horizontal velocity v0 at the lowest point A such that it completes a semi circular trajectory in the vertical plane with the string becoming slack only on reaching the topmost point, C. This is shown in Fig. Obtain an expression for (i) v0 (ii) the speeds at points B and C; (iii) the ratio of the kinetic energies (KB/K) at B and C. Comment on the nature of the trajectory of the bob after it reaches the point C.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 24
Answer:
Thus, at A:
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2} {\mathrm{mv}_0^2}[/latex] ………………… (1)
TA – mg = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mv}_0^2}{\mathrm{~L}}[/latex] [Newtons Second Law]
where TA is the tension in the string at A. At the highest point C, the string slackens, as the tension in the string (Tc) becomes zero.
E = – [latex]\frac{1}{2} {\mathrm{mv}_c^2}[/latex] + 2mgL ………………… (2) .
mg = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mv}_c^2}{\mathrm{~L}}[/latex] [Newtons Second law] ……………… (3)
where vc is the speed at C. From equations (2) & (3)
E = [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex]mgL
Equating this to the energy at A
[latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex] mgL = [latex]\frac{m}{2} v_0^2[/latex] or, v0 = [latex]\sqrt{5 \mathrm{gL}}[/latex]

(ii) It is clear from Equation (3)
vc = [latex]\sqrt{ \mathrm{gL}}[/latex]
At B, the energy is
E = [latex]\frac{1}{2} m v_B^2[/latex] + mgL
Equating this to the energy at A and empLoying the result from (i),
namely v02 = 5gL
[latex]\frac{1}{2} m v_B^2+m g L=\frac{1}{2} m v_0^2[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex]mgl ∴ vB = [latex]\sqrt{3\mathrm{gL}}[/latex]

(iii) The ratio of the kinetic energies at Band C is :
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{C}}}=\frac{\frac{1}{2} m v_{\mathrm{B}}^2}{\frac{1}{2} m v_{\mathrm{c}}^2}=\frac{3}{1}[/latex]
At point C, the string becomes slack and the velocity of the bob is horizontal and to the left.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 7.
To simulate car accidents, auto manufactures study the collisions of moving cars with mounted springs of different spring constants. Consider a typical simulation with a car of mass 1000 kg moving with a speed 18.0 km / h on a smooth road and colliding with a horizontally mounted spring of spring constant 6.25 × 103 N m1. What is the maximum compression of the spring ?
Answer:
At maximum compression the kinetic energy of the car is converted entirely into the potential energy of the spring.
The kinetic energy of the moving car is 11
K = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 103 × 5 × 5
K = 1.25 × 104 J
where we have converted 18 km h-1 to 5ms-1 [It is useful to remember that 36 km h-1 = 10 ms-1]. At maximum compression xm, the potential energy. V of the spring is equal to the kinetic energy K of the moving car from the principle of conservation of mechanical energy.
V = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] K xm2 = 1.25 × 104 J
We obtain xm = 2.00 m

Question 8.
Consider example 8 taking the coefficient of friction, μ, to be 0.5 and calculate the maximum compression of the spring.
Answer:
In presence of friction, both the spring force and the frictional force act so as to oppose the compression of the spring as shown in Fig.
We invoke the work-energy theorem, rather than the conservation of mechanical energy.
The change in kinetic energy is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 25
∆K = Kf – Ki = 0 – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2
The work done by the net force is
W = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]Kxm2 – μm g xm
Equating we have
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]mv2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]K xm2 + μm g xm
Now μmg = 0.5 × 103 × 10 = 5 × 103 N
(taking g = 10.0 ms-2]. After rearranging the above equation we obtain the following quadratic equation in the unknown xm.
K xm2 + 2μm gxm – mv2 = 0
xm = [latex]\frac{-\mu m g+\left[\mu^2 m^2 g^2+m k v^2\right]^{1 / 2}}{k}[/latex]
where we take the positive square root since xm is positive. Putting in numerical values we obtain
xm = 1.35 m
which, as expected, is less than the result in example 7
If the two forces on the body consist of a conservative force Fc and a non- conservative force Fnc, the conservation of mechanical energy formula will have to be modified. By the WE theorem
But Hence, (Fc + Fnc) ∆x = ∆K
Fc ∆x = ∆V
∆ (K + V) = Fnc ∆x
∆E = Fnc ∆x
where E is the total mechanical energy. Over the path this assumes the form Ef – Ei = Wnc
Where Wnc is the total work done by the non-conservative forces over the path. Note that unlike the conservative force. Wnc depends on the particular path i to f.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 9.
Examine express
(a) The energy required to break one bond in DNA in eV(1.6 × 10-19J);
(b) The kinetic energy of an air molecule (10-21J) in eV;
(c) The daily in take of a human adult in kilocalories (107).
Answer:
(a) Energy required to break one bond of DNA is [latex]\frac{10^{-20} \mathrm{~J}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{eV}}[/latex] ; 0.06 eV
Note 0.1 eV = 100 meV (100 millielectron volt).

(b) The kinetic energy of an air molecule is
[latex]\frac{10^{-21} \mathrm{~J}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{eV}}[/latex]; 0.0062 eV
This is the same as 6.2 meV.

(c) The average human consumption in a day
is [latex]\frac{10^7 \mathrm{~J}}{4.2 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~J} / \mathrm{kcal}}[/latex]; 2400 kcaL

Question 10.
An elevator can carry a maximum load of 1800 kg (elavator + passengers) is moving up with a constant speed of 2ms-1. The frictional force opposing the motion is 4000 N. Determine the minimum power delivered by the motor to the elevator in watts as well as in horse power.
Answer:
The downward force on the elevator is F = mg + Ff = (1800 × 10) + 4000 = 22000 N
The motor must supply enough power to balance this force. Hence,
P = F.v = 22000 × 2 = 44000 W = 59 hp

Question 11.
Slowing down of neutrons : In a nuclear reactor of high speed (typically 107ms-1) must be slowed to 103 ms-1 so that it can have a high probability of interacting with isotope [latex]{ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}[/latex] and causing it to fission. Show that a neutron can lose most of its kinetic energy in an elastic collision with a light nuclei like deuterium or carbon which has a mass of only a few times the neutron mass. The material making up the light nuclei, usually heavy water (D2O) or graphite, is called a moderator.
Answer:
The initial kinetic energy of the neutron is
K1i = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] m1 v1i2
While its final kinetic energy from
V1f = [latex]\frac{\left(m_1-m_2\right)}{m_1+m_2}[/latex] v1i2
K1f = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m1 v12f = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]m1 [latex]\left(\frac{m_1-m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right)^2[/latex] v1i2
The fractional kinetic energy lost is
f1 = [latex]\frac{K_{1 f}}{k_{1i}}\left(\frac{m_1-m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right)^2[/latex]
while the fractional kinetic energy gained by the moderating nuclei K2f/ K1i is f2 = 1 – f1
elastic collision = [latex]\frac{4 m_1 m_2}{\left(m_1+m_2\right)^2}[/latex]
One canalso verify this result by substituting from
v2f = [latex]\frac{2 m_1 v_1i}{m_1+m_2}[/latex]
For deuterium m2 = 2m1 and we obtain f1 = 1/9 while f2 = 8/9. Almost 90% of the neutron’s energy is transferred to deuterium. For carbon f1 = 71.6% and f2 = 28.4%. In practice, however, this number is smaller since head-on collisions are rare.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
Consider the collision depicted in Fig. to be between two billiard balls with equal masses m1 = m2. The first bail is called the cue while the second bail is called the target. The billiard player wants to ‘sink’ the target ball in a corner pocket, which is at an angle θ2 = 37°. Assume that the collision is elastic and that friction and rotational motion are not important. Obtain θ1.
Answer:
From momentum conservation, since the masses are equal
v1i = v1f + v2f
(or) v1i2 = (v1f + v2f). (v1f + v2f)
= v1f2 + V2f2 + 2v1fv2fcos (θ1 + 37°) …………….. (1)
Since the collision is elastic and m1 = m2 it follows from conservation of kinetic energy that
v1i2= v1f2 + v2f2 ………………. (2)
Comparing equations (1) and (2), we get
cos (θ1 + 37°) = 0
or θ1 +37° = 90°
Thus, θ1 = 53°
This proves the following results : When two equal masses undergo a glancing elastic collision with one of them at rest, after the collision, they will move at right angles to each other.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 5th Lesson Laws of Motion Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 5th Lesson Laws of Motion

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is inertia? What gives the measure of inertia? [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The resistance of the body to change its state of rest the state of uniform motion in a straight line is called inertia of the body.
Acceleration = [latex]\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Mass }}[/latex]
∴ The more the mass, the less acceleration and the more inertia. The mass of a body is a quantitative measure of its inertia.

Question 2.
According to Newton’s third law, every force is accompanied by an equal and opposite force. How can a movement ever take place?
Answer:
Because both action and reaction are taking place on different bodies.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 3.
When a bullet is fired from a gun, the gun gives a kick in the backward direction. Explain. [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Due to law of conservation of momentum, Recoil of the gun V = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mu}}{\mathrm{M}}[/latex]
Where M – mass of the gun; m = mass of the bullet; u = velocity of the bullet

Question 4.
Why does a heavy rifle not recoil as strongly as a light rifle using the same cartridges ?
Answer:
Recoil of the Gun V = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mu}}{\mathrm{M}}[/latex]
Due to heavy mass of rifle the recoil is less.

Question 5.
If a bomb at . _st explodes into two pieces, the pieces must travel in opposite directions. Explain. [T.S. Mar. 16, 15]
Answer:
According to law of conservation of momentum,
Mu = m1v1 + m2v2
Initially the bomb is at rest u = 0
m1v1 + m2v2 = 0
or m1v1 – m2v2
(Negative sign indicates that the pieces must travel in opposite direction)

Question 6.
Define force. What are the basic forces in nature ?
Answer:
The force is on which changes or tends to change the state of rest or motion of a body. Basic forces :

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Electromagnetic force
  3. Nuclear force
  4. Weak interaction force

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 7.
Can the coefficient of friction be greater than one ?
Answer:
Yes, coefficient of friction may be greater than one. In some particular cases it is possible. They are

  1. Due to increase the inner molecular attractive forces between surfaces when the contact surfaces are highly polished.
  2. When the contact surfaces of the bodies are inter locking the coefficient friction may be greater than one.

Question 8.
Why does the car with a flattened tyre stop sooner than the one with inflated tyres ?
Answer:
Flattened deforms more than the inflated tyre. Due to greater deformation of the type rolling friction is large nence it stops soon.

Question 9.
A horse has to pull harder during the start of the motion than later. Explain. [Mar. 13]
Answer:
We know the limiting frictional force is greater than kinetic frictional force. For starting motion of the cart, the limiting friction is to be overcome. Once motion is set, frictional force reduces. Therefore, the horse has to pull harder during starting of the cart.

Question 10.
What happens to the coefficient of friction if the weight of the body is doubled? [A.P. – Mar. 16]
Answer:
If weight of a body is doubled, coefficient of friction does not change. Coefficient of friction is independent of normal reaction. If weight is doubled, normal reaction doubled and correspondingly frictional force doubled. So, coefficient of friction does not change.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
A stone of mass 0.1 kg is thrown vertically upwards. Give the magnitude and direction of the net force on the stone
(a) during its upward motion.
(b) during the downward motion.
(c) at the highest point, where it momentarily comes to rest.
Answer:
Given that, mass of stone, m = 0.1 kg, g = 9.8 ms-2.
a) During upward motion: Magnitude of net force on the stone,
F = |-mg|; F = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98N.
Direction of net force is in upward direction.

b) During downward motion: Magnitude of net force on the stone,
F = ma = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98N.
Direction of net force is in downward direction.

c) At the heighest point : Magnitude of net force, F = mg = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98N..
At highest point of stone, direction is indeterminate.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
Define the terms momentum and impulse. State and explain the law of conservation of linear momentum. Give examples.
Answer:
Momentum : The product of mass and velocity of a body is called momentum momentum p = mv .
Impulse : The product of force and time that produces finite change in momentum of the body is called impulse.
Impulse (I) = Force × time duration = mat = [latex]m \frac{(v-u)}{t} t[/latex]
= (mv – mu)
Law of conservation of linear momentum : The total momentum of an isolated system of interacting particles remains constant it there is no resultant external force acting on it.

Explanation : Consider two smooth, non-rotating spheres of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2). Let u1 and u2 be their initial velocities. Let v1 and v2 be final velocities after head on collision. According to law of conservation of linear momentum, we have
Momentum of the system before collision = Momentum of the system after collision.
t.e., m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Examples :

  1. Motion of a Rocket
  2. Bullet-Gun motion

Question 3.
Why are shock absorbers used in motor cycles and cars ?
Answer:
When a scooter or a car moves on a rough road it receives an impulse due to the Jerkey motion. In case the shockers are used in the vehicle, the time of impact increases, and decreases the impulsive force, due to increased value of the time of impact the force of impact is reduced. So it saves the vehicle and its occupants from experiencing reverse jerks.

Question 4.
Explain the terms limiting friction, dynamic friction and rolling friction.
Answer:
Limiting friction : The maximum value of static friction is called “Limiting friction”.
It is denoted by FL = Fs(max) [∵ Fs ≤ μsN]
Dynamic friction (Kinetic friction) : The resistance encountered by a sliding body on a surface is called kinetic or dynamic friction Fk.
If the applied force overcomes the limiting friction and sets the body into motion. Then motion of the body is resisted by another friction called “Dynamic friction” or “Kinetic friction”.

Rolling friction : ‘The resistance encountered by a rolling body on a surface is called “Rolling friction”.
If a wheel or a cylinder or a spherical body like a marble rolls on horizontal surface, the speed of rolling gradually decreases and it finally stops.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 5.
Explain advantages and disadvantages of friction. [T.S., A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Advantages of friction :

  1. Safe walking on the floor, motion of vehicles etc., are possible only due to friction.
  2. Nails, screws are driven into walls (or) wooden surfaces due to friction.
  3. Friction helps the fingures hold the things (or) objects like pen, pencil and water tumbler etc.
  4. Speed running vehicles etc. can be stopped suddenly when friction is present, otherwise accidents become large. Due to friction vehicles move on the roads without slipping and they can be stopped.
  5. The mechanical power transmission of belt drive is possible due to friction.

Disadvantages of friction:

  1. Due to friction there is large amount of power loss in machines and engines.
  2. Due to friction wear and tear of the machines increases and reducing their life.
  3. Due to friction some energy gets converted into heat which goes as waste.

Question 6.
Mention the methods used in decrease friction [A.P. Mar. 18; T.S. Mar. 16, Mar. 14]
Answer:

  1. Polishing : By polishing the surfaces of contact, friction can be reduced.
  2. Bearings : The rolling friction.is less than the sliding friction hence free wheels of a cycle, motor
    car, dynamos etc., are provided with ball bearings to reduce friction. Bearings convert sliding motion into rolling motion.
  3. Lubricants: The lubricant forms a thin layer between surfaces of contact. It reduces the friction. In light vehicles or machines, oils like “three in one” are used as lubricants. In heavy machines greasure is used. In addition to this they guard the mechanical parts from over heating.
  4. Streamlining : Automobiles and aeroplanes are streamlined to reduce the friction due to air.

Question 7.
State the laws of rolling friction.
Answer:
Laws of friction – rolling friction :

  1. The smaller the area of contact, the lesser will be the rolling friction.
  2. The larger the radius of the rolling body, the lesser will be the rolling friction.
  3. The rolling friction is directly proportional to the normal reaction.
    If FR is the rolling friction and ‘N’ is the normal reaction at the contact, then FR ∝ N
    FR = μRN; where μR is the coefficient of rolling friction.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 8.
Why is pulling the lawn roller preferred in pushing it ?
Answer:
Pulling of lawn roller : Let a lawn roller be pulled on a horizontal road by a force ‘F, which makes an angle θ with the horizontal, to the right as shown in the figure. The weight of the body “mg” acts vertically downwards.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 1
Let the force ‘F’ be resolved into two mutually perpendicular components F sin θ, vertically upwards and F cos θ horizontally along the road.
∴ The normal reaction N = mg – F sin θ
Then the frictional force acting towards left is FR = μRN, where μR is the coefficient of rolling friction between he roller and the road, or FR= μR (mg – F sin θ)
∴ The net pulling force on roller is P = F cos θ – FR = F cos θ – (μR mg – F sin θ)
or P = F(cos θ + μR sin θ) – μR mg ………………(1)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 2
Pushing of lawn roller : When a lawn roller is pushed by a force ‘F1, which makes an angle ‘θ’ with the horizontal, the component of force acting vertically downwards is F sin θ. The horizontal component F cos θ pushes the roller to the right as shown in figure.
The weight ‘mg’ of the lawn roller acts vertically downwards. Therefore the normal reaction N of the surface on the roller
N = mg + F sin θ
Then the frictional force acting towards left.
FR = μRN = μR (mg + F sin θ)
The net pushing force on roller is
P’ = F cos θ – FR = F cos θ – μR (mg + F sin θ)
or P’ = F(cos θ – μR sin θ) – μR mg ……………… (2)
From equations (1) and (2) that it is easier to pull than push a lawn roller.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
a) State Newton’s second law of motion. Hence derive the equation of motion F = ma from it. [T.S. Mar. 18; A.P. Mar. 16, Mar. 13]
b) A body is moving along a circular path such that its speed always remains constant. Should there be a force acting on the body ?
Answer:
a) Newton’s Second of motion : “The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the external force applied and takes place in the same direction”.
To show F = ma : Let a body of mass ‘m’ moving with a velocity ‘v’ under the action of an external force F in the direction of velocity.
Momentum ‘P’ of a body is the product of the mass and velocity V.
∴ P = mv ……………… (1)
According to Newton’s second law of motion, we have
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dx}}[/latex] ∝ F, where F = external force
(or)F = K[latex]\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dx}}[/latex] ………………. (2)
From equations (1) and (2) we have
F = [latex]K \frac{d(m v)}{d t}=K \cdot m \frac{d v}{d t}[/latex]
= Kma …………………. (3)
Since the rate of change of velocity [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dx}}[/latex] is the acceleration ‘a’ of the body.
In SI system the unit of force is Newton and is defined as that force which when acting on a body of mass 1 kg produces in it an acceleration of 1 ms-2.
i.e., from equation (3),
If F = 1, m = 1 and a = 1
we get K = 1
Hence F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dx}}[/latex] = ma .
∴ F = ma

b) Suppose a body is moving along a circular part though its speed always remains constant its velocity changes at every point and resultant force acts on the body.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
a) Define angle of friction and angle of repose. Show that angle of friction is equal to angle of repose for a rough inclined place.
Answer:
Angle of friction : The angle of friction is defined as the angle made by the resultant of the normal reaction and the limiting friction with the normal reaction is called angle of friction.

Angle of repose : The angle of repose is defined as the angle of inclination of a plane with respect to horizontal for which the body will be in equilibrium on the inclined plane is called angle of repose.

Angle of friction is equal to angle of repose for a rough inclined plane : Let us consider a body of mass’m1 on a rough inclined plane. The angle of inclination of the rough surface is ‘θ’. By increasing the angle of inclination at one end, the body tends to slide on the surface. Then the angle of inclination ’0′ is called angle of repose.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 3
The weight (mg) of the body resolved into two components, the component mg cos 0 acts perpendicular to the inclined surface, which is equal to normal reaction ‘N‘.
i.e., N = mg cos θ ……………. (1)
The other component mg sin θ acts parallel to inclined plane and opposite to the frictional force ‘f’.
fs = my sin θ ……………… (2)
From [latex]\frac{(2)}{(1)} \Rightarrow \frac{f_s}{N}=\frac{m g \sin \theta}{m g{con} \theta}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{f_s}{N}[/latex] = tan θ = µs
∴ µs = tan θ …………………. (3)
when ‘α’ is angle of friction then from the definition of co-efficient of static friction,
µs = tan α ………………… (4)
from (3) and (4)
⇒ tan θ = tan α
θ = α
Hence angle of friction is equal to angle of repose.

b) A block of mass 4 kg is resting on a rough horizontal plane and is about to move when a horizontal force of 30 N is applied on it. If g = 10 m/s2. Find the total contact force exerted by the plane on the block.
Solution:
Given m = 4kg
F = 30 N
g = 10 ms-2
a = [latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{30}{4}[/latex] = 7.5 ms-2
µ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{7.5}{10}=\frac{3}{4}[/latex]
∴ Contact force = Frictional force
= µ mg
= [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × 4 × 10 = 30 N.

Problems

Question 1.
The linear momentum of a particle as a function of time t is given by p = a + bt, where a and b are positive constants. What is the force acting on the particle ?
Answer:
Linear momentum of a particle p = a + bt
Force F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex](a + bt) = 0 + b
∴ F = b

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
Calculate the time needed for a net force of 5 N to change the velocity of a 10 kg mass by 2 m/s.
Answer:
F = 5N, m = 10kg; (v-u) = 2m s-1, t = ?
F = [latex]m \frac{(v-u)}{t} \Rightarrow 5=\frac{10 \times 2}{t}[/latex]
∴ t = 4s.

Question 3.
A ball of mass m is thrown vertically upward from the ground and reaches a height h before momentarily coming to rest. If g is acceleration due to gravity. What is the impulse received by the ball due to gravity force during its flight ? (neglect air resistance).
Answer:
mass = m
Initial velocity of a ball to reach h is,
u = [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 4
On return journey, velocity of a ball to reach the ground, v = -[latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex]
Impluse I = m (u – v) = m [[latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex] – (-[latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex])]
= m 2 [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex] = 2m [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}[/latex]
∴ I = [latex]\sqrt{8 m^2 g h}[/latex]

Question 4.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3.0 kg changes its speed from 2.0 in m s-1 to 3.5 m s-1 in 25 s. The direction of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force ?
Answer:
m = 3.0 kg; u = 2.0 ms-1,
v = 3.5ms-1, t = 25 s;
F = m [latex]\left(\frac{v-u}{t}\right)[/latex] = 3[latex]\left(\frac{3.5-2}{25}\right)[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{3 \times 15}{25}=\frac{0.9}{5}[/latex] = 0.18 N
This force acts in the direction of change in velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 5.
A man in a lift feels an apparent weight W when the lift is moving up with a uniform acceleration of 1/3rd of the acceleration due to gravity. If the same man were in the same lift now moving down with a uniform acceleration that is 1/2 of the acceleration due to gravity, then what is his apparent weight ?
Answer:
When the lift is moving up, a = [latex]\frac{g}{3}[/latex]
Apparent weight W = m(g + a)
= m(g + [latex]\frac{g}{3}[/latex]) = [latex]\frac{4mg}{3}[/latex]
⇒ mg = [latex]\frac{3 W}{4}[/latex] …………….. (1)
When the lift is moving down, a = [latex]\frac{g}{2}[/latex]
Apparent weight W1 = m(g – a)
= m(g – [latex]\frac{g}{2}[/latex]) = [latex]\frac{mg}{2}[/latex]
∴ |W1| = [latex]\frac{\left[\frac{3 W}{4}\right]}{2}=\frac{3 W}{8}[/latex]

Question 6.
A container of mass 200 kg rests on the back of an open truck, if the truck accelerates at 1.5 m/s2, what is the minimum coefficient of static friction between the container and the bed of the truck required to prevent the container from sliding off the back of the truck ?
Answer:
m = 200kg, a = 1.5 ms-2, g = 9.8 ms-2
ma = μsmg
μs = [latex]\frac{a}{g}=\frac{1.5}{9.8}[/latex] = 0.153

Question 7.
A bomb initially at rest at a height of 40 m above the ground suddenly explodes into two identical fragments. One of them starts moving vertically down- wards with an initial speed of 10 m/s. If acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2. What is the separa-tion between the fragments 2s after the explosion ?
Answer:
Bomb explodes into two fragments say 1 and 2.
For 1st fragment, u1 = 10m/s, t = 2 sec; g = 10 m/s-2, s1 = ?
Now displacement of 1st fragment,
s1 = u1t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
= 10 × 2 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × 22 = 40m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 5
2nd fragment is move opposite to 1st fragment like an object from a tower.
For 2nd fragment u2 = – u1 = 10m/s
t = 2 sec; g = 10 m/s2
Now displacement of 2nd fragment
s2 = u2t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
= 10 × 2 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × 22 = 0
∴ The seperation of two fragments
= s1 + s2 = 40 + 0 = 40 m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 8.
A fixed pulley with a smooth grove has a light string passing over it with a 4 kg attached on one side and a 3 kg on the other side. Another 3 kg is hung from the other 3 kg as shown with another light string. If the system is released from rest, find the common acceleration ? (g = 10 m/s2).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 6
Answer:
From fig,
m1 = 3 + 3
= 6 kg
m2 = 4 kg
g = 10ms-2
Acceleration of the system,
a = [latex]\left(\frac{\dot{m}_1-m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right) g=\left(\frac{6-4}{6+4}\right) \times 10[/latex] = 2 ms-2

Question 9.
A block of mass of 2 kg slides on an inclined plane that makes an angle of 30% with the horizontal. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex].
(a) What force should be applied to the block so that it moves up without any acceleration ?
(b) What force should be applied to the block so that it moves up without any acceleration ?
Answer:
m = 2kg; θ = 30°; µ = [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex]
i) Fdown = mg (sinθ – µ cosθ)
= 2 × 9.8 (sin30° – [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex]cos30°)
= 2 × 98 [[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] – [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex]] = 49 N

ii) Fup = mg (sinθ + µ cosθ)
= 2 × 9.8 [sin30° + [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex] × cos30°]
= 2 × 9.8 [[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] + [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex]] = 24.5 N

Question 10.
A block is placed on a ramp of parabolic shape given by the equation g = [latex]\frac{x^2}{20}[/latex], see If is = 0.5, what is the maximum height above the ground at which the block can be placed without slipping ? (tan θ = µs = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} y}{\mathrm{~d} x}[/latex])
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 7
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 8

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 11.
A block of metal of mass 2 kg on a horizontal table is attached to a mass of 0.45 kg by a light string passing over a frictionless pulley at the edge of the table. The block is subjected to a horizontal force by allowing the 0.45 kg mass to fall. The coefficient of sliding friction between the block and table is 0.2.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 9
Calculate (a) the initial acceleration, (b) the tension in the string, (c) the distance the block would continue to move if. after 2 s of motion, the string should break.
Answer:
Here, m1 = 0.45kg
m2 = 2kg
µ = 0.2
a) Initial acceleration.
a = [latex]\left(\frac{m_1-\mu m_2}{m_1+m_2}\right) g=\left[\frac{0.45-0.2 \times 2}{0.45+2}\right] \times 9.8[/latex]
a = 0.2ms-2

b) From fig, we have
T – f = m2 a
T – 3.92 = 2 × 0.2
[∵ f = µm2g = 0.2 × 2 × 9.8] = 3.92 N
⇒ N = 0.4 + 3.92 = 4.32 N

c) Velocity of string after 2 sec
= u in this case: µ’ = 0
Stoping distance s = [latex]\frac{\mu^2}{2 \mu g}=\frac{0.4 \times 0.4}{2 \times 0.2 \times 9.8}[/latex] = 0.0408 m

Question 12.
On a smooth horizontal . surface a block A of mass 10 kg is kept. On this block a second block B of mass 5 kg is kept. The coefficient of friction between the two blocks is 0.4. A horizontal force of 30 N is applied on the lower block as shown.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 10
The force of friction between the blocks is (take g = 10 m/s2).
Answer:
Here mA = 10kg; mB = 5kg;
F = 30N; µ = 0.4
F = (mA + mB)a
⇒ a = [latex]\frac{F}{\left(m_A+m_B\right)}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{30}{10+5}[/latex] = 2ms-2
f = mBa = 5 × 2 = 10 N

Additional Problems

(For simplicity in numerical calculations, take g = 10 ms-2)

Question 1.
Give the magnitude and direction of the net force acting on
a) a drop of rain falling down with a constant speed,
b) a cork of mass 10 g floating on water,
c) a kite skillfully held stationary in the sky,
d) a car moving with a constant velocity of 30 km/h on a rough road,
e) a high-speed electron in space far from all material objects and free of electric and magnetic fields.
Answer:
a) As the rain drop is falling with a constant speed, its acceleration a = 0. Hence net force F = ma = 0.
b) As the cork is floating on water, its weight is being balanced by the upthrust (equal-to weight of water displaced). Hence net force on the cork is zero.
c) As the kite is held stationary, net force on the kite is zero, in accordance with Newton’s first law.
d) Force is being applied to overcome the force of friction. But as velocity of the car is constant, its acceleration, a = 0. Hence net force on the car F = ma = 0.
e) As no field (gravitational / electric / magnetic) is acting on the electron, net force on it is zero.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
A pebble of mass 0.05 kg is thrown vertically upwards. Give the direction and magnitude of the net force on the pebble.
a) during its upward motion,
b) during its downward motion
c) at the highest point where it is momentarily at rest. Do your answers change if the pebble was thrown at ah angle of 45° with the horizontal direction ?
Ignore are resistance.
Answer:
When a body is thrown vertically upwards (or) it moves vertically downwards, gravitational pull of earth gives it a uniform acceleration a = + g = + 9.8 ms-2 in the downward direction. Therefore, the net force on the pebble in all the three cases is vertically downwards.
As m = 0.05 kg and a = + 9.8 m/s2
In all the three cases,
∴ F = ma
= 0.05 × 9.8 = 0.49 N, vertically downwards.
If the pebble were thrown at an angle of 45° with the horizontal direction, it will have horizontal and vertical components of velocity. These components do not affect the force on the pebble. Hence our answers do not alter in any case. However in each case (C), the pebble will not be at rest. It will have horizontal component of velocity at highest point.

Question 3.
Give the magnitude and direction of the net force acting on a stone of mass 0.1 kg.
a) just after it is dropped from the window of stationary train,
b) just after it is dropped from the window of a train running at a constant velocity of 36 km/h,
c) just after it is dropped from the window of a train accelerating with 1 ms-2,
d) lying on the floor of a train which is accelerating with 1 ms-2, the stone being at rest relative to the train.
Answer:
a) Here, m – 0.1 kg, a = +g = 9.8 m/s2
Net force, F = ma = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98 N This force acts vertically downwards.

b) When the train is running at a constant velocity its acc. = 0. No force acts on the stone due to this motion.
Therefore, force on the stone F = weight of stone mg = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98 N
This force also acts vertically downwards.

c) When the train is accelerating with 1m/s2, an additional force F1 = ma = 0.1 × 1 = 0.1 N acts on the stone in the horizontal direction. But once the stone is dropped from the train, F1 becomes zero and the net force on the stone is F = mg = 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98 N, acting vertically downwards.

d) As the stone is lying on the horizontal direction of motion of the train. Note the weight of the stone in this case is being balanced by the normal reaction.

Question 4.
One end of a string of length l is connected to a particle of mass m and the other to a small peg on a smooth horizontal table. If the particle moves in a circle with speed v the net force on the particle (directed towards the centre) is ;
i) T,
ii) T – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{m} v^2}{l}[/latex],
iii) T + [latex]\frac{\mathrm{m} v^2}{l}[/latex],
iv) 0
T is the tension in the string. (Choose the correct Answer)
Answer:
The net force on the particle directed towards the center is T. This provides the necessary centripetal force to the particle moving in the circle.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 5.
A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of mass 20 kg moving initially with a speed of 15 ms-1. How long does the body take to stop ?
Answer:
Here, F = -50 N, m = 20 kg
μ = 15 m/s, v = 0, t = ?
From F = ma,
a = [latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{-50}{20}[/latex] = -2.5 m/s2
From v = u + at
0 = 15 – 2.5t
t = [latex]\frac{15}{2.5}[/latex] = 6s.

Question 6.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3.0 kg changes its speed from 2.0 ms-1 to 3.5 ms-1 in 25 s. The direction of the motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force ?
Answer:
Here m = 3.0 kg
μ = 2.0 m/s
v = 3.5 m/s,
t = 25s, F = ?
F = ma = [latex]\frac{m(v-u)}{t}=\frac{3.0(3.5-2.0)}{25}[/latex]
= 0.18 N.
The force is along the direction of motion.

Question 7.
A body of mass 5 kg is acted upon by two perpendicular forces 8 N and 6 N. Give the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of the body ?
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 11
θ = 36° 52
This the direction of resultant force and hence the direction of acceleration of the body, fig.
Also a = [latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{10}{5}[/latex] = 2ms-2

Question 8.
The driver of a three-wheeler moving with a speed of 36 km/h sees a child standing in the middle of the road and brings his vehicle to rest in 4.0 s just in time to save the child. What is the average retarding force on the vehicle ? The mass of the three wheeler is 400 kg and the mass of the driver is 65 kg.
Answer:
Here, u = 36km/h = 10 m/s, v = 0, t = s
m = 400 + 65 = 465 kg
Retarding force
F = ma = [latex]\frac{m(v-u)}{t}=\frac{465(0-10)}{4}[/latex] = -1162 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 9.
A rocket with a lift-off mass 20,000 kg is blasted upwards with an initial acceleration of 5.0 ms-2. Calculate the initial thrust (force) of the blast.
Answer:
Here m = 20,000 kg = 2 × 104 kg
Initial ace = 5 m/s2
Thrust, F = ?
Clearly, the thrust should be such that it overcomes the force of gravity besides giving it an upward acceleration of 5 m/s2. Thus the force should produce a net acceleration of 9.8 + 5.0 = 14.8 m/s2 As thrust = force = mass × acceleration
∴ F = 2 × 104 × 14.8 = 2.96 × 105N

Question 10.
A body of mass 0.40 kg moving initially with a constant speed of 10 ms-1 to the north is subject to a constant force of 8.0 N directed towards the south for 30 s. Take the instant the force is applied to be t = 0, the position of the body at the time to be x = 0 and predict its position at t = -5 s, 25 s, 100 s.
Answer:
Here, m = 0.40 kg, µ = 10m/s due N
F = – 8.0 N
a = [latex]\frac{F}{m}=\frac{-8.0}{0.40}[/latex] = -20 m/s2
for 0 ≤ t ≤ 30s.
i) At t = -5s, x = Ut = 10 × (-5) = -50 m

ii) At t = 25s, x = Ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
= 10 × 25 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-20) (25)2 = – 6000m

iii) At t = 100s, The problem is divided into two parts, upto 30s, there is force/acc.
∴ from x1 = Ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
= 10 × 30 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-20) (30)2
= -8700
At t = 30s, v = U + at = 10 – 20 × 30 = – 590 m/s,
∴ for motion from 30s to 100s
x2 = vt = – 590 × 70 = – 41300 m
x = x1 + x2 = -8700 – 41300
= -50,000 m = – 50km.

Question 11.
A truck starts from rest and accelerates uniformly at 2.0 ms-2. At t = 10 s, a stone is dropped by a person standing on the top of the truck (6 m high from the ground). What are the (a) velocity and (b) acceleration of the stone at t = 11 s ? (Neglect air resistance).
Answer:
Here, u = 0, a = 2 m/s2, t = 10s
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 12
Let v be the velocity of the truck when the stone is dropped.
From v = u + at
v = 0 + 2 × 10 = 20m/s
a) Horizontal velocity of stone, when it is dropped, vx = v = 20 m/s.
As air Resistance is neglected, vx remains constant.
In the vertical direction, initial velocity of stone, µ = 0, a = g = 9.8 m/s2,
time t = 11 – 10 = 1s
From v = u + at
vy = 0 + 9.8 × 1 = 9.8 ms-1
Resultant velocity of stone, OC is given by
v = [latex]\sqrt{v_x^2+v_y^2}=\sqrt{20^2+(9.8)^2}[/latex]
v = 22.3 m/s.
Let θ is the angle with the resultant velocity OC of stone makes with the horizontal direction OA, then from fig.
tan θ = [latex]\frac{v_y}{v_x}=\frac{9.8}{20}[/latex] = 0.49
∴ θ = 29°

b) The moment the stone is dropped from the car, horizontal force on the stone = 0. The only acceleration the path followed by the stone is, however parabolic.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 12.
A bob of mass 0.1 kg hung from the ceiling of a room by a string 2 m long is set into oscillation. The speed of the bob at its mean position is 1 ms-1. What is the trajectory of the bob if the string is cut when the bob is (a) at one of its extreme positions, (b) at its mean position.
Answer:
a) We shall study in unit x that at each extreme position, velocity of the bob is zero. If the string is cut at the extreme position, it is only under the action of ‘g’. Hence the bob will fall vertically downwards.

b) At the mean position, velocity of the bob is 1m/s. along the tangent to the arc, which is in the horizontal direction. If the string is let at mean position, the bob will be have as a horizontal projectile. Hence it will follow a parabolic path.

Question 13.
A man of mass 70 kg stands on a weighing scale in a lift which is moving
a) upwards with a uniform speed of 10 ms-1
b) downwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 ms-2
c) upwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 ms-2
What would be the readings on the scale in each case ?
d) What would be the reading if the lift mechanism failed and it hurtled down freely under gravity ?
Answer:
Here, m = 70 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
The weighing machine in each case measures the reaction R i.e. the apparent weight.
a) When lift moves upwards with a uniform speed, its accelerations is zero.
R = mg = 70 × 9.8 = 686N

b) When the lift moves downwards with a = 5 m/s2
R = m(g – a) = 70 (9.8 – 5) = 336 N

c) When the lift moves upwards with a = 5 m/s2
R = m(g + a) = 70 (9.8 + 5) = 1036 N
If the lift were to come down freely under gravity, downward acc. a = g
∴ R = m (g – a) = m(g – g) = zero

Question 14.
Figure shows the position-time graph of a particle of mass 4 kg. What is the (a) force on the particle for t < 0, t < 4 s, 0 < t < 4s ? (b) impulse at t = 0 and t = 4 s ?
(Consider one-dimensional motion only)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 13
Answer:
i) For t < 0, the position time graph is OA which means displacement of the particle is zero.
i.e. particle is at rest at the origin. Hence force on the particle must be zero.

ii) For 0 < t < 4s, s, the position time graph OB has a constant slope. Therefore, velocity of the particle is constant in this interval i.e. particle has zero acceleration. Hence force on the particle must be zero. iii) For t > 4s, the position time graph BC is parallel to time axis. Therefore, the particle remains at a distance 3m from the origin, i.e. it is at rest. Hence force on the particle is zero.

iv) Impulse at t = 0 :
We know. Impulse = change in linear momentum, Before t = 0 particle is at rest i.e. u = 0. After t = 0, particle has a constant velocity v = [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex]
= 0.75 m/s
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 14
∴ Impulse = m(v – u)
= u (0.75-0)
= 3kg m/s
∴ Impulse at t = 4s
Before t = 4s, particle has a constant velocity u = 0.75 m/s
After t = 4s, particle is at rest i.e. v = 0
Impulse = m(v – u) = 4 (0 – 0.75) = 3kg m/s.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 15.
Two bodies of masses 10 kg and 20 kg respectively kept on a smooth, horizontal surface are tied to the ends of a light string, a horizontal force F = 600 N is applied to (i) A, (ii) B along the direction of String. What is the tension in the string in each case ?
Answer:
Here, F = 500 N
m1 = 10kg, m2 = 20kg
Let T be the tension in the string and a be the acceleration of the system, in the direction of the force applied.
a = [latex]\frac{F}{m_1+m_2}=\frac{500}{10+20}=\frac{50}{3}[/latex] m/s2
a) When force is applied on heavier block,
T = m1 a = 10 × [latex]\frac{50}{3}[/latex] N
T = 166.66 N

b) When force is applied on lighter block,
T = m2a = 20 × [latex]\frac{50}{3}[/latex] N
= 333.33 N
Which is different from value T in case (a) Hence our answer depends on which mass end, the force is applied.

Question 16.
Two masses 8 kg and 12 kg are connected at the two ends of a light inextensible string that goes over a frictionless pulley. Find the acceleration of the masses, and the tension in the string when the masses are released.
Answer:
Here, m2 = 8 kg, m1 = 12kg
as a = [latex]\frac{\left(m_1-m_2\right) g}{m_1+m_2}[/latex]
a = [latex]\frac{(12-8) 9.8}{12+8}=\frac{39.2}{20}[/latex]
= 1.96 m/s2
Again
T = [latex]\frac{2 m_1 m_2 g}{m_1+m_2}=\frac{2 \times 12 \times 8 \times 9.8}{(12+8)}[/latex] = 94.1 N

Question 17.
A nucleus is at rest in the laboratory frame of reference. Show that if it disintegrates into two smaller nuclei the products must move in opposite directions.
Answer:
Let m1m2 be the masses of products and [latex]\vec{v}_1, \vec{v}_2[/latex] be their respective velocities. Therefore total linear momentum after disintegration = [latex]m_1 \overrightarrow{v_1}+m_2 \overrightarrow{v_2}[/latex]. Before disintegration, the nucleus is at rest. There, its linear momentum before dis-integration is zero. According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum.
[latex]m_1 \overrightarrow{v_1}+m_2 \overrightarrow{v_2}[/latex] (Or) [latex]\vec{v}_2=\frac{-m_1 \vec{v}_1}{m_2}[/latex]
Negative sign shows that [latex]\overrightarrow{v_1}[/latex] and [latex]\overrightarrow{v_2}[/latex] are in opposite direction.

Question 18.
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 6 ms-1 collide and rebound with the same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each ball due to the other ?
Answer:
Here, initial momentum of the ball,
A = 0.05 (6) = 0.3 kg m/s
As the speed is reversed on collision, final momentum of the ball A = 0.05 (-6)
= – 0.3 kg ms-1
Impulse imparted to ball A = Change in momentum of ball A = Final momentum – Intial momentum = – 0.3 – 0.3 = – 0.6 kg m/s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 19.
A shell of mass 0.020 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 ms-1, what is the recoil speed of the gun ?
Answer:
Here, mass of shell m = 0.02 kg
Mass of gun M = 100 kg
Muzzle speed of shell v = 80 m/s
Recoil speed of gun V = ?
According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum mv + MV = 0
(Or) V = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{M}}=\frac{-0.02 \times 80}{100}[/latex] = 0.016 m/s

Question 20.
A batsman deflects a ball by the angle of 45° without changing its initial speed which is equal to 54 km/h. What is the impulse imparted to the ball ? (Mass of the balls is 0.15 kg).
Answer:
In fig. the ball hits the bat KL along AO and is deflected by the bat along OB. Where LAOB = 45°. ON is normal to the portion of the bat KL deflecting the ball.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 15
∴ θ = LNOA
= 45°/2 = 22.5°
Intial vel along AO = u = 54 km/h
= 15 m/S1 and mass of ball m = 0.15 kg Intial velocity along AO has the two rectangular components : u cos θ along NO produced and u sin 6 along the horizontal OL.
Final velocity along OB has the same magnitude = u
It is resolved into two rectangular components u cos 6 along ON and u sin θ along OL. We observe that there is no change in velocity along the horizontal, but velocity along vertical is just reserved.
∴ Impulse imparted to the ball
= Change in linear momentum of the ball
= m u cos θ – (- m u cos θ)
= 2 m u cos θ
= 2 × 0.15 × 15 cos 22.5°
= 4.5 × 0.9239
= 4.16 kg m/s

Question 21.
A stone of mass 0.25 kg tied to the end of a string is whirled round in a circle of radius 1.5 m with a speed of 40 rev./ min in a horizontal plane. What is the tension in the string ? What is the maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around if the string can withstand a maximum tension of 200 N?
Answer:
Here, m = 0.25 kg, r = 15m
n = 40 rpm = [latex]\frac{40}{60}[/latex], rps = [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex], T = ?
T = mrw2 = mr(2 π)2 = 4 π2m2
T = 4 × [latex]\left(\frac{22}{7}\right)^2[/latex] × 0.25 × 1.5 × [latex]\left(\frac{2}{3}\right)^2[/latex] = 6.6N
If Tmax = 200 N. then from
Tmax = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\max }^2}{r}[/latex]
[latex]v_{\max }^2=\frac{T_{\max } \times r}{m}=\frac{200 \times 1.5}{0.25}[/latex] = 1200
vmax = [latex]\sqrt{1200}[/latex] = 34.6 m/s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 22.
If, in Exercise 5.21, the speed of the stone is increased beyond the maximum permissible value, and the string breaks suddenly, which of the following correctly describes the trajectory of the stone after the string breaks :
a) the stone moves radially outwards,
b) the stone flies off tangentially from the instant the string breaks,
c) the stone flies off at an angle with the tangent whose magnitude depends on the speed of the particle ?
Answer:
The instant the string, breaks, the stone flies off tangentialy, as per Newton’s first law of motion.

Question 23.
Explain why
a) a horse cannot pull a cart and run in empty space,
b) passengers are thrown forward from their seats when a speeding bus stops suddenly,
c) it is easier to pull a lawn mower than to push it.
d) a cricketer moves his hands back-wards while holding a catch.
Answer:
a) While trying to pull a cart, a horses pushes the ground backwards with a certain force at an angle. The ground offers an equal reaction in the opposite direction on the feet of the horse. The forward component of this reaction is responsible for the motion of the cart. In empty space, there is no reaction and hence a horse cannot pull the cart and run.

b) This is due to inertia of motion. When the speeding bus stops suddenly, lower part of the body in contact with the seats stops. The upper part of the body of the passengers tend to maintain its uniform motion. Hence the passengers are thrown forward.

c) While pulling a lawn roller, force is applied upwards along the handle. The vertical component of this force is upwards and reduces the effective weight of the roller, fig. (a) while pushing a lawn roller. Face is applied downwards along the handle. The vertical component of this force is downwards and increases the effective weight of the roller, fig. (b). As the effective weight is lesser in case of pulling than in a case of pushing, therefore pulling is easier than pushing.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 16
d) While holding a catch, the impulse receives by the hands F × t = Change in linear momentum of the ball is constant. By moving his hands, backwards, the cricketer increases the time of impact (t) to complete the catch. As t increases, F decreases and as a reaction, his hands are not hurt severly.

Question 24.
Figure shows the position-time graph of a body of mass 0.04 kg. Suggest a suitable physical context for this motion. What is the time between two consecutive impulses received by the body ? What is the magnitude of. each impulse ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 17
Answer:
Here, m = 0.04 kg. position time graph shows that the particle moves from x = 0 at 0 to x = 2 cm at A in 2 sec.
As x – t graph is a st. line, the motion is with a constant velocity.
μ = [latex]\frac{(2-0) \mathrm{cm}}{(2-0) \mathrm{s}}[/latex] = 1 cm s-1
= 10-2 ms-1
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 18
From x = 2 cm at A, particle goes to x = 0 at B in 2 sec.
As AB is a stline, motion is with constant velocity v = 1 cm/s = 10-2 m/s
Negative sign indicates the reversal of direction of motion. This is being repeated. We can visualise a ball moving between two walls located at x = 0 and x = 2 cm, getting rebounded repeatedly on striking against each wall on every collision with a wall, linear momentum of the ball changes. Therefore, the ball receives impulse after every two seconds. Magnitude of impulse = Total change in linear momentum.
= mu -(mv) = mu – mv = m(u – v)
= 0.04(10-2 + 10-2)
= 0.08 × 10-2
= 8 × 10-4 kg m/s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 25.
Figure shows a man standing stationary with respect to a horizontal conveyor belt that is accelerating with 1 ms-2. What is the net force on the man ? If the coefficient of static friction between the man’s shoes and the belt is 0.2, up to what acceleration of the belt can the man continue to be stationary relative to the belt ? (Mass of the man = 65 kg).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 19
Answer:
Here, acceleration of conveyer belt, a = 1 m/s2
As the man is standing stationary w.r.t the belt, acceleration of the man = Acceleration of belt = a = 1 m/s2
As m = 65 kg
∴ Net force on the man, F = ma = 65 × 1 = 65 N
Now, µ = 0.2
Force of limiting friction- F = µR = µmg
It the man remains stationary upto max.acc. a of the belt, then F = ma1 = g mg
a1 = mg = 0.2 × 9.8 = 1.96 ms-2

Question 26.
A stone of mass m tied to the end of a string revolves in a vertical circle of radius R. The net forces at the lowest and highest points of the circle directed vertically downwards are : (Choose the correct alternative)
Lowest Point – Highest Point
a) mg – T1 – mg + T2
b) mg + T1 – mg – T2
c) mg + T1 – (mυ12)/R – mg – T2 + (mυ12)/R
d) mg – T1 – (mυ12/R – mg + T2 + (mυ12)/R
T1 and υ1 denote the tension and speed at the lowest point T2 and υ2 denote corresponding values at the highest point.
Answer:
The net force at the lowest point α is
FL = (mg – T1) and the net force at the highest point H is FH = mg + T2. Therefore, alternative (a) is correct.

Question 27.
A helicopter of mass 1000 kg rises with a vertical acceleration of 15 ms-2. The crew and the passengers weight 300 kg. Give the magnitude and direction of the
a) force on the floor by the crew and passengers,
b) action of the rotor of the helicopter on the surrounding air,
c) force on the helicopter due to the surrounding air.
Answer:
Here, mass of the helicopter, m1 = 100 kg
Mass of the crew and passengers m2 = 300 kg
Upward acceleration a = 15 ms-2 and g = 10 ms-2
a) Force on the floor of helicopter by the crew and passengers = appeard weight of crew and passengers = m2(g + a)
= 300(10 + 15) = 7500 N

b) Action of rotor of helicopter on surrounding air is obviously vertically downwards because helicopter rises on account reaction to this force. Thus, force of action F = (m1 + m2) (g + a)
= (1000 + 300) (10 + 15)
= 1300 × 25 = 32500 N

c) Force on the helicopter due to surrounding air is the reaction. As action and reaction are equal and opposite, therefore, force of reaction F1 = 32500 N, vertically upwards.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 28.
A stream of water flowing horizontally with a speed of 15 ms-1 gushes out of a tube of cross-sectional area 10-2m2 and hits a vertical wall nearby. What is the force exerted on the wall by the impact of water, assuming it does not rebound ?
Answer:
Here v = 15 ms-1
Area of cross section a = 102 m-2, F = ?
Volume of water pushing out/sec
= a × v = 10-12 × m3 s-1
As density of water is 103 kg/m2, therefore, mass of water striking the wall per sec.
m = (15 × 10-2) × 103 = 150 kg/s
Change in linear momentum
As F = [latex]\frac{\text { Change in linear momentum }}{\text { Time }}[/latex]
∴ F = [latex]\frac{m \times v}{t}=\frac{150 \times 15}{1}[/latex] = 2250 N

Question 29.
Ten one-rupee coins are put on top of each other on a table. Each coin has a mass m. Give the magnitude and direction of
a) the force on the 7th coin (counted from the bottom) due to all the coins on its top
b) the force on the 7th coin by the eighth coin,
c) the reaction of the 6th coin on the 7th coin.
Answer:
a) The force on 7th coin is due to weight of the three coins lying above it. Therefore,
F (3m) kgf = (3mg)N
Where g is acceleration due to gravity. This force acts vertically downwards.

b) The eighth coin is already under the weight of two coins above it and it has its own weight too. Hence force on 7th coin due to 8th coin is sum of the two forces i.e.,
F = 2m + m = 3(m) kgf = (3mg)N
The force acts vertically downwards.

c) The sixth coin is under the weight of four coins above it.
Reaction, R = – F = -4m(kgf) = -(4 mg)N
Minor sign indicates that the reaction acts vertically upwards, opposite to the weight.

Question 30.
An aircraft executes a horizontal loop at a speed of 720 km/h with its wings banked at 15°. What is the radius of the loop ?
Answer:
Here θ = 15°
v = 720 km/h =[latex]\frac{720 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex] = 200 ms-1
g = 9.8 ms-2
From tan θ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{v}^2}{\mathrm{rg}}[/latex]
v2 = rg tan θ
r = [latex]\frac{v^2}{g \tan \theta}=\frac{(200)^2}{9.8 \times \tan 15^{\circ}}[/latex]
= 15232 m = 15.232 km

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 31.
A train runs along an unbanked circular track of radius 30 m at a speed of 54 km/h. The mass of the train is 106 kg. What provides the centripetal force required for this purpose – The engine or the rails ? What is the angle of banking required to prevent wearing out of the rail ?
Answer:
The centripetal force is provided by the lateral thrust exerted by the rails on the wheels. By Newton’s 3rd law, the train exerts an equal and opposite thrust on the rails causing its wear and tear.
Obviously, the outer rail will wear out faster due to the larger force exerted by the train on it.
Here v = 54 km/h =[latex]\frac{54 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex] = 15 m/s
g = 9.8 ms-2
As tan θ = [latex]\frac{v^2}{r g}=\frac{15 \times 15}{30 \times 9.8}[/latex] = 0.76
∴ θ = tan-1 0.76 = 37.4°

Question 32.
A block of mass 25 kg is raised by a 50 kg man in two different ways as shown in Fig. What is the action on the floor by the man in the two cases ? If the floor yields to a normal force of 700 N, which mode should the man adopt to lift the block without the floor yielding ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 20
Answer:
Here, mass of block m = 25 kg
Mass of man M = 50 kg
Force applied to lift the block
F = mg = 25 × 9.8 = 245 N
Weight of Man W = mg = 50 × 9.8 = 490 N
a) When block is raised by man as shown in Fig. force is applied by the man in the upward direction. This increases the apparent weight of the man. Hence action on the floor.
W1 = W + F
= 490 + 245
= 735 N

b) When block is raised by man as shown in Fig. force is app ed by the man in the downward direction. This decreases the apparent weight of the man. Hence action on the floor in this case would be
W1 = W – F = 490 – 245 = 245 N
As the floor yeilds to a normal force of 700 N, the mode (b) has to be adopted by the man to lift the block

Question 33.
A monkey of mass 40 kg climbs on a rope (Fig.) which can stand a maximum tension of 600 N. In which of the following cases will the rope break : the money
a) climbs up with an acceleration of 6 m s-2
b) climbs down with an acceleration of 4 ms-2
c) climbs up with a uniform speed of 5 ms-1
d) falls down the rope nearly freely under gravity ?
(ignore the mass of the rope)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 21
Answer:
Here, mass of monkey m = 40 kg
Maximum tension the rope can stand T = 600 N
In each case, actual tension in the rope will be equal to apparent weight of money (R). The rope will break when R exceeds T.
a) When monkey climbs up with a = 6 ms-2
R = m(g + a)
= 40(10 + 6)
= 640 N (Which is greater than T)
Hence the rope will break.

b) When monkey climbs down with a = 4 ms-2,
R = m(g – a) = 40(10 – 4) = 240 N
Which is less than T.
∴ The rope will not break.

c) When monkey climbs up with a uniform speed v = 5 ms-1.
Its acceleration, a = 0
∴ R = mg = 40 × 10 = 400 N,
which is less than T.
∴ The role will not break

d) When monkey falls down the rope nearly freely under gravity
a = g
∴ R = m(g – a) = m(g – g) = zero
Hence the rope will not break.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 34.
Two bodies A and B of masses 5 kg and 10 kg in contact with each other rest on a table against a rigid wall (Fig.). The coefficient of friction between the bodies and the table is 0.15. A force of 200 N is applied horizontally to A. What are (a) the reaction of the partition (b) the action-reaction forces between A and B ? What happens when the wall is removed ? Does the answer to (b) change, when the bodies are in motion? Ignore the difference between μs and μk.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 22
Answer:
Here, mass of body A, m1 = 5 kg
Mass of body B, m2 = 10 kg
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 23
Coefficient of friction between the bodies and the table, μ = 0.15
Horizontal force applied on A,
F = 200 N

a) Force of limiting friction acting to the left
f = μ (m1 + m2)g
= 0.15(5 + 10) × 9.8 = 22.05 N
∴ Net force to the right exerted on the partition
F’ = 200 – 22.05 = 177.95 N
Reaction of partition = 177.95 N to the left.

b) Force of limiting friction acting on body A
f1 = μm1g = 0.15 × 5 × 9.8
= 7.35 N
∴ Net force exerted by body A on body B.
F” = F -f1 = 200 – 7.35
= 19265 N
This is to the right
Reaction of body B on body A = 192.65
N to the left when the portion is removed, the system of two bodies will move under the action of net force.
F1 = 177.95 IM
Acceralation produced in the system
a = [latex]\frac{F^1}{m_1+m_2}=\frac{177.95}{5+10}[/latex]
= 11.86 ms-2
Force producing motion in body A
F1 = m1 a = 5 × 11.86
= 59.3 N
∴ Net force exerted by A on body B, when partition is removed
= F” – F1 = 192.65 – 59.3
= 133.35 N.
Hence the reaction of body B on A, when partition is removed = 133.35 N to the left.
Thus answers to (b) do change.

Question 35.
A block of mass 15 kg is placed on a long trolley. The cofficient of static friction between the block and the trolley is 0.18. The trolley accelerates from rest with 0.5 ms-2 for 20 s and then moves with uniform velocity. Discuss the motion of the block as viewed by (a) a stationary observer on the ground, (b) an observer moving with the trolley.
Answer:
a) Flere, m = 15 kg;
μ = 0.18,
a = 0.5 ms-2
t = 20 s
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 24
Force on the block due to motion of the trolly F’ = ma = 15 × 0.5 = 7.5 N
Force of limiting friction on the block
= F = μR = μmg
= 0.18 × 15 × 9.8 = 26.46 N
This opposes the motion of the block. The block shall not move. The force of static friction F will adjust itself equal and opposite to F’, the applied force.

Flence to a stationary observer on the ground, the block will appear to be at rest relative to the trolly. When trolly moves with uniform velocity, the block will continue to be stationary. Because in that case, forward force is zero. Force of friction alone is acting on the block.

b) An observer moving with the trolly has accelerated motion. The observer is therefore non-inertial.. The law of inertia is no longer valid.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 36.
The rear side of a truck is open and a box of 40 kg mass is placed 5 m away from the open end as shown in Fig. The coefficient of friction between the box and the surface below it is 0.15. On a straight road, the truck starts from rest and accelerates with 2 ms-2. At what distance from the starting point does the box fall of the truck?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 25
Answer:
Here mass of the box m = 40 kg
Acceleration of truck a = 2 ms-2
Distance of box from open end S = 5m
Coeff. of friction μ = 0.15
Force on the box due to accelarated motion of the truck, F = ma = 40 × 2 = 80 N
This force F is in the forward direction Reaction F’ on the box is equal to F = 80 N in the backward direction. This is opposed by force of limiting friction
f = μ R = μ mg
= 0.15 × 40 × 9.8
= 58.8 N in the forward direction
∴ Net force on the box in the backward direction is p = F’ – F = 80 – 58.8 = 21.2 N
Backward acceleration produced in the box
a = [latex]\frac{p}{m}=\frac{21.2}{40}[/latex] = 0.53 ms-2
It t is time taken by the box to travel S = 5 metre and fall off the truck, then from
S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
5 = 0 × t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.53 t2
t = [latex]\frac{\sqrt{5 \times 2}}{0.53}[/latex] = 4.345
If the truck travels a distance x during this time, then again from
S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
x = 0 × 4.34 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 2(4.34)2 = 18.84 m

Question 37.
A disc revolves with a speed of 33[latex]\frac{1}{3}[/latex] rev/min, and has a radius of 15 cm. Two coins are placed at 4 cm and 14 cm away from the centre of the record. If the co-efficient of friction between the coins and the record is 0.15, which of the coins will revolve with the record ?
Answer:
The coin revolves with the record in the case when the force of friction is enough to provide the necessary centripetal force. If this force is not sufficient to provide centripetal force, the coin slips on the record.
Now the frictional force is µR where R is the
normal reaction and R = mg
Hence force of friction = µ mg and centripetal force required is [latex]\frac{m v^2}{r}[/latex] or mrw2
µ1w are same for both the coins and we have different values of r for the two coins.
So to prevent slipping i.e., causing coins to rotate µ mg > mrω2 or µg > rω2 …………….. (1)
For 1st coin
r = 4 cm = [latex]\frac{4}{100}[/latex] m
n = 33 [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] rev/min = [latex]\frac{100}{3 \times 60}[/latex] rev/sec
w = 2πn = 2π × [latex]\frac{100}{180}[/latex] = 3.49 S-1
∴ rw2 = [latex]\frac{4}{100}[/latex] × (3.49)2 = 0.49 ms-2 and
µg = 0.15 × 9.8 = 1.47 ms-2
As µg > rw2, there fore this coin Will revolve with the record.
Note: We have nothing to do with the radius of the record = 15 cm

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 38.
You may have seen in a circus a motor-cyclist driving in verticle loops inside a ‘death-well’ (a hollow spherical chamber with holes, so the spectators can watch from outside). Explain clearly why the motorcyclist does not drop down when he is at the uppermost point, with no support from below. What is the minimum speed required at the uppermost position to perform a verticle loop if the radius of the chamber is 25 m ?
Answer:
At the uppermost point of the death well, with no support from below, the motorcyclist does not drop down. This is because his weight is being balance by the centrifugal force. Infact, the weight of the motorcyclist is spent up in providing the necessary centripetal force to the motorcyclist and hence he does not drop drown.

At the uppermost point, R + mg = [latex]\frac{m v^2}{r}[/latex],
where R is the normal reaction (downwards) on the motor cyclist by the ceiling of the chamber.
Speed will be minimum, when N = 0
∴ mg = [latex]\frac{m v^2}{r}[/latex] or
v = [latex]\sqrt{\mathrm{rg}}=\sqrt{25 \times 10}[/latex]
= 15.8 m/s

Question 39.
A 70 kg man stands in contact against the inner wall of a hollow cylindrical drum of radius 3 m rotating about its vertical axis with 200 rev/min. The coefficient of friction between the wall and his clothing is 0.15. What is the minimum rotational speed of the cylinder to enable the man to remain stuck to the wall (without falling) when the floor is suddenly removed ?
Answer:
Here m = 70 kg, r = 3
n = 200 rpm = [latex]\frac{200}{60}[/latex] rps
µ = 0.15
w = ?
The horizontal force N by the wall on the man provides the necessary centripetal force = mrω2. The frictional force (f) in this case is vertically upwards opposing the weight (mg) of the man.
After the floor is removed, the man will remain stuck to the wall, when
mg = f < µ N i.e., mg < µ mr ω2 or g < µ r ω2
∴ Minimum angular speed of rotation of the cylinder is ω = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{g}{\mu \mathrm{r}}}=\sqrt{\frac{10}{0.15 \times 3}}[/latex]
= 4.7 rad/s

Question 40.
A thin circular loop of radius R rotates about its vertical diameter with an angular frequency no. Show that a small bead on the wire loop remains at its
lowermost point for ω ≤ [latex]\sqrt{g / R}[/latex] . What is the angle made by the radius vector joining the centre to the bead with the vertical downward direction for ω = 2g/R ?
Answer:
In fig. we have show that radius vector joining the bead to the centre of the wire makes as angle θ with the vertical downward direction. It N is normal reaction, then as it is clear from the figure,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 26
mg = N cos θ ………… (1)
m rω2 = N sin θ …………….. (2)
Or m(R sin θ) ω2 = N sin θ
Or mRω2 = N
From (i) mg = mRω2 cos θ
Or cos θ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{R} \omega^2}[/latex] ……………….. (3)
As |cos θ| ≤ 1, therefore, bead will remain at its lower most point for
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{R} \omega^2}[/latex] ≤ 1 or w ≤ [latex]\sqrt{\frac{g}{R}}[/latex]
When ω = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 g}{R}}[/latex], from (iii),
cos θ = [latex]\frac{g}{R}\left(\frac{R}{2 g}\right)=\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
∴ θ = 60°

Textual Examples

Question 1.
An astronaut accidentally gets separated out of his small spaceship accelerating in inter stellar space at a constant rate of 100 ms-2. What is the acceleration of the astronaut the instant after he is outside the spaceship ? (Assume that there are no nearby stars to exert gravitational force on him).
Answer:
Since there are no nearby starts to exert gravitational force on him and the small spaceship exerts negligible gravitational attraction on him, the net force acting on the astronaut, once he is out of the spaceship, is zero. By the first law of motion the acceleration of the astronaut is zero.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
A bullet of mass 0.04 kg moving with a speed of 90 m s-1 enters a heavy wooden block and is stopped after a distance of 60 cm. What is the average resistive force exerted by the block on the bullet ?
Answer:
The retardation ‘a’ of the bullet (assumed constant) is given by
a = [latex]\frac{-u^2}{2 s}=\frac{-90 \times 90}{2 \times 0.6}[/latex] m s-2 = -6750 m s-2
The retarding force, by the second law of motion, is = 0.04 kg × 6750 ms-2 = 270 N
The actual resistive force, and therefore, retardation of the bullet may not be uniform. The answer therefore, only indicates the average resistive force.

Question 3.
The motion of a particle of mass m is described by y = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]at2. Find the force acting on the particle.
Answer:
We know, y = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
Now, υ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dy}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]u + gt
acceleration, a = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = g
Then the force is given by F = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = ma
F = ma = mg

Question 4.
A batsman hits back a ball straight in the direction of the bowler without changing its initial speed of 12 m s-1. If the mass of the ball is 0.15 kg determine the impulse imparted to the ball. (Assume linerar motion of the ball) [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Change in momentum
= 0.15 × 12-(-0.15 × 12) = 3.6 N s
Impulse = 3.6 N s, in the direction from the batsman to the bowler.
This is an example where the force on the ball by the batsman and the time of contact of the ball and the bat are difficult to know, but the impulse is readily calculated.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 5.
Two identical billiard balls strike a rigid wall with the same speed but at different angles and get reflected without any change in speed, as shown in Fig. What is (i) the direction of the force on the wall due to each ball ? (ii) the ratio of the magnitudes of impulses imparted to the balls by the wall ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 27
Answer:
An instinctive answer to (i) might be that the force on the wall in case (a) is normal to the wall, while that in case (b) is inclined at 30° to the normal. This answer is wrong. The force on the wall is normal to the wall in both cases. How to find the force on the wall ? The trick . is to consider the force on the wall ? The trick is to consider the force (or impulse) on the ball due to the wall using the second law, and then use the third law to answer (i). Let u be the speed of each ball before and after collision with the wall and m the mass of each bah. Choose the x and y axes as shown in the figure, and consider the change in momentum of the ball in each case :
Case (a) :
(Px)initial = mu
(Px)initial = 0
(Px)final = – mu
(Py)final = 0
Impulse is the change in momentum vector.
Therefore,
x-component of impulse = -2mu
y-component of impulse – 0
Impulse and force are in the same direction. Clearly, from above, the force on the ball due to the wall is normal to the wall, along the negative x-direction. Using Newton’s third law of motion, the force on the wall due to the ball is normal to the wall along the positive x-direction. The magnitude of force cannot be ascertained since the small time taken for the collision has not been specified in the problem. .
Case (b) :
(Px)initial = mu cos 30°
(Py)initial = – m u sin 30°
(Px)final = – mu cos 30°
(Py)final = -m u sin 30°
Note, while px changes sign after collision, py does not. Therefore,
x-component of impulse = -2 m u cos 30°
y-component of impulse 0
The direction of impulse (and force) is the same as in (a) and is normal to the wall along the negative x direction. As before, using Newton’s third law, the force on the wall due to the ball is normal to the wall along the positive x direction.
The ratio of the magnitudes of the impulses imparted to the balls in(a) and (b) is
2 mu / (2 m u cos 30°) = [latex]\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}}[/latex] ≈ 1.2

Question 6.
See Fig. A mass of 6 kg is suspended by a rope of length 2 m from the ceiling. A force of 50 N in the horizontal direction is applied at the mid point P of the rope, as show. What is the angle the rope makes with the vertical in equilibrium ? (Take g = 10 ms-2). Neglect the mass of the rope.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 28
Answer:
Figures (b) and (c) are known as free-body diagrams. Figure (b) is the free-body diagram of W and Fig. (c) is the free-body diagram of point P.
Consider the equilibrium of the weight W.
Clearly, T2 = 6 × 10 = 60 N.
Consider the equilibrium of the point P under the action of three forces – the tensions T1 and T2, and the horizontal force 50 N. The horizontal and vertical components of the resultant force must vanish separately :
T1 cos θ = T2 = 60N
T2 sin θ = T2 = 50N
which gives that tan θ = [latex]\frac{5}{6}[/latex] or
θ = tan-1 ([latex]\frac{5}{6}[/latex]) = 40°
Note the answer does not depend on the length of the rope (assumed massless) nor on the point at which the horizontal force is applied.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 7.
Determine the maximum acceleration of the train in which a box lying on the floor will remain stationary, given that the coefficient of static friction between the box and the train’s floor is 0.15.
Answer:
Since the acceleration of the box is due to the static friction,
ma = fs ≤ μs N = μs m g
i.e. a ≤ μs g
∴ amaximum = μs g = 0.15 × 10m s-2
= 1.5 ms-2

Question 8.
See Fig. A mass of 4 kg rests on a horizontal plane. The plane is gradually inclined unti at an angle θ = 15° with the horizontal, the mass just begins to slide. What is the coefficient of static friction between the block and the surface ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 29
Answer:
The forces acting on a block of mass …. at rest on an inclined plane are (i) the weight mg acting vertically downwards (ii) the normal force N of the plane on the block, and (iii) the static frictional force fs opposing the impending motion. In equilibrium, the resultant of these forces must be zero. Resolving the weight mg along the two directions shown, we have
m g sin θ = fs, m g cos θ = N
As θ increases, the self-adjusting frictional force fs increases until at θ = θmax, fs achieves its maximum value, (fs)max = μs N.
Therefore,
tan θmax = μs, or θmax = tan-1 μs
When θ becomes just a little more than there is a small net force on the block and θnm begins to slide. Note that θmax depends only on μs and is independent of the mass of the block
θmax = 15°, μs = tan 15° = t = 0.27

Question 9.
What is the acceleration of the book and trolley system shown in the Fig., if the coefficient of kinetic friction between the trolley and the suriace is 0.04 what is the tension in the string. Take g 10 ms-2). Neglect the mass of the string.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 30
Answer:
As the string is inextensible, and the pully is smooth, the 3 kg block and the 20 kg trolley both have same magnitude of acceleration. Applying second law to motion of the block (Fig. (b).
30 – T = 3a
Apply the second law to motion of the trolley (Fig. (c))
T – fk = 20a
Now fk = μk N,
Here μk = 0.04
N = 20 × 10 = 200N
Thus the equation for the motion of the trolley is
T – 0.04 × 200 = 20 a or T – 8 = 20a
These equations give a = [latex]\frac{22}{23}[/latex] m s-2 = 0.96 m s-2 and T = 27.1 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 10.
A cyclist speeding at 18 km/h on a level road takes a sharp circular turn of radius 3 m without reducing the speed. The co-efficient of static friction between the tyres and the road is 0.1. Will the cyclist slip while taking the turn ?
Answer:
On an unbanked road, frictional force alone can provide the centripetal force needed to keep the cyclist moving on a circular turn without slipping. If the speed is too large, or if the turn is too sharp (i.e. of too small a radius) or both, the frictional force is not sufficient to provide the necessary centripetal force, and the cyclist slips. The condition for the cyclist not to slip is given by
vmax = [latex]\sqrt{\mu_s R_g}[/latex] v2 ≤ μs Rg
Now, R = 3m, g = 9.8 m s-2, μs = 0.1.
That is, μs R g = 2.94 m2 s-2. v = 18 km/h = 5 m s-1; i.e., = 25 v2. The condition is not obeyed. The cyclist will slip while taking the circular turn.

Question 11.
A circular racetrack of radius 300 m is banked at an angle of 15°. If the coefficient of friction between the wheels of a race-car and the road is 0.2, what is the(a) optimum speed of the race-car to avoid wear and tear on its tyres, and (b) maximum permissible speed to avoid slipping?
Answer:
On a banked road, the horizontal component of the normal force and the frictional force contribute to provide centripetal force to keep the car moving on a circular turn without slipping. At the optimum speed, the normal reaction’s component is enough to provide the needed centripetal force, and the frictional force is not needed. The optimum speed v0 is given by
v0 = (R g tan θ)1/2-
Here R = 300 m, θ = 15°, g = 9.8 m s-2; we have
v0 = 28.1 ms-1
The maximum permissible speed vmax is given by
vmax = R g[latex]\left(\frac{\mu_s+\tan \theta}{1-\mu_s \tan \theta}\right)^{1 / 2}[/latex] = 38.1 m s-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 12.
See (Fig.) A wooden block of mass 2 kg rests on a soft horizontal floor. When an iron cylinder of mass 25 kg is placed on top of the block, the floor yields steadily and the block and the cylinder together go down with an acceleration of 0.1 ms-2. What is the action of the block on the floor (a) before and (b) after the floor yields ? Take g = 10 m s-2. Identify the action- reaction pairs in the problem.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 31
Answer:
(a) The block is at rest on the floor. Its free- body diagram shows two forces on the block, the force of gravitational attraction by the earth equal to 2 × 10 = 20 N; and the normal force R of the floor on the block. By the First Law, the net force on the block must be zero i.e., R = 20 N. Using third law the action of the block (i.e. the force exerted on the floor by the block) is equal to 20 N and directed vertically downwards.

(b)The system (block cylinder) accelerates downwards with 0.1 ms-2. The free – body diagram of the system shows two forces on the system : the force of gravity due to the earth (270 N); and the normal force R’ by the floor. Note, the free-body diagram of the system does not show the internal forces between the block and the cylinder. Applying the second law to the system,
270 – R’ = 27 × 0.1 N
i.e, R’ = 267.3 N
By the third law, the action of the system on the floor is equal to 267.3 N vertically downward.
Action-reaction pairs
For (a) :
(i) the force of gravity (20N) on the block by the earth (say, action); the force of gravity on the earth by the block (reaction) equal to 20 N directed upwards (not shown in the figure).
(ii) the force on the floor by the block (action); the force on the block by the floor (reaction).

For (b):
(i) the force of gravity (270 N) on the system by the earth (say, action), the force of gravity on the earth by the system (reaction), equal to 270 N, directed upwards (not shown in the figure).

(ii) the force on the floor by the system (action); the force on the system by the floor (reaction). In addition, for (b), the force on the block by the cylinder and the force on the cylinder by the block also constitute an action-reaction pair.

The important thing to remember is that an action-reaction pair consists of mutual fortes which are always equal and opposite between two bodies. Two forces on the same body which happen to be. equal and opposite can never constitute an action-reaction pair. The force of gravity on the mass in (a) or (b) and the normal force on the mass by the floor are not action-reaction pairs. These forces happen to be equal and opposite for (a) since the mass is at rest. They are not so for case (b), as seen already. The weight of the system is 270 N, while the normal force R’ is 267.3 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 4th Lesson Motion in a Plane Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 4th Lesson Motion in a Plane

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
The vertical component of a vector is equal to its horizontal component. What is the angle made by the vector with the x-axis?
Answer:
The horizontal component is equal to the vertical component of a vector.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 1
F cos θ = F sin θ.
Tan θ = 1 .
θ = tan-1(1) = 45°.

Question 2.
A vector V makes an angle 0 with the horizontal. The vector is rotated through an angle 0. Does this rotation change the vector V ?
Answer:
Yes, it changes the vector.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
Two forces of magnitudes 3 units and 5 units act at 60° with each other. What is the magnitude of their resultant ? [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Let P = 3 units, Q = 5 units, θ = 60°
Resultant (R) = [latex]\sqrt{p^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \theta}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{3^2+5^2+2 \times 3 \times 5 \times \cos 60^{\circ}}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{9+25+30 \times \frac{1}{2}}=\sqrt{49}[/latex] = 7 units

Question 4.
A = [latex]\vec{i}+\vec{j}[/latex]. What is the angle between the vector and X-axis ? [T.S., A.P. Mar. 17; Mar. 14, 13]
Answer:
A = [latex]\vec{i}+\vec{j}[/latex]
cos α = [latex]\frac{A x}{|A|}[/latex] (∵ Ax = 1)
= [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{1^2+1^2}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}[/latex]
α = cos-1 [latex]\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\right)[/latex] = 45°

Question 5.
When two right angled vectors of magnitude 7 units and 24 units combine, what is the magnitude of their resultant ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
θ = 90°, P = 7 units, Q = 24 units
R = [latex]\sqrt{P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \theta}[/latex]
R = [latex]\sqrt{7^2+24^2+2 \times 7 \times 24 \times \cos 90^{\circ}}=\sqrt{49+576}=\sqrt{625}[/latex] = 25 units.

Question 6.
If p = 2i + 4j + 14k and Q = 4i + 4j + 10k find the magnitude of P + Q. [T.S. – Mar. ‘16, ‘15]
Answer:
P = 2i + 4j + 14k, Q = 4i + 4j + 10k,
[latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}[/latex] = 2i + 4j + 14k + 4i + 4j + 10k
= 6i + 8j + 24k
|[latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}[/latex]| = [latex]\sqrt{6^2+8^2+24^2}=\sqrt{676}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
Can a vector of magnitude zero have non-zero components?
Answer:
No, the components of a vector of magnitude zero have non-zero components..

Question 8.
What is the acceleration projectile at the top of its trajectory?
Answer:
The acceleration of a projectile at the top of its trajectory is vertically downwards.

Question 9.
Can two vectors of unequal magnitude add up to give the zero vector? Can three unequal vectors add up to give the zero vector?
Answer:
No, two vectors of unequal magnitude cannot be equal to zero. According to triangle law, three unequal vectors in equilibrium can be zero.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State parallelogram law of vectors. Derive an expression for the magnitude and direction of the resultant vector. [T.S. – Mar. 16; Mar. 14, 15]
Answer:
Statement: If two vectors acting d a point are represented by the adjacent sides of a parallelogram in magnitude and direction, then their resultant is represented by the diagonal of the parallelogram in magnitude and direction dawn from the same vector.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 3
Explanation L Let two forces [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}[/latex] and [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}[/latex] point O. Let θ be the angle between two nrces. Let the side O = [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}[/latex] and OB = [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}[/latex]. The parallelogram OACB is completed. The points O and C are joined. Now OC = [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Resultant magnitude :
In fig [latex]\overrightarrow{O A}=\vec{p}, \overrightarrow{O B}=\vec{Q}, \overrightarrow{O C}=\vec{R}[/latex]
In the triangle COD. OC2 = OD2 + CD2
0C2 = (OA + AD)2 + CD2 (: OD = OA + AÐ)
OC2 = OA2 + AD2 + 2OA. AD + CD622
OC2 = OA2 + AC2 + 2OA. AD …………… (1)
From ∆le CAD, AD2 + CD2 = AC2
From ∆le CAD, cos θ = [latex]\frac{A D}{A C}[/latex]
AD = AC cos θ ……………. (2)
∴ R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2 PQ cosθ
R = [latex]\sqrt{\mathrm{P}^2+\mathrm{Q}^2+2 \mathrm{PQ} \cos \theta}[/latex] ………….. (3)

Resultant direction:
Let (L be the angle made by the resultant vector [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}[/latex] with [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}[/latex]
Then tan α = [latex]\frac{C D}{O D}[/latex]
tan α = [latex]\frac{C D}{O A+A D}[/latex] ……………… (4)
In the triangle CAD, sinO = [latex]\frac{C D}{A C}[/latex]
CD = AC sin θ
CD = Q sin θ ……………… (5)
∴ tan α = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Q} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{P}+\mathrm{Q} \cos \theta}[/latex] (∵ AD = Q COS θ)
α = tan-1 [latex]\left(\frac{Q \sin \theta}{P+Q \cos \theta}\right)[/latex] ……………….. (6)

Question 2.
What is relative motion ? Explain It.
Answer:
Relative velocity is defined as the velocity of one body with respect to another body.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 2
Let us consider two observers A and B are making measurements of an event P in space from two frames of reference as shown in figure. At the beginning let the two origins of the two reference frames coincide and are on the same line.

Let the observer B is moving with a constant velocity VBA with respect to A. Now we can connect the positions of the event P as measured by A with the position of P as measured by B.

As B is moving with constant velocity at the time of observation of event P, the frame B has moved a distance XBA with respect to A.
XPA = XPB + XBA …………….. (1)
“The position of P as measured by observer A is equal to the position of P as measured by B plus the position of B as measured by A”.
eq (1) can also be written as VPA = VPB + VBA …………….. (2)

Question 3.
Show that a boat must move at an angle with respect to river water in order to cross the river in minimum time.
Answer:
If the boat has to move along the line AB, the resultant velocity of VBE should be directed along AB and the boat reaches the point B directly. For this to happen, the boat velocity with respect to water VBW should be directed such that it makes an angle a with the line AB upstream as shown in the figure.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 4
[latex]\frac{V_{W E}}{V_{B W}}[/latex] = sin α ⇒ α = sin-1 [latex]\left(\frac{V_{\mathrm{WE}}}{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{BW}}}\right)[/latex]
and VBE = [latex]\sqrt{V_{B W}^2-V_{W E}^2}[/latex]
The minimum time taken by the boat to cross the river
t = [latex]\frac{A B}{V_{B E}}[/latex]
t = [latex]\frac{A B}{\sqrt{V_{B W}^2-V_{W E}^2}}[/latex]

Question 4.
Define unit vector, null vector and position vector.
Answer:
Unit Vector : A vector having unit magnitude is called unit vector.
[latex]\hat{A}=\frac{A}{|A|}[/latex] where [latex]\hat{A}[/latex] is unit vector.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 5
Null vector : A vector having zero magnitude is called null vector.
Position vector : The position of a particle is described by a position vector which is drawn from the origin of a reference frame. The position vector helps to locate the particle in space.
The position of a particle P is represented by
[latex]\overrightarrow{O P}=\vec{r}=x \vec{i}+y \vec{j}+z \vec{k}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 5.
If [latex]|\vec{a}+\vec{b}|=|\vec{a}-\vec{b}|[/latex] prove that the angle between [latex]\vec{a}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{b}[/latex] is 90°.
Answer:
[latex]|\vec{a}+\vec{b}|=|\vec{a}-\vec{b}|[/latex]
[latex]\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \theta}=\sqrt{a^2+b^2-2 a b \cos \theta}[/latex]
2 ab cos θ = – 2ab cos θ
4 ab cos θ = 0
cos θ = 0 but 4ab ≠ 0
∴ θ = 90°
Hence angle between [latex]\vec{a}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{b}[/latex] is 90°.

Question 6.
Show that the trajectory of an object thrown at certain angle with the horizontal is a parabola. [A.P. Mar. 18, 16, 15; T.S. Mar. 18, 15]
Answer:
Consider a body is projected with an initial velocity (u) making an angle 0 with the horizontal. The body does not experience acceleration in horizontal direction. The velocity of the projectile can be resolved in to (i) u cos θ, horizontal component (ii) u sin θ, vertical component. The horizontal component of velocity remains constant through out the motion. Only its vertical component changes due to acceleration due to gravity (g).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 6
The distance travelled along OX in time t is given by
x = u cos θ × t
t = [latex]\frac{x}{u \cos \theta}[/latex] ………………. (1)
The distance travelled along oy in time t is given by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 7
Y = Ax – Bx2 Where A and B are constants.
This is the equation of parabola.
∴ The trajectory of a projectile is parabola.

Question 7.
Explain the terms the average velocity and instantaneous velocity. When are they equal ?
Answer:
Average velocity :
The average velocity of the particle is defined as the ratio of displacement (∆x) to the time interval ∆t
[latex]\bar{v}=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta t}=\frac{x_2-x_1}{t_2-t_1}[/latex]
Average velocity is independent of the path followed by the particle between the initial and final positions. It gives the result of the motion.

Instantaneous velocity:
The velocity of a particle at a particular instant of time is known as instantaneous velocity.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 8
The instantaneous velocity may be positive (or) negative in straight line motion.
In uniform motion the instantaneous velocity of a body is equal to the average velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 8.
Show that the maximum height and range of a projectile are [latex]\frac{U^2 \sin ^2 \theta}{2 g}[/latex] and [latex]\frac{U^2 \sin 2 \theta}{g}[/latex] respectively where the terms have their regular meanings. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Maximum height:
When the projectile is at the maximum height, its vertical component of velocity vy = 0
Initial velocity (u) = u sin θ
Distance (s) = H = maximum height
Acceleration (a) = – g
using v2 – u2 = 2as,
0 – u2 sin2 θ = – 2gH
∴ H = [latex]\frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \theta}{2 g}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 9
Horizontal range (R) .
The horizontal distance travelled by the projectile from the point of projection during the time of flight is called range. . .
Range (R) = Horizontal velocity × Time of flight
R = u cos θ × T = u cos θ × [latex]\frac{2 u \sin \theta}{g}[/latex]
R = [latex]\frac{u^2 \times 2 \sin \theta \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}[/latex]
R = [latex]\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \theta}{g}[/latex]
If θ = 45°, RMax = [latex]\frac{u^2}{g}[/latex]

Question 9.
If the trajectory of a body is parabolic in one reference frame, can it be parabolic in another reference frame that moves at constant velocity with respect to the first reference frame ? If the trajectory can be other than parabolic, what else can it be ?
Answer:
No, when a stone is thrown from a moving bus, the trajectory of the stone is parabolic in one reference frame. That is when a man observes out side foot path.
In another frame of reference, the trajectory is a vertical straight line.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
A force 2i + j – k newton d’ts on a body which is initially at rest. At the end of 20 seconds the velocity of the body is 4i + 2j – 2k ms-1. What is the mass of the body ?
Answer:
F = (2i + j – k) N
t = 20 sec, u = 0
v = (4i + 2j – 2k) m/s
a = [latex]\frac{v-u}{t}=\frac{(4 i+2 j-2 k)-0}{20}[/latex]
a = [latex]\frac{2 i+j-k}{10}[/latex] m/s2
F = ma
mass (m) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{a}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2 i+j-k}{\left(\frac{2 i+k}{10}\right)}[/latex]
m = 10 kg

Problems

Question 1.
Ship A is 10 km due west of ship B. Ship A is heading directly north at a speed of 30 km/h. while ship B is heading in a direction 60° west of north at a speed of 20 km/h.
i) Determine the magnitude of the velocity of ship B relative to ship A.
ii) What will be their distance of closest approach ?
Answer:
i) VA = 30 kmph, VB = 20 kmp, θ = 60°
Relative velocity of ship B w.r.to ship A is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 10

Question 2.
If θ is the angle of projection, R the range, h the maximum height of the floor. Then show that (a) tan θ = 4h/R and (b) h = gT2/8
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 44

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
A projectile is fired at an angle of 60° to the horizontal with an initial velocity of 800 m/s:
i) Find the time of flight of the projectile before it hits the ground.
ii) Find the distance it travels before it hits the ground (range)
iii) Find the time of flight for the projectile to reach its maximum height.
Answer:
θ = 60°, u = 800 m/s
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 12

Question 4.
For a particle projected slantwise from the ground, the magnitude of its position vector with respect to the point of projection, when it is at the highest point of the path is found to be [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] times the maximum height reached by it. Show that the angle of projection is tan-1 (2)
Answer:
Range (R) = [latex]\frac{u^2 \times 2 \sin \theta \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{u}^2 \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}[/latex] ………… (1)
Maximum height (h) = [latex]\frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \theta}{2 g}[/latex] ……………….. (2)
Given R = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] h
[latex]\frac{u^2 \times 2 \sin \theta \cos \theta}{g}=\sqrt{2} \times \frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \theta}{2 g}[/latex]
tan θ = 2 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]
θ = tan-1 (2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex])

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 5.
An object is launched from a cliff 20m above the ground at an angle of 30° above the horizontal with an initial speed of 30 m/s. How far horizontally does the object travel before landing on the ground ? (g = 10 m/s2)
Answer:
h = 20m, θ = 30°, u = 30m/s,
g = 10m/s2
h = -(u sin θ) t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
20 = – 30 sin 30° × t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × t2
20 = – 30 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × t2
4 = – 3t + t2
t2 – 3t – 4 = 0
(t – 4) (t + 1) = 0
t = 4 sec (or) t = -1 sec
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 13
∴ Range (R) = u cos θ × t
= 30 cos 30° × 4
= 30 × [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}[/latex] × 4
R = 60[latex]\sqrt{3}[/latex] m

Question 6.
O is a point on the ground chosen as origin. A body first suffers a displacement of 10 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m North-East, next 10 m North and finally North-West. How far it is from the origin ?
Answer:
Given OB = 10 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m, BC = 10m.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 14
∴ Total displacement (OD) = | OF | + |FE| + || ED ||
OD = 10 + 10 + 10
OD = 30m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
From a point on the ground a particle is projected with initial velocity u, such that its horizontal range is maximum. Find the magnitude of average velocity during its ascent.
Answer:
S = [latex]\sqrt{\left(\frac{R}{2}\right)^2+\left(\frac{R}{4}\right)^2}=\sqrt{\frac{R^2}{4}+\frac{R^2}{16}}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{\frac{4 R^2+R^2}{16}}=\frac{\sqrt{5} R}{4}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 15

Question 8.
A particle is projected from the ground with some initial velocity making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. It reaches a height of 7.5 m above the ground while it travels a horizontal distance of 10m from the point of projection. Find the initial speed of projection, (g = 10m/s2)
Answer:
θ = 45°, g = 10 m/s2
Horizontal distance (x) = 10m.
Vertical distance (y) = 7.5 m.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 16

Additional Problems

Question 1.
State, for each of the following vector quantities, if it is a scalar are vector : volume, mass, speed, acceleration, density, number of mass, velocity, angular frequency. Displacement, angular velocity.
Answer:
Scalars, volume, mass, speed, density, number of moles, angular frequency vectors, acceleration, velocity, displacement, angular velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 2.
Pick out the two scalar quantities in the following list  angular momentum, work, current, linear momentum, electric field, average velocity, magnetic moment, relative velocity.
Answer:
Work and current are scalar quantities in the given list.

Question 3.
Pick out the only vector quantity in the following list : Temperature, pressure, impulse time, power, total path length, energy, gravitational potential, coefficient of friction, charge.
Answer:
Since, Impulse = change in momentum = force × time. A momentum and force are vector quantities hence impulse is a vector quantity.

Question 4.
State with reasons, whether the following algebraic operations with scalar and vector physical quantities are meaningful :
a) adding any two scalars,
b) adding a scalar to a vector of the same dimensions,
c) multiplying any vector by any scalar,
d) multiplying any two scalars,
e) adding any two vectors,
f) adding a component of a vector to the same vector.
Answer:
a) No, because only the scalars of same dimensions can be added.
b) No, because a scalar cannot be added to a vector.
c) Yes, when acceleration [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] is multiplied by mass m, we get a force [latex]\vec{F}=m \vec{A}[/latex], which is a meaningful operation.
d) Yes, when power P is multiplied by time t, we get work done = Pt, which is a useful operation.
e) No, because the two vectors of same dimensions can be added.
f) Yes, because both are vectors of same dimensions.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 5.
Read each statement below carefully and state with reasons, if it is true of false :
a) The magnitude of a vector is always a scalar,
b) each component of a vector is always a scalar,
c) the total path length is always equal to the magnitude of the displacement vector of a particle,
d) the average speed of a particle (defined as total path length divided by the time taken to cover the path) is either greater or equal to the magnitude of average velocity of the particle over the same interval of time,
e) Three vectors not lying in a plane can never add up to give a null vector.
Answer:
a) True, because magnitude is a pure number.
b) False, each component of a vector is also a vector.
c) True only if the particle moves along a straight line in the same direction, otherwise false.
d) True; because the total path length is either greater than or equal to the magnitude of the displacement vector.
e) True, as they cannot be represented by three sides of a triangle taken in the same order.

Question 6.
Establish the following vector inequalities geometrically or otherwise :
(a) |a + b| ≤ |a| + |b|
(b) |a + b| ≥ ||a| – |b||
(c) |a  – b| ≤ |a| + |b|
(d) |a – b| ≥ ||a| – |b||
When does the equality sign above apply ?
Answer:
Consider two vectors [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{B}[/latex] be represented by the sides [latex]\vec{OP}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{OQ}[/latex] of a parallelogram OPSQ. According to parallelogram law of vector addition; ([latex]\vec{A}+\vec{B}[/latex]) will be represented by [latex]\vec{OS}[/latex] as shown in figure. Thus OP = [latex]|\vec{A}|[/latex], OQ = PS = [latex]|\vec{B}|[/latex] and OS = [latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}|[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 17

a) To prove |[latex]\vec{A}+\vec{B}[/latex] | ≤ [latex]|\vec{A}|[/latex] + [latex]|\vec{B}|[/latex]
we know that the length of one side of a triangle is always less than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides. Hence from ∆OPS, we have OS < OP + PS or OS < OP + OQ or|[latex]\vec{A}+\vec{B}[/latex]|< |[latex]\vec{A}+\vec{B}[/latex]| ………………. (i) If the two vectors [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{B}[/latex] are acting along a same straight line aind in same directions, then [latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}|=|\vec{A}|+|\vec{B}|[/latex] …………….. (ii) combining the conditions mentioned in (i) and (ii) we get [latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}|=|\vec{A}|+|\vec{B}|[/latex] b) To prove [latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}| \geq\|\vec{A}|+| \vec{B}\|[/latex] From ∆OPS, we have OS + PS> OP or OS > |OP – PS| or OS > (OP – OQ) ………………. (iii)
(∵ PS = OQ)
The modulus of (OP – PS) has been taken because the LH.S is always positive but the R.H.S may be negative if OP < PS. Thus from (iii) we have [latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}|>\|\vec{A}|-| \vec{B}\|[/latex] ………………. (iv)
If the two vectors [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{B}[/latex] are acting along a straight line in opposite directions, then
[latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}|=\vec{A}-\vec{B}[/latex] ……………. (v)
combining the conditions mentioned in (iv) and (v) we get
[latex]|\vec{A}+\vec{B}| \geq \vec{A}-\vec{B}[/latex]

c)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 18
combining the conditions mentioned in (vi) and (vii) we get
[latex]|\vec{A}-\vec{B}| \leq|\vec{A}|+|\vec{B}|[/latex]

d) To prove [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \geq|| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|-| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \mid[/latex]
From ∆OPR, we note that OR + PR > OP or OR > |OP – PR| or OR > |OP – OT| ………………. (viii)
(∵ OT = PR)
The modulus of (OP – OT) has been taken because L.H.S. is positive and R.H.S. may be negative of OP < OT From (viii), [latex]|\vec{A}-\vec{B}|>|| \vec{A}|-| \vec{B} \|[/latex] …………….. (ix)
If the two vectors [latex]\vec{A}[/latex] and [latex]\vec{B}[/latex] are acting along the straight line in the same direction, then [latex]|\vec{A}-\vec{B}|[/latex]
= [latex]|\vec{A}|-|\vec{B}|[/latex] ………………. (x)
Combining the conditions mentioned in (ix) and (x) we get
[latex]\vec{A}-\vec{B} \geq \vec{A}-\vec{B}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
Given a + b + c + d = 0. Which of the following statements are correct:
a) a, b, c and d must each be a null vector,
b) The magnitude of (a + c) equals the magnitude of (b + d),
c) The magnitude of a can never be greater than the sum of the magnitudes of b, c, and d,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 19
d) b + c must lie in the plane of a and d if a and d are not collinear, and in the line of a and d, if they are collinear ?
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 20
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 21

Question 8.
Three girls skating on a circular ice ground of radius 200 m start from a point P on the edge of the ground and reach a point Q diametrically opposite to P following different paths as shown in Fig. 4.20. What is the magnitude of the displacement vector for each ? For which girl is this equal to the actual length of path skate ?
Answer:
Displacement for each girl = [latex]\vec{PQ}[/latex]
∴ Magnitude of the displacement of each girl = PQ
= diameter of circular ice ground
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 22
= 2 × 200 = 400 m
For girl B, the magnitude of displacement is equal to the actual length of path skated.

Question 9.
A cyclist starts from the centre O of a circular park of radius km, reaches the edge p of the pa’rk, then cycles along the circumference, and returns to the centre along QO as shown in Fig. 4.21. If the round trip takes 10 min, what is the
(a) net displacement,
(b) average velocity and
(c) average speed of the cyclist ?
Answer:
a) Here, net displacement = zero
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 23

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
On an open ground, a motorist follows a track that turns to his left by an angle of 60° after every 500m. Starting from a given turn, specify the displacement of the motorist at the third, sixth and eighth turn. Compare the magnitude of the displacement with the total path length covered by the motorist in each case.
Answer:
In this problem, the path is regular hexagon ABCDEF of side length 500m let the motorist start from A.
Third turn : The motor cyclist will take the third turn at D. Displacement vector at D = [latex]\overrightarrow{A D}[/latex] Magnitude of this displacement
= 500 + 500 = 1000 m
Total path length from A to D
= AB + BC + CD = 500 + 500 + 500 = 1500 m.
Sixth turn : The motor cyclist takes the sixth turn at A. So displacement vector is null vector – Total path length
= AB + BC + CD + DE + EF + FA = 6 × 500 = 3000 m.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 24
Eighth turn : The motor cyclist takes the eighth turn at C. The displacement vector = [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}[/latex], which is represented by the diagonal of the parallelogram ABCG.
So, |[latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}[/latex]|
= [latex]\sqrt{(500)^2+(500)^2+2 \times 500 \times 500 \times \cos 60^{\circ}}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{(500)^2+(500)^2+250000}[/latex]
= 866.03 m
tan β = [latex]\frac{500 \sin 60^{\circ}}{500+500 \sin 60^{\circ}}=\frac{500 \times \sqrt{3} / 2}{500(1+1 / 2)}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}[/latex] = tan 30° or β = 30°
It means [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}[/latex] makes an angle 30° with the initial direction.
Total path length = 8 × 500 = 4000 m.

Question 11.
A passenger arriving in a new town wishes to go from the station to a hotel located 10 km away on a straight road from the station. A dishonest cabman takes him along a circuitous path 23 km long and reaches the hotel in 28 min. What is (a) the average speed of the taxi, (b) the magnitude of average velocity ? Are the two equal ?
Answer:
Here, actual path length travelled, S = 23 km, displacement = 10 km, time taken, t = 28min = 28/60h
a) Average speed of a taxi
= [latex]\frac{\text { actual path length }}{\text { time taken }}=\frac{23}{28 / 60}[/latex]
= 49.3 km/hr
b) Magnitude of average velocity
= [latex]\frac{\text { displacement }}{\text { time taken }}=\frac{10}{(28 / 60)}[/latex]
= 21.4 km/hr
The average speed is not equal to the magnitude of the average velocity. The two are equal for the motion of taxi along a straight path in one direction.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 12.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 30 ms-1. A woman rides a bicycle with a- speed of 10 m s-1 in the north to south direction. What is the direction in which she should hold her umbrella ?
Answer:
The rain is falling along OA with speed 30 ms-1 and woman rider is moving along OS with speed 10 ms-1 i.e OA = 30 ms-1 & OB = 10ms-1. The woman rider can protect herself from the rain if she holds her umbrella in the direction of relative velocity of rainfall of woman. To draw apply equal and opposite velocity of woman on the rain i.e impress the velocity 10 ms-1 due to North on which is represented by OC. Now the relative velocity of rain w.r.t woman will be represented by diagonal OD of parallelogram OADL. if ∠AOD = θ, then
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 45
= tan 18°26′ or β = 18°26′ with vertical in forward direction.

Question 13.
A man can swim with a speed of 4.0 km/h in still water. How long does he take to cross a river 1.0 km wide if the river flows steadily at 3.0 km/h and he makes his strokes normal to the river current ? How far down the river does he go when he reaches the other bank ?
Answer:
Time to cross the river, t = [latex]\frac{\text { width of river }}{\text { speed of man }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1 \mathrm{~km}}{4 \mathrm{~km} / \mathrm{h}}=\frac{1}{4}[/latex]h = 15min
Distance moved along the river in time
t = vr × t = 3 km/h × [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex] h = 750 m.

Question 14.
The ceiling of a long hall is 25m high. What is the maximum horizontal distance that a ball thrown with a speed of 40 m s-1 can go without hitting the ceiling of the hall ?
Answer:
Here, u = 40 ms-1, H = 25 m; R = ?
Let θ be the angle of projection with the horizontal direction to have the maximum range, with maximum height 25m.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 26

Question 15.
A cricketer can throw a ball to a maximum horizontal distance of 100m. How much high above the ground can the cricketer throw the same ball ?
Answer:
Let u be the velocity of projection of the ball. The ball will cover maximum horizontal distance when angle of projection with horizontal, θ = 45°. Then, Rmax = u2/g Here u2/g = 100m ………………………….. (i)
In order to study the motion of the ball along vertical direction, consider a point on the surface of earth as the origin and vertical upward direction as the positive direction of Y – axis. Taking motion of the ball along vertical upward direction we have.
uy = u, ay = -g, vy = 0, t = ? y0 = 0, y = ?
As uy = uy + ayt
∴ 0 = u + (-g)t or t = u/g
Also y = y0 + uyt + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a0t2
∴ y = 0 + u(u/g) + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-g) u2 /g2
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{u}^2}{\mathrm{~g}}-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{u}^2}{\mathrm{~g}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{u}^2}{\mathrm{~g}}=\frac{100}{2}[/latex]= 50m [from (i)]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
A stone tied to the end of a string 80 cm long is whirled in a horizontal circle with a constant speed. If the stone makes 14 revolutions in 25s. What is the magnitude and direction of acceleration of the stone ?
Answer:
Here, r = 80 cm = 0.8 m ; v = 14/25s-1
∴ ω = 2πV
= 2 × [latex]\frac{22}{7} \times \frac{14}{25}=\frac{88}{25}[/latex] rad s-1
The centripetal accerlation, a = ω2r
= [latex]\left(\frac{88}{25}\right)^2[/latex] × 0.80
= 9.90 m/s2
The direction of centripetal acceleration is along the string directed towards the centre of circular path.

Question 17.
An aircraft executes a horizontal loop of radius 1.00 km with a steady speed of 900 km/h. Compare its centripetal acceleration with the acceleration due to gravity.
Answer:
Here, r = 1 km = 1000 m; v = 900 kmh-1
= 900 × (1000) m × (60 × 60 s)-1
= 250 ms-1
Centripetal acceleration, a = [latex]\frac{v^2}{r}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(250)^2}{1000}[/latex]
Now, a/g = [latex]\frac{(250)^2}{1000} \times \frac{1}{9.8}[/latex] = 6.38.

Question 18.
Read each statement below carefully and state, with reasons, if it is true of false :
a) The net acceleration of a particle in circular motion is always along the radius of the circle towards the centre.
b) The velocity vector of a particle at a point is always along the tangent to the path of the particle at that point.
c) The acceleration vector of a particle in uniform circular motion averaged over one cycle is a null vector
Answer:
a) False, the net acceleration of a particle is towards the centre only in the case of a uniform circular motion.
b) True, because while leaving the circular path, the particle moves tangentially to the circular path.
c) True, the direction of acceleration vector in a uniform circular motion is directed towards the centre of circular path. It is constantly changing with time, the resultant of all these vectors will be a zero vector.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 19.
The position of a particle is given by r = 3.0 t [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] – 2.0t2 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] + 4.0 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{k}}[/latex] m where t is in seconds and the co-efficients have the proper units for r to be in metres, (a) Find the v and a of the particle ? (b) What is the magnitude and direction of velocity of the particle at t = 2.0 s ?
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 27
∴ θ = 69.5° below the x – axis

Question 20.
A particle starts from the origin at t = 0 s with a velocity of 10.0 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] m/s and moves in the x – y plane with a constant acceleration of (8.0i + 2.0[latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]) m s-2. (a) At what time is the x – coordinate of the particle 16 m? What is the y – coordinate of the particle at that time ? (b) What is the speed of the particle at the time ?
Answer:
Here, [latex]\vec{u}[/latex] = 10.0 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] ms-1 at t = 0
[latex]\vec{a}=\frac{\overrightarrow{d v}}{d t}=(8.0 \hat{i}+2.0 \hat{j}) \mathrm{ms}^{-2}[/latex]
So [latex]d \vec{v}=(8.0 \hat{i}+2.0 \hat{j}) d t[/latex]
Integrating it with in the limits of motion i.e. as time changes from 0 to t, velocity changes is from u to v, we have
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 28
Integrating it within the conditions of motion i.e as time changes from 0 to t, displacement is from 0 to r, we have
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 29

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 21.
[latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] and [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] are unit vectors along x – and y – axis respectively. What is the magnitude and direction of the vectors [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] + [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] and [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] – [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] ? What are the components of a vector A = 2 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] + 3 [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] along the directions of [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] + [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex] and [latex]\overline{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] – [latex]\overline{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]? [You may use graphical method]
Answer:
a) Magnitude of [latex](\hat{i}+\hat{j})=|\hat{i}+\hat{j}|[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{(1)^2+(1)^2}=\sqrt{2}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 30

b) Here, [latex]\vec{B}=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}[/latex]
To find the component vectors of [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}[/latex] along the vectors [latex](\hat{i}+\hat{j})[/latex] we first find the unit vector along the vector [latex](\hat{i}+\hat{j})[/latex]. Let be the unit vector along the direction of vector [latex](\hat{i}+\hat{j})[/latex].
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 31
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 32

Question 22.
For any arbitrary motion in space, which of the following relations are true :
a) vaverage = (1/2) (v (t1) + v(t2))
b) vaverage = [r (t2) – r(t1)] / (t2 – t1)
c) v(t)average = v(0) + a t
d) r (t) = r (0) + v(0) t + (1/2) a t2
e) aaverage = [v (t2) – v(t1)] / (t2 – t1)
(The ‘average’ stands for average of the quantity over the time interval t1 to t2)
Answer:
The relations (b) and (e) are true; others are false because relations (a), (c) and (d) hold only for uniform acceleration.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 23.
Read each statement below carefully arid state, with reasons and examples, if it is true or fa1 e :
A scalar quantity is one that
a) is conserved in a process
b) can never take negative values
c) must be dimensionless
d) does not vary from one point to another in space
e) has the same value for observers with different orientations of axes.
Answer:
a) False, because energy is not conserved during inelastic collisions.
b) False, because the temperature can be negative.
c) False, because the density has dimensions.
d) False, because gravitational potential vary from point to point in space.
e) True, because the value of scalar does not change with orientation of axes.

Question 24.
An aircraft is flying at a height of 3400 m above the ground. If the angle subtended at a ground observation point by the aircraft positions 10.0 s apart is 30°, what is the speed of the aircraft ?
Answer:
In figure O is the observation point at the ground. A and B are the positions of aircraft for which ∠AOB = 30°. Draw a perpendicular OC on AB. Here OC = 3400m and ∠AOC = ∠COB = 15°
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 33
Time taken by aircraft from A to B is 10s
In ∆AOC, AC = OC tan 15° = 3400 × 0.2679
= 910.86m
AB = AC + CB = AC + AC = 2AC
= 2 × 910.86 m
Speed of the aircraft, v = [latex]\frac{\text { distance } A B}{\text { time }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2 \times 910.86}{10}[/latex]
= 182.17 ms-1 = 182.2 ms-1

Question 25.
A vector has magnitude and direction. Does K have a location in space ? Can it vary with time? Will two equal vectors a and b at different locations in space necessarily have identical physical effects ? Give examples in support of your answer. .
Answer:
i) A vector in general has no difinite location in space because a vector remains uneffected whenever it is displaced anywhere in space provided its magnitude and direction do not change. However a position vector has a definite location in space.
ii) A vector can vary with time eg the velocity vector of an accelerated particle varies with time.
iii) Two equal vectors at different locations in space do not necessarily have some physical effects. For example two equal forces acting at two different points on a body with can cause the rotation of a body about an axis will not produce equal turning effect.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 26.
A vector has both magnitude and direction. Does it mean that any thing that has magnitude and direction is necessarily a vector ? The rotation of a body can be specified by the direction of the axis of rotation, and the angle of rotation about the axis. Does that make any rotation a vector ?
Answer:
No. There are certain physical quantities which have both magnitude and direction, but they are not vectors as they do not follow the laws of vectors addition, which is essential for vectors. The finite rotation of a body about an axis is not a vector because the finite rotations do not abey the laws of vectors addition. However, the small rotation of a body is a vector quantity as it obey the law of vector addition.

Question 27.
Can you associate vectors with (a) the length of a wire bent into a loop, (b) a plane area, (c) a sphere ? Explain.
Answer:
a) We cannot associate a vector with the length of a wire bent into a loop.
b) We can associate a vector with a plane area. Such a vector is called area vector and its direction is represented by outward drawn normal to the area.
c) we can not associate a vector with volume of sphere however a vector can be associated with the area of sphere.

Question 28.
A bullet fired at an angle of 30° with the horizontal hits the ground 3.0 km away. By adjusting its angle of projection, can one hope to hit a target 5.0 km away ? Assume the muzzle speed to be fixed, and neglect air resistance.
Answer:
Horizontal range R = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{u}^2 \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}[/latex]
3 = [latex]\frac{u^2 \sin 60^{\circ}}{g}=\frac{u^2}{g} \sqrt{3} / 2[/latex] or [latex]\frac{\mathrm{u}^2}{\mathrm{~g}}=2 \sqrt{3}[/latex]
Since the muzzle velocity is fixed, therefore, Max, horizontal range.
Rmax = [latex]\frac{u^2}{g}=2 \sqrt{3}[/latex] = 3.464m.
So, the bullet cannot hit the target.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 29.
A fighter plane flying horizontally at an altitude of 1.5 km with speed 720 km/h passes directly overhead an anti-aircraft gun. At what angle from the vertical should the gun be fired for the shell with muzzle speed 600 m s-1 to hit the plane ? At what minimum altitude should the pilot fly the plane to avoid being hit ? (Take g = 10m s-2).
Answer:
In Fig. 0 be the position of gun and A be the position of plane. The speed of the plane,
v = [latex]\frac{720 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex] = 200 ms-1
The speed of the shell, u = 600 m/s
Let the shell will hit the plane at B after time t if fired at an angle 0 with the vertical from O then the horizontal distance travelled by shel in time t is the same as the distance covered by plane.
i.e. ux × t = vt or u sin θ t = vt .
or sin θ = [latex]\frac{v}{u}=\frac{200}{600}[/latex] = 0.3333 = sin 19.5°. or θ = 19.5°.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 34
The plane will not be hit by the bullet from the gun if it is flying at a minimum height which is maximum height (H) attained by bullet after firing from gun.
Here H = [latex]\frac{u^2 \sin ^2(90-\theta)}{2 g}=\frac{u^2 \cos ^2 \theta}{g}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(600)^2 \times(\cos 19.5)^2}{2 \times 10}[/latex]
= 16000 m
= 16 km

Question 30.
A cyclist is riding with a speed of 27 . km/h. As he approaches a circular turn on the road of radius 80m, he applies brakes and reduces his speed at the constant rate of 0.50 m/s every second. What is the magnitude and direction of the net acceleration of the cyclist on the circular turn ?
Answer:
Here v = 27 km/h-1 = 27 × (1000 m) × (60 × 60s)-1 = 7.5 ms-1, r = 80m centripetal acceleration
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 35
Let the cyclist applies the brakes at the point P of the Circular turn, then tangential acceleration aT will act opposite to velocity. Acceleration along the tangent, aT = 0.5 ms-2 Angle between both the acceleration is 90° Therefore, the magnitude of the resultant acceleration.
a = [latex]\sqrt{a c^2+a_T^2}[/latex]
= [latex]\sqrt{(0.7)^2+(0.5)^2}[/latex]
= 0.86 ms-2
Let the resultant acceleration make an angle β with the tangent i.e. the direction of velocity of the cyclist, then,
tan β = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{T}}}=\frac{0.7}{0.5}[/latex] = 1.4
or β = 54° 28′

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 31.
a) Show that for a projectile the angle between the velocity and the x-axis as a function of time is given by
b) Shows that the projection angle θ for a projectile launched from the origin is given by θ(t) = tan-1 [latex]\left[\begin{array}{cc}
v_{\theta y} & -g t \\
v_{0 x}
\end{array}\right][/latex]
θ0 = tan-1 [latex]\left(\frac{4 h_m}{R}\right)[/latex]
Where the symbols have their usual meaning
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 36
Answer:
a) Let vox and voy be the initial component velocity of the projectile at O along OX direction and OY direction respectveIy, where OX is horizantal and oy is vertical

Let the projectile go from o to p in time t and vx, vy be the component velocity of projectile at P along horizantal and vertical directions respectively. Then vy = voy – gt. and vx = vox
If θ is the angle which the resultant velocity [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}[/latex] makes with horizontal direction, then
tan θ = [latex]\frac{v y}{v x}=\frac{v_{o y}-g t}{v_{o x}}[/latex] or
θ = tan-1 [latex]\left[\frac{v_{\mathrm{oy}}-g t}{v_{o x}}\right][/latex]

b) In angular projection, maximum vertical height,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 37

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m s-1. Winds starts blowing after sometime with a speed of 12 m s-1 in east to west direction. In which direction should a boy waiting at bus stop hold his umbrella?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 38
Answer:
The velocity of the rain and the wind are represented by the vectors vr and vw in Fig. a e in the direction specified by the problem. Using the rule of vector addition, we see that the resultant of vr and vw is R as shown in the figure. The magnitude of R is
R = [latex]\sqrt{v_{\mathrm{r}}^2+v_{\mathrm{w}}^2}=\sqrt{35^2+12^2}[/latex] m s-1 = 37 m s-1
The direction θ that R makes with the vertical is given by
tan θ = [latex]\frac{v_w}{v_r}=\frac{12}{35}[/latex] = 0343
Or, θ = tan-1 (0.343) = 19°
Therefore, the boy should hold his umbrella in the vertical plane at an a glass about 19° with vertical towards the east.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 2.
Fine, the magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors A and B in terms of their magnitudes and angle θ between them.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 39
Answer:
Let OP and OQ represent the two vectors A and B making an angle θ (fig.). Then using the parallelogram method of vector addition, OS represents the vector R :
R = A + B
SN is normal to OP and PM is normal to OS.
From the geometry of the figure,
OS2 = ON2 + SN2
but ON = OP + PN = A + B cos θ
SN = B sin θ
OS2 = (A + B cos θ)2 + (B sin θ)2
or, R2 = A2 + B2 + 2AB cos θ
R = [latex]\sqrt{A^2+B^2+2 A B \cos \theta}[/latex] …………….. (1)
In ∆ OSN, SN = OS sin α = R sin α, and in ∆ PSN, SN = PS sin θ = B sin θ
Therefore, R sin θ = B sin θ
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 40
Equation (1) gives the magnitude of the resultant and Eqs. 5 & 6 its direction. Equation ((1) a) is known as the Law of ‘ cosines and Eq. (4) as the Law of sines.

Question 3.
A motorboat is racing towards north at 25 km/h and the water current in that region is 10 km/h in the direction of 60° east of south. Find the resultant velocity of the boat.
Answer:
The vector vb representing the velocity of the motorboat and the vector vc representing the water current are shown in Fig. in directions specified by the problem. Using the parallelogram method of addition, the resultant R is obtained in the direction shown in the figure.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 41
We can obtain the magnitude of R using the Law of cosine :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 42

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
The position of a particle is given by r =[latex]3.0 t \overline{\mathrm{i}}+2.0 \overline{\mathrm{j}}^2 \mathrm{j}+5.0 \overline{\mathrm{K}}[/latex] where t is in seconds and the coefficients have the proper units for r to he in metres. (a) Find v(t) and a(t) of the particle. (b) Find the magnitude and direction of v(t) at t = 1.0 s.
Answer:
v(t) = [latex]\frac{d r}{d t}=\frac{d}{d t}\left(3.0 t \hat{i}+2.0 t^2 \hat{j}+5.0 \hat{k}\right)[/latex]
= [latex]3.0 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4.0 t \hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]
a(t) = [latex]\frac{d v}{d t}=+4.0 \hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]
a = 4.0 ms-2 along y-direction
At t = 1.0 s, v = [latex]3.0 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4.0 \hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]
It’s magnitude is v = [latex]\sqrt{3^2+4^2}[/latex] = 5.0 m s-1 and direction is
θ = tan-1[latex]\left(\frac{v_{\mathrm{y}}}{v_{\mathrm{x}}}\right)[/latex] = tan-1 [latex]\left(\frac{4}{3}\right)[/latex] ≅ 53° with x-axis.

Question 5.
A particle starts from origin at t = 0 with a velocity 5.0 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] m/s and moves in x-y plane under action of a force which produces a constant acceleration of (3.0 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{i}}[/latex] + 2.0[latex]\hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]) m/s2.
(a) What is the y- coordinate of the particle at the instant its x-co-ordinate is 84 m ?
(b) What is the speed of the particle at this time?
Answer:
The position of the particle is given by
r(t) = v0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
= [latex]5.0 \hat{i} t+(1 / 2)(3.0 \hat{i}+2.0 \hat{j}) t^2[/latex]
= [latex]\left(5.0 t+1.5 t^2\right) \hat{i}+1.0 t^2 \hat{j}[/latex]
Therefore, x(t) = 5.0t + 1.5 t2
y(t) = + 1.0t2
Givn x(t) = 84m, t =?
5.0 t + 1.5 t2 = 84 ⇒ t = 6s
At t = 6 s, y = 1.0 (6)2 = 36.0 m
Now the velocity v = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dr}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
= (5.0 + 3.0t)[latex]\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2.0 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{j}}[/latex]
At t = 6s, v = [latex]23.0 \hat{i}+12.0 \hat{j}[/latex]
speed = |v| = [latex]\sqrt{23^2+12^2}[/latex] ≅ 26 m s-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m s-1. A woman rides a bicycle with a speed of 12 m s-1 in east to west direction. What is the direction in which she should hold her umbrella?
Answer:
In Fig. vr represents the velocity of rain and vb, the velocity of the bicycle, the woman is riding. Both these velocities are with respect to the ground. Since the woman is riding a bicycle, the velocity of rain as experienced by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 43
her is the velocity of rain relative to the velocity of the bicycle she is riding. That is
vrb = vr – vb
This relative velocity vector as shown in Fig. makes an angle θ with the vertical. It is given by
tan θ = [latex]\frac{v_{\mathrm{b}}}{v_{\mathrm{r}}}=\frac{12}{35}[/latex] = 0.343 or, θ ≅ 19°
Therefore, the woman should hold her umbrella at an angle of about 19° with the vertical towards the west.

Note carefully the difference between this example and the Example 1. In Example 1, the boy experiences the resultant (vector sum) of two velocities while in this example, the woman experiences the velocity of rain relative to the bicycle (the vector difference of the two velocities).

Question 7.
Galileo, in his book Two new sciences, stated that “for elevations which exceed or fall short of 45° by equal amounts, the ranges are equal”. Prove this statement.
Answer:
For a projectile launched with velocity v0 at an angle θ0, the range is given by
R = [latex]\frac{v_0^2 \sin 2 \theta_0}{g}[/latex]
Now, for angles, (45° + α) and (45° – α), 2θ0 is (90° + 2α) and (90° – 2α), respectively. The values of sin (90° + 2α) and sin (90° – 2α), are the same, equal to that of cos 2a. Therefore, ranges are equal for elevations which exceed or fall short of 45° by equal amounts α.

Question 8.
A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m above the ground and throws a stone horizontally with an initial speed of 15 ms-1. Neglecting air resistance, find the time taken by the stone to reach the ground and the speed with which it hits the ground. (Take g = 9.8m s-2).
Answer:
We choose the origin of the x , and y – axis at the edge of the cliff and t = 0 s at the instant the stone is thrown. Choose the positive direction of x-axis to be along the initial velocity and the positive direction of y-axis to be the vertically upward direction. The x, and y- components of the motion can be treated independently. The equations of motion are :
x (t) = x0 + υ0xt
y (t) = y0 + υ0y t + (1/2) ay t2
Here, x0 = y0 = 0, υ0y = 0, ay = – g = -9.8m s-2, υ0x = 15 m s-1.
The stone hits the ground when y(t) = – 490 m.
– 490 m = – (1/2) (9.8) t2.
This gives t = 10 s.
The velocity components are υx = υ0x and υy = υ0y – g t
so that when the stone hits the ground :
u0x = 15 m s-1
u0y = 0 – 9.8 × 10 = -98 m s-1
Therefore, the speed of the stone is
[latex]\sqrt{v_x^2+v_y^2}=\sqrt{15^2+98^2}[/latex] = 99 m s-1.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
A cricket ball is thrown at a speed of 28 m s-1 in a direction 30° above the horizontal. Calculate (a) the maximum height, (b) the time taken by the ball to return to the same level and (c) the distance from the thrower to the point where the ball returns to the same level.
Answer:
a) The maximum height is given by
hm = [latex]\frac{\left(v_0 \sin \theta_0\right)^2}{2 g}=\frac{\left(28 {in} 30^{\circ}\right)^2}{2(9.8)}[/latex] m
= [latex]\frac{14 \times 14}{2 \times 9.8}[/latex] = 10.0 m
(u0 sin0o)2 (28 in 30°)2 . hm ~ 2g “ 2(9.8) m

b) The time taken to return to the same level is
Tf = (2 υ0 sinθ0)/g = (2 × 28 × sin30°)/9.8
= 28 / 9.8 s = 2.9 s

c) The distance from the thrower to the point where the ball returns to the same level is
R = [latex]\frac{\left(v_0^2 \sin 2 \theta_0\right)}{g}=\frac{28 \times 28 \times \sin 60^{\circ}}{9.8}[/latex]
= 69 m

Question 10.
An insect trapped in a circular groove of radius 12 cm moves along the groove steadily and completes 7 revolutions in 100 s, (a) What is the angular speed and the linear speed of the motion ? (b) Is the acceleration vector a constant vector ? What is its magnitude ?
Answer:
This is an example nf uniform circular motion. Here R = 12 cm. The angular speed ω is given by
ω = 2π/T = 2π × 7/100 = 0.44 rad/s ,
The linear speed υ is :
υ = ω R = 0.44 s-1 × 12 cm = 5.3 cm s-1
The direction of velocity v is along the tangent to the circle at every point. The acceleration is directed towards the centre of the circle. Since this direction changes continuously, acceleration here is not a constant vector. However, the magnitude of acceleration is constant :
a – ω2 R = (0.44 s-1)2 (12 cm)
= 2.3 cm s-2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 3rd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 3rd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
The states of motion and rest are relative. Explain.
Answer:
Rest and motion are relative. They are not absolute. A body can be in the rest or in motion w.r.t. reference frame. A man in a moving train is a rest w.r. to a co-passenger, but he is in motion w.r.t a man on the ground.

Question 2.
How is average velocity different from instantaneous velocity? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
The average velocity does not give any details of the motion of the particle. It gives only the result of the motion. The instantaneous velocity defines how fast the particle moves at a particular instant of time.
In uniform motion, the instantaneous velocity is equal to the average velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 3.
Give an example where the velocity of an object is zero but its acceleration is not zero.
Answer:
When the body is projected vertically upwards, at the highest point, its velocity is zero. But its acceleration (a = g) is not equal to zero.

Question 4.
A vehicle travels half the distance L with speed v1 and the other half with speed v2. What is the average speed ?
Answer:
Average speed = [latex]\frac{\text { Total length of the path }}{\text { Total time taken }}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}\right)}{\mathrm{V}_1}+\frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}\right)}{\mathrm{V}_2}}=\frac{2 \mathrm{~V}_1 \mathrm{~V}_2}{\mathrm{~V}_1+\mathrm{V}_2}[/latex]

Question 5.
A lift coming down is just about to reach the ground floor. Taking the ground floor as origin and positive direction upwards for all quantities, which one of the following is correct
a) x < 0, v < 0, a > 0, b) x > 0, v < 0, a < 0, c) x > 0, v < 0, a > 0, d)x > 0, V > 0, a > 0
Answer:
While lift is moving towards ground floor (origin), position x decreases, velocity decreases. Hence x < 0, v < 0. But a > 0. So(a) is correct option.

Question 6.
A uniformly moving cricket ball is hit with a bat for a very short time and is turned back. Show the variation of its acceleration with time taking the acceleration in the backward direction as positive.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 1

Question 7.
Give an example of one-dimensional motion where a particle moving along the positive x-direction comes to rest periodically and moves forward.
Answer:
When simple harmonic oscillator starts from left extreme position and comes to rest at that point periodically and moves forward.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 8.
An object falling through a fluid is observed to have an acceleration given by a = g – bv where g is the gravitational accelaration and b is a constant. After a long time it is observed to fall with a constant velocity. What would be the value of this constant velocity ?
Answer:
Given acceleration a = g – bv
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = g – bv [∵ a = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]]
If an object is moving through fluid with constant velocity, dv = 0
0 = g – bv ∴ v = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{b}}[/latex]

Question 9.
If the trajectory of a body is parabolic in one frame, can it be parabolic in another frame that moves with a constant velocity with respect to the first frame ? If not, what can it be ?
Answer:
No. the trajectory is a vertical straight line.

Question 10.
A spring with one end attached to a mass and the other to a rigid support is stretched and released. When is the magnitude of acceleration a maximum ?
Answer:
The magnitude of acceleration is maximum at Extreme Positions.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Can the equations of kinematics be used when the acceleration varies with time ? If not, what form would these equations take ?
Answer:
No, the equations of kinematics be used when the acceleration varies with time.
If an object moves along a straight line with uniform acceleration (a), equations of kinematics are

  1. v = v0 + at;
  2. x = v0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2;
  3. v2 = v02 + 2ax

Where x is displacement, v0 is velocity at t = 0, v is velocity at time t, a is acceleration.
These are kinematic equations of rectilinear motion for constant acceleration.
If an object moves with non-uniform acceleration, the equations of motion are,

  1. v = v0 + at
  2. x = x0 + v0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]at2
  3. v2 = v02 + 2a (x – x0)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 2.
A particle moves in a straight line with uniform acceleration. Its velocity at time t = 0 is v1 and at time t = t is v2. The average velocity of the particle in this time interval is (v1 + v2)/2. Is this correct ? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
Consider a particle moving with uniform acceleration a.
At t = 0, the (initial) velocity = v1
At t = t, the (final) velocity = v2
time = t
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 2
∴ The given statement is true.

Question 3.
Can the velocity of an object be in a direction other than the direction of acceleration of the object ? If so, give an example.
Answer:
Yes, the velocity of an object be in a direction other than the direction of acceleration of the object.

Ex. : In the case of the upward motion of a projectile, the angle between velocity and acceleration is 180°. During its journey, the direction of velocity is in upwards and the direction of acceleration is in downwards.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 4.
A parachutist flying in an aeroplane jumps when it is at a height of 3 km above ground. He opens his parachute when he is about 1 km above ground. Describe his motion.
Answer:

  1. A parachutist is jumping from an air-plane at a height of 3 km from the ground. Upto 1 km above the ground, his motion is like a freely falling body. He falls with constant acceleration 9.8 ms-2.
  2. At a height of 1 km above the ground, when he opened the parachute, the air drag opposes the force of gravity resultant on it. The acceleration of parachutist gradually decreases since velocity increases (a = g – bv) and becomes zero.
  3. Further, the parachutist attains terminal speed (constant speed), where air drag (in upward direction) is equal to force of gravity (in downward).
  4. Hopefully this terminal speed is slow enough, so he can touch the ground without much difficulty.

Question 5.
A bird holds a fruit in its beak and flies parallel to the ground. It lets go of the fruit at some height. Describe the trajectory of the fruit as it falls to the ground as seen by
(a) the bird
(b) a person on the ground.
Answer:
A bird holds a fruit in its beak and flies parallel to the ground.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 3
It lets go of the fruit at some height, the trajectory of the fruit as it falls to the ground as seen by (a) the bird is a straight line (b) a person on the ground is a parabola.

Question 6.
A man runs across the roof of a tall building and jumps horizontally on to the (lower) roof of an adjacent building. If his speed is 9 ms-1 and the horizontal distance between the buildings is 10 m and the height difference between the roofs is 9 m, will he be able to land on the next building ? (take g = 10 ms-2).
Answer:
Difference of heights between two buildings h = 9 m; g = 10 ms-2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 4
Time of flight of a man t = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 9}{10}}[/latex]
= 1.341 sec
Horizontal speed of a man u = 9 ms-1
Horizontal distance travelled by a man dm
= Horizontal speed × Time of flight
= u × t = 9 × 1.341 = 12.07 m
Given, the horizontal distance between the buildings db = 10 m
Since dm > db, the man can able to land on the next building.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 7.
A ball is dropped from the roof of a tall building and simultaneously another ball is thrown horizontally with some velocity from the same roof. Which ball lands first? Explain your answer.
Answer:
Let height of the building = Displacement of ball = h
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 5
For first ball u = 0; S = h. a = g; t = t1
Substituting these values in S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
⇒ h = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt12
∴ t1 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}[/latex] …………… (1)
For second ball, ux = u (say) uy = 0, aY = g, SY = h; t = t2
Substituting these values in
SY = uYt + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] aYt2
h = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt22
∴ t2 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}[/latex]
From equation (1) and equation (2), t1 = t2
∴ Two balls will reach the ground in same time.

Question 8.
A ball is dropped from a building and simultaneously another ball is projected upward with some velocity. Describe the change in relative velocities of the balls as a function of time.
Answer:
For first ball u = u1; v = v1; a = g; t = t
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 6
Substituting these values in equation
v = u + at, we get
v1 = u1 + gt1
For second ball u = u<sub2; v = v2; a = – g; t = t2
Substituting these values in equation, v = u + at,
We get, v2 = u2 + gt2 ………………. (2)
(1) – (2) ⇒ (v1 – v2) = (u1 – u2) + g(t1 + t2)
∴ (v1 – v2) – (u1 – u2) = g(t1 + t2)
[∵ u1 = 0]
∴ (v1 – v2) – (0 – u2) = g(t1 + t2)
∴ The change in final relative velocity and initial relative velocity of two balls = Function of time.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 9.
A typical raindrop is about 4 mm in diameter. If a raindrop falls from a cloud which is km above the ground, estimate its momentum when it hits the ground.
Answer:
Diameter of rain drop, D = 4 mm
Radius of ram drop r = 2 mm = 2 × 10-3 m
Volume of the rain atop, V = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] πr3 = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × (2 × 10-3)3
Density of water drop = 103 kg/m3
Mass of water drop M = Vd = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × 8 × 10-9 × 103
= 33.5 × 2 × 10-6 kg
The height of raindrop falls from a cloud, h = 1 km = 1000 m
Velocity of raindrop just before touching the ground V = [latex]\sqrt{2 g h}=\sqrt{2 \times 9.8 \times 1000}[/latex] = 140 ms-1
Momentum of raindrop when it hits the ground P = mV = 33.52 × 10-6 × 140 = 469.28 × 10-5
= 0.004692 kg ms-1

Question 10.
Show that the maximum height reached by a projectile launched at an angle of 45° is one quarter of its range.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 7

Problems

Question 1.
A man walks on a straight road from his home to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 km h-1. Finding the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back home with a speed of 7.5 km h-1. What is the (a) magnitude of average velocity and (b) average speed of the man over the time interval 0 to 50 min.
Answer:
From home to market:
X1 = 2.5 km; v1 = 5 km h-1;
t1 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{X_1}}{\mathrm{v_1}}=\frac{2.5}{5}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex] h = 30 min.
From market to home:
X2 = 2.5 km; v2 = 7.5 km h-1
t2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{X_2}}{\mathrm{v_2}}=\frac{2.5}{7.5}=\frac{1}{3}[/latex] h = 20 min.
a) Magnitude of average velocity
= [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{X}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{X}_1-\mathrm{X}_2}{\mathrm{t}_1+\mathrm{t}_2}=\frac{2.5-2.5}{50}[/latex] = 0
b) Average speed
= [latex]\frac{X_1+X_2}{t_1+t_2}=\frac{2.5-2.5}{(30+20) \min }=\frac{5 \mathrm{~km}}{50 \times \frac{h}{60}}[/latex]
= 6 km h-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 2.
A car travels the first third of a distance with a speed of 10 kmph, the second third at 20 kmph and the last third at 60 kmph. What is its mean speed over the entire distance ? [T.S. Mar 16]
Answer:
v1 = 10 km ph; v2 = 20 km ph; v1 = 60 km ph; v = ?
[latex]\frac{3}{v}=\frac{1}{v_1}+\frac{1}{v_2}+\frac{1}{v_3}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{3}{v}=\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{20}+\frac{1}{60}, \frac{3}{v}=\frac{6+3+1}{60}=\frac{3}{v}=\frac{10}{60}[/latex]
∴ v = 18 km ph

Question 3.
A bullet moving with a speed of 150 ms-1 strikes a tree and penetrates 3.5 cm before stopping. What is the magnitude of its retardation in the tree and the time taken for it to stop after striking the tree ?
Answer:
u = 150 m/s, s = 3.5 cm = 0.035 m, v = 0
v2 – u2 = 2as
0 – 1502 = 2 × a × 0.035
a = [latex]\left|\frac{-150 \times 150}{2 \times 0.035}\right|[/latex]
= -3.214 × 105 m/s2 = -3.214 × 105 m/s2
Time = [latex]\frac{v-u}{a}=\frac{0-150}{3.214 \times 10^5}=\frac{-150}{3.214 \times 10^5}[/latex]
= 4.67 × 10-4 sec.

Question 4.
A motorist drives north for 30 min at 85 km/h and then stop for 15 min. He continues travelling north and covers 130 km in 2 hours. What is his total displacement and average velocity ?
Answer:
v1 = 85 kmph, t = 35.0 min, S2 = 130 km
S1 = Displacement = [latex]\frac{85}{60}[/latex] × 30 = 42.5 km
S2 = 130 km
a) S = S1 + S2 = 42.5 + 130 = 172.50 km
b) Avg.velocity = [latex]\frac{S_1+S_2+S_3}{t_1+t_2+t_3}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{42.5+0+130}{\frac{30}{60}+\frac{15}{60}+2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{172.5 \times 60}{165}[/latex]
= 62.7 km/hr

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 5.
A ball A is dropped from the top of a .building and at the same time an identical ball B is thrown vertically upward from the ground. When the balls collide the speed of A is twice that of B. At what fraction of the height of the building did the collison occur ?
Answer:
Let height of the building =H
Let two balls collide at a height = h
For ball A, u = 0; V = VA s = H – h; t = t; a = g
Substituting these values in s = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
H – h = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
H – h = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2 …………. (1)
and VA = gt ……………… (2)
For ball B, u = u; v = vB; s = h; a = -g
Substituting these values in s = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
⇒ h = ut – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2 ………. (3)
and VB = u – gt ……….. (4)
given VA = 2VB
gt = 2(u – gt)
u = [latex]\frac{3}{2}[/latex] gt …………… (5)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 8

Question 6.
Drops of water fall at regular intervals from the roof of abuilding of height 16 m. The first drop strikes the ground at the same moment as the fifth drop leaves the roof. Find the distances between successive drops.
Answer:
H = 16 m
Time taken by the first drop to touch the ground t = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 16}{9.8}=\sqrt{3.26}}[/latex]
sec = 1.8 sec
Time interval between two successive drops
= [latex]\frac{t}{n-1}[/latex] Where n = no. of drops
= [latex]\frac{1.8}{5-1}=\frac{1.8}{4}[/latex] = 0.45 sec
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 9
For second drop h2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 9.8 × 1.35 × 1.35 = 8.93 m
d12 = 16 – 8.93 = 7.06 = 7 m
For 3rd drop h3 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 9.8 × 0.90 × 0.90
= 3.97
d23 = 8.93 – 3.97 = 4.961 = 5 m
For 4th drop h4 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 9.8 × 0.45 × 0.45
= 0.9922
d34 = 3.97 – 0.9922
d34 = 2.9778 = 3 m
Similarly for d45 = 0.9922 – 0 = 0.9922 = 1 m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 7.
A hunter aims a gun at a monkey hanging from a tree some distance away. The monkey drops from the branch at the moment he fires the gun hoping to avoid the bullet. Explain why the monkey made a wrong move.
Answer:
Suppose a hunter aims the gun at a monkey hanging from a high tree branch some distance away d. The instant the monkey observes the flash of the gun it drops from the tree.
Here the time taken by the monkey from the tree to the ground is t1 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}[/latex] ……………. (1)
The path of bullet from the gun is like a horizontal Projectile, vertical velocity uy = 0, Let S = h. Let t2 be the time taken by the bullet to reach the ground.
∴ S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]a t22
S = 0 × t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]a t22
∴ h = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]g t22
t2 = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}[/latex] …………….. (2)
It is observed from equation (1) and (2),
t1 = t2
Both bullet and monkey reach the ground simultaneously.
Hence the bullet hits the monkey. Therefore Monkey made a wrong move.

Question 8.
A food packet is dropped from an aeroplane, moving with a speed of 360 kmph in a horizontal direction, from a height of 500 m. Find (i) its time of descent (ii) the horizontal distance between the point at which the food packet reaches the ground and the point above which it was dropped.
Answer:
Velocity of aeroplane v = 360 kmph
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 10
v = 360 × [latex]\frac{5}{18}[/latex] = 100 m/s
h = 500 m
i) Time of descent =
t = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 500}{10}}[/latex] = 10 sec
ii) Horizontal range R = u × [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}[/latex]
= 100 × 10 sec = 1000 sec

Question 9.
A ball is tossed from the window of a buliding with an initial velocity of 8 ms-1 at an angle of 20° below the horizontal. It strikes the ground 3 s later. From what height was the ball thrown ? How far from the base of the building does the ball strike the ground ?
Answer:
u = 8 m/s, θ = 20°, t = 35
a) Horizontal distance = (u cos θ) t = 8 cos 20° × 3 = 8 × 0.9397 × 3 = 22.6 m

b) Height h = (u sin θ)t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2
= 8 sin 20° × 3 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 9.8 × 9
= 8.208 + 44.1 = 52.31 m

c) The ball is thrown from a height of 44.1 m 1
h1 = (u sin θ)t1 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt12
10 = (8 sin 20°)t1 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] 9.8% t12
= 2.736 t1 + 4.9 t12
⇒ 4.9 t12 + 2.736 t1 – 10 = 0
t1 = [latex]\frac{-2.736 \pm \sqrt{(2.736)^2+4 \times 4.9 \times 10}}{2 \times 4.9}[/latex]
⇒ t1 = [latex]\frac{-2.736 \pm \sqrt{203.48}}{9.8}[/latex]
t1 = [latex]\frac{-2.736+14.265}{9.8}=\frac{11.5288}{9.8}[/latex]
= 1.176 = 1.18 sec

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 10.
Two balls are projected from the same point in directions 30° and 60° with respect to the horizontal. What is the ratio of their initial velocities if they
(a) attain the same height ?
(b) have the same range 1
Answer:
θ1 = 30°, θ2 = 60°
a) First ball maximum height H1
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 11

Additional Problems

Question 1.
In which of the following examples of motion, can the body be considered approximately a point object:
a) a railway carriage moving without jerks between two stations.
b) a monkey sitting on top of a man cycling smoothly on a circular track.
c) a spinning cricket ball that turns sharply on hitting the ground.
d) a tumbling beaker that has slipped off the edge of a table.
Solution:
a) The carriage can be considered a point object because the distance between two stations is very large as compared to the size of the railway carriage.

b) The monkey can be considered as a point object if the cyclist describes a circular track of very large radius because in that case the distance covered by the cyclist is quite large as compared to the size of monkey. The monkey can not be considered as a point object. If the cyclist describes a circular track of small radius, because in that case the distance covered by the cyclist is not very large as compared to the size of the monkey.

c) The cricket ball can not be considered as a point object because the size of the spinning cricket ball is quite appreciable as compared to the distance through which the ball may turn on hitting the ground.

d) A beaker sleeping off the edge of a table cannot be considered as a point, object because the size of the beaker is not negligable as compared to the height of the table.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 2.
The position-time (x – t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their homes P and Q respectively are shown in fig. Choose the correct entries in the brackets below :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 12
a) (A/B) lives.closer to the school than (B/A).
b) (A/B) starts from the school earlier than (B/A).
c) (A/B) walks faster than (B/A).
d) A and B reach home at the (same/ different) time.
e) (A/B) overtakes (B/A) on the road (once/twice).
Solution:
a) As OP < OQ, A lives closer to the school than B.

b) For x = 0, t = 0 for A; while t has some finite value for B.
Therefore, A starts from the school earlier than B.

c) Since the velocity is equal to slope of x -1 graph in case of uniform motion and slope of x -1 graph for B is greater than for A, hence B walks faster than A.

d) Corresponding to points P and Q, the value of t from x – t graph for A and B is same, which can be checked by drawing lines through P and Q parallel to x axis. Thus both A and B reach home at the same time.

e) The x – t graph for A and B intersect each other only once. Since B starts from the school after- wards, therefore B overtakes A on the road once.

Question 3.
A woman starts from her home at 9.00 am, walks with a speed of 5 km h-1 on a straight road up to her office 2.5 km away, stays at the office up to 5.00 pm and returns home by an auto with a speed of 25 km h-1. Choose suitable scales and plot the x-t graph of her motion.
Answer:
Time taken in reaching office
= [latex]\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Speed }}=\frac{2.5}{5}[/latex] = 0.5 hr.
Time taken in returning from office = [latex]\frac{2.5}{25}[/latex]
= 0.1 hr = 6 min
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 13
It means the woman reaches the office at 9.30 am and returns home at 5.06 p.m. The x – t graph of this motion will be as shown in fig.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 4.
A man walking in a narrow lane takes 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, followed again by 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward and so on. Each step is 1 m long and requires 1 s. Plot the x-t graph of his motion. Determine graphically and otherwise how long the drunkard takes to fall in a pit 13 m away from the start.
Answer:
The effective distance travelled by drunkard in 8 steps = 5 – 3 = 2 m.

Therefore he take 32 steps to walk 8 meters. Now he will have to cover 5 mt more to reach the pit, for which he has to take only 5 forward steps.

Therefore he will have to take = 32 + 5 = 37 steps to move 13 mts. Thus he will fall into pit after taking 37 steps i.e., after 37 seconds from the start.

Question 5.
A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500 km h-1 ejects its products of combustion at the speed of 1500 km h-1 relative to the jet plane. What is the speed of the latter with respect to an observer on the ground ?
Answer:
Lt vp be the velocity of the products w.r.to ground
Lt us consider the direction of motion of airplane to be positive direction of x-axis.
Here, speed of jet plane vA = 500 km h-1
Relative speed of products of combustion w.r.to jet plane vρA = -1500 km h-1
Relative velocity of the products w.r.to air plane is
vPA – vP – vA = -1500
(Or)
vP = vA – 1500 = 500 – 1500
= – 1000 km h-1
Here -ve sign shows the direction of products of combustion is opposite to that of airplane. Thus the magnitude of relative velocity is 1000 km h-1.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 6.
A car moving along a straight highway with speed of 126 km h-1 is brought to a stop within a distance of 200 m. What is the retardation of the car (assumed uniform) and how long does it take for the car to stop ?
Answer:
Here, u = 126 km h-1 = [latex]\frac{126 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex] ms-1
= 35 ms-1; v = 0, S = 200 m, a = ?
and t = ?
We know v2 = u2 + 2as
0 = (35)2 + 2 × a × 200 (Or)
a = [latex]\frac{-(35)^2}{2 \times 200}=\frac{-49}{16}[/latex]
= -3.06 ms-2
As v = u + at
0 = 35 + [latex]\left(\frac{-49}{16}\right) \mathrm{t}[/latex] (Or)
t = [latex]\frac{35 \times 16}{49}=\frac{80}{7}[/latex] = 11.43s

Question 7.
Two trains A and B of length 400 m each are moving on two parallel tracks with a uniform speed of 72 km h-1 in the same direction, with A ahead of B. The driver of B decides to overtake A and accelerates by 1 m s-2. If after 50 s, the guard of B just moves past the driver of A, what was the original distance between them ?
Solution:
For train A; u = 72 km h-1 = [latex]\frac{72 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex]
= 20 m s-2; t = 50s; a = 0, S = SA;
As S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
∴ SA = 20 × 50 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0 × 502
= 1000 m
For train B; u = 72 kms-1 = 20 ms-2;
a = 1 ms-2, t = 50/S, S = s-B
As, S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
∴ SB = 20 × 50 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 1 × 502 = 2250 m
Taking the guard of the train B in the last compartment of the train B, it follows that original distance between two trains + length of train A + length of train B = SB – SA.
(Or) Original distance between the two trains
400 + 400 = 2250 – 1000 = 1250
(Or) Original distance between the two trains
= 1250 – 800 = 450 m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 8.
On a two-lane road, car A is travelling with a speed of 36 km h-1. Two cars B and C approach car A in opposite directions with a speed of 54 km h-1 each. At a certain instant, when the distance AB is equal to AC, both being 1 km, B decides to overtake A before C does. What minimum acceleration of car B is required to avoid an accident ?
Solution:
Velocity of car A = 36 km h-1 = 10 ms-1
Velocity of car B or C = 54 km h-1 = 15 ms-1
Relative velocity of B w.r.to
A = 15 – 10 = 5 ms-1
Relative velocity of C w.r.to
A = 15 + 10 = 25 ms-1
As, AB = AC = 1 km = 1000 m
Time available to B (Or) C for crossing
A = [latex]\frac{1000}{25}[/latex] = 40s
If car B accelerates with acceleration a, to cross A before car C does, then
u = 5 ms-1, t = 40s, s = 1000 m, a = ?
Using s = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
1000 = 5 × 40 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × a × 402 (Or)
1000-200 = 800 a (Or)
a = 1 m/s2

Question 9.
Two towns A and B are connected by a regular bus service with a bus leaving in either direction every T minutes. A man cycling with a speed of 20 km h-1 in the direction A to B notices that a bus goes past him every 18 min in the direction of his motion and every 6 min in the opposite direction. What is the period T of the bus service and with what speed (assumed constant) do the buses ply on the road ?
Solution:
Let v km h-1 be the constant speed with which the buses ply between the towns A and B.
The relative velocity of the bus (for the motion A to B) w.r.to the cyclist C i.e., in the direction in which the cyclist is going = (v – 20) kmh-1.
The relative velocity of the bus from B to A W r to the cyclist = (v + 20) kmh-1.
The distance travelled by the bus in time T(min) = vT
As per question [latex]\frac{v T}{v-20}[/latex] = 18 (Or) vT
= 18v – 18 × 20 ………………… (i)
and [latex]\frac{v T}{v+20}[/latex] = 6 (Or) vT = 6v + 20 × 6 …………….. (ii)
Equations (i) and (ii) we get
18v- 18 × 20 = 6v + 20 × 6 (Or)
12v = 20 × 6 + 18 × 20 = 480
(Or) v = 40 kmh-1
Putting this value of v in (i) we get 40
T = 18 × 40- 18 × 20 = 18 × 20
(Or) T = 18 × 20/40 = 9 min.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 10.
A player throws a ball upwards with an initial speed of 29.4 ms-1.
a) What is the direction of acceleration during the upward motion of the ball ?
b) What are the velocity and accele-ration of the ball at the highest point of its motion ?
c) Choose the x = 0 m and t = 0 s to be the location and time of the ball at its highest point, vertically downward direction to be the positive direction of x-axis and give the signs of position, velocity and acceleration of the ball during its upward and downward motion.
d) To what height does the ball rise and after how long does the ball return to the player’s hands ?
(Take g = 9.8 ms-2 and neglect air resistance).
Solution:
a) Since the ball is moving under the effect of gravity, the direction of acceration due the gravity is always vertically downwards.

b) At the highest point, the velocity of the ball becomes zero and acceleration is equal to the acceleration due to gravity = 9.8 ms-2 in vertically downward direction.

c) When the highest point is chosen as the location for x = 0 and t = 0 and vertically downward direction to be positive direction of x- axis and upward direction as negative direction of x-axis.
During upward motion, sign of position is negative, sign of velocity is negative and sign of acceleration is positive.
During downward motion, sign of position is positive, sign of acceleration is also positive.

d) Let the t be time taken by the ball to reach the highest point where height from ground to be S.
Taking vertical upward motion of the ball,
we have
u = -29.4 m/s-1, a = 9.8 m/s-2,
v = 0, S = 5, t = 2
As v2 – u2 = 2as
0 – (29.4)2 = 2 × 9.8 × s (Or)
S = [latex]\frac{-(29.4)^2}{2 \times 9.8}[/latex] = -44.1 m
Here -ve sign shows that distance is covered in upward direction.
As v = u + at
∴ 0 = -29.4 + 9.8 × t (or) t = [latex]\frac{-29.4}{9.8}[/latex] = 3s
It means time of ascent = 3s
When an objective move under the effect of gravity alone, the time of ascent is always equal to time of descent.
Therefore total time after which the ball returns the player’s hand = 3 + 3 = 6s

Question 11.
Read each statement below carefully and state with reasons and examples, if it is true or false :
A particle in one-dimensional motion
a) with zero speed at an instant may have non-zero acceleration at that instant
b) with zero speed may have non-zero velocity.
c) with constant speed must have zero acceleration.
d) with positive value of acceleration must be speeding up.
Solution:
a) True, when a body is thrown vertically upwards in the space. Then at the highest point, the body has zero speed but has downward acceleration equal to acceleration due to gravity.

b) False, because velocity is the speed of body in a given direction. When speed is zero, the magnitude of velocity of body is zero, hence velocity is zero.

c) True, when a particle is moving along a strait line with a constant speed, its velocity remains constant with time. Therefore, acceleration ( = Change in velocity/time) is zero.

d) The statement depends upon the choice of instant of time as origin, when the body is moving along a strait line with positive acceleration. The velocity of the body at on instant of time is v = u + at.

The given statement is not correct. If a is positive and μ is negative, at the instant of time taken as origin. Then for all times before the time for which v vanishes, there is slowing down of the particle i.e., The speed of the particle keeps on decreasing with time. It happens when body is projected vertically upwards. However the given statement is true if u is positive, at the instant of time as origin. When the body is moving along a straight line with positive acceleration. The velocity of body at any instant of time t is v = u + at.

The given statement is not correct if a is positive and u is negative, at the instant of time taken as origin. Then for all times before the time for which v vanishes, there is slowing down of the particle i.e., the speed of particle keeps on decreasing with time. It happens when body is projected vertically upwards. However, the given statement is true if u is positive and a is positive, at the instant of time taken as origin. It is so when the body is falling vertically upwards.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 12.
A ball is dropped from a height of 90 m on a floor. At each collision with the floor, the ball loses one tenth of its speed. Plot the speed-time graph of its motion between t = 0 to 12 s.
Solution:
Taking vertical downward motion of ball from a height 90 m We have
u = 0, a = 10 m/s2, S = 90 m, t = ?, v = ?
t = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{25}{a}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 90}{10}}=3 \sqrt{25}[/latex] = 4.245
V = [latex]\sqrt{2 a \mathrm{~s}}=\sqrt{2 \times 10 \times 30}=30 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}[/latex]
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 14
Rebound velocity of ball,
u1 =[latex]\frac{9}{10} v=\frac{9}{10} \times 30 \sqrt{2}=27 \sqrt{2}[/latex] m/g
Time to reach the highest point is
t1 = [latex]\frac{u^1}{a}=\frac{27 \sqrt{2}}{10}=2.7 \sqrt{2}[/latex] = 3.81 S
Total time = t + t1 = 4.24 + 3.81 = 8.05 S
The ball will take further 3.1 S to fall back to floor, where its velocity before striking the floor = 2.7[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m/s.
Time to reach the highest point is,
t1 = [latex]\frac{u^1}{a}=\frac{27 \sqrt{2}}{10}=2.7 \sqrt{2}[/latex] = 3.81 S
Total time = t + t1 = 4.24 + 3.81 = 8.05 S
The ball will take further 3.81 S fall back to floor, where its velocity before striking the
floor = 2.7[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m/s.
Velocity of ball after striking the floor
= [latex]\frac{9}{10}[/latex] [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] = 24.3 [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] m/s.
Total time elapsed before upward motion of ball.
= 8.05 + 3.81 = 11.86 S
Thus the speed – time graph of this motion will be as shown in fig.

Question 13.
Explain clearly, with examples, the distinction between :
a) magnitude of displacement (sometimes called distance) over an interval of time and the total length of path covered by a particle over the same interval:
b) magnitude of average velocity over an interval of time and the average speed over the same interval. [Average speed of a particle over an interval of time is defined as the total path length divided by the time interval]. Show in both (a) and (b) that the second quantity is either greater than or equal to the first. When is the equality sign true ? [For simplicity, consider one-dimensional motion only].
Answer:
a) Magnitude of displacement of a particle in motion for a given time is shortest distance between the initial and final position of the particle in that time, where as the total length of the path covered by particle is actual path traversed by the particle in the given time. If particle goes from A to B and B to C in time t as shown in fig. Then magnitude of displacement = Distance AC.
Total path length = Distance AB + Distance AC
From the above we note that total path length (AB + AC) is greater than magnitude of displacement (AC).

If there is motion of the particle in one dimension i.e., along a straight line, then magnitude of displacement becomes equal to totalpath length transversed by the particle in the given time.

b) Magnitude of average velocity
= [latex]\frac{\text { Magnitude of displacement }}{\text { Time interval }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{A C}{t}[/latex] and average speed
= [latex]\frac{\text { Total path length }}{\text { Time interval }}=\frac{(A B+B C)}{t}[/latex]
As, (AB + BC) AC, So average speed is greates than the magnitude of average velocity. If the particle is moving along a straight line, then in a given time the magnitude of displacement is equal to total path length transvered by particle in that time, so average speed is equal to magnitude of average velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 14.
A man walks on a straight road from his home to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 km h-1. Finding the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back home with a speed of 7.5 km h-1. What is the
a) magnitude of average velocity and
b) average speed of the man over the interval of time (i) 0 to 30 min, (ii) 0 to 50 m in, (iii) 0 to 40 min ? [Note: You will appreciate from this exercise why it is better to define average speed as total path length divided by time and not as magnitude of average velocity. You would not like to tell the tired man on his return home that his average speed was zero !]
Solution:
Time taken by man to go from his home to market t1 = [latex]\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Speed }}=\frac{2.5}{5}=\frac{1}{2}[/latex] h
Time taken by man to go from market to his home t2 = [latex]\frac{2.5}{7.5}=\frac{1}{3}[/latex] h
Total time taken = t1 + t2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{3}=\frac{5}{6}[/latex]
h = 50 min.
i) 0 to 30 min
a) Average velocity
= [latex]\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2.5}{1 / 2}[/latex] = 5 km/h
b) Average speed
= [latex]\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2.5}{1 / 2}[/latex] = 5 km/h

ii) 0 to 50 min
Total distance travelled
= 2.5 + 2.5 = 5 km
Total displacement = zero
a) Average velocity = [latex]\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}[/latex] = 0
b) Average speed = [latex]\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{5}{5 / 6}[/latex] = 6 km/h

iii) 0 to 40 min
Distance moved in 30 min (from home to market) = 2.5 km
Distance moved in 10 min (from market to home) with speed 7.5 km/h = 7.5 × [latex]\frac{10}{60}[/latex]
= 12.5 km
So displacement = 2.5 – 1.25 = 1.25 km
Distance travelled = 2.5 + 1.25 = 3.75 km
a) Avg velocity = [latex]\frac{1.25}{(40 / 60)}[/latex] = 1.875 km/h
b) Avg speed = [latex]\frac{3.75}{(40 / 60)}=[/latex] = 5.625 km/h

Question 15.
In Exercises 3.13and 3.14, we have carefully distinguished between average speed and magnitude of average velocity. No such distinction is necessary when we consider in ‘antaneous speed and magnitude of velocity. The instantaneous speed is alway equal to the magnitude of instantaneous velocity. Why ?
Solution:
Instaneous speed (vins) of the particle at an instant is the first derivative of the distance w.r.to time at that instant of time
i.e., vins = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
Since in instantaneous speed we take only a small interval of time (dt) during which direction of motion of a body is not supposed to change, here there is no difference between total path length and magnitude of displacement for small interval of time dt. Hence instantaneous speed is always equal to magnitude of instantaneous velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 16.
Look at the graphs (a) to (d) (fig.) carefully and state, with reasons, which of these cannot possibly represent one-dimensional motion of a particle.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 15
Solution:
a) This graph does not represent one dimensional motion because, at the given instant of time, the particle will have two positions, which is not possible in one dimensional motion.

b) This graph does not represent one dimensional motion because, at the given instant of time, particle will have velocity in positive as well as in negative direction which is not possible in one dimensional motion.

c) It also does not represent one dimensional motion, because this graph tells that the particle can have the negative speed but the speed of the particle can never be negative.

d) It also does not represent one dimensional motion, because this graph tells that the total path length decreases after certain time but total path length of a moving particle can never decrease with time.

Question 17.
Figure shows the x – t plot of one-dimensional motion of a particle. Is it correct to say from the graph that the particle moves In a straight line for t < 0 and on a parabolic path for t > 0 ? If not, suggest a suitable physical context for this graph.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 16
Solution:
No, because the x – t graph does not represent the trajectory of the path followed by a particle.

From the graph, it is noted that at t = 0, x = 0 context. The above graph can represent the motion of a body falling freely from a tower uncles gravity.

Question 18.
A police van moving on a highway with a speed of 30 km h-1 fires a bullet at a thief’s car speeding away in the same direction with a speed of 192 km h-1. If the muzzle speed of the bullet is 150 ms-1 with what speed does the bullet hit the thief’s car ? (Note : Obtain that speed which is relevant for damaging the thief’s car),
Solution:
Muzzle speed of bullet, υB = 150 m/s = 540 km h-1
Speed of police van, υp = 30 km/h
Speed of theif car, υT = 192 km/h
Since the bullet is sharing the velocity of the police van, its effective velocity is
υB = υB + υP = 540 + 30 = 570 km/h
The speed of bullet w.r.to the theifs car moving in the same direction.
vBT = vB – vT = 570 – 192 = 378 378 km/h
= [latex]\frac{378 \times 1000}{60 \times 60}[/latex] = 105 m/s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 19.
Suggest a suitable physical situation for each of the following graphs (Fig.):
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 17
Solution:
In fig(a) : The x – t graph shows that intially x is zero i.e, at rest, then it increases with time, attains a constant value and again reduces to zero with time, then it increases in opposite direction till it again attains a constant value i.e., comes to rest. The similar In fig(b) : The velocity changes sign again and again with passage of time and every time some similar speed is lost. The similar physical situation arises when a ball is thrown up with some velocity, returns back and falls freely on striking the floor, it rebounds with reduced speed each it strikes against the floor.

Question 20.
Figure gives the x – t plot of a particle executing one-dimensional simple harmonic motion. (You will learn about this motion in more detail in Chapter 14). Give the signs of position, velocity and acceleration variables of the particle at t = 0.3 s, 1.2 s, -1.2 s.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 18
Solution:
In the S.H.M. acceleration a = ω2x, where co (i.e., angular frequency) is constant.

i) At time t = 0.35, x is negative, the slope of x -1 graph plot is negative, hence position and velocity are negative, Since a =ω2x, hence, acceleration is positive.
ii) At time t = 1.25, x is positive, the slope of x – t plot is also positive hence position and velocity are positive. Since a = -ω2x, hence acceleration is negative.
iii) At t = 1.2S, x is negative, the slope of x – t plot is also negative. But since both x and t are negative here, hence velocity is positive. Finally acceleration ‘a’ is also positive.

Question 21.
Figure gives the x – t plot of a particle in one-dimensional motion. Three different equal intervals of time are shown. In which interval is the average speed greatest and in which is it the least ? Give the sign of average velocity for each interval.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 19
Solution:
We know that average speed in a small interval of time is equal to slope of x -1 graph in that interval of time. The avg speed is the greatest in the interval 3 because slope is greatest and the average speed is least in interval 2 because slope is last three.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 22.
Figure gives a speed-time graph of a particle in motion along a constant direction. Three equal intervals of time are shown. In which interval is the average acceleration greatest in magnitude ? In which interval is the average speed greatest ? Choosing the positive direction as the constant direction of motion, give the signs of v and a in the three intervals. What are the accelerations at the points A, B, C and D ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 20
Solution:
We know that average acceleration in a small interval of time is equal to slope of velocity-time graph in that interval. As the slope of v – t graph is maximum in interval 2 as compared to other intervals 1 and 3, hence the magnitude of average acceleration is greatest in interval 2.
The average speed is greatest in interval 3 for obvious reasons.
In interval 1, the speed of v – t graph is positive. Hence acceleration a is positive. The speed u is positive in this interval due to obvious reasons.

In interval 2, the slope of v – t graph is negative, hence acceleration a is negative. The speed u is positive in this interval due to obvious reasons.

In interval 3, the v – t graph is parallel to time axis, therefore acceleration a is zero in this interval but u is positive due to obvious reasons. At points A, B, C and D the v – t graph is parallel to time axis. Therefore acceleration is zero at ail the four points.

Question 23.
A three-wheeler starts from rest, accelerates uniformly with 1 ms-2 on a straight road for 10 s and then moves with uniform velocity. Plot the distance covered by the vehicle during the nth second (n = 1, 2, 3 ) versus n. What do you expect this plot to be during accelerated motion : a straight line or a parabola ?
Solution:
Here u = 0, a = 1 m/s2
Distance covered in n th second is
Dn = u + [latex]\frac{a}{2}[/latex](2n-1) = 0 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (2n – 1) = 0.5 (2n – 1)
Putting n = 1, 2, 3, …………… we can find the value of Dn. The various values of n and corresponding values of Dn are shown below :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 21
On plotting a graph between Dn and n, we get a st. line AB as shown in fig. From (1) Dnn so the graph is a straight line. After 10S the graph is straight line BC parallel to time axis.

Question 24.
A boy standing on a stationary lift (open from above) throws a ball upwards with the maximum initial speed he can, equal to 49 ms-1. How much time does the ball take to return to his hands ? If the lift starts moving up with a uniform speed of 5 ms-1 and the boy again throws the ball up with the maximum speed he can how long does the ball take to return to his hands ?
Solution:
Taking vertical upward direction as the positive direction of x-axis.
When lift is stationary, consider the motion of the ball going vertically upwards and coming down to the hands of the body. We have
u = 49 m/s, a = 9.8 m/s2, t = ? x – x0 = S = 0
As S = ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
0 = 49 t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-9.8)t2 (Or) 49t = 4.9 t2 (Or)
t = 49/4.9 = 10 sec
When lift starts moving with uniform speed. As the lift starts moving upwards with uniform speed of 5 m/s, there is no change in the relative velocity of the ball w.r.to the boy which remains 49 m/s. Hence even in the case, the ball will return to the boys hand after 10 sec.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 25.
On a long horizontally moving belt a child runs to and fro with a speed 9 km h-1 (with respect to the belt) between his father and mother located 50 m apart on the moving belt. The belt moves with a speed of 4 km h-1. For an observer on a stationary platform outside, what is the
a) speed of the child running in the direction of motion of the belt ?
b) speed of the child running opposite to the direction of motion of the belt ?
c) time taken by the child in (a) and (b) ?
Which of the answer alter if motion is viewed by one of the parents ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 22
Solution:
Let us consider left to right to be the positive direction of x-axis.
a) Here, the velocity of belt υB = + 4 km/h; Speed of child w.r. to belt υC
= + 9 Km/h = [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex] m/s
Speed of the child w.r.to stationary observer,
υC1 = υC + υB = 9 + 4 = 13 km/h

b) Here, υB = + 4 km/h, υC = -9 km/h
Speed of the child w.r.to stationary observer
υC1 = υC + υB = -9 + 4 = -5 km/h
Here negative sign shows that the child will appears to run in a opposite to the direction f motion of the belt.

c) Distance between the parents S = 540 m Since parents and child are located on the same belt, the speed of the child as observed by stationary observer in either direction (Either from mother to father (or) from father to mother) will be 9 km/h.
Time taken by child in case (a) and (b) is
t = [latex]\frac{50}{(5 / 2)}[/latex] = 20 S
If motion is observed by one of the parents, answer to case (a) (Or) case (b) will be altered.
It is so because speed of child w.r. to either of mother (or) father is 9 km/h. But answer (c) remains unaltered due to the fact that parents and child are on the same belt and such all are equal affected by the motion of the belt.

Question 26.
Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the edge of a cliff 200 m high with initial speeds of 15 ms-1 and 30 ms-1. Verify that the graph shown in Fig. correctly represents the time variation of the relative position of the second stone with respect to the first. Neglect air resistance and assume that the stones do not rebound after hitting the ground. Take g = 10 ms-2. Give the equations for the linear and curved parts of the plot.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 23
Solution:
Time vertical upward motion of the first tone for time t, we have
x0 = 200 m, u = 15 m/s, a = -10 m/s2, t = t1, x = x1
As x = x0 + ut + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
x1 = 200 + 15 t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-10)t2 (Or)
x1 = 200 + 15 t – 5 t2 ……………….. (i)
Taking vertical upward motion of the second stone for time t,
We have
x0 = 200 m, u = 30 m/s-1, a = -10 m/s-2, t = t1, x = x2
Then x2 = 200 + 30 t – [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 t2
= 200 + 30 t – 5t2
When the first stone hits the ground x1 = 0,
So t2 – 3t – 40 = 0
(Or) (t – 8) (t + 5) = 0 ……………….. (ii)
∴ Either t = 8 S (Or) – 5S
Since t = 0 corresponds to the instant, when the stone was projected. Hence negative time has no meaning in this case. 50 t = 8S. When the second stone hits the ground, x2 = 0.
0 = 200 + 30 t – 5t2 (Or) t2 – 6t – 40 = 0 (Or) (t – 10) (t + 4) = 0
Therefore, either t = 10 s (Or) t = -4s
Since t = -4s is meaningless, So t = 10s
Relative position of second stone w.r.to first is
= x2 – x1 = 15 t …………………….. (ii)
From (i) and (ii)
Since (x2 – x1) and t are linearly related, therefore the graph is a straight line till t = 8s For maximum separation t = 8 S, so maximum separation = 15 × 8 = 120 m After 8 seconds only second tone would be in motion for 2 seconds, so the graph is in accordance with the aquadratic equation x2 = 200 + 30t – 5t2 for the interval of time 8 seconds to 10 seconds.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 27.
The speed-time graph of a particle moving along a fixed direction is shown in Fig. Obtain the distance traversed by the particle between (a) t = 0 s to 10 s, (b) t = 2s to 6s.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 24
What is the average speed of the particle over the intervals in (a) and (b) ?
Solution:
a) Distance travelled by the particle between 0 to 10s will be
= Area of ∆ OAB, whose base is 10s and height is 12 m/s
= [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 10 × 12 = 60 m 60
Average speed = [latex]\frac{60}{10}[/latex] = 6mS-1

b) Let s1 and s2 be the distances covered by the particle in the time interval t1 = 2s to 5s and t2 = 5s to 6s, then total distance covered in time interval t = 2s to 6s will be s = s1 + s2 ……………….. (i)

To find s1: let us consider u1 is the velocity of particle after 2 seconds and a1 is the acceleration of the particle during the time interval zero to 5 seconds.
Then u1 = 0, v = 12 m/s,
a = a , a1 and t = 5s
We have a1 = [latex]\frac{v-u}{t}=\frac{12-0}{5}=\frac{12}{5}[/latex]
= 2.4 m/s2
∴ u1 = υ + a1t = 0 + 2.4 × 2 = 4.8 m/s-1 Thus for the distance travelled by particle in 3 seconds (i.e, time interval 2s to 5s), we have
u1 = 4.8 m/s, t1 = 3s, a1 = 2.4 m/s2, s1 = ?
As s1 = u1t1 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a1t12
S1 = 4.8 + 3 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 2.4 × 32 = 25.2 m

To find s2 : let a2 be the acceleration of the particle during the motion t = 5s to t = 10s
We have a2 = [latex]\frac{0-12}{10-5}[/latex] = -2.4 m/s2
Taking motion of the particle in time interval t = 5s to t = 6s We have
u1 = 12 m/s-1, a2 = -2.4 m/s2, t2 = 1s, s2 = ?
As s2 = u2t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a2t22
s2 = 12 × 1 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] (-2.4) 12 = 10.8 m
∴ Total distance travelled s = 25.2 + 10.8
= 36m
Average velocity = [latex]\frac{36}{6-2}=\frac{36}{4}[/latex] = 9 m/s

Question 28.
The velocity-time graph of a particle in onedimensional motion is shown in Fig.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 25
Which of the following formulae are correct for describing the motion of the particle over the time-interval t1 to t2 :
a) x(t2) = x(t1) + v(t1) (t2 – t1) + ([latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]) a(t2 – t1)2
b) v(t2) = v(t1) + a(t2 – t1)
c) vaverage = (x(t2) – x(t1)) / (t2 – t1)
d) vaverage = (v(t2) – v(t1)) / (t2 – t1)
e) x(t2) = x(t2) + Vaverage (t2 – t2) + ([latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]) aaverage (t2 – t1)2
f) x(t2) = x(t1) = area under the y – t curve bounded by the t-axis and the dotted line shown.
Solution:
From the graph we note that the slope is not constant and is not uniform, hence the relations (iii), (iv), (v) are correct.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A car is moving along a straight line. Say OP Fig. 3.1. It moves from O to P in 1 8s and returns from P to Q in 6.0s. What are the average velocity and average speed of the car in going (a) from O to P? arid (b) from O to P and back to Q?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 26
Thus, in this case the average speed is equal to the magnitude of the average velocity.

b) In this case,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 27

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 2.
The position of an object moving along x-axis is given by x = a + bt2 where a = 8.5 m, b = 2.5 ms-2 and t is measured in seconds. What is its velocity at t = 0s and t = 2-.0s. What is the average velocity between t = 2.0s and t = 4.0s ?
Solution:
In notation of differential calculus, the velocity is
υ = [latex]\frac{d x}{d t}=\frac{d}{d t}[/latex](a + bt2) = 2b t = 5.0 t ms-1
At t = 0s, υ = 0 ms-1 and at t = 2.0s, υ = 10 ms-1
Average velocity = [latex]\frac{x(4.0)-x(2.0)}{4.0-2.0}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{a+16 b-a-4 b}{2.0}[/latex] = 6.0 × b
= 6.0 × 2.5 = 15 ms-1

Question 3.
Obtain equations of motion for cons-tant acceleration using method of calculus.
Answer:
By definition a = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
dυ = a dt
Integrating both sides
[latex]\int_{v_0}^v d v=\int_0^t a d t[/latex]
= [latex]a \int_0^t d t[/latex] (a is constant)
υ – υ0 = at
υ = υ0 + at
Further υ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]
dx = υ dt
Integrating both sides
[latex]\int_{x_0}^x d x=\int_0^t v d t=\int_0^t\left(v_0+a t\right) d t[/latex]
x – x0 = υ0 t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a t2
x = x0 + υ0 t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a t2
We can write
a = [latex]\frac{d v}{d t}=\frac{d v}{d x} \frac{d x}{d t}=v \frac{d v}{d x}[/latex]
or, υ dυ = a dx
Integrating both sides,
[latex]\int_{v_0}^v v d v=\int_{x_0}^x a d x[/latex]
[latex]\frac{v^2-v_0^2}{2}[/latex] = a(x – x0)
υ2 = υ02 + 2a(x – x0)
The advantage of this method is that it can be used for motion with non-uniform acceleration also.
Now, we shall use these equations to some important cases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 4.
A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 20 ms-1 from the top of a multistorey building. The height of the point from where the ball is thrown is 25.0 m from the ground. [T.S. A.P. Mar. 15]
(a) How high will the ball rise ? and
(b) how long will it be before the ball hits the ground ? Take g = 10 ms-2. (Actual valqp is 9.8 ms-2)
Solution:
a) Let us take the y—axis in the vertically upward direction with zero at the vertically upward direction with zero at the ground, as shown in fig. 3.13.
Now υ0 = + 20 ms-1
a = -g = -10 ms-2,
υ = 0 ms-1
If the ball rises to height y from the point of launch, then using the equation
υ2 + υ02 + 2a(y – y0)
we get
0 = (20)2 + 2(-10) (y – y0)
Solving, we get, (y – y0) = 20 m

b) We can solve this part of the problem in two ways. Note carefully the methods used.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 28
First Method : In the first method, we split the path in two parts : the upward motion (A to B) and the downward motion (B to C) and calculate the corresponding time taken t1 and t2. Since the velocity at B is zero, we have :
υ = υ0 + at
0 = 20 – 10 t1
t1 = 2s
Or,
This is the time in going from A to B. From B, or the point of the maximum height, the ball falls freely under the acceleration due to gravity. The ball is moving in negative y direction. We use equation
y = y0 + υ0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
We have, y0 = 45 m, y = 0, υ0 = 0,
a = -g = – 10 ms-2
0 = 45 + ([latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]) (-10) t22
Solving, we get t2 = 3s
Therefore, the total time taken by the ball
before it hits the ground = t1 + t2 = 2s + 3s = 5s.

Second method : The total time taken can also be calculated by nothing the coordinates of initial and final positions of the ball with respect to the origin chosen and using equation.
y = y0 + υ0t + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] at2
Now y0 = 25 m, y = 0 m
υ0 = 20 ms-1, a = -10 ms-2, t = ?
0 = 25 + 20t + ([latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex])(-10)t2
Or, 5t2 -20t – 25 = 0
Solving this quadratic equation for t, we get t = 5s

Question 5.
Free-fall : Discuss the motion of an object under fall. Neglect air resistance.
Solution:
An object released near the surface of the Earth is accelerated downward under the influence of the force of gravity. The magnitude of acceleration due to gravity is represented by g. If air resistance is neglected, the object is said to be in free fall. If the height through which the object falls is small compared to the earth’s radius, g can be taken to be constant, equal to 9.8 ms-2. Free fall is thus a case of motion with uniform acceleration.

We assume that the motion is in y-direction, more correctly in -y-direction because we choose upward direction as positive Since that acceleration due to gravity is always downward, it is in the negative direction and we have
a = – g = -9.8 ms-2
The object is released from rest at y = 0. Therefore, υ0 = 0 and the equations of motion become :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 29
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 30
Motion of an object under free fall.
a) Variation of acceleration with time.
b) Variation of velocity with time.
c) Variation of distance with time.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 6.
Galileo’s law of odd numbers : The distances traversed, during equal intervals of time, by a body falling from rest, stand to one another in the same ratio as the odd numbers beginning with unity (namely 1:3:5:7 )n Prove it.
Solution:
We have y = -[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gt2 Using this equation, we can calculate the position of the object after different time intervals, 0, τ, τ2, τ3 which are given in second column of table 3.2. If we take (-1/2) gτ2 as y0 – the position coordinate after first time interval τ, then third column gives the positions in the unit of y0. The fourth column gives the distances traversed in successive τs. We find that the distances are in the simple ratio 1: 3 : 5 : 7 : 9 :11 as shown in the last column.

Question 7.
Stopping distance of vehicles : When brakes are applied to a moving vehicle, the distance it travels before stopping is called stopping distance. It is an important factor for road safety and depends on the initial velocity (-υ0) and the braking capacity or deceleration, – a that is caused by the braking. Derive an expression for stopping distance of a vehicle in terms of υ0 and a.
Solution:
Let the distance travelled by the vehicle before it stops be ds. Then, using equation of motion υ2 = υ02 + 2 ax and noting that υ = 0, we have the stopping distance
ds = [latex]\frac{-v_0^2}{2 a}[/latex]
Thus, the stopping distance is proportional to the square of the initial velocity. Doubling the initial velocity increases the stopping distance by a factor of 4 (for the same deceleration).

For the car of a particular make, the braking distance was found to be 10 m, 20 m, 34 m and 50 m corresponding to velocities of 11, 15,20 and 25 m/s which are nearly consistent with the above formula.

Question 8.
Reaction time : When a situation demands our immediate action. It takes some time before we really respond. Reaction time is the time a person takes to observe, think and act. For example, if a person is driving and suddenly a boy appears on the road, then, the time elapsed before he slams the brakes of the car is the reaction time. Reaction time depends on complexity of the situation and on an individual.

You can measure your reaction time by a simple experiment. Take a ruler and ask your friend to drop it vertically through the gap between your thumb and forefinger (Fig. 3.15). After you catch it, find the distance d travelled by the ruler. In a particular case, d was found to be 21.0 cm. Estimate reaction time.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 31
Solution:
The ruler drops under free fall. Therefore υ0 = 0 and a = -g = -9.8 ms-2. The distance travelled d and the reaction time t, are related by d = -[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] gtr2 Or tr = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~d}}{\mathrm{~g}}}[/latex]s.
Given d = 21.0 cm and g = 0.8 ms-2 the reaction time is
tr = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 0.21}{9.8}}[/latex] s ≅ 0.2 s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 9.
Two parallel rail tracks run north- south. Train A moves north with a speed of 54 km h-1 and train B moves south with a speed of 90 kmh-1. What is the
a) velocity of B with respect to A ?
b) velocity of ground with respect to B ?
c) velocity of a monkey running on the roof of the train A against. Its motion (with a velocity of 18 kmh-1 with respect to the train A) as observed by a man standing on the ground ?
Solution:
Choose the positive direction of x-axis to be from south to north. Then,
υA = + 54 km h-1 = 15 ms-1
υB = – 90 km h-1 = -25 ms-1
Relative velocity of B with respect to A = υA – υB = – 40 ms-1, i.e., the train B appears to A to move with a speed of 40 ms-1 from north to souch.
Relative velocity of ground with respect to B = 0 – υB = 25 ms-1
In.(c), let the velocity of the monkey with respect to ground be υM. Relative velocity of the monkey with respect to A,
υMA = υM – υA = – 18 km h = – 5 mh-1
Therefore, υM = (1 5 – 5)mh-1 = 10 mh-1.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 2nd Lesson Units and Measurements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 2nd Lesson Units and Measurements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between accuracy and precision. [A.P. Mar. 16, 15; T.S. Mar. 15, 13]
Answer:
Accuracy:

  1. The accuracy of measurement of any physical quantity made by any measuring instrument is a measure of how close the measured value is to the true value of the quantity.
  2. The accuracy depends on errors.

Precision:

  1. The precision of the measuring instrument denotes upto what limit (or) resolution the quantity can be measured with the given instrument.
  2. The precision does not depend on errors.

Question 2.
What are the different types of errors that can occur in a measurement?
Answer:
Mainly there are three types of errors.

  1. Systematic errors
  2. Random errors
  3. Gross errors.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
How can systematic errors be minimized or eliminated? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Systematic errors can be minimised by improving experimental techniques, selecting better instruments and removing personal bias as far as possible. For a given set up, these errors may be estimated to a certain extent and the necessary corrections may be applied to the readings.

Question 4.
Illustrate how the result of a measurement is to be reported indicating the error involved. [T.S., A.P. – Mar. 17]
Answer:
To measure any physical quantity, we compare it with a standard (unit) of that quantity. No measurement is perfect as the errors involved in the process cannot be removed completely. Hence inspite of our best efforts, the measured value is always some what different from its actual value (or) true value.

Question 5.
What are significant figures and what do they represent when reporting the result of a measurement ? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
The digits of a number that are definitely known plus one more digit that is estimated are called significant digits (or) significant figures.
Example : Time period of a simple pendulum is 1.62, the digits 1 and 6 are reliable while the digit 2 is uncertain. The measured value has three significant figures.

Question 6.
Distinguish between fundamental units and derived units. [T.S. – Mar. 16]
Answer:

  1. Units of fundamental quantities are called fundamental units. Fundamental units can neither derived from one another, nor can they be resolved into other units.
  2. Units of derived quantities are called derived units.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 7.
Why do we have different units for the same physical quantity ?
Answer:
We have different systems like C.G.S system, M.K.S system, F.P.S system and S.l system. Hence we have different physical units for the same physical quantity.

Question 8.
What is dimensional analysis ?
Answer:
Dimensional analysis is the representation of derived physical quantities in terms of units of fundamental quantities.

With the help of dimensional analysis to check the correctness of the equation, convert one system of units into other system and derive certain equations relating physical quantities.

Question 9.
How many orders of magnitude greater is the radius of the atom as compared to that of the nucleus ?
Answer:
Size of atomic nucleus = 10-14 m
Size of atom = 10-10 m
Hence size of atom is 1CT4 m greater the size of the nucleus.

Question 10.
Express unified atomic mass unit in kg.
Answer:
1 unified atomic mass unit = [latex]\frac{1}{12}[/latex] of the mass of carbon – 12 atom.
1 a.m.u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
The vernier scale of an instrument has 50 divisions which coincide with 49 main scale divisions. If each main scale division is 0.5 mm, then using this instrument what would be the minimum inaccuracy in the measurement of distance ?
Answer:
Value of each main scale division = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
In vernier callipers, L.C = [latex]\frac{S}{N}=\frac{\text { Value of one main scale division }}{\text { No. of vernier scale divisions }}[/latex]
L.C. = [latex]\frac{0.5}{50}[/latex] = 0.01 m.m
The minimum inaccuracy in the measurement of distance is 0.01 m.m. (Or)
Value of 1 MSD = 0.5 m.m
NV.S.D = (N – 1) M.S.D
50 V.S.D – 49 M.S.D
1 V.S.D = [latex][/latex] M.S.D. = [latex]\frac{49}{50}[/latex] × 0.5
L.C = 1 M.S.D – 1 V.S.D
(0.5 – [latex]\frac{49}{50}[/latex] × 0.5) = (1 – [latex]\frac{49}{50}[/latex])0.5 = [latex]\frac{1}{50}[/latex] × 0.5
L.C. = 0.01 m.
∴ Minimum inaccuracy in the measurement of distance is 0.01 m.m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 2.
In a system of units, the unit of force is 100 IM. unit of length is 10 m and the unit of time is 100s. What is the unit of mass in this system ?
Answer:
Force (F) = 100 N; Length (L) = 10 m; Time (T) = 100 s F = ma
mass (m) = [latex]\frac{F}{a}=\frac{F}{L T^{-2}}[/latex]; m = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{FT}^2}{\mathrm{~L}}=\frac{100 \times(100)^2}{10}[/latex] = 105 kg

Question 3.
The distance of a galaxy from Earth is of the order of 1025 m. Calculate the order of magnitude of the time taken by light to reach us from the galaxy.
Answer:
Distance of galaxy from earth = 1025 m
Velocity of light (C) = 3 × 108 m/s
Time taken by the light (t) = [latex]\frac{\text { Distance of galaxy from earth }}{\text { velocity of light }}[/latex]
t = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex] ⇒ t = [latex]\frac{10^{25}}{3 \times 10^8}[/latex] = 0.33 × 1017 s ⇒ t = 3.3 × 1016 sec.

Question 4.
The Earth-Moon distance is about 60 Earth radius. What will be the approximate diameter of the Earth as seen from the Moon?
Answer:
Distance between Earth-Moon = 60 R
Radius of the earth = R
r = 60R = 60 × 6400 × 103 (R = 6400km)
θ = 1 sec = [latex]\frac{1}{60}[/latex] Min = [latex]\frac{1}{60 \times 60}[/latex] degree ⇒ θ = [latex]\frac{1}{60 \times 60} \times \frac{\pi}{180}[/latex] radian
Then r = [latex]\frac{l}{\theta}[/latex] ⇒ l = rθ ⇒ l = 60 × 6400 × 103 × [latex]\frac{1}{60 \times 60} \times \frac{\pi}{180}[/latex]
l = 11.16 × 103 km ⇒ Diamter (l) = 11.16 × 103 km

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
Three measurements of the time for 20 oscillations of a pendulum give t1 = 39.6 s, t2 = 39.9 s and t3 = 39.5 s. What is the precision in the measurements? What is the accuracy of the measurements?
Answer:
No. of oscillations = 20
t1 = 39.6 sec, t2 = 39.9 sec, t3 = 39.5 sec
Mean value = [latex]\frac{t_1+t_2+t_3}{3}=\frac{39.6+39.9+39.5}{3}=\frac{119}{3}[/latex] = 39.66
Mean value = 39.7 sec;
Precision = 0.1 sec.
Accuracy is the closeness of measured value with true value.
Hence 39.6 s is accuracy.

Question 6.
1 calorie = 4.2J where 1J = 1 kg m2s2. Suppose we employ a system of units in which the unit of mass is [latex]\hat{a}[/latex] kg, the unit of length is [latex]\hat{a}[/latex] m and the unit of time is [latex]\tilde{a}[/latex] s, show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 [latex]\hat{\mathrm{a}}^{-1} \hat{a}^{-2} \tilde{\mathrm{a}}^{-2}[/latex] in the new system.
Answer:
1 Calorie = 4. 2J ⇒ 1 J = 1 kg m2 s-2
1 calorie = 4.2 kg m2 s-2
In new system, 1 calorie = 4.2 [latex]\hat{a} \hat{a}^2 \hat{a}^{-2}[/latex]

Question 7.
A new unit of length is chosen so that the speed of light in vacuum is 1 ms-2. If light takes 8 min and 20 $ to cover this distance, what is the distance between the Sun and Earth in terms of the new unit ?
Answer:
V = Speed of light in vacuum = 1 m/s
Time taken (t) = 8 min 20 sec = 500 sec
Distance between the sun and earth (d) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex] ⇒ d = [latex]\frac{1}{500}[/latex] = 0.002 m.

Question 8.
A student measures the thickness of a human hair using a microscope of magnification 100. He makes 20 observations and finds that the average thickness (as viewed in the microscope) is 3.5 mm. What is the estimate of the thickness of hair ?
Answer:
Magnification of microscope = M = 100
Observed thickness = 3.5 m.m
Magnification (M) = [latex]\frac{\text { Observed thickness }}{\text { Real thickness }}[/latex] ⇒ 100 = [latex]\frac{3.5}{\text { Real thickness }(t)}[/latex] ⇒ t = [latex]\frac{3.5}{100}[/latex] = 0.035 m.m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 9.
A physical quantity X is related to four measureable quantities a, b, c and d as follows. X = a2 b3 c5/2d-2
The percentage error in the measurement of a, b, c and d are 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respectively. What is the percentage error in X ?
Answer:
X = a2 b3 c5/2d-2
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{a}}[/latex] × 100 = 1%, [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] × 100 = 2%, [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex] × 100 = 3%, [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}[/latex] × 100 = 4%
Percentage error in X is
([latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{X}}{\mathrm{X}}[/latex]) × 100 = 2([latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{a}}[/latex] × 100) + 3([latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] × 100) + [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex] ([latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] × 100) + 2 [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}[/latex] × 100
= 2 × 1 + 3 × 2 + [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex] × 3 + 2 × 4 = 2 + 6 + [latex]\frac{15}{2}[/latex] + 8
⇒ ([latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{X}}{\mathrm{X}}[/latex] 100 = 23.5 %

Question 10.
The velocity of a body is given by v = At2 + Bt + C. If v and t are expressed in SI what are the units of A, B and C ?
Answer:
Given V = At2 + Bt + C
According to principle of homogeneity,

  1. V = At2 ⇒ A =[latex]\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{t}^2}=\frac{\mathrm{LT}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~T}^2}[/latex] = [LT-3] ⇒ A = ms-3
  2. V = Bt ⇒ B = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{LT}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~T}}[/latex] = [LT-1] ⇒ B = ms-2
  3. V = C ⇒ C = LT-1 ⇒ C = ms-1

Problems

Question 1.
In the expression P = E l2 m-5 G-2 the quantities E, l, m and G denote energy, angular momentum, mass and gravitational constant respectively. Show that P is a dimension-less quantity.
Solution:
P = E L2 m-5 G-2
Energy (E) = [ML2 T-2]
Angular momentum (L) = ML2 T-1
Mass = [M]
Universal gravitational constant
(G) = [M-1L3T-2]
P = [ML2 T-2] [ML2 T-1]2 [M]-5 [M-1 L3 T-2]-2
P = M1+2-5+2 L2+4-6 T-2-2+4
P = [M0 L0 T0]
Hence P is dimensional less quantity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 2.
If the velocity of light c. Planck’s constant h and the gravitational ‘ constant G are taken as fundamental quantities : then express mass, length and time in terms of dimensions of these quantities.
Solution:
i) M ∝ Gx Cy hz
[M1 L0 T0] = [M-1 L3 T-2]x [LT-1]y [ML2 T-1]z
[M1L0T0] = M-x+z L3x+y+2z T-2x-y-z = 0
– x + z = 1, 3x + y + 2z = 0, – 2x – y – z = 0
Solving these equations, we get
x = [latex]\frac{-1}{2}[/latex], y = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex], z = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
M = G[latex]\frac{-1}{2}[/latex] C[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] h[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
M = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\mathrm{G}}}[/latex]

ii) Length (l) ∝ Gx Cy hz
[M0 L1 T0] = [M-1 L3 T-2]x [LT-1]y [ML2 T-1]z
[M0L1T0] = M-x+z L3x+y+2z T-2x-y-z
Applying principle of homogeneity
-x + z = 0, 3x + y + 2z = 0, -2x – y – z = 0
Solving these equations, we get
x = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex], y = [latex]\frac{-3}{2}[/latex], z = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
From equation (1), l = G[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] C[latex]\frac{-3}{2}[/latex] h[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
Length (l) = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{C}^3}}[/latex]

iii) Time (T) ∝ Gx Cy hz
[M0 L0 T1] = [M-1 L3 T-2]x [LT-1]y [ML2 T-1]z
[M0L0T1] = M-x+z L3x+y+2z T-2x-y-z
Applying principle of homogeneity
-x + z = 0, 3x + y + 2z = 0, -2x – y – z = 1
Solving these equations, we get
x = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex], y = [latex]\frac{-5}{2}[/latex], z = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
From equation (1), l = G[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] C[latex]\frac{-5}{2}[/latex] h[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
Length (l) = [latex]\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{C}^5}}[/latex]

Question 3.
An artificial satellite is revolving around a planet of mass M and radius R in a circular orbit of radius r. Using dimensional analysis show that the period of the satellite
T = [latex]\frac{k}{R} \sqrt{\frac{r^3}{g}}[/latex]
where k is a dimensionless constant and g is acceleration due to gravity.
Solution:
T = [latex]\frac{k}{R} \sqrt{\frac{r^3}{g}}[/latex]
L.H.S. : Time period = [T]
R.H.S. : [latex]\frac{k}{R} \sqrt{\frac{r^3}{g}}=\frac{1}{L} \sqrt{\frac{L^3}{L T^{-2}}}[/latex] = [T]
∴ L.H.S. = R.H.S.
Above equation is correct.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 4.
State the number of significant figures in the following.
a) 6729
b) 0.024
c) 0.08240
d). 6.032
e) 4.57x
Solution:
a) 6729 – 4     Significant figures
b) 0024 – 2            ”
c) 008240 – 4         ”
d) 6.032 –  4           ”
e) 4.57 × 108 – 3     ”

Question 5.
A stick has a length of 12.132 cm and another has a length of 12.4 cm. If the two sticks are placed end to end what is the total length ? If the two sticks are placed side by side, what is the difference in their lengths?
Solution:
a) Let lengths of the rods are
l1 = 12.132 cm, l2 = 12.4 cm
Here has one decimal place and l1 has to be rounded to have only two decimal places.
l = l1 + l2 = 12.13 + 12.4 = 24.53
This is to be rounded off to have one decimal place only.
∴ The result is 24.5 cm

b) l1 = 12.132 cm, l2 = 12.4 cm
Here l1 is rounded only two decimal places,
l2 – l1 = 12.4 – 12.13 = 0.27
This should be rounded off to have only one decimal place, l2 – l1 = 0.3

Question 6.
Each side of a cube is measured to be 7.203 m. What is
(i) the total surface area and
(ii) the volume of the cube, to appropriate significant figures ?
Solution:
Length of a side = 7.203 m
(i) Total surface area = 6a2
= 6 × (7.203)2
= 311.29
This should be rounded off to four significant figure as 7.203 as 4 significant figures.
∴ The result = 311.3m2

(ii) Volume of the cube = a3
= (7.203)3
= 373.71
This should be rounded off to four significant figures has 7.203 has four significant figures.
∴ Volume = 373.7 m3

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 7.
The measured mass and volume of a body are 2.42 g and 4.7 cm3 respectively with possible errors 0.01 g and 0.1 cm3. Find the maximum error in density.
Solution:
M = 2.42 g, V = 4.7 cm3
∆M = 0.01 g, ∆V = 0.1 cm3
Density (ρ) = [latex]\frac{M}{V}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{M}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{0.01}{2.42}+\frac{0.1}{4.7}[/latex]
= 0.004 + 0.02 = 0.024
% error is [latex]\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}[/latex] × 100 = 0.024 × 100
= 2.4% ≈ 2%

Question 8.
The error in measurement of radius of a sphere is 1%. What is the error in the measurement of volume ?
Solution:
Radius of the sphere [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}[/latex] × 100 = 1%
Volume (V) = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] πr3
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}[/latex] × 100 = 3 × [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}[/latex] × 100 = 3 × 1% = 3%

Question 9.
The percentage error in the mass and speed are 2% and 3% respectively. What is the maximum error in kinetic energy calculated using these quantities ?
Solution:
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{M}}[/latex] × 100 = 2%, [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}[/latex] × 100 = 3%;
Kinetic energy = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mV2
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{K}}[/latex] × 100 = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{M}}[/latex] × 100 + 2 [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}[/latex] × 100
= 2 + 2(3) = 2 + 6 = 8%

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 10.
One mole of an ideal gas at standard temperature and pressure occupies 22.4 L (molar volume). If the size of the hydrogen molecule is about 1A°, what is the ratio of molar volume to the atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen ?
Solution:
Molar volume = 22.4 lit = 22.4 × 1000 c.c.
= 22.4 × 10-3 m3
Diameter of the hydrogen molecule
= 1 A° = 10-10 m
Radius (r) = [latex]\frac{D}{2}=\frac{10^{-10}}{2}[/latex] = 0.5 × 10-10 m
Volume (V) = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] πr3
= [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × 3.14 × (0.5 × 10-10)3
v = [latex]\frac{1.57}{3}[/latex] × 10-30 = 0.5233 × 10-30 m3
Atomic volume = V × Avagadro’s number (N)
= 0.5233 × 10-30 × 6.023 × 1023 = 3.151 × 10-7
∴ [latex]\frac{\text { Molar volume }}{\text { Atomic volume }}=\frac{22.4 \times 10^{-3}}{3.151 \times 10^{-7}}[/latex]
= 7.108 × 10-4

Additional Problems

Note : In stating numerical answers, take care of significant figures.

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks
a) The volume of a cube of side 1 cm is equal to …………….. m3
b) The surface area of a solid cylinder of radius 2.0 cm and height 10.0 cm is equal to ……………. (mm)2
c) A vehicle moving with a speed of 18 km h-1 covers ……………. m in 1 s
d) The relative density of lead is 11.3. Its density is …………….. g cm-3 or …………….. kg m-3.
Solution:
a) Here, length of slide L = 1 cm = 10-2 m
Volume of cube = L3 = (10-2 m)3 = 10-6 m3

b) Here, r = 2.0 cm = 20 mm
h = 10.0 cm = 100 mm
Surface area of solid cylinder = (2rcr) × h
= 2 × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × 20 × 100 mm2
= 1.26 × 104 mm2

c) Here, speed V = 18 km
h-1 = [latex]\frac{18 \times 1000 \mathrm{~m}}{60 \times 60 \mathrm{~s}}[/latex] = 5 ms-1
∴ Distance covered in 1 second = 5 m

d) Here, relative density = 11.3
density = 11.3 g k.c = [latex]\frac{11.3 \times 10^{-3}}{\left(10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^3}[/latex]
= 11.3 × 103 kg m-3

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks by suitable conversion of units.
a) 1 kg m2 s-2 = ………….. g cm2 s-2
b) 1 m = ………….. 1y
c) 3.0 ms-2 = ………….. km h-2
d) G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2 (kg)-2 = …………. (cm)3 s-2 g-1.
Solution:
a) 1 kg m2 s2
= 1 × 103 g (102 cm)2s-2 = 107 g cm2 s-2

b) We know, 1 light year = 9.46 × 1015 m
∴ 1 m = [latex]\frac{1}{9.46 \times 10^{15}}[/latex] light year
= 1.053 × 10-16 light year

c) 3ms-2 = 3 × 10-3 km [latex]\left(\frac{1}{60 \times 60} h\right)^{-2}[/latex]
= 3 × 10-3 × 3600 × 3600 km h-2

d) G = 6.61 × 10-11 Nm2 kg-2
= 6.67 × 10-11 (kg ms-2) m2 kg-2
= 6.67 × 10-11 m3 s-2 kg-1
= 6.67 × 10-11 (100 cm)3 s-2 (1000 g)-1
= 6.67 × 10-8 cm3 s-2 g-1

Question 3.
A calorie is a unit of heat or energy and it equals about 4.2 J where 1J = 1 kg m2 s-2. Suppose we employ a system of units in which the unit of mass equals a kg, the unit of length equals b m, the unit of time is g s. Show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 a-1b-2 g2 in terms of the new units.
Solution:
Here 1 calorie = 4.2 J = 4.2 Kg m-3S-1 …………… (1)
As new unit of mass = 1kg
∴ 1 kg = [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{a}}[/latex] new unit of mass = a-1
similarly, 1m = [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{b}}[/latex] = b-1
1s = [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{g}}[/latex] = g-1
Putting these values in eq(1), we obtains.
1 calorie = 4.2 (a-1 new unit of mass)
(b-1 new unit of length)2
(g-1 new unit of time)2
1 calorie = 4.2 a-1 b-2 g2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 4.
Explain this statement clearly :
‘To call a dimensional quantity ‘large1 or ‘small’ is meaningless without specifying a standard for comparison”. In view of this, reframe the following statements wherever necessary :
a) atoms are very small objects
b) a jet plane moves with great speed
c) the mass of Jupiter is very large
d) the air inside this room contains a large number of molecules
e) a proton is much more massive than an electron
f) the speed of sound is much smaller than the speed of light.
Solution:
i) The statement is true. This is because a dimensionless quantity can be large or small only in comparison to some standard. For example, angle is dimensionless ∠θ = 60° is larger than ∠θ = 30°, but smaller than ∠θ = 90°

ii) a) The size of an atom is smaller than the sharp tin of a pin.
b) A jet plane moves faster than a superfast train.
c) The mass of Jupiter is very large compared to the mass of earth.
d) The air inside this room contains more number of molecules than in one mole of air.
e) The statement is already correct.
f) The statement is already correct.

Question 5.
A new unit of length is chosen such that the speed of light in vacuum in unity. What is the distance between the Sun and the Earth in terms of the new unit if light takes 8 min and 20 s to cover this distance ?
Solution:
We are given that velocity of light in vacuum, c = 1 new unit of length s-1
Time taken by light of Sun to reach the Earth,
t = 8 min 20 s = 8 × 60 + 20 = 500 s
∴ Distance between the Sun and the Earth,
x = C × t =1 new unit of length s-1 × 500 s
= 500 new units of length

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 6.
Which of the following is the most
precise device for measuring length :
a) a vernier cuHipers with 20 divisions on the sliding scale
b) a screw gauge of pitch 1 mm and 100 divisions on the circular scale
c) an optical instrument that can measure length to within a wave-length of light ?
Solution:
The most precise device is that whose least count is minimum. Now
a) Least count of this vernier callipers
= 1 SD – 19 SD = 1 SD = [latex]\frac{19}{20}[/latex] SD = [latex]\frac{1}{20}[/latex] SD
= [latex]\frac{1}{20}[/latex] mm = [latex]\frac{1}{200}[/latex] cm = 0.005 cm

b) Least count of screw gauge
= [latex]\frac{\text { Pitch }}{\text { No. of divisions on circular scale }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{100}[/latex] mm = [latex]\frac{1}{1000}[/latex] cm = 0.01 cm

c) Wavelength of light,
λ = 10-5 cm = 0.00001 cm
Obviously, the most precise measurement is with optical instrument.

Question 7.
A student measures the thickness of a human hair by looking at it through a microscope of magnification 100. He makes 20 observations and finds that the average width of the hair in the field of view of the microscope is 3.5 mm. What is the estimate on the thickness of hair ?
Soution:
Magnification m = [latex]\frac{\text { observed with }(\mathrm{y})}{\text { real width }(\mathrm{x})}[/latex]
x = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{3.5 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}[/latex] = 0.035 mm

Question 8.
Answer the following :
a) You are given a thread and a metre scale. How will you estimate the diameter of the thread ?
b) A screw gauge has a pitch of 1.0 mm and 200 divisions on the circular scale. Do you think it is possible to increase the accuracy of the screw gauge arbitrarily by increasing the number of divisions on the circular scale ?
c) The mean diameter of a thin brass rod is to be measured by vernier callipers. Why is a set of 100 measurements of the diameter expected to yield a more reliable estimate than a set of 5 measurements only ?
Solution:
a) The diameter of a thread is so small that it cannot be measured using a metre scale. We wind a number of turns of the thread on the metre scale. So that the turns are closely touching one another. Measure the length (l) of the windings on the scale which contains n number of turns.
∴ Diameter of thread = [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex]

b) As least count
= [latex]\frac{\text { Pitch }}{\text { Number of divisions on circular scale }}[/latex]
∴ Theoretically speaking, least count decreases on increasing the number of divisions on the circular scale. Hence accuracy would increase. Practically, it may not be possible to take the reading precisely due to low resolution of human eye.

c) A large number of observations will give more reliable result than smaller number of observations. This is because of probability of making a positive random error of certain magnitude is equal to that of making a negative random errors are likely to cancel and the result may be more reliable.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 9.
The photograph of a house occupies an area of 1.75 cm2 on a 35 mm slide. The slide is projected on to a screen and the area of the house on the screen is 1.55 m2. What is the linear magnification of the projector-screen arrangement.
Solution:
Here, area of object = 1.75 cm2 and area of image = 1.55 m2 = 1.55 × 104 cm2
∴ Areal magnification = [latex]\frac{\text { area of image }}{\text { area of object }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1.55 \times 10^4}{1.75}[/latex] = 8857
Linear magnification = [latex]\sqrt{8857}[/latex] = 94.1

Question 10.
State the number of significant figures in the following :
a) 0.007 m2
b) 2.64 × 1024 kg
c) 0.2370 g cm-3
d) 6.320 J
e) 6.032 N m-2
f) 0.0006032 m2
Solution:
The number of significant figures is as given below.
a) one
b) three
c) four
d) four
e) four
f) four

Question 11.
The length, breadth and thickness of a rectangular sheet of metal are 4.234 m, 1.005 m, and 2.01 cm respectively. Give the area and volume of the sheet to correct significant figures.
Solution:
Here, length l = 4.234 m;
Breath, b = 1.005 m
Thickness, t = 2.01 cm = 2.01 × 10-2 m
Area of the sheet = 2(l × b + b × t + t × l)
= 2(4.234 × 1.005 + 1.005 × 0.0201 + 0.0201 × 4.234)
2(4.3604739) = 8.7209478 m2
As area can contain a maximum of three significant digits, therefore, rounding off, we get
Area = 8.72 m2
Also, volume = l × b × t
V = 4.234 × 1.005 × 0.0201
V = 0.0855289
V = 0.855 m3

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 12.
The mass of a box measured by a grocer’s balance is 2.300 kg. Two gold pieces of masses 20.15 g and 20.17 g are added to the box. What is (a) the total mass of the box, (b) the difference in the masses of the pieces to correct significant figures ?
Solution:
Here, mass of the box, m = 2.3 kg
Mass of one gold piece,
m1 = 20.15 g = 0.02015 kg
Mass of another gold piece,
m2 = 20.17g = 0.02017 kg
a) Total mass = m + m1 + m1
= 2.3 + 0.02015 + 0.02017
= 2.34032 kg
As the result is correct only upto one place of decimal, therefore, on rounding off total mass = 2.3 kg

b) Difference in masses
= m2 – m1 = 20.17 – 20.15
= 0.02g (correct upto two places of decimal)

Question 13.
A physical quantity P is related to four observables a, b, c and d as follows :
P = a3b2/ ([latex]\sqrt{c}[/latex]d )
The percentage errors of measurement in a, b, c and d are 1%, 3%, 4% and 2%, respectively. What is the percentage error in the quantity P ? If the value of P calculated using the above relation turns out to be 3.763, to what value should you round off the result ?
Solution:
Here, P = [latex]\frac{a^3 b^2}{\sqrt{c} d}[/latex]
Maximum fractional error in P is given by [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{P}}[/latex]
= [latex]3 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{a}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{b}}+\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta \mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{c}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}[/latex]
= [latex]3\left(\frac{1}{100}\right)+2\left(\frac{3}{100}\right)+\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{4}{100}\right)+\frac{2}{100}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{13}{100}[/latex] = 0.13
Percentage error in
P = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{P}}[/latex] × 100 = 0.13 × 100 = 13%
As the result (13% error) has two significant figures, therefore if P turns out to be 3.763, the result would be rounded of to 3.8.

Question 14.
A book with many printing errors contains four different formulas for the displacement y of a particle undergoing a certain periodic motion :
a) y = a sin 2 π t/T) b) y = a sin vt,
c) y = (a/T) sin t/a,
d) y = (a[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]) (sin 2πt /T + cos 2 πt/T)
(a = maximum displacement of the particle, v = speed of the particle. T = time- period of motion). Rule out the wrong formulas on dimensional grounds.
Solution:
The argument of a trigonometrical function i.e., angle is dimensionless. Now in
a) [latex]\frac{2 \pi t}{T}=\frac{T}{T}[/latex] = 1 = (M0L0T0)
…………… dimensionless
b) vt = (LF-1) (T) = L = (M0L1T0)
………….. not dimensionless

c) [latex]\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{L}}[/latex] = (L-1T-1)
………….. not dimensionless

d) [latex]\frac{2 \pi t}{\mathrm{~T}}=\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}}[/latex] = 1 = [M0L0T0]
…………… dimensionless

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 15.
A famous relation in physics relates ‘moving mass’ m to the ‘rest mass’ m0 of a particle in terms of its speed v and the speed of light, c. (This relation first arose as a consequence of special relativity due to Albert Einsterin). A boy recalls the relation almost correctly but for-gets where to put the constant c. He writes :
m = [latex]\frac{m_0}{\left(1-v^2\right)^{1 / 2}}[/latex]
Guess where to put the missing c.
Solution:
According to the principle of homogenity of dimensions power of M, L, T on either side of the formula must be equal. For this, on RHS, the denominator (1 – v2)1/2 should be dimensionless. Therefore, instead of (1 – v2)1/2,
we should write [latex]\left(\frac{1-v^2}{c^2}\right)^{1 / 2}[/latex]
Hence the correct formula would be
m = [latex]\frac{m_0}{\left(\frac{1-v^2}{c^2}\right)^{1 / 2}}[/latex]

Question 16.
The unit of length convenient on the atomic scale is known as an angstrom and is denoted byA° : 1A° = 1010m. The size of a hydrogen atom is about 0.5 A°. What is the total atomic volume in m3 of a mole of hydrogen atoms ?
Solution:
Here r = 0.5 A° = 0.5 × 10-10 m
Volume of each atom of hydrogen = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]πr3
= [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × 3.14(0.5 × 10-10) = 5.236 × 10-31 m3
Number of hydrogen atoms in one gram mole of hydrogen = Avagadro’s number
= 6.023 × 1023
∴ Atomic volume of one gram mole of hydrogen atom
= 5.236 × 10-31 × 6.023 × 1023
= 3.154 × 10-7 m3

Question 17.
One mole of an ideal gas at standard temperature and pressure occupies 22.4 L of (molar volume). What is the ratio of molar volume to the atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen ? (Take the size of hydrogen molecule to about 1A°). Why is this ratio so large ?
Solution:
Atomic volume = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]πR3 × N
= [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] (0.5 × 10-10)3 × 6.023 × 1023
= 3.154 × 10-7 m3
Molar volume = 22.4 lit = 22.4 × 10-3 m3
[latex]\frac{\text { Molar volume }}{\text { Atomic volume }}=\frac{22.4 \times 10^{-3}}{3.154 \times 10^{-7}}[/latex] = 7.1 × 104
The ratio is large due to large intermolecular separations.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 18.
Explain this common observation clearly: If you look out of the window of a fast moving train, the nearby tr6es, houses etc., seem to move rapidly in a direction opposite to the train’s motion, but the distant objects (hill tops, the Moon, the stars etc.) seem to be stationary. (In fact, since you are aware that you are moving; these distant objects seem to move with you).
Solution:
The line joining the object to the eye is called the line of sight. When a train moves rapidly, the line of sight of a near by tree changes its direction of motion rapidly. Therefore, the trees appear to run in opposite direction. On the contrary, the line of sight of far off objects does not change its direction. So much, due to extremely large distance from the eye. Hence distant hill tops, moon, the stars etc., appear stationary.

Question 19.
The principle of ‘parallax’ in section 2.3.1 is used in the determination of distances of very distant stars. The baseline AB is the line joining the Earth’s two locations six months apart 21. in its orbit around the Sun. That is, the baseline is about the diameter of the Earth’s orbit 3 × 1011 m. However, even the nearest stars are so distant that with such a long baseline, they show parallax only of the order of 1″ (second) of arc or so. A parsec is a convenient unit of length on the astronomical scale. It is the distance of an object that will show a parallax of 1″ (second) of arc from opposite ends of a baseline equal to the distance from the Earth to Sol. the Sun. How much is a parsec in terms of metres ?
Solution:
Here, length of baseline
= distance from each to the sun
= 1 A.U = 1.5 × 1011 m
Parallax angle, θ = 1
[latex]\frac{1^1}{60}=\frac{1^{\circ}}{60 \times 60}=\frac{\pi}{180} \times \frac{1}{60 \times 60}[/latex] radian
r = 1 par sec = ?; From l = rθ = [latex]\frac{l}{\theta}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1.5 \times 10^{\prime \prime}}{\pi / 180 \times 60 \times 60} \mathrm{~m}[/latex] = 3.1 × 1016 m
Hence 1 parsec = 3.1 × 1016 m

Question 20.
The nearest star to our solar system is 4.29 light years away. How much is this distance in terms of parasecs ? How much parallax would this star (named Alpha Centauri) show when viewed from two locations of the Earth six months apart in its orbit around the Sun ?
Solution:
x = 4.29 ly = 4.29 × 9.46 × 1015 m
= [latex]\frac{4.29 \times 9.46 \times 10^{15}}{3.08 \times 10^{16}}[/latex] par sec
= 1.323 par sec
θ = [latex]\frac{l}{r}=\frac{2 A u}{x}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{2 \times 1.496 \times 10^4}{4.29 \times 9.46 \times 10^{15}}[/latex] radian = 1.512 sec

Question 21.
Precise measurements of physical quantities are a need of science. For example, to ascertain the speed of an aircraft, one must have an accurate method to find its positions at closely separated instants of time. This was the actual motivation behind the discovery of radar in World War II. Think of different examples in modem science where precise measurements of length, time, mass etc., are needed. Also, wherever you can, give a quantitative idea of the precision needed.
Solution:
Precise measurements of physical quantities like length, mass and time are the primary requirements for development of quantitative laws of physics or any other science. For example, in the measurement of distance of moon from earth by laser beam, very accurate measurement of time taken is required. Similarly, for measuring distance, elevation and velocity of an aeroplane by radar method, time measurement has to be accurate. For measuring distances of near by stars, accurate measurement of parallax angle is required.

In the field of crystallography, precise measurement of length is needed to determine interatomic distances using a mass spectrometer, the precision measurement of masses of atoms are made.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 22.
Just as precise measurements are necessary in science, it is equally important to be able to make rough estimates of quantities using rudimentary ideas and common observations. Think of ways by which you can estimate the following (where an estimate is difficult to obtain, try to get an upper bound on the quantity):
a) the total mass of rain-bearing clouds over India during the Monsoon
b) the mass of an elephant
c) the wind speed during a storm
d) the number of strands of hair on * your head
e) the number of air molecules in your classroom.
Solution:
a) During the Monsoon, meteorologist record about 100 cm of rainfall, i.e.,
h – 100 cm = 1m
Area of our country,
A = 3.3 million square km
= 3.3 × 106 (103m2)
= 3.3 × 1012 m6
∴ Volume of rain water,
v = A × h = 3.3 × 1012 1m3
As density of water,
P = 103 km/m3
∴ Mass of rain water
= vP = 3.3 × 1012 × 103 kg
= 3.3 × 1015 kg
This must be the total mass of rain bearing clouds over India.

b) To estimate the mass of an elephant, we take a boat of known base area A. Measure the depth of boat in water. Let it be x1. Therefore, volume of water displaced by the boat , V1 = Ax1 move the elephant into this boat. The boat gets deeper into water. Measure the depth of boat now into water, Let it be x1
∴ Volume of water displaced by boat and elephant V2 = Ax2
∴ Volume of water displaced by the elephant V = V2 – V1 = A(x2 – x1)
If ρ is density of water, then mass of elephant
= mass of water displaced by it
= Vρ = A(X2 – X1) ρ

c) The wind speed during a storm can be estimated using a gas filled balloon. In figure OA is normal position of a gas filled balloon, when there is no wind. As the wind blows to the right, the balloon drifts to position B in one second. The angle of drift ∠AOB = θ is measured, if h is the height of the balloon, then AB = d = hθ This is the distance travelled by the balloon in one second it must be the wind speed.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 1

d) For this, we measure the area of the head . that carrier the hair let it be A. Using a screw guage, we measure thickness of hair, let it bad.
∴ Area of cross section of hair = πd2
Assuming that the distribution of hair over the head is uniform.
The number of strands of hair
= [latex]\frac{\text { total area }}{\text { area of cross section of each hair }}=\frac{\mathrm{A}}{\pi \mathrm{d}^2}[/latex]
Calculations show that number of strands of hair on human head is of the order of one million.

e) Measure the volume of room. We know that one mole of air at NTP occupies a volume of 22.4 lit i.e., 22.4 × 10-3 m3
∴ Number of air molecules in 22.4 × 10-3 m3 = 6.023 × 1023
Number of air molecules in volume v of room = [latex]\frac{6.023 \times 10^{23}}{22.4 \times 10^{-3}}[/latex]v

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 23.
The Sun is a hot plasma (ionized matter) with its inner core at a temperature exceeding 107 K and its outer surface at a temperature of about 6000 K. At these high temperatures, no substance remains in a solid of liquid phase. In what range do you expect the mass density of the Sun to be, in the range of densities of solids and liquids or gases ? Check if your guess is correct from the following data : mass of the Sun = 2.0 × 1030 kg, radius of the Sun = 7.0 × 108 m.
Solution:
Here, M = 2.0 × 1030 kg; R = 7.0 × 108 m
Density ρ = ?
ρ = [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { volume }}=\frac{M}{\frac{4}{3} \pi R^3}=\frac{3 M}{4 \pi R^3}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{3 \times 2.0 \times 10^{30}}{4 \times 3.14 \times\left(7 \times 10^8\right)^3}[/latex]
= 1.392 × 103 kg/m3
This is the order of density of solids and liquids; and not gases.
The high density of Sun is due to inward gravitational attraction on outer layers, due to inner layers of the Sun.

Question 24.
When the planet Jupiter is at a distance of 824.7 million kilometers from the Earth, its angular diameter is measured to be 35.72, of arc. Calculate the diameter of Jupiter.
Solution:
Here, r = 824.7 × 106 km
θ = 35.72″ radian
= [latex]\frac{35.72}{60 \times 60} \times \frac{\pi}{180}[/latex] radian
Diameter, l = ?; As l = rθ
∴ l = 824.7 × 106 × [latex]\frac{35.72 \times \pi}{60 \times 60 \times 180}[/latex] km
= 1.429 × 105km

Question 25.
A man walking briskly in rain with speed u must slant his umbrella forward making an angle q with the vertical. A student derives the following relation between q and v : tan θ = v and checks that the relation has a correct limit: as v → 0, θ →0, as expected. (We are assuming there is no strong wind and that the rain falls vertically for a stationary man). Do you think this relation can be correct ? If not, guess the correct relation.
Solution:
The relation tan θ = v has a correct limit, as v → 0, θ → 0.
However, RHS = tan θ = [M0L0T0] and L.H.S = v = [M0L1T-1]
Therefore, the relation is not correct dimensionally.
We shall find the correct relation is
tan θ = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{v^2}}{\mathrm{rg}}[/latex]

Question 26.
It is claimed that two cesium clocks, if allowed to run for 100 years, free from any disturbance, may differ by only about 0.02 s. What does this imply for the accuracy of the standard cesium clock in measuring a time-interval of 1 s ?
Solution:
Error in 100 years = 0.02s
Error in 1 sec
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 2
Hence the accuracy of the standard cesium clock is measuring a time interval of 1s is 10-12 s.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 27.
Estimate the average mass density of a sodium atom assuming its size to be about 2.5 A°. (Use the known values of Avogadro’s number and the atomic mass of sodium). Compare it with the density of sodium in its crystalline phase: 970 kg m-3. Are the two densities of the same order of magnitude ? If so why ?
Solution:
Atomic volume = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]πR3 × N
= [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] × [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] (1.25 × 10-10)3 6.023 × 1023 m
= 4.93 × 10-6 m3
Average mass density
= [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { volume }}=\frac{23 \times 10^{-3}}{4.93 \times 10^{-6}}[/latex]
= 4.67 × 103 kg/m3
The two densities are not of the same order. This is due to interatomic spacing in the crystalline phase.

Question 28.
The unit of length convenient on the nuclear scale is a fermi: 1 f = 10-15 m. Nuclear sizes obey roughly the following empirical relation :
r = r0A1/3
where r is the radius of the nucleus. A its mass number, and r0 is a constant equal to about 1.2 f. Show that the rule implies that nuclear mass density is nearly constant for different density of a sodium atom obtained in Exercise. 27.
Answer:
Let m be the average mass of nucleon (neutron or proton)
As the nucleus contains A nucleons,
∴ mass of nucleus μ = mA
Radius of nucleus r = r0A1/3
Nuclear density ρ = [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { volume }}=\frac{\mu}{\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{3 m A}{4 \pi\left(r_0 A^{1 / 3}\right)^3}=\frac{3 m}{4 \pi r_0^3}[/latex]
As m and r0 are constant, therefore, nuclear density is constant for all nuclei.
using m = 1.66 × 10-27 kg and r0
= 1.2f = 1.2 × 10-15 m
We get ρ = [latex]\frac{3 m}{4 \pi r_0^3}=\frac{3 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27}}{4 \times 3.14\left(1.2 \times 10^{-15}\right)^3}[/latex]
= 2.29 × 1017 kg m-3
As ρ is constant for all nuclei, this must be the density of sodium nucleus also.
Density of sodium atom
ρ’ = 4.67 × 103 kg m-3
= [latex]\frac{\rho}{\rho^{\prime}}=\frac{2.29 \times 10^{17}}{4.67 \times 10^3}[/latex] = 4.67 × 10-3

Question 29.
A LASER is a source or very intense, monochromatic and unidirectional beam of light. These properties of a laser light can be exploited to measure long distances. The distance of the Moon from the Earth has been already determined very precisely using a laser as a source of light. A laser light beamed at the Moon takes 2.56 s to return after reflection at the Moon’s surface. How much is the radius of the lunar orbit around the Earth ?
Solution:
Here, t = 2.56s
Velocity of laser light in vacuum,
c = 3 × 108 m/s
The radius of lunar orbit is the distance of moon from the earth. Let it be x.
As x = [latex]\frac{c \times t}{2}[/latex]
∴ x = [latex]\frac{3 \times 10^8 \times 2.56}{2}[/latex] = 3 84 × 108 m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 30.
A SONAR (sound navigation and ranging) uses ultrasonic waves to detect and locate objects under water. In a submarine equipped with a SONAR the time delay between generation of a probe wave and the reception of its echo after reflection from an enemy submarine is found to be 77.0 s. What is the distance of the enemy submarine? (Speed of sound in waiter = 1450 ms-1).
Solution:
Here, t = 77.0 s, x = ? V = 1450 ms-1
As x = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{V} \times \mathrm{t}}{2}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1450 \times 77.0}{2}[/latex]m; x = 55825 m

Question 31.
The farthest objects in our Universe discovered by modern astronomers are so distant that light emitted by them takes billions of years to reach the Earth. These objects (known as quasars) have many puzzlingn features, which have not yet been satisfactorily explained. What is the distance in km of a quasar from which light takes 3.0 billion years to reach us ?
Solution:
Here, x = ?
Time taken t = 30 billion years = 3 × 109 yr
= 3 × 109 × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
Velocity of light in vacuum, c = 3 × 108 m/s
= 3 × 105 km/s
As distance = velocity × time
x = (3 × 105) × 3 × 109 × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 km.
= 2.84 × 1022 km

Question 32.
It is a well known fact that during a total solar eclipse the disk of the moon almost completely covers the disk of the Sun. From this fact and from the information you can gather from examples 3 and 4. determine the approximate diameter of the moon.
Solution:
Distance of moon from earth,
ME = 3.84 × 108 m
Distance of Sun from earth,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 3
SE = 1.496 × 1011 m
Distance of Sun AB = 1.39 × 109 m
The situation during total solar eclipse is shown in figure.
As ∆s ABE of CDE are similar, therefore,
[latex]\frac{A B}{C D}=\frac{S E}{M E}[/latex]
CD = AB × [latex]\frac{M E}{S E}=\frac{1.39 \times 10^9 \times 3.84 \times 10^8}{1.496 \times 10^{11}}[/latex]
= 3.5679 × 106 m = 3567.9 km

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 33.
A great physicist of this century (P.A.M. Dirac) loved playing with numerical values of Fundamental constants of nature. This led him to an interesting observation. Dirac found that from the basic constants of atomic physics (c, e, mass of electron, mass of proton) and the gravitational costant G, he could arrive at a number with the dimension of time. Further, it was a very large number, its magnitude being close to the present estimate on the age of the universe (~ 15 billion years). From the table of fundamental constants in this book, try to see if you too can construct this number (or any other interesting number you can think of). If its coincidence with the age of the universe were significant, what would this imply for the constancy of fundamental constants ?
Solution:
Trying out with basic constants of atomic physics (speed of light c, charge on electron e, mass of electron mc, mass of proton mp) and universal gravitational constant G, we can arrive at a quantity which has the dimensions of time. One such quantity is
t = [latex]\left(\frac{c^2}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}\right)^2 \times \frac{1}{m_p m_{e^2} c^3 G}[/latex]
Put e = 1.6 × 10-19 c
[latex]\frac{1}{4 \pi \epsilon_0}[/latex] = 9 × 109,
c = 3 × 10<sup8 m/s and
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2 kg-2
t = (1.6 × 10-19)4 × (9 × 109)2 × [latex]\frac{1}{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times\left(9 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)^3 \times 6.67 \times 10^{-11}}[/latex]
t = 2.18 × 1016 sec; This time is of the order of age of universe.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Calculate the angle at (a) 1° (degree) (b) V (minute of arc or arcmin) and (c) 1″ (second of arc or are second) in radians. Use 360° = 2π rad, 1° = 60′ and 1′ = 60″.
Answer:
(a) We have 360° = 2π rad
1° = (π/180) rad = 1.745 × 10-2 rad

(b) 1′ = 60′ = 1.745 × 10-2 rad
V = 2.908 × 10-4 rad, 2.91 × 10-4 rad

(c) 1′ = 60″ = 2.908 × 10-4 rad
1″ = 4.847 × 10-6 rad, 4.85 × 10-6 rad.

Question 2.
A man wishes to estimate the distance of a nearby tower from him. He stands at a point A in front of the tower C and spots a very distant object O in line with AC. He then walks perpendicular to AC up to B, a distance of 100 m and looks at O and C again. Since O is very distant, the direction BO is practically the same as AO; but he finds the line of sight of C shifted from the original line of sight by an angle θ = 40° (θ is known as parallax’) estimate the distance of the tower C from his original position A.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 4
Answer:
Parallax angle θ = 40°; AB = AC tan θ
AC = AB/tan θ = 100 m/tan 40°
= 100 m/0.8391 = 119 m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
The moon is observed from two diametrically opposite points A and B on Earth. The angle 6 subtended at the moon by the two directions of observation is 1°54‘. Given the diameter of the Earth to be about 1.276 × 107 m, compute the distance of the moon from the Earth.
Solution:
We have θ = 1°54′ = 114
= (114 × 60)” × (4.85 × 10-6) rad
= 3.32 × 10-2 rad.
Since 1″ = 4.85 × 10-6,; rad
Also b = AB = 1.276 × 107 m
Hence from D = b/θ, we have the earth-moon distance,
D = b/θ
= [latex]\frac{1.276 \times 10^7}{3.32 \times 10^{-2}}[/latex] = 3.84 × 108 m.

Question 4.
The Sun’s angular diamater is mea-sured to be 1920″. The distance D of the Sun from the Earth is 1.496 × 10″ m. What is the diameter of the Sun ?
Answer:
Sun’s angular diameter α = 1920”
= 1920 × 4.85 × 10-6 rad
= 9.31 × 10-3 rad
Sun’s diameter d = α
D = (9.31 × 10-3) × (1.496 × 1011) m
= 1.39 × 109 m.

Question 5.
If the size of a nucleus in the range of 10-15 to 10-14 m) is scaled up to the tip of a sharp pin, what roughly is the size of an atom ? Assume tip of the pin to be in the range 10-5 m to 10-4 m.
Answer:
The size of a nucleus is in the range of 10-15m and 10-14 m. The tip of a sharp pin is taken to be in the range of 10-5 m and 10-4 m. Thus we are scaling up by a factor of 1010. An atom roughly of size 10-10 m will be scaled up to a size of 1 m. Thus a nucleus in an atom is as small in size as the tip of a sharp pin placed at the centre of a sphere of radius about a metre long.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 6.
Two clocks are being tested against a standard clock located in a national laboratory. At 12 : 00 : 00 noon by the standard dock, the readings of the two clocks are :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 5
If you are doing an experiment that requires ‘precision time interval’ measurements, which of the two clocks will you prefer ?
Answer:
The range of variation over the seven days of observations is 162 s for clock 1 and 31 s for clock 2. The average reading of clock 1 is much closer to the standard time than the average reading of clock 2. The important point is that a clock’s zero error is not as significant for precision work as its variation, because a ‘zero-error’ can always be easily corrected. Hence clock 2 is to be preferred to clock 1.

Question 7.
We measure the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum. In successive measurements, the readings turn out to be 2.63 s. 2.56 s, 2.42 s, 2.71 is and 2.80 s. Calculate the absolute errors relative error or percentage error.
Answer:
The mean period of oscillation of the pendulum
T = [latex]\frac{(2.63+2.56+2.42+2.71+2.80) s}{5}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{13.22}{5}[/latex] s = 2.624 s = 2.62 s
As the periods are measured to a resolution of 0.01 s, all times are to the second decimal; it is proper to put this mean period also to the second decimal.
The errors in the measurements are
2.63 s – 2.62 s = 0.01 s
2.56 s – 2.62 s = -0.06 s
2.42 s – 2.62 s = -0.20 s
2.71 s – 2.62 s = 0.09 s
2.80 s – 2.62 s = 0.18 s
Note that the errors have the same units as the quantity to be measured.
The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors (for arithmetic mean, we take only the magnitudes) is
∆Tmean = [(0.01 + 0.06 + 0.20 + 0.09 + 0.18)s]/5 = 0.54 s/5 = 0.11 s
That means, the period of oscillation of the simple pendulum is (2.62 ± 0.11) s i.e. it lies between (2.62 + 0.11) s and (2.62 – 0.11) s or between 2.73 s and 2.51 s. As the arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is 0.11 s, there is already an error in the tenth of a second. Hence there is no point in giving the period to a hundredth. A more correct way will be to write T = 2.6 ± 0.1 s

Note that the last numeral 6 is unreliable, since it may be anything between 5 and 7. We indicate this by saying that the measurement has two significant figures. In this case, the two significant figures are 2, which is reliable and 6, which has an error associated with it. You will learn more about the significant figures in section 2.7.
For this example, the relative error or the percentage error is δa = [latex]\frac{0.1}{2.6}[/latex] × 100 = 4.

Question 8.
The temperatures of two bodies measured by a thermometer are t1 = 20 °C ± 0.5 °C and t2 = 50 °C ± 0.5°C. Calculate the temperature difference and the error therein.
Answer:
t’ = t2 – t1
= (50 °C ± 0.5 °C) – (20 °C ± 0.5 °C)
t’ = 30 °C ± 1 °C.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 9.
The resistance R = V/I where V = (100 ± 5) V and I = (10 ± 0.2) A. Find the percentage error in R.
Answer:
The percentage error in V is 5 and in I it is 2.
The total error in R would therefore be 5 + 2 = 7%.

Question 10.
Two resistors of resistances R1 = 100 ± 3 ohm and R2 = 200 ± 4 ohm are connected (a) in series, (b) in parallel. Find the equivalent resistance of the (a) series combination, (b) parallel combination. Use for (a) the relation R
= R1 + R2 and for (b) [latex]\frac{1}{R^{\prime}}+\frac{1}{R_1}+\frac{1}{R_2}[/latex] and [latex]\frac{\Delta R^{\prime}}{R^{\prime 2}}=\frac{\Delta R_1}{R_1^2}+\frac{\Delta R_2}{R_2^2}[/latex]
Answer:
a) The equivalent resistance of series, combination
R = R1 + R2 = (100 ± 3)
ohm + (200 ± 4) ohm = 300 ± 7 ohm.

b) The equivalent resistance of parallel combination
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 6
Then, R’ = 66.7 ± 1.8 ohm
(Here, ∆R is expressed as 1.8 instead of 2 to keep in conformity with the rules of significant figures).

Question 11.
Find the relative error in Z, if Z = A4B1/3/CD3/2.
Answer:
The relative error in Z is ∆Z/Z = 4(∆A/A) + (1/3) (∆B/B) + (∆C/C) + (3/2) (∆D/D).

Question 12.
The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{L / g}[/latex]. Measured value of L is 20.0 cm known to 1 mm accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 90 s using a wrist watch of 1s resolution. What is the accuracy in the determination of g ?
Answer:
g = 4π2L/T2; Here, T = [latex]\frac{t}{n}[/latex] and ∆T = [latex]\frac{\Delta t}{n}[/latex]
Therefore, [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}[/latex]
The errors in both L and t are the least count errors. Therefore, (∆g/g) = (∆L/L) + 2(∆T/T)
= [latex]\frac{0.1}{20.0}+2\left(\frac{1}{90}\right)[/latex] = 0.027
Thus, the percentage error in g is 100 (∆g/g)
= 100(∆L/L) + 2 × 100 (∆T/T) = 3.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
Each side of a cube is measured to be 7.203 m. What are the total surface area and the volume of the cube to appro¬priate significant figures ?
Answer:
The number of significant figures in the measured length is 4. The calculated area and the volume should therefore be rounded off to 4 significant figures.
Surface area of the cube = 6(7.203)2 m2
= 311.299254 m2
= 311.3 m2
Volume of the cube = (7.203)3 m3
= 373.714754 m3
= 373.7 m3

Question 14.
5.74 g of a substance occupies 1.2 cm3. Express its density by keeping the significant figures in view.
Answer:
There are 3 significant figures in the measured mass whereas there are only 2 significant figures in the measured volume. Hence the density should be expressed to only 2 significant figures.
Density = [latex]\frac{5.74}{1.2}[/latex] cm-3 = 4.8 g cm-3.

Question 15.
Let us consider an equation [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] mv2 = mgh where m is the mass of the body, v its velocity, g is the acceleration due to gravity and h is the height. Check whether this equation is dimensionally correct.
Answer:
The dimensions of LHS are
[M] [LT-1]2 = [M] [L2T-2] = [M L2T-2]
The dimensions of RHS are
[M] [LT-2] [L] = [M] [L2T-2] = [M L2T-2]
The dimensions of LHS and RHS are the same and hence the equation is dimensionally correct.

Question 16.
The SI unit of energy is J = kg m2s-2; that of speed v is ms-1 and of acceleration a is ms-2. Which of the formulae for kinetic energy (K) given below can you rule out on the basis of dimensional arguments (m stands for the mass of the body):
(a) K = m2V3
(b) K = (1/2) mv2
(c) K = ma
(d) K = (3/16) mv2
(e) K = (1/2) mv2 + ma.
Answer:
Every correct formula or equation must have the same dimensions on both sides of the equation. Also, only quantities with the same physical dimensions can be added or subtracted. The dimensions of the quantity on the right side are [M2 L3 T-3] for (a) : [ML2T-2] for (b) and (d); [MLT-2] for (c). The quantity on the right side of (e) has no proper dimensions since two quantities of different dimensions have been added. Since the kinetic energy K has the dimensions of [ML2T-2], formulas (a), (c) and (e) are ruled out. Note that dimensional arguments cannot tell which of the two, (b) or (d), is the correct formula. For this, one must turn to the actual definition of kinetic energy. The correct formula for kinetic energy is given by (b).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 17.
Consider a simple pendulum, having a bob attached to a string, that oscillates under the action of the force of gravity. Suppose that the period of oscillation of the simple pendulum depends on its length (l), mass of the bob (m) and acceleration due to gravity (g). Derive the expression for its period using method of dimensions.
Answer:
The dependence of time period T on the quantities l, g and m as a product may be written as :
T = k lx gy mz
Where k is dimensionless constant and x, y and z are the exponents.
By considering dimensions on both sides, we have
[L°M°T1] = [L1]x [L1T-2]y [M1]2 = Lx+yT-2y Mz
On equating the dimensions on both sides, we have
x + y = 0; -2y = 1 and z = 0
So that x = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex], y = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex], z = 0
Then, T = kl1/2 g1/2 or T = [latex]\mathrm{k} \sqrt{\frac{l}{\mathrm{~g}}}[/latex]
Note that value of constant k can hot be obtained by the method of dimensions. Here it does not matter if some number multiplies the right side of this formula because that does not affect its dimensions.
Actually, k = 2π so that T = [latex]2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}[/latex]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 1st Lesson Physical World Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 1st Lesson Physical World

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is Physics?
Answer:
Physics is a branch of science that deals with the study of nature and natural phenomena.

Question 2.
What is the discovery of C.V.Raman? [T.S. Mar. 17, 16; Mar. 14]
Answer:
In the elastic scattering of light by molecules.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 3.
What are the fundamental forces in nature?
Answer:

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Electromagnetic force
  3. strong nuclear force
  4. weak nuclear force

Question 4.
Which of the following has symmetry?
(a) Acceleration due to gravity
(b) Law of gravitation.
Answer:
Law of gravitation. For example, the acceleration due to gravity at the moon is one-sixth that at the earth, but the law of gravitation is same both on the moon and the earth.

Question 5.
What is the contribution of S. Chandra Sekhar to physics ? [AP – Mar. ’17, ’16, ’15; TS – Mar. – ’15]
Answer:
While studying the constitution of the stars, he has proved that the maximum mass that a white dwarf can have is 1.4 times the solar mass. This mass is known as Chandrasekhar limit. If a star crosses this limit, it has to face a catostropic collapse.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Some of the most profound statements on the nature of science have come from Albert Einstein, one of the greatest scientists of all time. What do you think Einstein meant when he said : “The most incomprehensible thing about the world is that it is comprehensible” ?
Answer:
The physical world when seen by a layman, presents us with such a wide diversity of things. It seems incomprehensible, ie as if it can not be understood. On study and analysis, the scientists find that the physical phenomena from atomic to astronomical ranges can be understood interms of only a few basic concepts i.e., the physical world becomes comprehensible. This is what is meant by Einsteins statement mode above.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 2.
“Every great physical theory starts as a heresy and ends as a dogma”. Give some examples from the history of science of the validity of this incisive remark.
Answer:
The statement is true. For example, in ancient times, ptolemy postulated that earth is stationary and all heavy bodies like sum, stars, planets etc revolve around the earth, Later an Italian Scientist Galileo was postulated that sun is stationary and earth along with other planets is revolving around the sun. Galileo was punished by the authorities for spreading wrong concepts. How ever later on newton and kepler supported Galileo’s theory and now it is no more than a dogma.

Question 3.
“Politics is the art of the possible”. Similarly. “Science is the art of the soluble”. Explain this beautiful aphorism on the nature and practice of science.
Answer:
It is well known that to win over vots, politicians would make anything and everything possible even when they are least sure of the same. The statement that science is the art of the soluble implies that a wide variety of physical phenomena are understood in terons of only a few basic concepts ie there appears to be unity in diversity as if widely different phenomena are soluble and can be explained in terms of only a few fundamental laws.

Question 4.
Though India now has a large base in science and technology, which is fast expanding, it is still a long way from realising its potential of becoming a world leader in science. Name some important factors which in your view have hindered the advancement of science in India.
Answer:
In my view some important factors which have hindered the advancement of science in india are

  1. Lack of education.
  2. Poverty, which leads to lack of resources and lack of infrastructure.
  3. Pressure of increasing population.
  4. lack of scientific planning.
  5. Lack of development of work culture and self discipline.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 5.
No physicist has ever “seen” an electron. Yet, all physicists believe in the existence of electrons. An intelligent but superstitious man advances this analogy to argue that ‘ghosts’ exist even though no one has ‘seen’ one. How will you refute his argument ?
Answer:
No physicist has every seen an electron. This is true. But there is so much of Evidence that establishes the existance of electrons, on the contrary, there is hardly any evidence, direct (or) indirect to establish the existance of ghosts’.

Question 6.
The shells of crabs found around a particular coastal location in Japan seem mostly to resemble that legendary face of Samurai. Given below are two explanations of this observed fact. Which of these strikes you as a scientific explanation ?
(a) A tragic sea accident several centuries ago drowned a young Samurai. As a tribute to his bravery, nature through its inscrutable ways immortalised his face by imprinting it on the crab shells in that area.
(b) After the sea tragedy, fishermen in that area, in a gesture of honour to their dead hero, let free any crab shell caught by them which accidentally had a shape resembling the face of a Samurai. Consequently, the particular shape of the crab shell survived longer and therefore in course of time the shape was genetically propagated. This is an example of evolution by artificial selection.
[Note : This interesting illustration taken from Carl Sagan’s The Cosmos’ highlights the fact that often strange and inexplicable facts which on the first sight appear ‘supernatural’ actually turn out to have simple scientific explanations. Try to think out other examples of this kind).
Answer:
Explanation (b) is a scientific explanation of the observed fact.

Question 7.
The industrial revolution in England and Western Europe more than two centuries ago was triggered by some key scientific and technological advances. What were these advances ?
Answer:
Industrial revolution in England and western Europe in 1750 A.D. was triggered by some key scientific and technological advances. Development of steam engine, blast furnace and cotton gin and power loom are some of the examples.

Question 8.
It is often said that the world is witnessing now a second industrial revolution, which will transform the society as radically as did the first. List some key contemporary areas of science and technology,which are responsible fo this revolution.
Answer:
Some of the key contemparary areas of science and technology which may transform the society radically are

  1. Development of superconducting materials at room temperature –
  2. Development of superfast computers
  3. Information explosion and advances in information technology
  4. Developments in biotechnology
  5. Developments of robots.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 9.
Write in about 1000 words is fiction piece on the science and technology of the twenty second century.
Answer:
Imagine a space ship heading towards a star about 100.light years away. It is propelled by electric current generated by electromagnetic induction, as the space ship crosses the magnetic fields in space the current is given to an electric motor made of super conducting wires. Thus no energy would be required to propagate the space ship over it extire journey.

In a particular region of the space, suppose the temperature becomes so high that the super conducting property of the wires of the motor is destroyed. This causes a panic in the space ship because no power is generated by the motor.

In a split second, another space ship filled with matter and antimatter stored in different compartments to produce energy for the first ship comes to its rescue. And the first ship continues its onward Journey.

Question 10.
Attempt to formulate your ‘moral’ views on the practice of science. Imagine yourself stumbling upon a discovery, which has great academic interest but is certain to have nothing but dangerous consequences for the human society. How, it at all, will you resolve your dilemma ?
Answer:
Science is search for truth. If a discovery is of great academic interest, but is sure to have dangerous consequences for the human society, it must be made public. To reveal the truth and the means to prevent its misuse, both are the responsibilities of the scientist. For example, discovery of nuclear fission led to generation of electric power, and also to the development of an atom bomb, a weapon of mass destruction . The humanity at large has to be educated to use nuclear energy for peaceful purposes.

Question 11.
Science, like any knowledge, can be put to good or bad use, depending on the user. Given below are some of the applications of science. Formulate your views on whether the particular application is good, bad or something that cannot be so clearly categorised:
a) Mass vaccination against small pox to curb and finally eradicate this disease from the population. (This has already been successfully done in India).
b) Television for eradication of illiteracy and for mass communication of news and ideas.
c) Prenatal sex determination
d) Computers for increase in work efficiency
e) Putting artificial satellites into orbits around the Earth
f) Development of nuclear weapons
g) Development of new and powerful techniques of chemical and biological warfare).
h) Purification of water for drinking
i) Plastic surgery
j) Cloning
Answer:
a) Mass Vaccination is good
b) Television for eradication of illeteracy and for mass communication of news and ideas is really good.
c) Prenatal sex determination is not bad, but people are misusing it. they must be educated to avoid its misuse in creating inbalance between the male arid female population.
d) computers for increase in work efficiency are good.
e) Putting artificial satellites in to orbits around the earth is a good development.
f) Development of nuclear weapons is bad as they are the weapons of mass destruction.
g) Development of new and powerful techniques of chemical and biological warfare is real bad as these weapons are destruction of mankind.
h) purification of water for drinking is good.
i) Plastic surgery is good.
j) Cloning is also good.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 12.
India has had a long and unbroken tradition of great scholarship – in mathematics, astronomy, linguistics, logic and ethics. Yet, in parallel with this, several superstitious and obscurantistic attitudes and practices flourished in our society and unfortunately continue even today – among many educated people too. How will you use your knowledge of science to develop strategies to counter these attitudes ?
Answer:
Educating the common man is the only way to get rid of superstitious and obscurantistic attitudes. The mass media like news papers, magazines, radio, T.V. etc can play vital role school and colleges curricula can be suitably developed and teachers can take this responsibility.

Question 13.
Though the law gives women equal status in India, many people hold unscientific views on a woman’s innate nature, capacity and intelligence, and in practice give them a secondary status and role. Demolish this view using scientific arguments, and by quoting examples of great women in science and other spheres; and persuade yourself and others that, given equal opportunity, women are on par with men.
Answer:
Given equal opportunity, women are at par with men. Development of human mind depends basically on nutrition content of prenatal and postnatal diet, and also on the care and use of the mind. There is no gender bias involved. Anything which can be achieved by man’s mind can also be achieved by women’s mind. Madam curie won Nobel Prize in physics. Mother teresa proved herself a saint. In politics Mrs. Indira Gandhi, Mr. Margarettheatcher, Mr’s. Bhandarnaike excelled others.

Question 14.
“It is more important to have beauty in the equations of physics than to have them agree with experiments”. The great British physicist. P. A. M. Dirac held this view. Criticize this statement. Look out for some equations and results in this book which strike you as beautiful.
Answer:
The statement of great British physicist P.A.M. Dirac is partially true. For example f = ma; E = mc2 are some of simple and beautiful equations of physics which have universal application.

However, there is not the case always. The equations involved in general theory of relativity, some of the least works of higher physics are neither simple nor beautiful, they are rather difficult to understand.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 15.
Thought the statement quoted above may be disputed, most physicists do have a feeling that the great laws of physics are at once simple and beautiful. Some of the notable physicists, besides Dirac, who have articulated this feeling, are : Einstein, Bohr. Heisenberg, Chandrasekhar and Feynman: You are urged to make special efforts to get access to the general books and writings by these and other great masters of physics. (See th§ Bibliography at the end of this book.) Their writings are truly inspiring !
Answer:
General books on physics make an interesting reading, students are advised to consult a good library. Surely you are Joking Mr. Feynman by Feynman is one of the books that would amuse the students. Some other interesting books are : physics for the inquiring mind by E.M, Rogers; physics. Foundations and frontiers by G. Gamow; thirty years that shook physics by G. Gamow; physics can be fun by perelman.

Question 16.
Textbooks on science may give you a wrong impression that studying science is dry and all too serious and that scientists are absent-minded introverts who never laugh or grin. This image of science and scientists is patently false. Scientists, like any other group of humans, have their share of humorists, and many have led their lives with a great sense of fun and adventure, even as they seriously pursued their scientific work. Two great physicists of this genre are Gamow and Feynman. You will enjoy reading their books listed in the Bibliography.
Answer:
True, scientists like any other group of humans have their share of humorists ; lively, jovial, fun loving, adventurist people, some of them are absent minded introvert too. Students are advised to go through books by two great physicists, Feynman and Gamow to realise this view.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 16th Lesson Communication Systems Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 16th Lesson Communication Systems

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are the basic blocks of a communication system?
Answer:
Basic blocks in a communication system are

  1. Transmitter
  2. Receiver
  3. Channel.

Question 2.
What is “World Wide Web” (WWW) ?
Answer:
Tern Berners -Lee invented the World Wide Web.
It is an encyclopedia of knowledge accessible to every one round the clock through out the year.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 3.
Mention the frequency range of speech signals.
Answer:
Speech signals frequency range is 300 Hz to 3100 Hz.

Question 4.
What is sky wave propagation ?
Answer:
In the frequency range from a MHz upto about 30 MHz, long distance communication can be achieved by ionospheric reflection of radio waves back towards the earth. This mode of propagation is called sky wave propagation.

Question 5.
Mention the various parts of the ionosphere ?
Answer:
Parts of ionosphere are

  1. D (Part of stratosphere (65-70 km day only),
  2. E (Part of stratosphere (100 km day only),
  3. F1 (Part of mesosphere (170 km – 190 km),
  4. F2 (Part of thermosphere [300 km at night 250 – 400 km during day time]).

Question 6.
Define modulation. Why is it necessary ? (T.S. Mar.’19, 16, 15; A.P. Mar. 16, 15) (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Modulation : The process of combining low frequency audio signal with high frequency carrier wave is called modulation.

Necessary : Low frequency signals cannot transmit directly. To reduce size of the antenna and to avoid mixing up of signal from different transmitters modulation is necessary.

Question 7.
Mention the basic methods of modulation. (A.P. Mar. ’19, ’16, T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
The basic methods of modulation are :

  1. Amplitude modulation (AM)
  2. Frequency modulation (FM)
  3. Phase modulation (PM)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 8.
Which type of communication is employed in Mobile Phones ? (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Space wave mode of propagation is employed in mobile phones.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Draw the block diagram of a generalized communication system and explain it briefly.
Answer:
Every communication system has three essential elements :

  1. Transmitter
  2. Medium / Channel
  3. Receiver.

The block diagram is shown in Fig.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 1
In Communication system, the transmitter and the receiver are located at two different places separate from the transmitter.

The channel is the physical medium that connects. The purpose of transmitter is to convert the message signal produced by the source of information into a form, suitable for transmission through the channel. If the output of the information source is a non-electrical signal like a voice signal, a transducer converts it to electrical form before giving it as an input to the transmitter. When a transmitted signal propagates along the channel it may get distorted due to channel imperfection. Moreover, noise adds to the transmitted signal and the receiver receives a corrupted version of the transmitted signal. The receiver has the task of operating on the received signal. It reconstructs a recognizable form of the original message signal for delivering it to the user of information.

Question 2.
What is a Ground wave ? When is it used for communication ?
Answer:
Ground Wave : To radiate signals with high efficiency, The antennas should have a size comparable to the wavelength λ of the signal (at least ~ λ/4). At longer wavelengths (i.e., at lower frequencies), the antennas have large physical size and they are located on or very near to the ground. In standard AM broadcast, ground based vertical towers are generally used as transmitting antennas. For such antennas, ground has a strong influence on the propagation of the signal. The mode of propagation is called surface wave propagation and the wave glides over the surface of the earth. A wave induces current in the ground over which it passes and it is attenuated as a result of absorption of energy by the earth. The attenuation of surface waves increases very rapidly with increase in frequency. The maximum range of coverage depends on the transmitted power and frequency (less than 2 MHz). Ground waves will propagate long distances over sea water due to its high conductivity.

Question 3.
What are Sky Waves ? Explain Sky Wave propagation, briefly.
Answer:
Sky Waves : Long distance communication between two points on the earth is achieved through reflection of electromagnetic waves by Ionosphere, Such waves are called sky waves.

This mode of propagation is used by short wave broadcast services. The Ionosphere is so called because of the presence of a large number of ions or charged particles. It extends from a height of ~ 65 Km to about 400 km above the earth’s surface.

The degree of ionisation varies with the height. The density of atmosphere decreases with height. At greater heights the solar radiation is intense but there are few molecules to be ionized. Close to the earth, the radiation intensity is low so that the ionization is again low. However at some intermediate heights, there occurs a peak of ionization density. The ionospheric layer acts as a reflector for a certain range of frequencies (3 to 30 MHz).
Electromagnetic waves of frequencies higher than 30 MHz penetrate ionosphere and escape. This phenomenon is shown in the Fig.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 2
The phenomenon of bending of em waves is so that they are diverted towards the earth which is similar to Total Internal Reflection in optics.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 4.
What is Space Wave Communication ? Explain.
Answer:
A spcae wave travels in a straight line from transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. Space waves are used for line – of – sight (LOS) communication as well as satellite communication. At frequencies above 40 MHz, communication is essentially limited to line-of-sight paths. At these frequencies, the antennas are relatively smaller and can be placed at heights of many wavelengths above the ground. Because of line-of-sight nature of propagation, direct waves get blocked at some point by the curvature of the earth as illustrated in Fig. If the signal is to be received beyond the horizon then the receiving antenna must be high enough to intercept the line-of-sight waves.

If the transmitting antenna is at a height hT then it can be shown that the distance to the horizon dT is given as dT = [latex]\sqrt{\left(2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{T}}\right)}[/latex] where R is the radius of the earth (approximately 6400 km). Similarly if the receiving antenna is at a height hR, the distance to the horizon dR is dR = [latex]\sqrt{\left(2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{R}}\right)}[/latex]. With reference to Fig. the maximum line-of sight distance dM between the two antennas having heights hT and hR above the earth is given by dM = [latex]\sqrt{\left(2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{T}}\right)}[/latex] = [latex]\sqrt{\left(2 \mathrm{Rh}_{\mathrm{R}}\right)}[/latex]

Television broadcast, microwave links and satellite communication are some examples of communication systems that use space wave mode of propogation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 3

Question 5.
What do you understand by modulation ? Explain the need for modulation.
Answer:
The process of combining audio frequency signal with high frequency signal is called modulation.
To transmit an electronic signal in the audio frequency range (20 Hz to 20 KHz) over a long distance directly the following constraints limit the possibility :

  1. Size of the antenna
  2. Effective power radiated by the antenna
  3. Mixing up of signals from different transmitters.

For 20 KHz signal the height of antenna is about 4km, still a large height. This makes antenna length impractical. Even if we transmit the signal, they may combine with low frequency signals present in the atmosphere and it is impossible to distinguish the signals at the receiving end.

In order to avoid these problems a low frequency audio signal is combined with high frequency signal to translate the audio signal to high frequencies.

Question 6.
What should be the size of the antenna or aerial ? How the power radiated is related to length of the antenna and wavelength ?
Answer:
Size of antenna (or) aerial: For trasmitting a signal, we need an antenna. The size of the antenna comparable to the wavelength of the signal (at least λ/4). So that the antenna properly senses the time variation of the signal. For an e.m waves of frequency 20 kHz, the wavelength λ is 15 km. Obviously such a long antenna is not possible to construct and operate. There is a need of translating the information contained in our original low frequency base band signal into high frequencies before transmission.

Effective power radiated by an antenna : A linear antenna (length l) show that the power radiated is proportional to [latex]\frac{l}{\lambda^2}[/latex]. For the same antenna length, the power radiated increases with decreasing λ. i.e., increasing frequency. Hence the effective power radiated by a long wave length base band signal would be small.

Question 7.
Explain amplitude modulation.
Answer:
Amplitude modulation (AM.) : In amplitude modulation, the amplitude of carrier wave varies, but frequency and phase remains constant.
Here we can explain AM using a sinusoidal signal as a modulating signal.

Let C(t) = Ac sin ωc t represent carrier wave
m(t) = Am sin ωm t represent modulating signal.
The modulating Cm(t) can be written as
Cm(t) = (Ac + Am sin ωmt) sin ωCt
Cm(t) = Ac (1 + [latex]\frac{A_m}{A_c}[/latex] sin ωmt) sin ωct —— (1)
Where ωm = 2πfm is the angular frequency of message signai
Note that the modulated signal now contains the message signal.
Cm(t) = Ac sin ωct + µ Ac sin ωmt sin ωc t —– (2)
Where µ = [latex]\frac{A_m}{A_c}[/latex] = Modulation index.
To avoid distortion keep . µ ≤ 1
Cm(t) = Ac sin ωt + [latex]\frac{\mu A_c}{2}[/latex] cos (ωc – ωm) t – [latex]\frac{\mu \mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{c}}}{2}[/latex] cos (ωc + ωm)t —— (3)
Here (ωc – ωm) and (ωc + ωm) are lower side and upper side frequencies.
As long as the broadcast frequencies (camer wave) are sufficiently spaced out the side bands donot over lap.

Question 8.
How can an amplitude modulated wave be generated?
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 4
The modulated signal Am sin ωmt is added to the camer wave signal Ac sin ωct to produce the signal x(t).
x(t) = Am sin ωm t + A sin ωct is passed through a square law device produces an output.
y(t) = B x(t) + Cx2 (t)
where B and C are constant.
This signal is passed through a band pass filter. The output of band pass filter produces AM wave, In band pass filter dc and the sinusoidal frequencies ωm, 2ωm and 2ωc rejects and retains the frequency ωc, (ωc – ωm) and (ωc + ωm)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 9.
How can an amplitude modulated wave be detected ?
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 5
A block diagram of a typical receiver is shown in figure. Detection is the process of recovering the modulating signal from the modulated carrier wave.
We just saw that the modulated carrier wave contains the frequencies ωc and ωc ± ωm.. In order to obtain message signal m(t) of angular frequency ωm, a simple method is shown in figure.

The modulated signal is passed through a rectifier produces the output message signal. This message signal is passed through envelope detector (RC circuit).
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 6

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
Which of the following frequencies will be suitable for beyond the horizon communication using sky waves ?
(a) 10 kHz
(b) 10 MHz
(c) 1 GHz
(d) 1000 GHz
Solution:
(b) 10 kHz frequencies cannot be radiated due to large antenna size, 1GHz and 1000 GHz will be generated. So option (b) is correct.

Question 2.
Frequencies in the UHF range normally propagate by means of:
(a) Ground waves
(b) Sky waves
(c) Surface waves
(d) Space waves
Answer:
(d). The frequencies in UHF range normally propagate by means.of space waves. The high frequency space does not bend with ground but are ideal for frequency modulation.

Question 3.
Digital signals
(i) do not provide a continuous set of values
(ii) represent values are discrete steps
(iii) can utilize binary system and
(iv) can utilize decimal as well as binary systems.
Which of the above statements are true ?
(a) (i) and (ii) only
(b) (ii) and (iii) only
(c) (i), (ii) and (iii) but not (iv)
(d) All of (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv).
Answer:
(c). A digital signal is a discontinuous function of time in contrast to an analogue signal. The digital signals can be stored as digital data and cannot be transmitted along the telephone lines. Digital signal cannot utilize decimal signals.

Question 4.
Is it necessary for a transmitting antenna to be at the same height as that of the receiving antenna for line-of-sight communication ? A TV transmitting antenna is 81m tall. How much service area can it cover if the receiving antenna is at the ground level ?
Answer:
No, it is not necessary for line of sight communication, the two antennas may not be at the same height.
Given, height of antenna h = 81 m.
Radius of earth R = 6.4 × 106 m.
Area = πd2; Range, d = [latex]\sqrt{2 \mathrm{hR}}[/latex]
∴ Service area = π × 2πR = [latex]\frac{22}{7}[/latex] × 81 × 2 × 6.4 × 106 = 3258.5 km2.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems

Question 5.
A carrier wave of peak voltage 12V is used to transmit a message signal. What should be the peak voltage of the modulating signal in order to have a modulation index of 75% ?
Answer:
Given, Peak voltage V0 = 12V
Modulation index μ = 75% = [latex]\frac{75}{100}[/latex]
We know that Modulation index (μ)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 7
So, peak voltage of modulating signal Vm = μ × Peak voltage = [latex]\frac{75}{100}[/latex] × 12 = 9V.

Question 6.
A modulating signal is a square wave, as shown in fig.
The carrier wave is given by c(t) = 2 sin (8πt) volts.
(i) Sketch the amplitude modulated waveform.
(ii) What is the modulation index ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 8
Answer:
Given, equation of carrier wave c(t) = 2 sin (8πt) —– (1)

(i) According to the diagram
Amplitude of modulating signal Am = 1V
Amplitude of carrier wave Ac = 2V
TM = 1s; Ωm = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{T_m}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{2 \pi}{1}[/latex] = 2π rad/s —– (2)
From equation (1)
c(t) = 2 sin 8πt = Ac sin ωc
From equation (2)
so, ωc = 4ωm
Amplitude of modulated wave A = Am + Ac = 2 + 1 = 3V.
The sketch of amplitude modulated waveform is shown below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 16 Communication Systems 9

(ii) Modulation index μ = [latex]\frac{A_m}{A_c}[/latex] = 0.5

Question 7.
For an amplitude modulated wave, the maximum amplitude is found to be 10V while the ‘ minimum amplitude is found to be 2V. Determine the modulation index, μ. What would be the value of m if the minimum amplitude is zero volt ?
Answer:
Given, maximum amplitude Amax = 10V
Minimum amplitude Amin = 2V
Let Ac and Am be amplitudes of carrier wave and signal wave
Amax = Ac + Am = 10 —— (1)
and Amin = Ac – Am = 2 —– (2)
Adding the equations (1) & (2) we get 2 Ac = 12; Ac = 6V; Am = 10 – 6 = 4V
Modulation index μ = [latex]\frac{A_m}{A_c}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{4}{6}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex].
When the minimum amplitude is zero, then i.e., Amin = 0
Ac + Am = 10 —– (3)
Ac – Am = 0 —- (4)
By solving (3) & (4) we get 2 Am = 10; Am = 5; Ac = 5
Modulation index μ = [latex]\frac{A_m}{A_c}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{5}{5}[/latex] = 1.

Question 8.
Due to economic reasons, only the upper sideband of an AM wave is transmitted, but at the receiving station, there is a facility for generating the carrier. Show that if a device is available which can multiply two signals, then it is possible to recover the modulating signal at the receiver station.
Answer:
Let ωc be the angular frequency of carrier waves & ωm be the angular frequency of signal waves.
Let the signal received at the receiving station be e = E1. cos (ωc + ωm) t
Let the instantaneous voltage of carrier wave ec = E0 cos ωc t is available at receiving station.
Multiplying these two signals, we get
e × ec = E1Ec cos ωct. cos (ωc + ωm) t
E = [latex]\frac{E_1 E_c}{2}[/latex] 2. cos ωct. cos (ωc + ωm) t. (Let e × ec = E)
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_1 \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{c}}}{2}[/latex] [cos (ωc + ωc + ωm) t + cos (ωc + ωm – ωc) t]
∵ [2 cos A cos B = cos(A + B) + cos (A – B)]
[latex]\frac{E_1 E_c}{2}[/latex] = [cos (2 (ωc + ωm)t + cos ωmt]

Now, at the receiving end as the signal passes through filter, it will pass the high frequency (2ωc + ωm)t + cos ωm) but obstruct the frequency ωm. So we can record the modulating signal [latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_1 \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{c}}}{2}[/latex] cos ωmt which is a signal of angular frequency to ωm.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 15th Lesson Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 15th Lesson Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is an n-type semiconductor? What are the majority and minority charge carriers in it?
Answer:
If a pentavalent impurity is added to pure tetravalent semiconductor, it is called n-type semiconductor.
In n-type semiconductor majority charge carriers are electrons and minority charge carriers are holes.

Question 2.
What are intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors? (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Pure form of semiconductors are called intrinsic semiconductors.
When impure atoms are added to increase their conductivity, they are called extrinsic semiconductors.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 3.
What is a p-type semiconductor? What are the majority and minority charge carriers in it?
Answer:
If a trivalent impurity is added to a tetravalent semiconductor, it is called p-type semi-conductor.
In p-type semiconductor majority charge carriers are holes and minority charge carriers are electrons.

Question 4.
What is a p-n junction diode ? Define depletion layer. (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
When an intrinsic semiconductor crystal is grown with one side doped with trivalent element and on the other side doped with pentavalent element, a junction is formed in the crystal. It is called p-n junction diode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 1
A thin narrow region is formed on either side of the p-n junction, which is free from charge carriers is called depletion layer.

Question 5.
How is a battery connected to a junction diode in

  1. forward and
  2. reverse bias ?

Answer:

  1. In p-n junction diode, if p-side is connected to positive terminal of a cell and n-side to negative terminal, it is called forward bias.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 2
  2. In a p-n junction diode, p-side is connected to negative terminal of a cell and n-side to positive terminal, it is called reverse bias.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 6.
What is the maximum percentage of rectification in half wave and full wave rectifiers ?
Answer:

  1. The percentage of rectification in half-wave rectifier is 40.6%.
  2. The percentage of rectification in full-wave rectifier is 81.2%.

Question 7.
What is Zener voltage (Vz) and how will a Zener diode be connected in circuits generally ?
Answer:

  1. When Zener diode is in reverse biased, at a particular voltage current increases suddenly is called Zener (or) break down voltage.
  2. Zener diode always connected in reverse bias.

Question 8.
Write the expressions for the efficiency of a full wave rectifier and a half wave rectifier.
Answer:

  1. Efficiency of half wave rectifier (η) = [latex]\frac{0.406 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
  2. Efficiency of full wave rectifier (η) = [latex]\frac{0.812 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]

Question 9.
What happens to the width of the depletion layer in a p-n junction diode when it is
i) forward-biased and
ii) reverse biased ?
Answer:
When a p-n junction diode is forward bias, thickness of depletion layer decreases and in reverse bias, thickness of depletion layer increases.

Question 10.
Draw the circuit symbols for p-n-p and n-p-n transistors. (Mar. 14) (A.P. Mar. 19; T.S. Mar. 16)
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 3

Question 11.
Deflne amplifier and amplification factor.
Answer:

  1. Rising the strength of a weak signal is known as amplification and the device is called amplifier.
  2. Amplification factor is the ratio between output voltage to the input voltage.
    A = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{V}_0}{\mathrm{~V}_{\mathrm{i}}}[/latex]

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 12.
In which bias can a Zener diode be used as voltage regulator ?
Answer:
In reverse bias Zener diode can be used as voltage regulator.

Question 13.
Which gates ae called universal gates ?
Answer:
NAND gate and NOR gates are called universal gates.

Question 14.
Write the truth table of NAND gate. How does it differ from AND gate.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 4

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are n-type and p-type semiconductors? How is a semiconductor junction formed?
Answer:
n-type semiconductor : When a pure semiconductor is droped with pentavalent atoms like Arsenic, Antimony, Bismuth, then n-type semiconductor is formed.

p-type semiconductor: When a pure semiconductor is doped with trivalent atoms like Indium, Gallium. Al, p-type semiconductor is formed.

Formation of p-n junction diode: When p-type and n-type semiconductors are formed side by side at the junction, holes from p side diffuse to the n -side and electrons from n -side to p-side.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 5
Hence positive charge is built in n-side and negative charge is established at the p-side.
At the junction, the electrons and holes recombine and the region is free from charge carriers. This region which is free from charge carriers is called depletion layer.

The potential developed near the p-n junction is called barrier potential.
The potential barrier stops further diffusion of holes and electrons across the junction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 2.
Discuss the behaviour of p-n junction. How does a potential barrier develop at the junction ?
Answer:
When p-n junction is formed, the free electrons on n-side diffuse over to p-side, they combine with holes and become neutral. Similarly holes on p-side diffuse over to n-side and combine with electrons become neutral.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 6
This results in a narrow region formed on either side of the junction. This region is called depletion layer. Depletion layer is free from charge carriers.

The n-type material near the junction becomes positively charged due to immobile donor ions and p-type material becomes negatively charged due to immobile acceptor ions. This creates an electric field near the junction directed from n-region to p-region and causes a potential barrier.

The potential barrier stops further diffusion of holes and electrons across the junction. The value of the potential barrier depends upon the nature of the crystal, its temperature and the amount of doping.

Question 3.
Draw and explain the current-voltage (I -V) characteristic curves of a junction diode in forward and reverse bias.
Answer:
A graph is drawn between the applied voltage (V) and the current (I) passing through the p-n junction diode is called characteristics of a diode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 7
As forward bias voltage is increased potential barrier decreases, but initially increases in current is negligible (region OA). This is due to the potential barrier.

The voltage at which the current starts to increase rapidly is called knee voltage (or) cut in voltage.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 8
In this reverse bias, small current flows in the circuit due to minority charge carriers. 1f the reverse voltage is increased further, after some voltage, there will be a sudden rise of reverse current. This region is named as breakdown region.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 4.
Describe how a semiconductor diode is used as a half wave rectifier. (Mar. ’14) (T.S. & A.P. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 9

  1. A half wave rectifier can be constructed with a single diode. The ac input signal is fed to the primary coil of a transformer. The output .signal is taken across the load resistance RL
  2. During positive half cycle, the diode is forward biased and current flows through the diode.
  3. During negative half cycle, diode is reverse biased and no current flows through the load resistance.
  4. This means current flows through the diode only during positive half cycles and negative half cycles are blocked. Hence in the output we get only positive half cycles.
  5. Rectifier efficiency is defined as the ratio of output dc power to the input ac power.
    η = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{dc}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{ac}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.406 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
    where rf = Forward resistance of a diode; RL = Load resistance
    The maximum efficiency of half wave rectifier is 40.6%.

Question 5.
What is rectification ? Explain the working of a full wave rectifier. (T. S. Mar. 19: A.P. & T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Rectification : The process of converting on alternating current into a direct current is called rectification.
The device used for this purpose is called rectifier.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 10

  1. A full wave rectifier can be constructed with the help of two diodes D1 and D2.
  2. The secondary transformer is centre tapped at C and its ends are connected to the p regions of two diodes D1 & D2.
  3. The output voltage is measured across the load resistance RL.
  4. During positive half cycles of ac, the diode D1 is forward biased and current flows through the load resistance RL. At this time D2 will be reverse biased and will be in switch off position.
  5. During negative half cycles of ac, the diode D2 is forward biased and the current flows through RL. At this time D1 will be reverse biased and will be in switch off position.
  6. Hence positive output is obtained for all the input ac signals.
  7. The efficiency of a rectifier is defined as the ratio between the output dc power to the input ac power.
    η = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{dc}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{ac}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.812 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
    The maximum efficiency of a full wave rectifier is 81.2%

Question 6.
Distinguish between half-wave and full-wave rectifiers. (A.P. Mar. ’19)
Answer:
Half wave rectifier

  1. Single diode is used.
  2. Only half wave is rectified.
  3. Rectifier efficiency η = [latex]\frac{0.406 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
  4. Efficiency of half wave rectifier is 40.6%.
  5. Output is discontinuous and pulsative.

Full wave rectifier

  1. Two diodes are used.
  2. Full wave is rectified.
  3. Rectifier efficiency η = [latex]\frac{0.812 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
  4. Efficiency of full wave rectifier is 81.2%.
  5. Output is continuous and pulsative.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 7.
Distinguish between zener breakdown and avalanche breakdown.
Answer:
Zèner break down

  1. Zener break down occurs at heavily doped diodes.
  2. This occurs at low reverse bias voltages.
  3. This occurs due to field emissîon.
  4. Width of depletion layer is small.

Avalanche break down

  1. Avalanche break down occurs at lightly doped diodes.
  2. This occurs at high reverse bias voltages.
  3. This occurs due to ionisation by collision.
  4. Width of depletion layer is also small.

Question 8.
Explain hole conduction in intrinsic semiconductors.
Answer:
Pure semiconductors are called intrinsic semiconductors. At low temperature, valency band is filled with electrons and conduction band is empty. Hence it acts as an insulator at low temperature.

As temperature increases electrons in valence band get energy and jumps into the conduction band crossing the forbidden band. At their places in the valency band a vacancy is created.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 11
This vacancy of electron in the valency band is called a hole. Hole has positive charge and move only in the valency band; giving hole current.

In this Fermi-energy level will be at the middle of the forbidden band.

Question 9.
What is a photodiode ? Explain its working with a circuit diagram and draw its I-V characteristics.
Answer:
Photodiode : Photodiode is an optoelectronic device in which current carriers are generated by photons through photo excitation.

Working : When visible light of energy greater than forbidden energy gap is incident on a reverse biased p-n juncton photodiode, additional electron-hole pairs are created in the depletion layer (near the junction). These charge carriers will be seperated by the junction field and made to flow across the junction. Creating a reverse current across the junction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 12
The value of reverse saturation current increases with the increase in the intensity of incident light.
V-I characteristics of photodiode is shown in figure. It is found that reverse saturation current through the photodiode varies almost linearly with the light flux.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 13
Uses :

  1. It is used in switching the light ON and OFF.
  2. It is used in demodulation in optical signals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 10.
Explain the working of LED and what are its advantages over conventional incandescent low power lamps.
Answer:
Light emitting diode (LED) : It is a photoelectronic device which converts electrical energy into light energy.
It is a heavily doped p-n junction diode which under forward bias emits spontaneous radiation. The diode is covered with a transparent cover so that the emitted light may be come out.

Working ; When p-n junction diode is forward biased, the movement of majority charge carriers takes place across the junction. The electrons move from n-side to p-side through the junction and holes move from p-side to n-side.
As a result of it, concentration of majority carriers increases rapidly at the junction.

When there is no bias across the junction, therefore there are excess minority carriers on either side of the junction, which recombine wito majority carriers near the junction.

On recombination of electrons and hole, die energy is given out in the form of heat and light.

Advantages of LED’S over incandescent lamp:

  1. LED is cheap and easy to handle.
  2. LED has less power and low operational voltage.
  3. LED has fast action and requires no warm up time.
  4. LED can be used in burglar alarm system.

Question 11.
Explain the working of a solar cell and draw Its I-V characteristics.
Answer:
Solar cell is a p-n junction device which converts solar energy into electric energy.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 14
It consists of a silicon (or) gallium – arsenic p-n junction diode packed in a can with glass window on top. The upper layer is of p-type semiconductor. It is very thin so that the incident light photons may easily reach the p-n junction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 15

Working : When light (E = hv) falls at the junction, electron – hole pairs are generated near 13% junction. The electrons and holes produced move in opposite directions due to junction field. They will be collected at the two sides of the junction giving rise to a photo voltage between top and bottom metal electrodes. Top metal acts as positive electrode and bottom metal acts as a negative electrode. When an external load is connected across metal electrodes a photo current flows.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 16
I – V characteristics : I – V characteristics of solar cell is drawn in the fourth quadrant of the co-ordinate axes. Because it does not draw current.
Uses : They are used in calculators, wrist watches, artificial satellites etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 12.
Explain the different transistor configurations with diagrams.
Answer:
There are three configurations. They are

1) Common Base
2) Common emitter
3) Common collector.

1) Common Base configuration :
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 17
In this configuration base is earthed. Base is common both input and output. Input is given across base – emitter and output is taken across base-collector.

2) Common Emitter configuration :
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 18
In this configuration emitter is earthed. Emitter is common both input and output. Input is given across base – emitter and output is taken across collector – emitter.

3) Common collector configuration :
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 19
In this configuration collector is earthed. Collector is common both input and output. Input is given across base collector and output is taken across collector – emitter.

Question 13.
Explain how transistor can be used as a switch?
Answer:
To understand the operation of transistor as a switch.

  1. As long as Vi is low and unable to forward bias the transistor, V0 is high (at VCC).
  2. If Vi is high enough to drive the transistor into saturation then V0 is low, very near to zero.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 20
  3. When the transistor is not conducting it is said to be switched off and when it is driven into saturation it is said to be switched on.
  4. We can say that a low input to the transistor gives a high output and high input gives a low output.
  5. When the transistor is used in the cutoff (or) saturation state it acts as a switch.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 21

Question 14.
Explain how transistor can be used as an oscillator ?
Answer:

  1. In an oscillator, we get ac output without any external input signal.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 22
  2. Here L – C circuit is inserted in emitter-base circuit of transistor winch is forward biased with battery VBB. The collector emitter circuit is reverse biased with battery VCC-.
  3. A coil L1 is inserted in collector emitter circuit. It is coupled with L.

Working:

  1. S we close the key (K), weak collector current start rising with time due to inductance L1. As a resell, increasing magnetic flux is finked with L1 and L.
  2. Due to mutual induction, an emf is induced in L which will charge the upper plate of capacitor (C), consequently there will be support to the forward biasing of emitter base circuit.
  3. This results in an increasing in the emitter current and hence an increase in the collector current.
  4. Due to it, more increasing magnetic flux is linked with L1 & L.
  5. The above process continues till the collector current becomes maximum (or) saturated,
  6. The resonant frequency of tuned circuit at which the oscillator will oscillate.
    v = [latex]\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}[/latex]

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 15.
Define WND and NOR gases. Give their truth tables.
Answer:
NAND gate : NAND gate is a combination of AND gate and NOT gate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 23
NAND gate can be obtained by connecting a NOT gate in the output of an AND gate. NAND gates are called universal gates.

  1. If both inputs are low, output is high
    A = 0, B = 0, X = 1
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 24
  2. If any input is low, output is high.
    A = 0, B = 1, X = 1
    A = 1, B = 0, X = 1
  3. If both inputs are high, output is low.
    A = 1, B = 1, X = 0

NOR gate : NOR gate is a combination of OR gate and NOT gate when the output of OR gate is connected to NOT gate. It has two (or) more inputs and one output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 25

  1. If both inputs are low, output is high
    A = 0, B = 0, X = 1
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 26
  2. If input is high, output is low.
    A = 0, B = 0, X = 1
  3. If both inputs are high, the output is low.
    A = 1, B = 1, X = 0
    NOR gate is also a universal gate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 16.
Explain the operation of a NOT gate and give, its truth table.
Answer:
NOT gate: NOT gate is the basic gate. It has one input and one output. The NOT gate is also called an inverter. The circuit symbol of NOT gate is shown in figure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 27

  1. If input is low, output is high.
    A = 0, X = [latex]\overline{0}[/latex] = 1
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 28
  2. If input is high, output is low.
    A = 1, X = [latex]\overline{1}[/latex] = 0

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is a junction diode ? Explain the formation of depletion region at the junction. Explain the variation of depletion region in forward and reverse-biased condition.
Answer:
p-n junction diode: When a p-type semiconductor is suitably joined to n-type semiconductor, a p-n junction diode is formed.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 29
The circuit symbol of p-n junction diode is shown in figure.

Formation of depletion layer at the junction: When p-n junction is formed, the free electrons on n-side diffuse over to p-side, they combine with holes and become neutral. Similarly holes on p-side diffuse over to n-side and combine with electrons become neutral.

This results in a narrow region formed on either side of the junction. This region is called depletion layer. Depletion layer is free from charge carriers.

The n-type material near the junction becomes positively charged due to immobile donor ions and p-type material becomes negatively charged due to immobile acceptor ions. This creates an electric field near the junction directed from n-region to p-region and cause a potential barrier.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 30
The potential barrier stops further diffusion of holes and electrons across the junction. The value of the potential barrier depends upon the nature of the crystal, its temperature and the amount of doping.

Forward bias:
“When a positive terminal of a battery is connected to p-side and negative terminal is connected to n-side; then p-n junction diode is said to be forward bias”.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 31
The holes in the p-region are repelled by the positive polarity and move towards the junction.
Similarly electrons in the n-region are repelled by the negative polarity and move towards the junction.
As a result, the width of the depletion layer decreases. The charge carriers cross the junction and electric current flows in the circuit.

Hence in forward bias resistance of diode is low. This position is called switch on position.

Reverse bias:

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 32

‘When the negative terminal of the battery is connected to p-side and positive terminal of the battery is connected n-side of the p-n junction, then the diode is said to be reverse bias”.

The holes in the p-region are attracted towards negative polarity and move away from the junction. Similarly the electrons in the n-region are attracted towards positive polarity and move away from the junction.

So, width of the depletion layer and potential barrier increases. Hence resistance of p-n junction diode increases. Thus the reverse biased diode is called switch off position.

Question 2.
What is a rectifier ? Explain the working of half wave and full wave rectifiers with diagrams.
Answer:
Rectifier: It is a circuit which converts ac into d.c. A p-n junction diode is used as a rectifier.
Half-wave rectifier:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 33

  1. A half wave rectifier can be constructed with a single diode. The ac input signal is fed to the primary coil of a transformer. The output signal is taken across the load resistance RL.
  2. During positive half cycle, the diode is forward biased and current flows through the diode.
  3. During negative half cycle, diode is reverse biased and no current flows through the load resistance.
  4. This means current flows through the diode only during positive half cycles and negative half cycles are blocked. Hence in the output we get only positive half cycles.
  5. Rectifier efficiency is defined as the ratio of output dc power to the input ac power.
    η = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{dc}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{ac}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.406 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
    Where rf = Forward resistance of a diode; RL = Load resistance
    The maximum efficiency of half wave rectifier is 40.6%.

Full wave rectifier: The process of converting an alternating current into a direct current is called rectification.
The device used for this purpose is called rectifier.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 34

  1. A full wave rectifier can be constructed with the help of two diodes D1 and D2.
  2. The secondary transformer is centre tapped at C and its ends are connected to the p regions of two diodes D1 & D2.
  3. The output voltage is measured across the load resistance RL.
  4. During positive half cycles of ac, the diode D1 is forward biased and current flows through the load resistance RL. At this time D2 will be reverse biased and will be in switch off position.
  5. During negative half cycles of ac, the diode D2 is forward biased and the current flows through RL. At this time D1 will be reverse biased and will be in switch off position.
  6. Hence positive output is obtained for all the input ac signals.
  7. The efficiency of a rectifier is defined as the ratio between the output dc power to the input ac power.
    η = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{dc}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{ac}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.812 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex]
    The maximum efficiency of a full wave rectifier is 81.2%.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 3.
What is a Zener diode ? Explain how it is used as a voltage regulator.
Answer:
Zener diode : Zener diode is a heavily doped germanium (or) silicon p-n junction diode. It works on reverse bias break down region.

The circuit symbol of zener diode is shown in figure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 35
Zener diode can be used as a voltage regulator. In general zener diode is connected in reverse bias in the circuits.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 36

  1. The zener diode is connected to a battery, through a resistance R. The battery reverse biases the zener diode.
  2. The load resistance RL is connected across the terminals of the zener diode.
  3. The value of R is selected in such away that in the absence of load RL maximum safe current flows in the diode.
  4. Now consider that load is connected across the diode. The load draws a current.
  5. The current through the diode falls by the same amount but the voltage drops across the load remains constant.
  6. The series resistance R absorbs the output voltage fluctuations, so as to maintain constant voltage across the load.
  7. The voltage across the zener diode remains constant even if the load RL varies. Thus, zener diode works as voltage regulator.
  8. If I is the input current, IZ and IL are zener and load currents.
    I = IZ + IL; Vin = IR + VZ
    But Vout= VZ
    ∴ Vout= Vin – IR

Question 4.
Describe a transistor and explain its wbking.
Answer:
Transistor: It is a device which consists of two p-n junctions joined back to back. Transistor means transfer of resistance.
Transistor has three regions. They are :

1) Emitter (E)
2) Base (B)
3) Collector (C)

1) Emitter (E) The section at one end of transistor is called emitter. It is heavily doped region. It emitts charge carriers.
2) Base (B) : The middle section off transistor is called base. This is lightly doped and very thin and almost of the charge carriers injected into it to flow into collector with out neutralised.
3) Collector (C) : The section at the other end is called collector. It is moderately doped. It collects the charge carriers. Physically it is large.

Note : Usually the emitter-base junction is forward biased and collector-base junction is reverse biased.

Working of p-n-p transistor : The base part is made of n-type, emitter and collector parts are ‘made of p-type. The circuit symbol of p-n-p transistor is shown in figure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 37
The emitter junction is forward biased by connecting positive terminal off battery to the emitter and negative to the base. The collector junction is reverse biased by connecting negative to fee collector and positive to fee base.

The holes in p-region (emitter) are repelled by the positive terminal and crossing the emitter junction, enter the base region causing emitter current IE. Few holes are combined with electrons in base region, this constitute base current (IB). Majority of holes enters through the collector region. The negative terminal battery rapidly sweeps the holes in the collector region causing collector current (IC).
IE = IB – IC
In p-n-p transistor inside the circuit charge carriers are holes and outside the circuit charge carriers are electrons.

n-p-n transistor: If the base part is made of p-type, emitter and collector parts are made of n-type, we get n-p-n transistor. The circuit symbol of n-p-n transistor is shown in figure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 38
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 39
The emitter junction is forward biased with negative end of a battery connected to emitter and positive to the base. The collector junction is reverse biased with collector positive end of a battery and negative to the base.

The electrons in the emitter (n-region) are repelled by the negative terminal of a battery and cross the base region constituting the emitter current IE. A small number of electrons may recombine with holes in base region constituting base current IB.

Majority charge carriers (electrons) enters into the collector region. The positive terminal of battery rapidly sweeps the electrons in collector, constituting collector current IC.
IE = IB + IC
In n-p-n transistor charge carriers inside and outside the circuit are electrons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 5.
What is amplification ? Explain the working of a common emitter amplifier with necessary diagram.
Answer:
Amplification : The process of raising the strength of a weak signal is called amplification and the device which accomplishes this job is called an amplifier.
Amplifiers are of two types.

  1. Power amplifier
  2. Voltage amplifier.

Amplification factor: The ratio between output voltage to the input voltage is called amplification factor.
A = [latex]\frac{v_0}{v_i}[/latex]
Common emitter transistor amplifier:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 40
The n-p-n common emitter amplifier circuit is shown in figure. In this circuit the battery VBB provides the biasing voltage VBE for the base emitter junction. The emitter junction is forward biased and the battery VCC provides the biasing voltage VCE for the emitter collector junction. The junction is reverse biased. Most of the electrons from emitter cross the base region and move into the collector.

The input signal to be amplified is connected in series with the biasing battery (VBB). A load resistance RL is connected in the collector circuit and output voltage is taken across RL.

As the base emitter voltage (VBE) changes due to input signal, the base current changes (IB) . This results in large change in collector current (ΔIC). The change in collector emitter voltage (ΔVCE) is taken across RL. Thus amplified output is obtained across RL.

Current gain (β) : The ratio of change in collector current to the change in base current is called current gain (or) current amplification factor.
β = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}[/latex]

Voltage gain (AV) : It is the ratio of change in output voltage (ΔVCE) to the change in input voltage (ΔVBE).

Power gain : It is defined as the product of current gain and voltage gain.
Power gain (Ap) = Current gain × Voltage gain.

Question 6.
Draw an OR gate using two diodes and explain its operation. Write the truth table and logic symbol of OR gate.
Answer:
OR Gate : It has two input terminals and one output terminal. If both inputs are low the output is low. If one of the inputs is high, or both the inputs are high then the output of the gate is high. The truth tables of OR gate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 41
In truth table logic function is written as A or B ‘OR’ logic function is represented by the symbol ‘plus’
Q = A + B
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 42
Logic gate ‘OR’ is shown given below.

Implementation of OR gate using diodes:
Let D1 and D2 be two diodes.
A potential of 5V represents the logical value 1
A potential of 0V represents the logical value 0
When A = 0, B = 0 both the diodes are reverse, biased and there no current through the resistance. So, the potential at Q is zero. i.e. Q = 0. When A = 0 or B = O and the other equal to a potential of 5V i.e., Q = 1. When both A and B which is 5V i.e., Q = 1. The output is same as that of the OR gate.

Question 7.
Sketch a basic AND circuit with two diodes and explain its operation. Explain how doping increases the conductivity in semiconductors?
Answer:
AND gate : It has two input terminals and one out terminal

  • If both the inputs are low (or) one of the inputs is low.
    ⇒ The out is low in an AND gate.
  • If both the inputs are high ⇒ The output of the gate is high

Note: If A and B are the inputs of the gate and the output is ‘Q’ then ‘Q‘ is a logical function of A and B.
AND gate Truth Tables
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 43
The logical function AND is represented by the symbol dot so that the output, Q = A.B and the circuit symbol used for the logic gate AND is shown in Fig.
The logical function AND is similar to the multiplication.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 44

Implementation of AND gate using diodes: Let D1 and D2 represents two diodes. A potential of 5 V represents the Logical value 1 and a potential of 0 V represents the logical value zero (O). When A = 0, B = 0 both the diodes D1 and D2 are forward-biased and they behave like closed switches. Hence, the output Q is same as that A or B(equal to zero.) When A = 0 or B = 0, D1 or D2 is forward – biased and Q is zero. When A = 1 and B = 1 both the diodes are reverse – biased and they behave like open switches. There is no current through the resistance R making the potential at Q equal to 5V i.e., Q = 1. The output is same as that of an AND gate.

Doping increases the conductivity in Semiconductors : If a pentavalent impurity (Arsenic) is added to a pure tetravalent semiconductor it is called n-type semiconductor. Arsenic has 5 valence electrons, but only 4 electrons are needed to form covalent bonds with the adjacent Germanium atoms. The fifth electron is very loosely bound and become a free electron. Therefore excess electrons are available for conduction and conductivity of semiconductor increases.

Similarly when a trivalent impurity Indium is added to pure Germanium it is called p-type semiconductor. In this excess holes in addition to those formed due to thermal energy are available for conduction in the valence bând and the conductivity of semiconductor increases.

Problems

Question 1.
In a half wave rectifier, a p-n junction diode with internal resistance 20 ohm is used. If the load resistance of 2 ohm is used in the circuit, then find the efficiency of this half wave rectifier.
Solution:
Internal resistance (rf) = 20Ω
RL = 2kΩ = 2000 Ω
η = [latex]\frac{0.406 R_L}{r_f+R_L}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.406 \times 2000}{20+2000}[/latex] × 100 = [latex]\frac{812 \times 100}{2020}[/latex]
η = 40.2%

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 2.
A full wave p-n junction diode rectifier uses a load resistance of 1300 ohm. The internal resistance of each diode is 9 ohm. Find the efficiency of this full wave rectifier.
Solution:
Given that RL = 1300 Ω
rf = 9Ω
η = [latex]\frac{0.812 \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.812 \times 1300}{9+1300}[/latex] × 100
η = [latex]\frac{8120 \times 13}{1309}[/latex]
η = 80.64%

Question 3.
Calculate the current amplification factor β(beta) when change in collector current is 1mA and change in base current is 20μA.
Solution:
Change in collector current (ΔIC) = 1mA = 10-3 A
Change in base current (ΔIB) = 20μA = 20 × 10-6 A
β = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{10^{-3}}{20 \times 10^{-6}}[/latex]
β = [latex]\frac{1000}{20}[/latex]
β = 50

Question 4.
For a transistor amplifier, the collector load resistance RL = 2k ohm and the input resistance Ri = 1 k ohm. If the current gain is 50, calculate voltage gain of the amplifier.
Solution:
RL = 2kΩ = 2 × 103
Ri = 1kΩ = 1 × 103
β = 50.
Voltage gain (AV) = β × [latex]\frac{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{i}}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{50 \times 2 \times 10^3}{1 \times 10^3}[/latex]
AV = 100.

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
In an n-type silicon, which of the following statement is true :
(a) Electrons are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
(b) Electrons are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
(c) Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
(d) Holes are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
Answer:
(c). In an n-type semiconductor, it is obtained by doping the Ge or Si with pentavalent atoms. In n-type semiconductors, electrons are majority carriers and holes are minority carriers.

Question 2.
Which of the statements given in Exercise 1 is true for p-type semiconductors ?
Answer:
(b) & (d). p-type semiconductor is obtained by doping Ge or Si with trivalent atoms. In p-type semiconductor holes are majority carriers and electrons are minority carriers.

Question 3.
Carbon, silicon and germanium have four valence electrons each. These are characterised by valence and conduction bands separated by energy band gap respectively equal to (Eg)c, (Eg)Si and (g)Ge. Which of the following statements is true ?
(a) (Eg)Si < (Eg)Ge < (Eg)C
(b) (Eg)C < (Eg)Ge > (Eg)Si
(c) (Eg)C > (Eg)Si > (Eg)Ge
(d) (Eg)C = (Eg)Si = (Eg)Ge
Answer:
(c). The energy band – gap is largest for carbon, less for sillicon and least for Germanium.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 4.
In an unbiased p-n junction, holes diffuse from the p-region to n-region because
(a) free electrons in the n-region attract them.
(b) they move across the junction by the potential difference.
(c) hole concentration in p-region is more as compared to n-region.
(d) All the above.
Answer:
(c). In an unbiased p-n junction, the diffusion of charge carriers across the junction takes place from higher concentration to lower concentration. Therefore, hole concentration in p-region is more as compared to n-region.

Question 5.
When a forward bias is applied to a p-n junction, it
(a) raises the potential barrier.
(b) reduces the majority carrier current to zero.
(c) lowers the potential barrier.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c). When a forward bias is applied across the p-n junction, the applied voltage opposes the barrier voltage. Due to this, the potential barrier across the junction is lowered.

Question 6.
For transistor action, which of the following statements are correct:
(a) Base, emitter and collector regions should have similar size and doping concentrations.
(b) The base region must be very thin and lightly doped.
(c) The emitter junction is forward biased and collector junction is reverse biased.
(d) Both the emitter junction as well as the collector junction are forward biased.
Answer:
(b) and (c). For a transistor β = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}[/latex]
IB = [latex]\frac{I_C}{\beta}[/latex] (Or) Rinput = [latex]\frac{V_{\text {input }}}{V_B}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{V_{\text {input }}}{I_C}[/latex] . β. i.e., Rinput ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}[/latex]

Therefore Rinput is inversly proportional to the collector current. For high collector current, the Rinput should be small for which the base region must be very thin and lightly doped for a transistor action, the emitter junction is forward biased and collector junction is reverse biased.

Question 7.
For a transistor amplifier, the voltage gain
(a) remains constant for all frequencies.
(b) is high at high and low frequencies and constant in the middle frequency range.
(c) is low at high and low frequencies and Constant at mid frequencies.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c). The voltage gain is low at high and low frequencies and constant at mid-frequency.

Question 8.
In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency, if the input frequency is 50 Hz. What is the output frequency of a full-wave rectifier for the same input frequency ?
Answer:
A half wave rectifier rectifies only the half of ac input i.e., it conducts once during an ac input cycle while a full wave rectifier rectifies both the half cycles of the ac input i.e., it conducts twice during a cycle.
The output frequency for half-wave is 50Hz.
The output frequency of a full-wave rectifier is 2 × 50 = 100Hz.

Question 9.
For a CE-transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collected resistance of 2 kΩ is 2 V. Suppose the current amplification factor of the transistor is 100, find the input signal voltage and base current, if the base resistance is 1 kΩ.
Solution:
Given, collector resistance Routput = 2KΩ = 2000Ω.
Current amplification factor of the transistor βAC = 100.
Audio signal voltage Voutput = 2V
Input (base) resistance Rinput = 1KΩ = 1000Ω
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 45

Question 10.
Two amplifiers are connected one after the other in series (cascaded). The first amplifier has a voltage gain of 10 and the second has a voltage gain of 26. If the input signal is 0.01 volt, calculate the output ac signal.
Solution:
Given, voltage gain of first Amplifier, [latex]\mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{V}_1}[/latex] = 10
Voltage gain of second Amplifier, [latex]\mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{V}_2}[/latex] = 20
Input voltage V1 = 0.01V
Total voltage gain Av = [latex]\frac{v_0}{v_i}[/latex] = [latex]\mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{V}_1}[/latex] × [latex]\mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{V}_2}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{v_0}{0.01}[/latex] = 10 × 20; V0 = 2V

Question 11.
A p-n photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with band gap of 2.8 eV. Can it detect a wavelength of 6000 nm ?
Solution:
Energy(E) = [latex]\frac{h c}{\lambda}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{6000 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}[/latex] eV = 2.06 eV.
The band – gap is 2.8 eV and energy E is less than band gap (E < Eg). So p-n junction cannot detect, file radiation of given wavelength 6000 nm.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
The number of silicon atoms per m3 is 5 × 1028. This is doped simultaneously with 5 × 1022 atoms per m3 of Arsenic and 5 × 1028 per m3 atoms of Indium. Calculate the number of electrons and boles. Gives that n,sub>i = 1.5 × 1016 m-3. Is the material n-type or p-type ?
Solution:
We know that for each atom doped of arsenic one free electron is received. Similarly, for each- atom doped of Indium a, vacancy is crested So, the number of free electrons introduced by pentavalent impurity added.
ne = NAs = 5 × 1022m3 —- (i)
The number of holes introduced by trivalent impurity added.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 46
As number of electrons ne (= 4.95 × 1022) is greater than number of holes nh (= 45 × 109). So, the material is n-type semiconductor.

Question 2.
In an intrinsic semiconductor the energy gap Eg is 1.2 eV. Its hole mobility is much smaller than electron mobility and independent of temperature. What is the ratio between conductivity at 600K and that at 300 K ? Assume that the temperature dependence of intrinsic carrier concentration ni is given by ni = n0 exp [latex]\left(-\frac{\mathbf{E}_{\mathbf{g}}}{2 \mathbf{K}_{\mathbf{B}} \mathbf{T}}\right)[/latex] where n0 is a constant.
Solution:
Given, intrinsic carrier concentration ni = [latex]n_0 e^{-E g / 2 k_B T}[/latex] and Energy gap Eg = 1.2 eV
KB = 8.62 × 10-5 eV/K
For T = 600k
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 47
Let the conductivities are σ600 and σ300 (∵ σ = e n µe)
[latex]\frac{\sigma_{600}}{\sigma_{300}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{n_{600}}{n_{300}}[/latex] = 1.1 × 105.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 3.
In a p-n junction diode, the current I can be expressed as I = I0 exp [latex]\left(\frac{e V}{2 K_B T}-1\right)[/latex] where I0 is called the reverse saturation current, V is the voltage across the diode and is positive for forward bias and negative for reverse bias, and I is the current through the diode, kB is the Boltzmann constant (8.6 × 10-5 eV/K) and T is the absolute temperature. If for a given diode I0 = 5 × 10-12 A and T = 300 K, then
(a) What will be the forward current at a forward voltage of 0.6 V ?
(b) What will be the increase in the current if the voltage across the diode is increased to 0.7 V?
(c) What is the dynamic resistance ?
(d) What will be the current if reverse bias voltage changes from IV to 2 V ?
Solution:
Given I0 = 5 × 10-12 A, T = 300K
KB = 8.6 × 10-5eV/K = 8.6 × 10-5 × 1.6 × 10-19 J/K
a) Given, voltage V = 0.6V
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{eV}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}} \mathrm{T}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 0.6}{8.6 \times 10^{-5} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 300}[/latex] = 23.26
The current I through a junction diode is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 48
= 5 × 10-12(e23.26 – 1) = 5 × 10-12 (1.259 × 1010 – 1)
= 5 × 10-12 × 1.259 × 1010 = 0.063 A
Change in current ΔI = 3.035 – 0.063 = 2.9A

b) Given voltage V = 0.7 V
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{eV}}{\mathrm{K}_B T}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 0.7}{8.6 \times 10^{-5} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 300}[/latex] = 27.14
Now, I = [latex]I_0 e^{\frac{e V}{K_B T}}-1[/latex] = 5 × 10-12(e27.14 – 1)
= 5 × 10-12(6.07 × 1011 – 1)
= 5 × 10-12 × 5.07 × 1011 = 0.035 A
Change in current ΔI = 3.035 – 0.693 = 2.9 A

c) ΔI = 2.9A, voltage ΔV = 0.7 – 0.6 = 0.1 V
Dynamic retistance Rd = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.1}{2.9}[/latex] = 0.0336Ω

d) As the voltage changes from IV to 2V, the current I will be almost equal to
I0 = 5 × 10-12A.
It is due to that the diode possesses practically infinite resistance in the reverse bias.

Question 4.
You are given the two circuits as shown in Fig.Show that circuit (a) acts as OR gate while the circuit (b) acts as AND gate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 49
Solution:
a) Split the gate, OR gate
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 50
The truth table :
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 51
Here, for given A and B as inputs, C is the output of OR gate and input of NOT gate 1, D is the output of NOT gate 1 and input of NOT gate 2, then Y is finally output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 52
This is same as OR gate. So, this circuit acts as OR gate.

b) Split the gate:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 53
The truth table:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 54
Here, for given A and B as inputs, C is the output of A and D is the output of B, E is the output of OR gate and input of NOT gate 3, then Y is finally output. .
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 55
This is same as AND gate, So the given circuit acts as AND gate

Question 5.
Write the truth table for a NAND gate connected as given in fig.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 56
Hence identify the exact logic operation carried out by the circuit.
Solution:
Split the gate:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 57
Truth table:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 58
B is the output of AND gate and input of NOT gate.
So, for input A and output Y, the table is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 59
Here, it is same as NOT gate, so the logic operation is carried by this circuit as NOT gate

Question 6.
You are given two circuits as shown in fig. which consist of NAND gates. Identify the logic operation carried out by the two circuits.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 60
Solution:
a) Split the gate:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 61
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 62
C is the output of AND gate 1 and input of NOT gate 1, D is the output of NOT gate 1 and input of AND gate 2, E is the õut put of AND gate 2 and input of NOT gate 2, Y is finally output
Truth table:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 63
So, this logic operation is AND gate.

b)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 64
C is the out put of AND gate 1
D is the out put of AND gate 2
E is the out put of NOT gate 1
F is the out put of NOT gate 2
G is the out put of AND gate 3 and input of NOT gate 3
Here, it is same as OR gate. A and B are inputs and Y is output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 65
So, this logic operation resembles to OR gate.

Question 7.
Write the truth table for circuit given in fig. below consisting of NOR gates and identify the logic operation (OR, AND, NOT) which this circuit is performing.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 66
Hint: A = 0, B = 1 then A and B inputs of second NOR gate will be 0 and hence Y = 1. Similarly work out the values of Y for other combinations of A and B. Compare with the truth table of OR, AND, NOT gates and find the correct one.)
Solution:
Split the gate:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 67
C is the output of OR gate 1.
D is the output of NOT gate 1 and input of NOT gate 2. E is the output of OR gate 2 and input of the NOT gate 2. Here, it is same as OR gate. A and B are inputs and Y is output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 68
So, this logic operation resembles to OR gate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics: Material, Devices and Simple Circuits

Question 8.
Write the truth table for the circuits given in fig. consisting of NOR.gates ònly. Identify the logic operations (OR, AND, NOT) performed by the two circuits.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 69
Solution:
a) Split the gate
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 70
B is the output of OR gate and input of NOT gate. So, the gate resembles to NOT gate as A is input and Y is output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 71

b) a) Split the gate:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 72
C is the output of OR gate 1 and input of NOT gate 1, D is the output of OR gate 2 and input of NOT gate 2, E is the output of NOT gate 1, F is the output of NOT gate 2.

G is the output of OR gate 3 and input of NOT gate 3. The truth table resembles to AND gate as A and B inputs and Y is output.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 15 Semiconductor Electronics Material, Devices and Simple Circuits 73
This operation is AND gate.